AutoCAD Electrical 2011 User’s Guide January 2008
© 2010 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.
Contents Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Overview of AutoCAD Electrical Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Join the Customer Involvement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 What's New in Previous Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 What's New in 2008 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 What's New in 2009 Release . . . . . . . .
Edit Footprints panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Other Tools panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Conduit Tools panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Reports tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Schematic panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Panel panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Miscellaneous panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Import/Export Data tab . . . . . . . .
About collaborative design . . . . . . . . . . . Create a drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change drawing display options . . . . . . . Overview of project-related files . . . . . . . . Overview of the project file format . . . . . . Archive a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Multiple Clients . . . . . . . . . . Overview of setup for multiple clients . Drawing List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IEC tag mode update . . . . . . . .
Managing Library Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Substitute symbols in the library . . . . . . . . Change appearance of existing library symbols . Predefine symbol annotation . . . . . . . . . . Swap blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a library symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . Generic Device Boxes . . . . . . . . . Stand-alone Cross-reference Symbols . Wire Arrows - Reference Only . . . . . One-Line Components . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal . . . . . . . .
Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Phase Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Phase Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformer Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . Push to Test Lights . . . .
Mechanical Controls . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Controls, Latching Device . Mechanical Controls, Coupling . . . . . Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic Device Boxes . . . . . . . . . . Stand-alone Cross-reference Symbols . . Wire Arrows - Reference Only . . . . . . Splice Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical standards database editor . . . Use Circuit Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . Recalculate wire size . . . . . . . . . . . Reference an existing circuit . . . . . . . Use circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add existing circuits to the icon menu . Chapter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 . 687 . 720 . 721 . 724 . 727 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change attribute justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change attribute text style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change attribute text size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename an attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add attributes to blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set tags to fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retag components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change to multi-line text . .
Reposition wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996 Modify Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007 Modify wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007 Erase or Hide Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008 Erase or hide wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008 Signal Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 Signal Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 Fan In/Out Markers . . . . .
Create a project-wide script file . . . . . . . Renumber Ladder References . . . . . . . . . Project-wide update or retag . . . . . . . . . Track drawing changes . . . . . . . . . . . . Translate description text . . . . . . . . . . . Publish to the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publish to DWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Title Block Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Title block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Title Block utility setup . . . . . . . . . Title Block setup overview . . . .
Schematic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generate schematic reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generate panel reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of format files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run automatic reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export/Import spreadsheet data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create user-defined attributes . . . . . . .
Swap terminal strip wire text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611 Chapter 20 Conduit Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625 Overview of conduit tools . . . . . . . . . Conduit Marker Intelligence . . . . . Overview of conduit marker support files . Generate a conduit marker report . . . . . Generate a conduit routing report . . . . . Chapter 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625 .
Create a drawing template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716 Use the template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1718 Project description lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719 Drawing values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719 Title Block Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1720 Customize project description labels . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722 WDT file method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1724 Create a title block . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surf - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1804 Moving between symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1804 Block swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1807 Block swap - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1807 Swapping components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1807 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1809 PLC - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P&ID and Hydraulic diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . P&ID and Hydraulic diagrams - Introduction . Setting Up Hydraulic Drawings . . . . . . . . Inserting Hydraulic Schematic Symbols . . . . Creating Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Hydraulic Drawing . . . . . . Setting Up P&ID Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting P&ID Schematic Symbols . . . . . . Creating Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Builder - Introduction . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1977 Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1979 Set up peer-to-peer component relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1979 Create automated pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1981 Set up AutoCAD Electrical for multiple users . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1984 Show source and destination markers on cable wires . . . . . . . . . 1989 Use the PLC Database File Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xx
AutoCAD Electrical What's New 1 Overview of AutoCAD Electrical Help The AutoCAD Electrical Help system is a browser-based system available through context-sensitive links or by accessing it through the Help menu or icon. Key features of the Help system include: ■ There is on-demand access from the F1 function key, ribbons, dialog boxes, and the command line. ■ Navigation tabs in each topic link to related procedures, references, and concepts.
■ In a dialog box, press F1 to open the Reference topic for the active tool. In a dialog box, click Help to open the Reference topic for the active tool. Help button How is Help organized? Most of the subjects in the Help system have three topic types: Procedure, Reference, and Concept. Every Help topic selected from a menu has a tab row above the topic title. You can click a tab to go to the other available topic types.
for an alphabetical list of AutoCAD Electrical tools found in the menu and toolbars. Index You can enter a word in the box to locate the term in the alphabetical index. Double-click the term to display the topic, or if multiple topics, to open a list of topics found. Search Enter a search word in the box, and click List Topics to view a list of topics that contain the search word anywhere in their content. Click a title, and then click Display (or doubleclick a title) to open the topic.
■ Select Help ➤ Electrical Help Topics from the menu bar, and then browse to the desired topic. You can use the tabbed pane to access the Index, Search, or Table of Contents. ■ Press F1 to open the Procedure or Reference Help topic for the active command. ■ In an open dialog box, press F1 or click Help to open the Reference topic for the active command. To customize Help Use any of the following methods to customize Help.
6 Use operators to refine your Search criteria further. Click the right arrow next to the search text box, and then select one of the following operators. ■ AND Use AND to search for topics with more than one set of your search criteria. ■ OR Use OR to search for topics with at least one of your search criteria. ■ NEAR Use Near to search for specified text within close proximity to each other. ■ NOT Use NOT to search for topics that do not include your search criteria.
To get started with AutoCAD Electrical 1 Select the Help drop-down arrow in the upper right to display a menu of help options. 2 Select Learning Tools ➤ Launchpad. The AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad screen appears. The Launchpad has two sections. The top section is for first-time users. It has links to white papers, the Tutorials, and the AutoCAD Electrical discussion group. The bottom section has links to places for additional information about AutoCAD Electrical.
3 In the Customer Involvement Program dialog box, choose whether you want to start or stop participating. 4 Click OK. What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2011 Catalog Lookup The catalog lookup user-interface enhancements include: ■ Control which fields are displayed and the field order in the catalog lookup dialog box. ■ Filter catalog records by selecting existing values from any of the catalog fields.
For More Information on page 903 Item Numbering enhancements Item numbering now supports fixed item numbers on panel components. If Resequence Item Numbers is run later on, fixed item numbers do not change. Resequence item numbers based on the manufacturer values of the components. Select the manufacturers from a list of values used in the project. Only item numbers on components with selected manufacturer values change. Define the resequence order based on the manufacturer values of the components.
Suppress wire collision check Turn the collision checking off temporarily when inserting wires. Default behavior is to route around a component when routing a wire from one specified location to another. If you want the wire to break across any components encountered as you insert the wire, turn the collision checking off. For More Information on page 913 Learning Solutions ■ Getting Started exercises added to the online Help.
Feature 2008 2009 2010 Catalog Database Creation 2011 X on page 8 Circuit Builder X on page 19 Direct Wire Sequencing X on page 15 DWG Product Recognition X on page 18 Electrical Audit X on page 26 X on page 28 Help Updates X on page 19 Icon Menu Wizard Enhancements X on page 15 Improved Performance X on page 18 InfoCenter X on page 19 Insert Components from a Menu X on page 14 Inserting Spare Terminals X on page 16 Installer Improvements X on page 18 Item Numbering Location Bo
Feature 2008 Migration Utility Multi-Level Terminals 2009 X on page 17 X on page 20 X on page 27 Pin List Data Management X on page 18 PLC I/O Import/Export X on page 13 PLC I/O Libraries X on page 13 Power Feed Support X on page 26 Project Manager X on page 23 Ribbon Interface X on page 25 X on page 13 Stand-alone Cross-reference Surfable Reports 2011 X on page 21 One-Line Support Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Enhancements 2010 X on page 22 X on page 24 X on page 14 X on page 2
Feature 2008 2009 Symbol Libraries X on page 22 Terminal Jumpers X on page 17 X on page 20 Terminal Properties Database Editor X on page 17 X on page 20 Terminal Strip Editor X on page 15 X on page 20 Terminals X on page 24 X on page 19 Wire Collision Avoidance X on page 9 Wire Connection Improvements X on page 23 Wire Number Placement X on page 23 Wire Sequence Updates 2011 X on page 27 Table Style Cross-reference Updates User’s Guide 2010 X on page 15 Wire Type Creation/Import
What's New in 2008 Release PLC I/O Import/Export You can now communicate your electrical designs between AutoCAD Electrical and Unity Pro from Schneider Electric. Employing the widely used XML language format, you can transfer design data back and forth while maintaining structure and organization. Use the new Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet tool to import Unity Pro XML export files.
Surfable Reports When reports are placed into a drawing as a table, click various report cells to find the corresponding devices within the schematic or panel layout drawings in the active project. When surfing on a table inserted by the Terminal Strip Editor, click the title cell to surf on the Tagstrip value. You can surf on the value even if the Tagstrip is not included in the title.
Icon Menu Wizard Enhancements Use the Icon Menu Wizard to customize the icon menus easily. You can copy and paste icons from one submenu into another, drag and drop icons to place the icons that are commonly used at the top of the Symbol Preview window and the icons that are used less frequently at the bottom of the window, and create new icons to use when inserting components. You can also easily modify the existing icon or menu properties like changing the name, image, or block name.
The Terminal Strip Editor dialog box now has an enhanced grid control with bolder grid lines that provide better visual definition for the terminal strip. Other enhancements to the dialog box include: ■ The Terminal Pin (TPin) column is now “T.” ■ The TERM column is now “Number” to indicate the terminal numbering, whether it is a wire number or user-defined number. ■ The Function column is now “Installation.” ■ A new column (on the far left side of the grid) indicates the level definition.
For More Information on page 1102 Multi-Level Terminals Multi-level terminal blocks are quickly becoming an industry standard. Using AutoCAD Electrical, you can define and manage the terminal numbers and levels as well as all connectivity information with no added complexity. You can now associate schematic terminals to build a multi-level terminal block that is limited to the number of levels defined in the block properties.
Pin List Data Management Pin list data is now managed based on manufacturer. Use the Pin List Database Editor tool to select the pin list table to edit or create a table. The _PINLIST table in the default_cat.mdb file now uses a single PINLIST column and a single PEER_PINLIST column. The continuation columns were removed.
DWG icon, the tooltip identifies which Autodesk product and version was used to create the DWG. Parametric Twisted Pair Symbol Enhancements The icon menus are enhanced to include three new parametric twisted pair symbols. To insert a twisted pair symbol, click Components > Insert Component. On the Insert Component icon menu, click Miscellaneous and click Cable Markers. User’s Guide A User’s Guide for AutoCAD Electrical is now available in PDF format.
Inserting a custom motor control circuit can also be as easy as a few mouse clicks. Select the options to define the circuit, such as breaker type, control circuitry and motor horsepower. Select the location for the circuit and a custom circuit is built based on the selected options. You can customize the Circuit Builder feature to build your custom circuits. The feature uses a spreadsheet and drawing templates. The spreadsheet defines the available options for the circuit and the defaults for each option.
For More Information on page 1064 Symbol Builder The Symbol Builder now takes advantage of the block editor environment. All the block editor features are available along with AutoCAD Electrical dialog boxes. It is easy to adjust the graphics of the component and add the necessary attributes for each type of AutoCAD Electrical component. Start with a template supplied with attributes for the specific component type you want to create.
3 Select the Components tab. 4 Click Item Numbering. 5 Click Per-Part Number Basis (excluding ASSYCODE combinations). 6 Click OK. NOTE An item number can be assigned to the main catalog entry and any multiple catalog entries. It cannot be assigned to a catalog entry based on an assembly code. The Insert Balloon feature supports multiple balloons per component. If a component carries multiple item number assignments, multiple balloons are inserted automatically.
You can now predefine other attributes on the module like the inline device fields. For example, you want a module to have a Rack value of “2”, an Installation value of “MACH1”, and a Rating2 value of “Hazardous Duty”. In the spreadsheet, in the RACK column, enter “2;INST=MACH1;RATING2=HAZARDOUS DUTY”. When this module is generated these extra attribute values are assigned.
Trim Wire You can now use the dynamic pan and zoom while using the Trim Wire command. Start the command and select the Fence option. Select the first fence point and pan the drawing to select the next fence point. All wires are trimmed that cross the fence rather than just the wires on the screen. Edit Wire Sequence The Edit Wire Sequence command remains active until you choose to exit the command by not selecting a wire.
Help Updates The New Features Workshop provides an outline and graphical view of new features this release. A symbol library preview guide lists the library symbols supplied with AutoCAD Electrical. For More Information on page 361 Toolbar Tooltips Some of the commonly used AutoCAD Electrical commands now provide an additional level of information in the tooltip. Pause the mouse over the command icon. The first level of information for that command is displayed.
Circuit Builder goes green Circuit Builder now provides engineering analysis/green calculations in the area of power conductor size versus energy losses. Designing to meet minimum code requirements can conflict with green design. During the code requirements analysis, Circuit Builder displays parallel energy loss calculations so you can make better green design decisions. For example, suppose you must oversize the conductors for a motor to reduce conductor heating losses.
■ Electrical standards database editor to view, modify, and expand the ace_electrical_standards.mdb file. For More Information on page 653 Motor control one-line circuits AutoCAD Electrical now provides library support and software support to create motor control one-line diagrams that link back to other drawing types in a project drawing set. ■ New motor control one-line symbol library accessible from the icon menu. ■ Circuit Builder helps you build motor control one-line circuits dynamically.
■ If any wire in the network is on a layer set “Yes” for Wire Numbering, the existing non-fixed wire number is updated, or a new wire number is inserted. ■ If a wire network already has a non-fixed wire number, it is updated regardless of the Wire Numbering setting. Use the Delete Wire Numbers command to remove the wire number. For More Information on page 266 Electrical Audit The Electrical Audit can now display the results for the active drawing only.
Ribbon Interface Project tab Project Tools panel Command Description Project Manager AEPROJECT Lists the drawing files associated with each open project. Use this to add new drawings, reorder drawing files, and change project settings. You cannot have two projects open in the Project Manager with the same project name. Copy Project AECOPYPROJECT Copies an existing project to a new name and creates renamed copies of the drawing files.
Command Description Mark/Verify DWGs AEMARKVERIFY Places an invisible mark on each component before sending the drawings to a client. When the drawings are returned, a list is generated that includes any components or wire numbers that have been modified, edited, or copied. NOTE This command writes information to the project database file that is used to check for deleted components. Your drawings must be named and part of the active project to use this command.
Command Description Language Conversion AELANG Translates component description text from one language to another. Description text and switch position text is processed on schematic and panel components. Edit Language Database AELANGDB Opens the current language table for review and modification. The default table is wd_lang1.mdb.
Command Description Update to New WD_PNLM Block, No changes AESWAPPNLMNOCHANGE Replaces the panel wd_pnlm.dwg block in the current drawing with a newer copy, but keeps existing configuration values and layer names. Update Symbol Library WD_M Block AECOPY2SYMLIB Writes the attribute settings for the wd_m block in the current drawing to the wd_m.dwg drawing file in the symbol library.
Command Description AECREATEPROJCATALOG Move Objects to Layer AEMOVE2LAYER Moves all objects on a layer in the active drawing to a different layer. PLC Database Migration Utility AEPLCMIGRATE Adds the Category field to the PLC database tables. This field is used by the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O utility to determine module placement. Troubleshooting panel The Troubleshooting panel is off by default.
Command Description MDB Command Trace Off AEOFFMDBDEBUG Turns off the display of error messages generated during temporary MDB file rebuild and freshen. Command Timer On AEONTIMER Turns on the timer for command execution elapsed time. Command Timer Off AEOFFTIMER Turns off the timer for command execution elapsed time. Schematic tab Quick Pick panel The Quick Pick panel is off by default. Command Description Relays AERELAYMENU Activates the icon menu with the relay page displayed.
Command Description Limit Switches AELIMITSWITCHMENU Activates the icon menu with the limit switch page displayed. Pilot Lights AEPILOTLIGHTSMENU Activates the icon menu with the pilot light page displayed. Insert Saved Circuit AESAVEDCIRCUIT Inserts a user circuit selected from on-screen icon menu. Insert Components panel Command Description Insert Component AECOMPONENT Inserts selected components from the icon menu onto the drawing.
Command Description crosoft® Excel® spreadsheet, or Microsoft Access database file for input. Insert Component (Panel List) AECOMPONENTPNL Lists panel components extracted from your panel drawing, finds the appropriate schematic symbol, and inserts the schematic components at your pick point. Insert Terminal (Panel List) AETERMINALPNL Lists panel terminals extracted from your panel drawing, finds the appropriate schematic symbol, and inserts the schematic terminals at your pick point.
Command Description Insert PLC (Parametric) AEPLCP Generates PLC I/O modules on demand, in a variety of different graphical styles via a parametric generation technique. It is driven by a database file (ace_plc.mdb) and a handful of library symbol blocks. Insert PLC (Full Units) AEPLC Inserts PLC I/O modules that are fixed library symbol blocks. Location Box AELOCATIONBOX Draws a dashed box around selected components.
Command Description Insert Splice AESPLICE Inserts a splice symbol selected from the onscreen icon menu. Link Components with Dashed Line AELINK Draws a smart dashed line between stacked contacts of a multicontact component. When the dashed link line inserts, certain attributes automatically flip to invisible. Use the Attribute Hide command to turn the visibility of the selected attributes back on. Insert Reference Arrow To AEREFARROWTO Draws a dashed line from a component to a “To” arrow symbol.
Command Description Insert Hydraulic Component AEHYDRAULIC Inserts hydraulic components from an onscreen icon menu. This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Project Properties dialog box. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu. Insert P&ID Component AEPID Inserts P&ID components from an on-screen icon menu. This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom menu.
Command Description Edit User Table Data AEUSERTABLE Edits user-defined Xdata on component or wire numbers and populates the User table in project database file. You can add, edit, or remove free-form user data records attached to the selected block insert. Delete Component AEERASECOMP Removes the selected component from the drawing. If you erase a parent schematic component, you have the option to search for related child components, surf to them, and delete them.
Command Description the command by typing V or H at the command line. Move Component AEMOVE Automatically moves the selected component to a new position. Reverse/Flip Component AEFLIP Reverses or flips selected component graphics and its associated attributes NOTE This tool only operates on a component with 2-wire connections (ex: limit switch contact symbol).
Command Description Find/Replace Terminal Text AEFINDTERMTEXT Finds and replaces terminal number text values or find and replace sub-strings within those values. You can do this on a selection from the active drawing, the entire active drawing, or across the project drawing set. Move/Show Attribute AEATTSHOW Moves the selected attributes to a picked point. The attributes remain tied to the block inserts Edit Selected Attribute AEEDITATT Edits an attribute's text by picking right on the attribute.
Command Description Rename Attribute AERENAMEATTRIB Adds a new attribute to an existing instance of a block insert. Squeeze Attribute/Text AEATTSQUEEZE Compresses an attribute to make it fit into a tight spot (such as between closely spaced components). Each click on the attribute dynamically changes the attribute's width factor by 5%. Stretch Attribute/Text AEATTSTRETCH Expands an attribute. Each click on the attribute dynamically changes the attribute's width factor by 5%.
Command Description Swap/Update Block AESWAPBLOCK Use to update or change blocks in place. Attribute values are retained during the swapping process. Wire connections are also maintained even if the new symbol is slightly wider or narrower than the original. Reverse Connector AEREVERSE Reverses the orientation of the connector about its horizontal or vertical axis.
Command Description Move Connector Pin AEMOVEPIN Moves connector pin associated to selected connector. Swap Connector Pins AESWAPPINS Exchanges one set of connector pin numbers for another on an existing connector or between connectors on the drawing. NOTE You cannot swap a combination connector with a single plug or receptacle connector. Additionally, you cannot use this tool to swap pins from one side of a connector to the other.
Command Description haves as if it is an attribute tied to the component block. Cross-Reference Check AEXREFCHECK Displays all associated and parent components to the selected component. A complete list of components is extracted from the project drawing set. The component's tag is read, then all associated components are found and listed in the dialog box. A bill of material check can be performed to see if the item's description indicates that the quantity of contacts can be accommodated.
Command Description AECOPYINSTLOC code, pick from an on-line list, or pick a similar master component. Associate Terminals AEASSOCTERMINAL Associates two or more terminal symbols together. Associating schematic terminals combines the terminals into a single terminal block property definition. The number of schematic terminals that can be combined is limited to the number of levels defined for the block properties.
Command Description Terminal:Mark Internal Connections AEMARKTERMINT Marks internal terminal block connections. Controls which side of a terminal receives internal wire connections. Terminal:Mark External Connections AEMARKTEMEXT Marks external terminal block connections. Controls which side of a terminal receives external wire connections. Terminal:Erase Internal/External Connections AEERASETEMCONN Erases internal and external terminal block connections.
Command Description Insert Wire Gap AEWIREGAP Inserts a gap/loop at the point of two crossing lines. Gaps are automatically inserted when a new wire crosses another. Multiple Wire Bus AEMULTIBUS Inserts vertical or horizontal bus wiring. Bus spacing defaults to the default ladder rung spacing for horizontal bus. Multiple bus wiring automatically breaks and reconnects to any underlying components that it finds in its path.
Command Description Fan In/Out Source AEFANINSRC Inserts in-line source marker symbols and changes the connected wire on the fan-in side to be on a non-wire layer. Fan In/Out Destination AEFANINDEST Changes the connected common wires on the fan-out side to non-wire layer but leaves the individual segments on the opposite side of marker on the original wire layer. Wire Arrows for Reference Only AEREFWIREARROWS Inserts non intelligent, reference-only arrows.
Command Description encing in the Drawing Properties dialog box to X Zones. Wire Number Leader AEWIRENOLEADER Repositions the wire number text with an attached leader. Wire Color/Gauge Labels AEWIRECOLORLABEL Inserts wire color gauge labels with a leader on your drawing's wiring. In-Line Wire Labels AEINLINEWIRE Inserts a reference-only in-line wire label. Cable Markers AECABLEMARKER Inserts cable markers onto the drawing.
Command Description Insert Angled Tee Markers AEANGLETEE Inserts an angled tee connection symbol at a manually drawn wire intersection. You cannot insert a tee connection symbol into empty space. If present, this replaces an existing wire connection dot with a tee connection symbol. Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel Command Description Edit Wire Number AEEDITWIRENO Allows manual edit of an existing wire number or insert of a new one if none exists.
Command Description Unhide Wire Numbers AESHOWWIRENO Moves the wire number out of the hide layer so that the number is visible on the screen. Trim Wire AETRIM Removes a wire segment and dots as required. You can select a single wire or draw a fence through multiple wires to trim. Delete Wire Numbers AEERASEWIRENUM Deletes selected wire numbers.
Command Description Copy Wire Number AECOPYWIRENO Inserts extra wire numbers anywhere on a wire network. These copies follow the network's main wire number attribute. If AutoCAD Electrical modifies it, then any wire number copies on the network also update. Extra wire numbers go on their own layer that is defined in the Define Layers dialog box.
Command Description Bend Wire AEBENDWIRE Bends a wire in a right angle and makes 3 right angle turns to avoid or add geometry. When a wire is defined at a right angle you can modify the wire and create a new right angle bend while maintaining the original wire connections to the components. NOTE This tool terminates if the bend attempts to connect two different wire networks or if the bend bypasses more than a single right angle turn.
Command Description Toggle Angled Tee Markers AETOGGLETEE Toggles an existing angled tee connection symbol (or windowed symbols) through a total of 4 possible orientations. Right-click to toggle through the various tee connection orientations, and press ESC when the appropriate one displays. This replaces any dot tee symbols with angled tee symbols, and then toggles through the 4 possible orientations for each. Flip Wire Gap AEFLIPWIREGAP Flips the gap to the other wire.
Command Description Fan In/Out - Single Line Layer AEFANIN Defines a special layer or set of layers for the wires going out of a Fan In/Out source marker and the wires coming into a destination marker. List Signal Code AELISTSIG Follows a signal from a specific source or destination symbol and lists the signal code references. Show Signal Paths AESHOWSIG Displays signal source and destination paths on the active drawing.
Command Description Icon Menu Wizard AEMENUWIZ Launches the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify or expand an icon menu, or replace an existing icon menu with your own custom menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Project Properties dialog box. The default icon menu can also be redefined in “wd.env.” Drawing Properties AEPROPERTIES Defines defaults for component and wire tag formats, signal references, cross references, and layers.
Command Description Pin List Database Editor (AEPINLISTTABLE) Edits a pin list database table in the catalog database. Terminal Properties Database Editor AETERMDBEDITOR Edits a Terminal Properties table in the catalog database. Schematic Database File Editor AESCHEMATICDB Edits the records in the schematic_lookup.mdb file to use for mapping panel footprints and terminal representations to the equivalent schematic component block names.
Command Description Power Load Check Report AEPOWERLOADREPORT Scans the wire interconnections and reports if there is too much load on a given power source. Panel tab Insert Component Footprints panel Command Description Insert Footprint (Icon Menu) AEFOOTPRINT Inserts panel footprint selected from on-screen icon menu. This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Project Properties dialog box.
Command Description Insert Footprint (Manufacturer Menu) AEFOOTPRINTMFG Inserts and annotates panel footprint using manufacturer-specific icon menu. This can save a lot of time if you frequently use the same vendor and panel components. You can even apply this method to create client-specific menus making it easier to use the vendor or components that each client prefers.
Command Description tied to a footprint, they are properly updated when copied using this utility. Terminal Footprints panel Command Description Terminal Strip Editor AETSE Displays terminal strips inside of the active project database. The combination of Function, Location, and Terminal Strip values make a complete unique record for selection in the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box. Terminal Strip Table Generator AETSEGENERATOR Controls the Tabular Terminal layout format automatically.
Command Description schematic components may not carry manufacturer/catalog information or have a part number assigned that is not listed in the footprint lookup file. In such a case, AutoCAD Electrical cannot determine what footprint block needs to be used so you have to select to make catalog assignments, select or create a footprint, or create a lookup entry on the fly. Edit Footprints panel Command Description Edit Footprint AEEDITFOOTPRINT Edits panel footprint or terminal.
Command Description combination. Additional multi-catalog numbers on a specific component are ignored. Only the main part number combination is used to group similar components together under a common item number. Delete Footprint AEERASECOMP Removes the selected footprint from the drawing. You have the option to search for related components, surf to them, and delete them. Copy Installation Code AECOPYINST Copies Installation Code to one or more selected panel footprints.
Other Tools panel Command Description Symbol Builder AESYMBUILDER Converts existing symbols or creates new, custom components on the fly. It works nicely for quickly building power supplies, filters, drives, controllers, and other custom devices or for converting existing non-AutoCAD Electrical symbols to make them “AutoCAD Electrical smart.
Command Description example, if DEMO-WIRES is currently assigned as an AutoCAD Electrical wire layer, and you rename it using this utility, the new layer name is substituted for DEMO-WIRES in the AutoCAD Electrical wire layer name list. Update Footprint Layers AEFPLAYERS Updates selected footprint layer assignments to match panel drawing settings layer assignments.
Command Description Edit Conduit Marker AEEDITCONDUITMARKER Edits conduit marker tag, descriptions, and wire assignments. Conduit Marker Report AECONDUITMARKERRPT Extracts conduit marker information into a report. Extractable conduit marker symbols are named “WWAY*.” A conduit can be represented by a line or a polyline and by itself does not carry any intelligence. However, you can insert a conduit marker symbol and associate it to a conduit.
Command Description Show Missing Catalog Assignment AEMISSINGCATREPORT Displays components that do not carry a catalog number assignment. The components are marked with diamond-shaped temporary graphics. Electrical Audit AEAUDIT Displays a report of detected problems or potential problems. You can save this file for reference or surf the file to view and correct the errors. Drawing Audit AEAUDITDWG Displays a report of detected problems or potential problems.
Command Description Report Format File Setup AEFORMATFILE Creates and maintains report formatting files. User Defined Attribute List AEUDA Creates an attribute text file (*.wda) of userdefined attributes defined on AutoCAD Electrical block files. The User Defined Attribute List is used by report tools to determine which additional attributes are listed in a report. The list file name can be the same as the active project or named Default to be used by the entire system. The Default .
Command Description Electrical construct a set of PLC I/O wiring diagrams directly from your data. Ladders and modules insert automatically, breaking at the bottom of one ladder and continuing on the next (or on to the next drawing). Update from Spreadsheet AEIMPORTSS Imports data from an edited spreadsheet, and retags or updates components, wire numbers, terminal text, or PLC I/O.
Command Description tains the PLC I/O addresses and descriptions for import into the Unity Pro software. Export to Spreadsheet AEEXPORT2SS Exports the selected data category to a comma-delimited, Excel XLS, or Access MDB file format for editing. Conversion Tools tab Tools panel Command Description Promis·e Conversion AEP2E Converts drawing files from promis·e to AutoCAD Electrical.
Command Description take advantage of the tagging tools to modify the text entities to attributes and the linking tools to make various blocks. Convert Ladder AE2LADDER Converts the upper-most line reference number on a non-intelligent ladder to be AutoCAD Electrical-aware. Change/Convert Wire Type AECONVERTWIRETYPE Changes between wire types and converts lines to wires. Use the grid control to sort and select the wire types for easy modification.
Command Description Block Replacement AEBLOCKREPLACE Performs drawing-wide and project-wide block replacements using a user-defined spreadsheet. This automatically maps the unconverted drawing's non-AutoCAD Electrical block inserts and attributes to appropriate AutoCAD Electrical-smart component symbols drawn from a symbol library. Swap/Update Block AESWAPBLOCK Use to update or change blocks in place. Attribute values are retained during the swapping process.
Schematic panel Command Description Tag Schematic Component AETAGSCH Makes selected text entities an attributed block file with the TAG1 attribute visible. The template block file (HDV1_CONVERT.DWG or VDV1_CONVERT.DWG depending on the drawing properties) contains attributes for a schematic component. Tag PLC AETAGPLC Makes selected text entities an attributed PLC address associated to a PLC tag. The template block file (PLCIO_ADDR_CONVERT.DWG, PLCIO_CONVERT.DWG, PLCIO_V_ADDR_CONVERT.
Command Description Tag Child - Form C AETAGFORMC Makes the selected text entities an attributed block file with the TAG2 attribute visible. The template block file (HDV23_CONVERT.DWG or VDV23_CONVERT.DWG depending on the drawing properties) contains attributes used for a child Form C contact component. Tag Schematic Terminal - Terminal Number AETAGTERMINAL Makes the selected text entities an attributed block file with the TAGSTRIP and TERM01 attribute visible. The template block file (HT0T_CONVERT.
Panel panel Command Description Tag Panel Component AETAGPANEL Makes selected text entities an attributed block file with the P_TAG1 attribute visible. The template block file (ACE_P_TAG1_CONVERT.DWG) contains attributes for a panel component. Tag Nameplate AETAGNAMEPLATE Makes selected text entities an attributed block file with the DESC1-3 attributes visible. The template block file (ACE_NP_CONVERT.DWG) contains attributes used in nameplate symbols.
Command Description is removed and replaced with the next available description attribute, up to 3. Link PLC Address Descriptions AELINKPLC Links simple text to a PLC address attribute as PLC I/O address description attributes. During the conversion process, the text entity is removed and replaced with the next available PLC address description attribute, up to 5.
Command Description Link Installation Code AELINKINST Links simple text as Installation attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical block file. The entity value is used as the Installation value for one or more template block definitions. If only one template block is selected for the link, the text entity is removed and replaced with the Installation attribute. Link Split Tag AELINKSPLITTAG Links another string of text to a tag attribute, creating a split tag.
Command Description Show Links AESHOWLINK Selects the tagged template block file and displays everything (such as description, location, manufacturer, and catalog number codes) that has been linked to it. Un Link AEUNLINK Selects an existing linked attribute and unlinks the attribute from the symbol, changing the attribute to AutoCAD text. Symbol Builder tab Edit panel The Symbol Builder tab is displayed automatically when you use Symbol Builder.
Help panel The Symbol Builder tab is displayed automatically when you use Symbol Builder. Command Description Symbol Builder Help Displays the Symbol builder Help. Toolbars to Ribbons Main Electrical toolbar Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Catalog List. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Equipment List.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Terminal (Panel List). Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Swap/Update Block. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Copy Component. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Multiple Insert drop-down ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu). Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Multiple Insert drop-down ➤ Multiple Insert (Pick Master).
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Dashed Link Line drop-down ➤ Insert Refer- ence Arrow - From. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert PLC drop-down ➤ Insert PLC (Paramet- ric). Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert PLC drop-down ➤ Insert PLC (Full Units). Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Unity Pro. Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ RSLogix 500. Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ PLC I/O Utility.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Connector drop-down ➤ Insert Con- nector. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Connector drop-down ➤ Insert Con- nector (From List). Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Reverse Connector. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Rotate Connector Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Stretch Connector.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Delete Connector Pins. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Move Con- nector Pins. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Swap Con- nector Pins. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Connector drop-down ➤ Insert Splice. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit drop-down ➤ Insert WBlocked Circuit.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Circuit drop-down ➤ Move Circuit. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Circuit drop-down ➤ Save Circuit to Icon Menu. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Internal Jumper. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Fix/Unfix Tag.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Retag Components drop-down ➤ Retag Components. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Retag Components drop-down ➤ Find/Edit/Replace Component Text. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Retag Components drop-down ➤ Find/Replace Terminal Text. Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Update/Retag. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components drop-down ➤ Scoot. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components drop-down ➤ Align.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components drop-down ➤ Reverse/Flip Component. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components drop-down ➤ Stretch PLC Module. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components drop-down ➤ Split PLC Module. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Move/Show Attribute. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Edit Selected Attribute.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Squeeze At- tribute/Text. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Stretch Attrib- ute/Text. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Change At- tribute Size. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Rotate Attribute. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Change At- tribute Justification.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Delete Component. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wires drop-down ➤ Wire. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Multiple Bus. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wires drop-down ➤ 22.5 Degree. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wires drop-down ➤ 45 Degree. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wires drop-down ➤ 67.5 Degree.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wires drop-down ➤ Interconnect Components. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wires drop-down ➤ Gap. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ ➤ Modify Wire Gap drop-down ➤ Flip Wire Gap. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ ➤ Modify Wire Gap drop-down ➤ Delete Wire Gap. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ ➤ Modify Wire Gap drop-down ➤ Check/Repair Gap Pointers.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Type drop-down ➤ Cre- ate/Edit Wire Type. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wires drop-down ➤ Stretch Wire. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wires drop-down ➤ Show Wires. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wires drop-down ➤ Check/Trace Wire. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ ➤ Wire Sequence drop-down ➤ Edit Wire Sequence.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Terminal: Show Internal/External Connections. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Terminal: Mark Internal Connections. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Terminal: Mark External Connections. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Terminal: Erase Internal/External Connections. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Cable Markers drop-down ➤ Cable Markers.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Dot, Tee Markers drop-down ➤ Insert Dot Tee Markers. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Dot, Tee Markers drop-down ➤ Insert Angled Tee Markers. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ ➤ Toggle Angled Tee Markers. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Ladder drop-down ➤ Insert Ladder. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Ladder drop-down ➤ Revise Ladder.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Ladder drop-down ➤ X Zones Setup. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Ladder drop-down ➤ Add Rung. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Trim Wire. Main Electrical 2 toolbar Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Wire Numbers. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ 3 Phase.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Wire Number Leader drop-down ➤ Wire Number Leader. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Wire Number Leader drop-down ➤ Wire Color/Gauge Labels. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Wire Number Leader drop-down ➤ In-Line Wire Labels. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Copy Wire Number drop-down ➤ Copy Wire Number.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Edit Wire Number. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Fix. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Swap. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Find/Replace. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Hide.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Toggle Wire Number In-line. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Signal Arrows drop-down ➤ Source Arrow. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Signal Arrows drop-down ➤ Destin- ation Arrow. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ ➤ Update Signal References. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Signal Arrows drop-down ➤ Fan In Source.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ ➤ List Signal Code. ➤ Show Signal Paths. Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Signal Error/List. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Signal Arrows drop-down ➤ Reference Only Arrows. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Delete Wire Numbers. Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder drop-down ➤ Symbol Builder. Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Icon Menu Wizard.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Associate Terminals. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Break Apart Terminal Associations. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Copy Terminal Block Properties. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Component Cross-Reference drop-down ➤ Component Cross-Reference. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Component Cross-Reference drop-down ➤ Hide/Unhide Cross-Referencing.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Component Cross-Reference drop-down ➤ Change Cross-Reference to Multiple Line Text. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Component Cross-Reference drop-down ➤ Cross-Reference Check. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Component Cross-Reference drop-down ➤ Child Location/Description Update. Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Component Cross-Reference drop-down ➤ Copy/Add Component Override.
Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Copy Installation/Location Code Values. Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Surfer drop-down menu ➤ Surfer. Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Surfer drop-down ➤ Continue Surfer. Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Previous DWG. Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Next DWG. Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports. Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Missing Catalog Data. Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Electrical Audit.
Command Access Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ DWG Audit. Reports tab ➤ Miscellaneous panel ➤ Report Format Setup. Reports tab ➤ Miscellaneous panel ➤ Automatic Reports. Reports tab ➤ Miscellaneous panel ➤ User Attributes. Import/Export Data tab ➤ Export panel ➤ Inventor. Import/Export Data tab ➤ Export panel ➤ Unity Pro. Import/Export Data tab ➤ Export panel ➤ To Spreadsheet. Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ From Spreadsheet. Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ From Project MDB.
Command Access Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Spreadsheet to Table. Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties drop-down ➤ Rename Layers. Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties drop-down ➤ Settings Compare. Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Copy. Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Update/Retag.
Command Access Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Mark/Verify DWGs. Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Language Conversion. Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Edit Language Database. tab ➤ panel ➤ Rebuild/Freshen Project Database. Panel Layout toolbar Command Access Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert Footprints drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert Footprints drop-down ➤ Schematic List.
Command Access Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert Footprints drop-down ➤ Manu- facturer Menu. Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert Footprints drop-down ➤ Catalog List. Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert Footprints drop-down ➤ Equip- ment List. Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Editor. Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Table Generator.
Command Access Panel tab ➤ Edit Footprints panel ➤ Copy Footprint. Panel tab ➤ Edit Footprints panel ➤ Edit. Panel tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Panel Configuration drop-down ➤ Make Xdata Visible. Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Balloon. Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Wire Annotation. Reports tab ➤ Panel panel ➤ Reports. tab ➤ panel ➤ Rebuild/Freshen Project Database. Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Panel Assembly.
Command Access Panel tab ➤ Edit Footprints panel ➤ Copy Codes drop-down ➤ Copy Installation Code. Panel tab ➤ Edit Footprints panel ➤ Copy Codes drop-down ➤ Copy Location Code. Panel tab ➤ Edit Footprints panel ➤ Copy Codes drop-down ➤ Copy Mount Code. Panel tab ➤ Edit Footprints panel ➤ Copy Codes drop-down ➤ Copy Group Code. Panel tab ➤ Edit Footprints panel ➤ Resequence Item Numbers. Panel tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Footprint Database File Editor.
Command Access Panel tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Panel Configuration drop-down ➤ Rename Layers. Panel tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Panel Configuration drop-down ➤ Update Layers. Panel tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Panel Configuration drop-down ➤ Configuration. Conversion toolbar Command Access Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Special Explode. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Block Replacement drop-down ➤ Block Replacement. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Promise Conversion.
Command Access Conversion Tools tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Tag PLC Module. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Tag Child Component. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Tag Child Contacts drop-down ➤ Tag Child - N.O.. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Tag Child Contacts drop-down ➤ Tag Child - N.C.. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Tag Child Contacts drop-down ➤ Tag Child - Form C.
Command Access Conversion Tools tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Tag Schematic Terminals drop-down ➤ Tag Schematic Terminal - Wire Number Change. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Link Descriptions. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Link Split Tag. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Link PLC Address Descriptions. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Link Terminal Number. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Link Location Code.
Command Access Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Link Rating. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Link User. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Show Links. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Un-Link. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Add Wire Connections. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Add Geometry. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Panel panel ➤ Tag Footprint. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Panel panel ➤ Tag Nameplate.
Command Access Conversion Tools tab ➤ Panel panel ➤ Tag Panel Terminal - Wire Number. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Link Descriptions. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Link Split Tag. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Link Item Number. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Link Location Code. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Link Installation Code. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Link Manufacturer.
Command Access Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Link User. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Show Links. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Un-Link. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Add Wire Connections. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Add Geometry. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Convert Ladder. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Change/Convert Wire Type drop-down ➤ Change/Convert Wire Type.
Command Access Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Schematic Conversion drop-down ➤ Convert Block to Source Arrow. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Schematic Conversion drop-down ➤ Convert Block to Destination Arrow. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Change/Convert Wire Type drop-down ➤ Check/Repair Gap Pointers. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Stretch Wire. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Change Attribute Size. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Add Attribute.
Command Access Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Schematic Conversion drop-down ➤ Convert to Schematic Component. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Map Attributes from Old to New. Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Block Replacement drop-down ➤ Swap/Update Block. Conduit Marker toolbar Command Access Panel tab ➤ Conduit Marker panel ➤ Conduit Markers drop-down ➤ Insert Marker. Panel tab ➤ Conduit Marker panel ➤ Conduit Markers drop-down ➤ Insert From List.
Command Access Panel tab ➤ Conduit Marker panel ➤ Conduit Reports drop-down ➤ Conduit Report. Panel tab ➤ Conduit Marker panel ➤ Conduit Reports drop-down ➤ Routing Report. Panel tab ➤ Conduit Marker panel ➤ Conduit Reports drop-down ➤ Extract Wire Data. Power Check toolbar Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Power Check panel ➤ Add/Edit Source/Load. Schematic tab ➤ Power Check panel ➤ Mark Components To Pass Power. Schematic tab ➤ Power Check panel ➤ Load Check Report.
Extra Libraries toolbar Command Access Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ ➤ Insert Pneumatic Components. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ ➤ Insert Hydraulic Components. Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ ➤ Insert P&ID Components. The Ribbon The ribbon is a palette that displays task-based tools and controls. Overview of the Ribbon The ribbon is displayed by default when you open a file, providing a compact palette of all of the tools necessary to create or modify your drawing.
Display and Organize the Ribbon The horizontal ribbon is displayed across the top of the file window. You can dock the vertical ribbon to the left or right of the file window. The vertical ribbon can also float in the file window or on a second monitor. Ribbon Tabs and Panels The ribbon is composed of a series of panels, which are organized into tabs labeled by task. Ribbon panels contain many of the same tools and controls available in toolbars and dialog boxes.
panel. The dialog box launcher indicates that you can display a related dialog box. Display the related dialog box by clicking the dialog box launcher. To specify which ribbon tabs and panels are displayed, right-click the ribbon and, on the shortcut menu, click or clear the names of tabs or panels. Floating Panels If you pull a panel off of a ribbon tab and into the drawing area or onto another monitor, that panel floats where you placed it.
Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you select a particular type of object or execute some commands, a special contextual ribbon tab is displayed instead of a toolbar or dialog box. The contextual tab is closed when you end the command. To display the ribbon ■ Click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ Ribbon. NOTE The ribbon displays the ribbon panels associated with the workspace you used last. To display the ribbon panels associated with a specific workspace, click Tools menu ➤ Workspaces.
To minimize the ribbon Pointing device: Double-click the name of the active ribbon tab or anywhere in the ribbon tab bar. To return a floating panel to the ribbon ■ Hover over the right side of the floating panel and click the Return Panels to Ribbon icon. To display or hide a ribbon panel ■ Right-click anywhere inside the ribbon. Under Panels, select or unselect the name of a panel. To show or hide text labels on ribbon panels ■ Right-click the ribbon tab bar and click Show Panel Titles.
■ You can convert toolbars into ribbon panels using the Customize User Interface Editor. See Customize Ribbon Panels in the AutoCAD Customization Guide. To display the tool palette group associated with a ribbon ■ Right-click a ribbon tab and click Show Related Tool Palette Group.
Migration 2 Migration Utility The Migration Utility migrates settings and files from a previous AutoCAD Electrical release to the current release. Many files within AutoCAD Electrical are customizable. The Migration Utility migrates these custom changes to the current release. You select which files to migrate and which migration option to use.
■ Data folder - C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\AcadE {version}\AeData\ ■ Project folder - C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\AcadE {version}\AeData\Proj ■ Library folder - C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\ ■ User folder - C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\R17.0\{language}\Support\User\ ■ Catalog folder - C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\AcadE {version}\AeData\Catalogs ■ PLC f
File Type Default Folder File Migration Options Schematic lookup database Catalogs schematic_lookup.mdb Copy PLC database PLC ace_plc.mdb Copy or Merge Pick list database Catalogs wd_picklist.mdb Copy Dinrail Catalogs wddinrl.xls Copy Language conversion database Catalogs wd_lang1.mdb Copy Library symbols Library all folders Copy User circuits User *.dwg Copy Drawing templates Registry template path *.dwt Copy Table styles Program support tablestyle.
File Type Default Folder File Migration Options Terminal strip table setup User *.tsl Copy Conduit setup Program Support *.wwl Copy Plot paper size Program Support Generic paper size.txt Copy Title block mapping Project *.wdt Copy Title block line label mapping User *.wdl Copy Family tag mapping User wd_fam.dat Copy PLC mapping User Support wdmbblks.bsf Copy RSlogix code mapping Program Support *.wdf Copy Unity Pro symbol mapping User *.
; = TD1N=TD TD1NT=TD TD1NF=TD TD1FT=TD Wildcard mapping for catalog database tables is allowed on the source (left) database side of the mapping file. For example, TD*=TD. When the table or wildcard mapping is used and the source database table is component-specific, the merge utility places the table name into the WDBLKNAM field of the destination database. It provides the symbol name for the initial filter used in the catalog lookup window.
file is migrated, the Migration Utility automatically runs the PLC Database Migration utility using the following default settings. Input DI*,AI*,*INP*,*IN *,*IN,*IN/* Output DO*,AO*,D0*,A0*,*OUT* Combination *OTHER*,IO*,I0* The PLC Database Migration utility compares the values in the DESCRIPTION field of the PLC database to default values for input, output, or combination. If a match is not made, the database table name is compared.
If you also select the catalog database for migration, the data from the source catalog database is migrated to the destination catalog database based on the selected migration options, for example merge - overwrite. The suggested destination folder for the migrated catalog database is the path in the migrated wd.env. If you change the migration status of the wd.env file, you are prompted to update these dependent files to make sure that the location of each file matches the wd.env settings.
2 Select the release to migrate from. AutoCAD Electrical searches for files from the selected release. Existing files are selected for migration by default. 3 Click the category name in the Migration items list. The files within that category are shown in the Migration files section. 4 Click within the Copy/Merge Option cell, and select the Browse tool to change the migration option for a file. The Copy/Merge Options dialog box opens. Different file types have different migration options.
4 Click the category name in the Migration items list. 5 Click within the Source cell and type the file name or browse to the file you want to migrate. 6 Click within the Destination cell and type the file name or browse to the destination file. 7 Click within the Copy/Merge Option cell, and select the Browse tool to change the migration option for the file. The Copy/Merge Options dialog box opens. Different file types have different migration options. 8 Select the Copy/Merge option and select OK.
4 Select Save As to save the migration settings to a file. 5 Enter a file name and click Save. 6 Continue the migration or Cancel. Migrating from the saved settings file 1 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Migration Utility. 2 Select External File to migrate from the saved settings. 3 Select the saved .migr file and click Open. 4 Review the migration items. 5 Select OK. 6 Review the Migration Complete information. 7 Select Done.
Migrate from Select to migrate from a previous version of AutoCAD Electrical or to perform a custom migration. All installed AutoCAD Electrical versions, 2004 or newer, are options in the dialog box list. Click External file to browse to a previously saved migration settings file. Migration items Available migration items are listed in a tree structure. Select a file category check box if you want to migrate files from that category.
ging the Environment File, Symbol Menu, or Line Type. Red text indicates changed lines. Blue text indicates added lines. Merge/Copy Options The Migration Utility supports various file types for migration to the current release of AutoCAD Electrical. Different file types have different migration options. There are two file migration options: copy or merge. Copy If the Copy option is selected, the source file is copied to the file location for the current release.
DESCRIPTION field or table name, the CATEGORY value is entered for that module. ■ 1 - Input module ■ 2 - Output module ■ 3 - Combination module Input Enter text, comma delimited, used to match to the DESCRIPTION value. If there is a match, the module is assigned a CATEGORY value of 1 for input. Output Enter text, comma delimited, used to match to the DESCRIPTION value. If there is a match, the module is assigned a CATEGORY value of 2 for output.
Command entry: AEMIGRATION The Migration Review dialog box opens after selecting OK on the AutoCAD Electrical Migration Utility dialog box. The dialog box displays all the migration items and the options for each item. Files selected for migration Status: indicates the migration option, such as Merge/Overwrite or Copy/Overwrite. Source: name and path of the file containing the data to migrate. Destination: name and path of the file to receive the values from the source file.
Project Management 3 Overview of projects A project is a set of interrelated wiring diagram drawings. An ASCII text file, called the project file, lists the AutoCAD drawing file names that make up the wiring diagram set. You can have as many projects as you wish, but only one project can be active at a time. An AutoCAD Electrical project file: ■ Is an ASCII text file with any path and any name followed by the .WDP extension.
Project files default to the directory pointed to by your project subdirectory (given by the WD_PROJ setting in your environment file). It is not mandatory. When you create a project file, you can save it to any subdirectory. In some cases, you may want to store them in client-specific subdirectories to take advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to access client-specific catalog files and library symbols.
NOTE You can also create a project by right-clicking at the bottom of the tree inside the Project Manager and selecting New Project or by clicking the arrow on the Project Selection menu and selecting New Project. 3 In the Create New Project dialog box, enter the name for the new project. The .WDP extension is automatically added to the filename. 4 Select or create the directory where you want to save the project. 5 (Optional) Specify an existing project file (WDP) to use.
2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Add Drawings. 3 In the Select Files to Add dialog box, select the drawings to add to the current project. You can select multiple drawings using the Shift or Control keyboard keys. NOTE The order in which you select drawings determine how they are listed in the project drawing list. 4 Click Add. The drawings are added to end of the project drawing list.
■ Reset: Moves all selected drawings back to the project drawing list. ■ Un-select: Moves one or more drawings back to the project drawing list. ■ by Section/sub-section: Selects drawings by sections and subsections. 8 Click OK. 9 Enter the directory path where to save the new project. If the directory does not exist, it is created. 10 Select the project-related files to copy. (See the following list.) 11 Click OK. 12 Modify the new drawing file names if necessary. 13 Click OK.
■ Spreadsheet PLC I/O Utility settings (.wdi) ■ RSLogix import mapping (.wdf) ■ User-defined attributes (.wda) ■ Terminal audit filter (.wdn) Work with project drawings Use the Project Manager to access an existing project and modify its associated information. Group drawings within a project You can create groups of drawings within your project list by assigning sections and subsection codes to each drawing.
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Reorder Drawings. 3 Find and highlight the drawing you want to move in the list. 4 Click Move Up or Move Down until the drawing moves to the appropriate position in the list. 5 Click OK. Remove a drawing from the active project 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Remove.
Select from a list of predefined descriptions from the active project by clicking the arrow. 4 Click OK. TIP These descriptions can link to an attribute in the title block for automatic update. Preview a drawing You can preview a drawing from the Project Manager. 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. 2 In the Project Manager, select a drawing from the list. 3 In the Details pane, click Preview. An image of the highlighted drawing displays. Once selected, the preview remains on.
selected project the active project and open the selected drawing or click Back to return to the Recent Projects dialog box. 5 (Optional) Click Remove to remove a project from the project list. 6 Click OK. The selected project becomes the active project. NOTE If you know the drawing name but you are not sure what project the drawing is in, click Find in the Recent Projects dialog box. In the Find Drawing in Recent Projects dialog box, enter the name of the drawing (wildcards are accepted) and click Find.
Right-click menu You can right-click in empty space in the Project Manager to display the following options: New Project Creates a project. Once created, the new project automatically becomes the active project. Open Project Opens a different project from a file selection dialog box. In the Select Project File dialog box, navigate to the project to open and select it. New Drawing Creates a drawing file and adds it to the active project.
Buttons New Project Creates a project. Once created, the new project automatically becomes the active project. New Drawing Creates a drawing file and adds it to the active project. Refresh Refreshes the drawing list inside of the Project Manager. For Vault: Checks for changes in external file references and updates the Vault icons in the Project Manager. Files that have changed and are currently checked out to you are not updated.
Projects Displays all the open projects in a list. You can have as many projects open as you need, but only one project can be active at a time. The active project appears in bold text and is always found at the top of the list. Right-click the project name to display the following project editing options: Descriptions Edits the project descriptions. Displays unlimited lines describing the project. Descriptions can then be included in report headers and title blocks.
Settings Displays the settings for the project and information about the AutoCAD Electrical environment. Exception List Displays a list of drawing files that have different settings from the project definition file (.wdp). If all drawing files match the .wdp, the dialog box indicates that there are no exceptions. You can then use the Settings Compare tool to display the differences.
still check out the drawings available for editing. Check In Adds the project definition file to the vault and creates a version of the file. Use this option if you want to check in only the project definition file and none of its drawing file dependencies; otherwise use Check In All. NOTE If files used to support the project (such as .wdl and .wdt) share the same file name as the project, they appear in the Vault Check In dialog box. Check Out Reserves and locks the master project definition file.
Project Drawing List Displays the drawings associated with a project. You can select multiple drawings from the project list to open, close, remove, apply project defaults, or paste properties all at once. You cannot select multiple drawings from two or more projects. The active drawing appears in bold text in the list. By default, the selected drawing highlights in the project drawing list regardless if the Project Manager is active or not.
Drawing Properties Assigns, edits, and removes section and subsection coding for a drawing. Assigns drawing descriptions to the drawing files. Apply Project Defaults Applies project settings to new drawing files where the project default settings for the drawings were not applied at creation time. Copy Copies the drawing settings and options from one drawing to one or more drawings.
NOTE Two projects can reference the same drawing file. If both projects try to modify the same drawing with a project-wide tagging or cross-referencing function it can lead to conflicts. Details Switches between displaying drawing previews and drawing descriptions. The drawing details are updated when you highlight a drawing file and remain visible until a new drawing file is selected. Use the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard to switch drawings.
File is in the vault and available to be checked out, but the local copy is out of date. Get the latest version from the vault. File is checked out to you and the local version is the same as in the vault. Also referred to as the Latest Version. File is checked out to you and the local copy is newer than the latest version in the vault. This status typically means that you changed the file since it was checked out but have not checked it back in.
Click the New Project button or select New Project from the Project Selection menu. NOTE You can also create a project by right-clicking at the bottom of the tree inside the Project Manager, and selecting New Project. Name Specifies the name for the new project. Enter a name to define any of the project properties. NOTE The .wdp extension is not required in the edit box. Location Specifies the location for a project definition file and folder definition.
Copy project: step 1 - select existing project to copy Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Copy. Toolbar: Project Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Copy Project Command entry: AECOPYPROJECT NOTE If the active drawing is one of them to copy to a new project, cancel the dialog box, open a new drawing, and then restart the Copy Project command. Copy Active Project Copies the active project. Browse Selects another project to copy.
to edit it. When you finish working on the project, check the project back into the vault. TIP Other people can view updates you made to a project while you continue modifying the project. Select the Keep Checked Out option on the Check In dialog box. It checks in the updates you made to the project and keeps the project checked out to you. NOTE You must have all references of a project file downloaded to your working folder to edit the project file. ■ View the status of files in a design.
virtual-to-physical mapping that is maintained for as long as the user works with the vault. The working folder can be changed, but the mapping itself cannot be removed. ■ When you check out a project, that project is copied from the virtual location in the vault to the physical location in the working folder. When you are ready to check the project back in, the mapping tells the vault where to check the files in from.
to display options to move, size, close, dock, hide, or set the transparency for the Project Manager. NOTE You cannot have two projects open in the Project Manager with the same project name. Right-click menu You can right-click in empty space in the Project Manager to display the following options: New Project Creates a project. Once created, the new project automatically becomes the active project. Open Project Opens a different project from a file selection dialog box.
next to the Open button and select one of the following options: Open (Check Out), Open (Check Out All), or Open Read-only. Buttons New Project Creates a project. Once created, the new project automatically becomes the active project. New Drawing Creates a drawing file and adds it to the active project. Refresh Refreshes the drawing list inside of the Project Manager. For Vault: Checks for changes in external file references and updates the Vault icons in the Project Manager.
Publish/Plot Batch plots one or more drawings in the active project. Projects Displays all the open projects in a list. You can have as many projects open as you need, but only one project can be active at a time. The active project appears in bold text and is always found at the top of the list. Right-click the project name to display the following project editing options: Descriptions Edits the project descriptions. Displays unlimited lines describing the project.
Task List Performs pending updates on any drawing files inside of the active project that have been modified. Publish Launches dialog boxes to plot the project, publish to the Web, publish to DWF, or create a zip file of the project. Settings Displays the settings for the project and information about the AutoCAD Electrical environment. Exception List Displays a list of drawing files that have different settings from the project definition file (.wdp). If all drawing files match the .
Check Out All Reserves and locks the project definition file along with the associated drawing files listed in the Project Manager. If the project definition file is unavailable for checkout, you can still check out the drawings available for editing. Check In Adds the project definition file to the vault and creates a version of the file. Use this option if you want to check in only the project definition file and none of its drawing file dependencies; otherwise use Check In All.
working folder. The status indicator displaying a red background indicates older files. Project Drawing List Displays the drawings associated with a project. You can select multiple drawings from the project list to open, close, remove, apply project defaults, or paste properties all at once. You cannot select multiple drawings from two or more projects. The active drawing appears in bold text in the list.
Rename Renames the selected drawing directly in the drawing list. Drawing Properties Assigns, edits, and removes section and subsection coding for a drawing. Assigns drawing descriptions to the drawing files. Apply Project Defaults Applies project settings to new drawing files where the project default settings for the drawings were not applied at creation time. Copy Copies the drawing settings and options from one drawing to one or more drawings.
NOTE Two projects can reference the same drawing file. If both projects try to modify the same drawing with a project-wide tagging or cross-referencing function it can lead to conflicts. Details Switches between displaying drawing previews and drawing descriptions. The drawing details are updated when you highlight a drawing file and remain visible until a new drawing file is selected. Use the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard to switch drawings.
File is in the vault and available to be checked out, but the local copy is out of date. Get the latest version from the vault. File is checked out to you and the local version is the same as in the vault. Also referred to as the Latest Version. File is checked out to you and the local copy is newer than the latest version in the vault. This status typically means that you changed the file since it was checked out but have not checked it back in.
NOTE You can also create a drawing by right-clicking at the bottom of the tree inside the Project Manager and selecting New Drawing or by right-clicking on the active project name and selecting New Drawing. 3 In the Create New Drawing dialog box, enter the name for the new drawing. The .dwg extension is automatically added to the file name. 4 Specify the template drawing to use for the creation of the drawing file. If left blank, the default ACAD.DWT file is used.
On the Project Manager, click the New Drawing button. NOTE You can also create a drawing by right-clicking at the bottom of the tree inside the Project Manager and selecting New Drawing or by right-clicking on the active project name and selecting New Drawing. Drawing File Name Specifies the file name for the new drawing. Enter a file name to define any of the drawing properties or to create a drawing. NOTE The .dwg extension is not required in the edit box.
updates and custom drawing properties. Select from a list of predefined descriptions from the active project by clicking the arrow. NOTE Drawing descriptions are disabled when you are modifying the properties of a drawing that is not in a project or if the project file is unavailable for edit. IEC-Style Designators Specifies IEC default values for the drawing, such as Project (%P), Installation (%I), and Location (%L) fields.
Drawing Specifies the drawing number value for the drawing settings. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %D. Section Specifies the section value for the drawing file saved in the project definition file (.wdp). This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %A. Sub-Section Specifies the subsection value for the drawing file saved in the project definition file (.wdp). This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %B.
■ Location Code (%L) ■ Section ■ Sub Section ■ Sheet Number (%S) ■ Drawing Number (%D) ■ Drawing Description 1-3 ■ File Name 4 Select the display option from the Display Options list and click the >> button or add all of the options by clicking the All >> button. The display option you selected moves to the Current Display Order list. To rearrange this list, select an option and click Move Up or Move Down. To remove an option from the list, select the option and click the << button.
Configures the display options. There are ten values that can be associated with a drawing listed. You can display the information based on your requirements. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT On the Project Manager, click the Drawing List Display Configuration tool. Display Options Lists the values that you can associate to a drawing.
Move Up Moves the selected display option up one spot in the Current Display Order list. Move Down Moves the selected display option down one spot in the Current Display Order list. Overview of project-related files There are some optional project-related files that AutoCAD Electrical supports.
When you click Defaults on the Insert/Edit Component or Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box the contents of the ASCII text file display in a dialog box where you can select a line of text to use as the description text. The selected text, up to a “;” comment delimiter if any, then displays in the description edit box on the Insert/Edit dialog box. If the selected text has one or more “|” characters, it is interpreted as having line breaks so the 2nd and 3rd description lines fill in as well.
A file with the same path and name as the project but with a “_FOOTPRINT_LOOKUP.MDB” suffix and extension is searched for first. If the file is not found, then the default FOOTPRINT_LOOKUP.MDB file is searched for in the same directory as the project file and then in the subdirectory search sequence "B" below. Schematic lookup Database for schematic components inserted from panel footprints. A file with the same path and name as the project but with a “_SCHEMATIC_LOOKUP.
ectory as the project file and then in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below. Mount codes Lists the default mount codes for selections found in the Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog boxes (select Include external list from the location's Project list subdialog box). A file with the same path and name as the project with a .mnt extension is searched for first. If the file is not found, then the DEFAULT.
If .wdn is not found, AutoCAD Electrical looks for the DEFAULT.WDN file in the project folder: Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Proj\ Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Proj The default .wdn file contains the terminal number filers GND, PE, and E. They are ignored when checking for duplication and are not listed in the Electrical Audit report.
Wire color and gauge labels Maps color and gauge wire descriptions based on wire layers. A file with the same path and name as the project but with a .wdw extension is searched for first. If the file is not found, then the DEFAULT.WDW file is searched for in the same directory as the project file. If the file is not found, then the file is searched for in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below. Subdirectory search sequence "A" 1 Full path (if full path name given) 2 User subdirectory Windows XP: C:\Do
7 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\) 8 All paths defined under AutoCAD Options ➤ Files ➤ Support Files Search Path Subdirectory search sequence "B" 1 Full path (if full path name given) 2 User subdirectory Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\User\ Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{countr
Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\ 7 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Support\) 8 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\) 9 All paths defined under AutoCAD Options ➤ Files ➤ Support Files Search Path Subdirectory search sequence "C" 1 Full path (if full path name given) 2 User subdirectory Windows XP: C:\Documents and Setting
Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\ 6 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Support\) 7 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\) 8 All paths defined under AutoCAD Options ➤ Files ➤ Support Files Search Path NOTE If the environment file (wd.
ON - the settings of the drawing are set to match the "?[n]" settings listed in the .wdp file of the current project. For example, you have an active project that is set up for a one-of-a-kind wire tagging format that is different from all your other projects. It is also different from the default carried on the WD_M.dwg block insert of the symbol library. When you start a new drawing for the project, check this switch on.
table not found, 0 or entry omitted = use component-specific only. LINEx entries for reports Marked with "+[9]" followed by comma-delimited list. Gives a list of project properties ➤ description entries that are included as a header for generated reports. Combined Installation/Location/Tag Marked with "+[10]" followed by 0= Combined Installation/Location component tag mode is “off”, 1= mode is “on”, 3= mode is “on” and include Installation/Location as a tag prefix.
is present on the network (so that the same wire number does not display twice on the single wire network), 0= normal mode (do not hide any wire number text). Wire number offset Marked with "+[19]" followed by wire number offset value, 0 or blank or missing= normal centering of wire numbers on the wire segment, value= offset from left or upper end of wire segment. Alternate WD.ENV Marked with "+[20]" followed by the file name. If this alternative .
7 for the various horizontal/vertical sort orders listed in the dialog box. Real-time error checking Marked with "+[32]" followed by 0= real-time error checking mode is “off”, 1= mode is “on.” Grid column headers Marked with "+[33]" to indicate a string of column names used in grid column headers in the Wire Type commands. Suppress dash Marked with "+[34]" to suppress the dash (-) if it is the first character of a tag when the Combined installation/location component tag mode is “on.
to three lines of description are defined, "===" precedes each description listed in order. If a drawing is marked "Ref only", a "====REF" entry precedes it . The drawing name is given last. The drawing name contains the path relative to the location of the WDP file of the project. NOTE The following options are no longer valid since they are now drawing settings: Cross-reference fill format (+[7]), Cross-reference text between (+[8]) and Cross-reference order (+[28]).
3 In the AutoCAD Electrical Project Zip dialog box, enter the zip name of the file to create or update. 4 Indicate whether to include the project database. 5 Click OK. This utility can also be accessed from within some AutoCAD Electrical routines that access and modify multiple drawings. Project zip Zips the drawing list in the current project with your zipping program. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Zip.
Deleting a project Deletes a project and provides the option to also delete the drawing files in the project. 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Delete. 2 Find and select the .wdp project definition file. 3 Click Open. 4 Select from the available options: ■ Delete “wdp” project list file - deletes the selected .wdp file. ■ Delete project’s AutoCAD drawing files - deletes all files listed in the project definition file unless the List option is used.
Set up title block mapping files for clients Use the AutoCAD Electrical Title block setup tool to create a default.wdt file for the title block of each client. Store this default.wdt in the base subdirectory of the client. For example: n:\campbell.nap\default.wdt One way to do it: 1 Use AutoCAD Electrical to create a project in the base subdirectory of the client (for example: n:\campbell.nap\dummy.wdp).
Try updating the Title Block from the Project Manager. Notice all of the updated labels. Specify client-specific library symbols If the client has special symbols or text size settings that are different from the default libraries provided with the AutoCAD Electrical product, create and maintain a client-specific symbol library subdirectory with smart AutoCAD Electrical symbols that have been adjusted to meet that standards of the client.
With the previous setup, anytime you work on a Campbell project (project file ".wdp" stored in the n:\campbell.nap directory), AutoCAD Electrical automatically uses the client-specific title block mapping file (n:\campbell.nap\default.wdt) and the client-specific dialog box label file (n:\campbell.nap\wdtitle.wdl). Drawing List Report Drawing List Report Reports the settings of each drawing in the project, and provides the means to edit the report and update the drawing properties with the edited values.
Menu: Projects ➤ IEC Tag Mode - Update Command entry: AEUPDATEIECTAG If a change to the IEC component tag mode format is detected, use this tool to freshen the tag format. It makes sure that component tags are displayed per the change. Freshen tags for Specifies whether to freshen the entire project, the active drawing only, or selected components in the active drawing. Freshen parent/child cross-reference annotation Reruns the cross-reference update.
The tasks that still need to be performed on the selected drawings are listed in the upper portion of the dialog box. The login name of the user creating the task, file name, installation and location codes, component tag, type, status, attribute, old value and new value are all displayed. The 'x' indicates that the source of the change no longer matches the task list. Sort Sorts the list of tasks to be performed. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list.
Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Update from Project Scratch Database Command entry: AEIMPORTDB Select the database table to update then select the drawings to process. Any changes are written back to the appropriate objects. Alternately, save the scratch database file with a new name, edit, and then reference this file when the command starts.
Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Rebuild/Freshen Project Database Command entry: AEREBUILDDB ■ List: Lists the drawings that appear to be out-of-date with the wire connection table of the project. You can trigger an update when the dialog box is open or you can defter to auto-update when a wire report is run. ■ Include wire connection processing: Indicates to process wire connections when updating the database file or the wire connection table.
If some of the drawings selected for processing are unavailable (such as in a read-only state) this dialog box appears. The file name, status, and location of the drawing is listed in the dialog box for review. Retry Now Tries to gain full write access to the entire list of drawing files previously selected. If you gain full access, the files are locked out by you and other users cannot modify until the project-wide command finishes.
198
Drawing and Project Properties 4 Overview of project and drawing properties Use the Project Properties dialog box to define settings when creating a project. Then have the settings used for new drawings or the settings added to the project. In the Project Properties dialog box, icons indicate whether the settings apply to project settings or drawing defaults. Settings that apply to project settings and are saved inside the project definition file (.wdp).
Use the Drawing Properties dialog box to define settings for a new or selected drawing. These settings override the project properties set in the Project Properties dialog box. If the drawing is part of a project, the project name displays in the dialog box. Otherwise, text displays indicating that the drawing is not part of a project, and drawing-related edit fields saved in the .wdp file are disabled.
Drawing settings include: ■ Drawing type and descriptions ■ IEC default values for the Project (%P), Installation (%I), and Location (%L) fields ■ Sheet values for the sheet and drawing in addition to section or subsection codes Components Use this tab to: ■ Specify the way new component tags are created. ■ Switch between sequential or line reference based tags. ■ Set component tag options such as using combined Installation/Location tags or suppressing the Installation/Location tag on reports.
■ Set component cross-reference display: text, graphical, or table. You can also change the display format setup from this dialog box. Styles Use this tab to: ■ Change default styles for arrows, plcs, fan-in/out markers, and wiring. ■ Add or remove layers from the layer list. Drawing Format Use this tab to: ■ Set the default orientation, spacing, and width values for any new ladders inserted on the drawing. ■ Specify the format referencing style: X-Y Grid, X Zones, or Reference Numbers.
3 In the Project Properties dialog box, select the tab to modify properties for. 4 Click OK. Set project descriptions You can specify descriptions for use in reports and title block updates. AutoCAD Electrical supports an unlimited number of description lines. 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Descriptions. NOTE You can also set project descriptions when you create a project.
See also: ■ Customize LINEx Labels on page 1224 ■ Map AutoLISP values to the title block on page 1226 Project properties: project settings tab Modify your project default settings for libraries, catalog lookup, and error checking. All information defined in this tab is saved to the project definition file as a project default. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.
NOTE You can only specify one search path for the icon menu. Add Adds a new entry into the libraries tree structure. Browse Browses for a folder to select a symbol library or icon menu from. Remove Removes the selected path from the libraries tree structure. Move Up Moves the selected path up one spot in the libraries tree structure. Move Down Moves the selected path down one spot in the libraries tree structure. Default Brings the default paths from the environment file (WD.
the log file named "_error.log"and is saved in the User subdirectory. If a log file exists, the new content is added to the same file. A blank line separates one error record from another. Tag/Wire Number Sort Order Sets the default wire numbering and component tag sort order for the project. Electrical Code Standard Sets the Electrical code standard used by Circuit Builder. A three character suffix code is saved to the.wdp project file.
Specifies to define a secondary lookup file for the project. Catalog lookup files provided with AutoCAD Electrical include: default_cat.mdb, footprint_lookup.mdb, schematic_lookup.mdb, wd_lang1.mdb, and wd_picklist.mdb. Defines a secondary catalog lookup file that functions as such: Optional: Define a secondary catalog lookup file for this project ■ For catalog part number selection, switches to a secondary catalog lookup file.
NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides a predefined format for you to use or you can enter your own format using replaceable parameters on page 236. NOTE The %N parameter is mandatory in any component tag format you define. Search for PLC I/O address on insert Searches for a connected PLC I/O module's I/O point. If found, the I/O address value is substituted for the "%N" part of the default component tag. NOTE This setting is saved in the MISC_FLAGS attribute on the WD_M block of the drawing.
NOTE The component tag suffix is automatically added to the end of the tag. You can force AutoCAD Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within the tag format. Use the Suffix position parameter, %X, in the component tag format (for example, %N%X - %F). Displays the suffix list. The individual items in the suffix list are given in the row of edit boxes across the top of the dialog box.
ample, tag "K101" becomes "-K101" but "+LOC1K101" remains unchanged._ NOTE This suppression takes place automatically in reports; and takes place graphically only when a component is inserted, edited, or retagged. Format Installation/Location into tag Specifies to exclude the Installation and Location code values as part of the tag when displaying. For example, if it is not on, a tag might show up as K16 in the Surf dialog box, but if selected the tag might show up +AAA-K16 (where AAA is the location).
Item Numbering Setup Define the item numbering settings for the project. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Properties. Select the Components tab and click Item Numbering. Item Numbering Mode Sets item numbering to either project-wide or perdrawing.
In the Project Manager, right-click on the project name and select Properties. Select the Wire Numbers tab. Wire Number Format Wire number tags can be sequential or reference-based. Format Specifies the way new wire number tags are created. The wire number tag format must include the %N parameter that is the base sequential or reference-based value from the selection described.
If you set DEMO1 to 100 and DEMO2 to 200, the wire numbers on DEMO1 start at 100 and wire numbers on DEMO2 start at 200. If DEMO1 has more than 100 wire numbers it starts using wire number 200 and above. DEMO2 would begin its wire numbers where DEMO1 left off (making sure that duplicate wire numbers are not assigned). Increment The default is "1". Setting it to "2" with a starting sequential of "1" would yield wire numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, and so on. Line Reference Sets the wire number tag suffix.
Hidden on Wire Network with Terminal Displaying Wire Number Specifies to hide the wire number automatically for a wire network that has a wire number-type terminal. On per Wire Basis Specifies to assign a wire number for each wire rather than the default one wire number per wire network. Exclude If using sequential wire numbers, specifies the wire number ranges to exclude. (applied to the %N part of the wire number tag format) Syntax is - to show range (for example 1000-1499).
if the leader itself overlays another object). Select the method for inserting new wire numbers as leaders: As Required, Always, or Never. NOTE This change does not affect wire numbers that are already present on the drawing. Wire Type Displays the Rename User Columns dialog box used for renaming User1 to User20 header columns in the Set Wire Type, Create/Edit Wire Type, and Change/Convert Wire Type dialog boxes.
Cross-reference Options Real-time signal and contact cross-referencing between drawings Automatically updates relay and wire source and destination symbols cross-referencing across multiple drawings. NOTE If this option is not selected, you are prompted to authorize the update. The target drawing is automatically opened and updated. You then return to the active drawing. Any unauthorized update is queued up in a Project Task List.
Modify your project default settings for various component styles. All information defined in this tab is saved to the project definition file as project defaults and settings. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager, right-click on the project name and select Properties. Select the Styles tab. Arrow Style Specifies the default wire signal arrow style.
Wire Cross Specifies the default mode of operation when wires cross each other: insert gap with no loop, insert gap and loop, or solid (no gap). Wire Tee Specifies the default wire tee marker: none, dot, angle1, or angle2. Project properties: drawing format tab Allows you to modify your project default settings for drawings. All information defined in this tab is saved to the project definition file as a project default. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.
Format Referencing Specifies the default referencing system. There are three modes: All referencing is tied to an X-Y grid system of numbers and letters along the left-hand side and top of the drawing. Set the vertical and horizontal index numbers and letters of your drawing, spacing, and origin in the X-Y grid setup dialog box. X-Y Grid TIP Use negative spacing values for Horizontal or Vertical to change the origin of the X-Y grid system to be other than the upper left-hand corner of the drawing.
Layers Defines and manages wire and component layers. NOTE No matter which layer is current, wires always go to a wire layer and components to component layers. Drawing properties: drawing settings tab Sets default values for a drawing. Any drawing Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.
Drawing File Specifies the project that the drawing is found in. Project NOTE If the drawing is not in any of the currently open projects, "Drawing not in open project" displays instead of the project name. If the drawing is in an open project but it cannot be edited, "Project not available for edit" displays instead of the project name. This alert displays when a project file is read only, locked by someone else, not checked out in Vault, or the folder where the project is located is read only.
Drawing Displays a list of Installation or Location codes from the active drawing. Project Displays a list of previously defined Installation or Location codes in the active project or from the Default.INST or Default.LOC file. NOTE Avoid using a mixture of drawings in the project when using the Combine Installation/Location Tag mode. For example, do not include some drawings with drawing-wide Installation or Location values and some without drawing-wide values.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. Select the Components tab. Active drawing Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: AEPROPERTIES Select the Components tab. Tag Format Specifies the way new component tags are created.
Search for PLC I/O address on insert Searches for a connected PLC I/O module's I/O point. If found, the I/O address value is substituted for the "%N" part of the default component tag. NOTE This setting is saved in the MISC_FLAGS attribute on the WD_M block of the drawing. Sequential Enter the beginning sequential number for the drawing. Sequential tags can continue uninterrupted from one drawing to the next if you assign the same beginning sequential number to every drawing in your project.
ence or in the same zone (to keep tags unique). The suffix is added to the end of the component tag. To add it to the inside of the tag, use "%X" in the Tag Format. Example: %N-%F or %N-%F%X = suffix at the end (such as 101-CRA) %N%X-%F = add to number, before family code (such as 101A-CR) Select from the default lists or manually enter your own suffix list in the row of edit boxes. Drawing properties: wire numbers tab Apply drawing-specific wire number settings.
Wire Number Format Wire number tags can be sequential or reference-based. Format Specifies the way new wire number tags are created. The wire number tag format must include the %N parameter that is the base sequential or reference-based value per the selection above. If your format includes the sheet number %S parameter or the drawing number %D parameter, enter the values in the edit boxes in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box.
off (making sure that duplicate wire numbers are not assigned). Increment The default is "1." Setting it to "2" with a starting sequential of "1" would yield wire numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, and so on. Line Reference Sets the wire number tag suffix. This list is used to create unique reference-based wire number tags for multiple wire networks beginning at the same reference location (such as wire network beginning at a location per line reference number, X-Y grid reference, or X-Zone reference).
(This option is unavailable for in-line wire numbers.) AutoCAD Electrical places wire numbers on leaders when it determines that the wire number text bumps into something. It does not check if the leader itself overlays another object. Select the method for inserting new wire numbers as leaders: As Required, Always, or Never. Leaders NOTE This change does not affect wire numbers that are already present on the drawing.
Select the Cross-References tab. Cross-reference Format Defines the cross-reference annotation format. One replaceable parameter, %N, must always be part of the cross-reference format string. A typical format string might be just the %N parameter. Use Same Drawing for on-drawing references and Between Drawings for off-drawing references. You can use the same format for both.
Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. Select the Styles tab. Active drawing Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: AEPROPERTIES Select the Styles tab. Arrow Style Specifies the default wire signal arrow style. Select from the four predefined styles or a user-defined style.
Wire Cross Specifies the default mode of operation when wires cross each other: insert gap with no loop, insert gap, and loop, or solid (no gap). Wire Tee Specifies the default wire tee marker: none, dot, angle1, or angle2. Drawing properties: drawing format tab Apply a drawing-specific format settings that are maintained inside the WD_M block of the drawing. Any drawing Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.
Spacing Specifies the spacing between each ladder rung. Default: insert new ladders without references Sets the default for the Insert Ladder command. New ladders you insert do not have line reference numbering, by default. Width Specifies the width of the ladder. Multi-wire Spacing Specifies the spacing between each wire in multi-wire phases. Format Referencing Specifies the default referencing system.
affect components and wire numbers that are already present on the drawing. Select inch if your drawing is to use library symbols from the JIC1/JIC125 libraries or mm full size for the metric scaled symbol libraries. It adjusts the wire connection trap distance that determines whether closely spaced wire ends connector not. inch/inch scaled to mm/mm full size Tag/Wire Number Order Sets the default wire numbering sort order for the active drawing.
NOTE You can also access this dialog box from the Project Properties or Drawing Properties dialog boxes. Some options are not available when you access the dialog box through the properties dialog boxes. Specifies the origin for the X Zone grid. Click pick to select the origin on the drawing or enter X and Y values. Origin NOTE The Pick button is not available when accessed through the properties dialog box. Spacing Specifies the spacing between the grid columns. Enter the horizontal value.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Ladder drop-down ➤ XY Grid Setup. Command entry: Ladders Command entry: AEXYGRID Your drawing must be configured for X-Y Grids. Set the Format Referencing in the Drawing Properties: Drawing Format dialog box to X-Y Grid. NOTE You can also access this dialog box from the Project Properties or Drawing Properties dialog boxes. Some options are not available when you access the dialog box through the properties dialog boxes.
Horizontal. You might get a %N value of "B2"; if it is set to Vertical you might get a %N value of "2B." Grid labels (only available when accessed from the ribbon, toolbar, or menu) Specifies the labels for the grid columns. Enter the horizontal and vertical values. You can enter the first value only or a complete list. If you enter a list, separate the values with commas - such as "A, B, C, D.
%P IEC-style project code (default for drawing) %I IEC-style installation code (default for drawing) %L IEC-style location code (default for drawing) %A Project drawing list's SEC value for active drawing %B Project drawing list's SUB-SEC value for active drawing The %L and %I values used for cross-referencing are the Drawing Default Location and Installation values from the corresponding Parent or Child drawing and not the Location and Installation values of the component itself.
W-%S%N = W-350 For defining wire annotation and graphical terminal strips %P Terminal pin text %Q Terminal pin TERMDESC text %I IEC-style installation code %L IEC-style location code %M Mount assignment (on panel footprint equivalent) %U Group assignment (on panel footprint equivalent) %W Wire number %C Cable tag + conductor/core color combination (format is "tag-color") %E Cable tag %J Cable conductor/core color %V Cable tag substituted for wire number if cable tag is non-blank.
%4 Equivalent of "%L%1" (IEC comp tag) %5 Equivalent of "%L%1:%P" (tag:term) %6 Equivalent of "%L%1:%P:%D" (tag:term:termdesc) %7 Equivalent of "%I%I%1" (INST prefix+IEC comp tag) %8 Equivalent of "%I%L%1:%P" (tag:term) %9 Equivalent of "%I%L%1:%P:%D" (tag:term:termdesc) The part after the colon(:) is suppressed if the value is blank in %2 - %9 parameters (for example, %2=comp tag:term). The ":term" part is suppressed if blank.
4 Click OK. NOTE Changing these settings does not automatically change components and wiring already present in your drawing. Compare drawing and project settings Displays differences between project defaults and drawing default properties and allows an update. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties drop-down ➤ Settings Compare.
Show Differences Displays settings that are different between the WD_M block and the .wdp file. Select All Selects all of the settings in the list so you can quickly change all settings to match either the project or the drawing. Match Project Changes the selected drawing setting to make it match the project. Select the settings from the list, and then click the button. Match Drawing Changes the selected project default setting to make it match the drawing.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Settings List Utility. Menu: Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Settings List Utility Command entry: AEDWGCFG Click Edit Mode. If you edit the information in the Configuration Report, you have an option to update the project and drawings with the new information. Re-order the lines with the Move Up, Move Down, Move to Top, and Move to Bottom buttons. If you re-order the lines, the order of the drawing list in the project file (.WDP) can be updated to match.
SHDWGNAM If you change any of the SHDWGNAM data, the Dwg no. (%D) field for that drawing can be updated to match. IEC_P If you change any of the IEC_P data, the IEC Project (%P) field for that drawing can be updated to match. IEC_I If you change any of the IEC_I data, the IEC Installation (%I) field for that drawing can be updated to match. IEC_L If you change any of the IEC_L data, the IEC Location (%L) field for that drawing can be updated to match.
Sub-Section (in .WDP) Update the Sub-Section data held in the project file (.WDP). Sheet (%S) (on drawing) Update the Sheet (%S) data on each drawing. Drawing (%D) (on drawing) Update the Dwg no. (%D) data on each drawing. IEC Project (%P) (on drawing) Update the IEC Project (%P) data on each drawing. IEC Installation (%I) (on drawing) Update the IEC Installation (%I) data on each drawing. IEC Location (%L) (on drawing) Update the IEC Location (%L) data on each drawing. Description (in .
6 Save the drawing as an AutoCAD Drawing Template file with a .DWT extension. This template appears in the list of saved templates the next time you open a new AutoCAD Electrical drawing. See also: ■ Title block on page 1208 ■ Title Block tutorial on page 1707 Drawing properties: drawing settings tab Sets default values for a drawing. Any drawing Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.
Sets the values you enter for drawing description, project, installation, location, sheet, and drawing code. Sets the format for component tags, wire numbers, cross-references, PLC modules, signal arrows, ladders, and layers. Overrides the project properties set in the project Properties dialog box. Drawing File Specifies the project that the drawing is found in. Project NOTE If the drawing is not in any of the currently open projects, "Drawing not in open project" displays instead of the project name.
Installation Code Specifies the installation code for the WD_M block definition. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %I. Location Code Specifies the location code for the WD_M block definition. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %L. Drawing Displays a list of Installation or Location codes from the active drawing. Project Displays a list of previously defined Installation or Location codes in the active project or from the Default.INST or Default.LOC file.
Updating the WD_M Block Overview of the WD_M block A special invisible block must be present on the drawing. The WD_M.dwg is found in the default symbol library.
Ladder defaults RUNGHORV ladder orientation: "H" = horizontal rungs (vertical ladders); "V" = vertical rungs (horizontal ladders) REFNUMS reference numbering system: ladder line reference-based or X-Y grid reference-based ■ 1 = line reference numbers ■ 2 = numbers with ruling ■ 3 = user-defined line reference block ■ 4 = X-Y grid reference mode ■ 5 = X-Zone reference mode RUNGDIST default rung spacing DLADW default ladder width RUNGINC default rung-to-rung line reference increment (default
WIRE-START starting sequential number of the drawing - for sequential tagging only (that is, "100") WIRE-RSUF wire tag suffix list - for reference-based tagging only (that is, "A,B,C") WIREFMT wire tag format specifier (default=%N) WINC wire number increment WLEADERS wire leaders: 0 = only as required, 1 = always insert wire leaders, 2 = never insert leaders GAP_STYLE wire gap style: 0 = wire gap, 1 = use loops across gaps, 2 = solid crossing (no gap) SORTMODE retag and wire numbering sort mode
TERM_LAY component terminal pin numbers layer XREF_LAY cross-reference layer of the parent component CXREF_LAY cross-reference layer of the child component LOC_LAY component location code layer POS_LAY component position code layer MISC_LAY miscellaneous layer COMP_LAY layer for schematic component graphics LINK_LAY dashed link lines layer LOCBOX_LAY location box layer WIRELAYS valid wire layer names where "" = all valid (comma-delimited) WIRENO_LAY valid wire number WIRECOPY_LAY extr
XREF_STYLE cross-reference style: 0 = text, 1 = graphical, 2 = table XREF_FLAGS 1's bit = include unused contacts, 2's bit (if table)= include parent coil XREF_UNUSEDSTYLE 0 = separate reference, 1 = contact count totals XREF_FILLWITH cross-reference fill-with text XREF_SORT 0 = sort by line reference, 1 = sort by pin list XREF_TXTBTWN cross-reference text between references (text style cross-referencing) XREF_GRAPHIC 0 = contact mapping (text), 1 = graphic XREF_GRAPHICSTYLE 0 = JIC, 1 = IEC
HOIRZ_FIRST X-Y referencing format: 0 = V-H, 1 = H-V XY_DELIM X-Y delimiter character Styles PLC_STYLE PLC module style code (default = 1) ARROW_STYLE default signal arrow style number Miscellaneous WNUM_GAP list of 3 in line wire number/label gap settings (see WNUM_FLAGS bit 1 for toggle mode); value saved to GBL_wd_inline_gapas a list.
2 Save the drawing. 3 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Update Symbol Library WD_M Block. 4 Select the WD_M - schematic settings to modify and click OK. The settings and layer names are collected from the drawing and appropriate adjustments are made to the WD_M block. 5 Save the modified WD_M drawing. NOTE Update the version of your template drawing of the inserted WD_M block if a template drawing exists for your project. 6 Open your template file.
Update to New WD_M Block, No Changes Replaces the schematic wd_m.dwg block in the current drawing with a newer copy, but keeps existing configuration values and layer names. Update to New WD_PNLM Block, Values, Layers Replaces the panel wd_pnlm.dwg block in the current drawing with a newer copy, and converts to the newer configuration values and layers. Update to New WD_PNLM Block, No Changes Replaces the panel wd_pnlm.
The WD_M.dwg block is located in the default symbol library. This block carries about 50 attributes that define settings, layer names, and other default settings that are referenced by AutoCAD Electrical commands. NOTE If the drawing includes panel layout symbols, the block WD_PNLM.dwg is also needed. The WD_M and WD_PNLM blocks can be present on the same drawing. To insert a WD_M or WD_PNLM block ■ If the WD_M block is not present in a new or existing drawing, click OK to insert the block at location 0,0.
When AutoCAD Electrical inserts a footprint, it is modified on the fly to match the layering scheme set up in this dialog box. 4 Click OK. Rename panel layers The Rename Panel Layers tool makes it easy to rename layers one by one, or multiple layers at once by using the Find/Replace method.
Electrical to insert something onto that layer, AutoCAD Electrical creates that layer on the fly. 5 Click OK. 6 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click OK. NOTE You can also change layer properties using the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click on the drawing name and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties (or to change the project default settings, right-click on the project name and select Properties. The settings are applied to new drawings).
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: AEPROPERTIES In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Drawing Format tab. In the Layers section, click Define. NOTE You can also change layer properties using the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.
Description Layer name for parent functional description text (for example, "MASTER RELAY") Description (Child) Layer name for child contact functional description text (a copy of the description of the parent) Cross-reference Layer name for parent cross-reference text Cross-reference (Child) Layer name for child cross-reference text Pin Numbers Layer name for terminal pin number text Installation/Location Layer name for optional location and installation code text Positions Layer name for swit
Wire Copies Layer name for extra wire number copies Fixed Numbers Layer name for fixed wire numbers that do not change when other wires are renumbered Terminal/Signal Layer name for wire number copies that are part of a terminal or signal arrow symbol If your current layer is BORDER, when you use the AutoCAD Electrical icon menu to insert a 2-position selector switch.
Menu: Projects ➤ Rename Schematic Layers Command entry: AERENAMELAYER The Layer Rename and Panel Layer Rename utilities rename layers one by one, or multiple layers at once by using the Find/Replace method. Updates the AutoCAD Electrical layer assignment information carried on the WD_M and WD_PNLM blocks in the drawing.
Non-text Graphic Layers When a panel component is inserted, the block is inserted on the current layer if it is one of those listed in the "Non-text Graphics" layer list (wild-cards allowed). If the current layer is not in this list, the block is inserted on the first layer in the list. Attributes are moved to the layer defined for its type. Nameplate Layers Lists existing nameplate layers for the graphics, tags, and descriptions.
Use wire layers The Set Wire Type tool is used for setting a wire type for new wires only. The wire layer name and the associated wire properties (such as wire color, size, and whether the wire layer is processed for wire numbers) are saved in the drawing file. The following rules determine the wire layer for a new wire: ■ When a wire is created from an existing wire, the new wire takes on the same layer as the existing wire. It ignores the current layer and the current wire type.
■ When the new wire is started in empty space but ends at an existing wire, the new wire takes on the wire layer of the ending wire. The current layer and current wire type are ignored. ■ When a new wire is started at an existing wire and ends at another existing wire, the new wire takes on the layer of the beginning wire. ■ If there are no wire layers in the drawing, the new wire is drawn in the WIRES layer.
■ Define how the import function behaves if a wire type exists on the active drawing. 6 Click Color, Linetype, or Lineweight to assign values for the new layer. NOTE If you want the new wire layer to be the default, click Mark Selected as Default. 7 Click OK. Add existing wire layers to the drawing Wire layer names for drawings are set up in the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Type drop-down ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Type drop-down ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type. Toolbar: Wires Menu: Wires ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type Command entry: AEWIRETYPE The program saves the wire layer name and associated properties, such as wire color, size, and whether the wire layer is processed for wire numbers, in the drawing file. Use the grid control to sort and select wire types to modify. TIP Use the Change/Convert Wire Type tool to convert lines to wires.
To rename the User1- User 20 column headers, right-click the project name in the Project Manager and select Properties. In the Project Properties ➤ Wire Numbers dialog box, Wire Type section, click Rename User Columns. In the Rename User Columns dialog box, specify a new column name and click OK. Renaming of user-defined columns is project-specific. You cannot rename the Color, Size, or Layer Name columns. All the data corresponding to the header column can be copied, cut, and pasted to another column.
BLK for color and 10AWG for size, the layer name is filled in as BLK_10AWG based on default %C_%S format. Placeholders are supported at any place in the format (that is, "CUST%C-THIN%S). Valid wire name format codes are: ■ %C = Wire Color ■ %S = Wire Size ■ %1-%5 = User 1 - User 5 Color Displays the AutoCAD dialog box for Layer colors election. The Select Color dialog box highlights the color corresponding to the wire type record. The default color for new records is white.
name from the existing layer list consisting of all the layers in the drawing inclusive of the non-wire layers. Only lines on pre-selected layers are processed as wires. Enter a wire layer name in the dialog box. A wildcard used in the name selects a group of layers (for example, RED_* selects all layers that begin with "RED_"). Removes the selected layer name from the wire type grid. The layer is no longer a valid wire layer, however the layer remains in the drawing as an AutoCAD line layer.
Import wire types 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Type drop-down ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type. 2 Click Import. The Wire Type Import - Select Master Drawing dialog box displays. 3 Select the drawing or drawing template containing the wire types for import. 4 Click Open. The Import Wire Types dialog box displays. 5 Select the wire types for import. 6 Define how the import function behaves if a wire type exists on the active drawing.
3 Browse to or enter the name of the drawing or drawing template containing the wire type definitions for import. 4 Click Setup to display the Import Wire Types dialog box. 5 Select the wire types for import. 6 Define how the import function behaves if a wire type exists on the drawing being processed. Overwrite any Wire Numbering and USERn differences - if checked, changes the wire numbering setting and all the USER values for the existing wire type to match the imported wire type.
Project-wide utilities Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Utilities. Toolbar: Project Menu: Projects ➤ Project-Wide Utilities Command entry: AEUTILITIES Select the Import from specified drawing check box. Browse to or enter the name of the drawing or drawing template containing the wire type definitions for import. Click Setup. Double click a column heading to sort the wire type list by the data in that column. Grid Select the wire types to import.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Type drop-down ➤ Change/Convert Wire Type. Optionally, you can right-click on an existing wire and select Change/Convert Wire Type. 2 In the Change/Convert Wire Type dialog box, select a wire type record in the wire type list, or click Pick to select a wire type record from the drawing. If you right-clicked on a wire and selected Change/Convert Wire Type, the wire type corresponding to the selected wire layer is highlighted in the list.
■ Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Multiple Bus. ■ Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Ladder drop-down ➤ Add Rung. ■ Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Ladder drop-down ➤ Insert Ladder. NOTE If you select Another Bus (Multi-Wire) in the Multiple Wire Bus dialog box, the wires are drawn on the same wire layer as the existing wire bus. You cannot type "T" to change the wire type during wire insertion.
A “No” in the Wire Numbering column indicates that wires on this layer do not receive a wire number. The Insert Wire Numbers command follows these rules: ■ If all wires in the network are on layers set “No” for Wire Numbering, no new wire number is inserted. ■ If any wire in the network is on a layer set “Yes” for Wire Numbering, the existing non-fixed wire number is updated or a new wire number is inserted.
Makes the selected wire type the current wire type. If the selected wire type does not exist on the drawing, the wire layer is created on the fly. The wire layer name and properties are saved in the drawing file. For the layer to create, the following rules apply: ■ The layer name must be unique ■ The layer name cannot be left blank ■ The layer name cannot contain special characters such as / \ " : ; ? * | , = ' >< Set wire type This tool sets wire types for new wires.
To rename the User1- User 20 column headers, right-click the project name in the Project Manager and select Properties. In the Project Properties ➤ Wire Numbers dialog box, Wire Type section, click Rename User Columns. In the Rename User Columns dialog box, specify a new column name and click OK. Renaming of user-defined columns is project-specific. You cannot rename the Color, Size, or Layer Name columns. All the data corresponding to the header column can be copied, cut, and pasted to another column.
Command entry: AEPROJECT Right-click the project name and select Settings. On the Current Settings dialog box, click Environment file.
280
Symbol Libraries 5 Determine symbol block names The symbol folder on page 204 contains hundreds of component symbols in standard AutoCAD ".dwg" file format. They are referenced by AutoCAD Electrical and its icon menuing system and are inserted as standard AutoCAD blocks with attributes. There are two ways to determine the block name of an existing symbol: METHOD A Insert the symbol from the AutoCAD Electrical icon menu and then use the AutoCAD LIST command to display the block name.
The "|" characters divide the entry into three sections. The first piece is the description that appears in the side bar of the menu, the second in a slide-library reference, and the third is the actual symbol file name. In this example, the file name of the library symbol is htd1n.dwg. The vertical version of this symbol is vtd1n.dwg. You can select a different name for a component family by creating or editing the WD_FAM.dat file.
■ The next two characters are "W0." A zero (0) means that the symbol does not trigger a wire number change through it. ■ The fourth character is either 1 or 2: "1" for parent marker or "2" for child marker. ■ The remaining characters are not specified. Examples: HW01.dwg Parent cable conductor marker, horizontal wire insertion HW02.dwg Child cable marker, horizontal wire insertion VW01.dwg Parent cable conductor marker, vertical wire insertion VW02.
Examples: HCR1.dwg Control relay coil, horizontal rung insertion VCR1.dwg Control relay coil, vertical rung insertion HCR21.dwg Horizontal relay contact, N.O. HCR22.dwg Horizontal relay contact, N.C. HCR22T.dwg Horizontal relay contact, N.C., with in-line terminal numbers VPB11.dwg Vertical push button, parent contact, N.O. VPB21.dwg Vertical push button, child contact, N.O. HLS11.dwg Horizontal limit switch, parent, N.O. HLS11H.dwg Horizontal limit switch, parent, N.O. Held closed VLT1RP.
Configuration and Ladder Master Line Reference Symbols AutoCAD Electrical expects to find these block inserts: WD_M.dwg Block insert consisting of about 50 invisible attributes. They carry the settings of the drawing. WD_PNLM.dwg Optional block insert consisting of several invisible attributes. They carry the settings of the drawing for panel layout functions. WD_MLRH.
■ The eighth character is either "P" or "J": P = Plug, J = Jack (Receptacle) Examples: HCN1_14P.dwg Horizontal parent - single (plug) wiring connects from left or bottom VCN2_18P.dwg Vertical child - single (plug) wiring connects from left or bottom HCN1_11J.dwg Horizontal parent - single (receptacle) wiring connects from right or top VCN2_12P.
■ Use "_" and enter a meaningful name corresponding to the symbol. Example: HCYL1_plunger_cyl.dwg Horizontal standalone cylinder; plunger_cyl is the meaningful name for the symbol Inline Wire Marker Symbols Construct dumb inline wire marker symbols with a tiny piece of "pigtail" line entity at each connection point. It can be small, but it must be present for AutoCAD Electrical to correctly "see" the in-line inserted block as it traces the wire network.
Example: "RED" inline marker, horizontal wire insert HT0_RED.dwg One-line Symbols One-line symbols follow the same naming convention as schematic parent and child symbols. To make the symbol names unique, the one-line symbol block names have a “1-” suffix. However, the symbol name does not define the symbol as a one-line symbol. A one-line symbol is defined by the existence of a WDTYPE attribute on page 325 with a value of “1-” on the symbol, or a value of “1-1” for a one-line bus-tap symbol.
■ Break into the one-line bus where the circuit connects. On a dual circuit one-line template, there are three bus-tap symbols. One at the normal point where the circuit ties into the bus. There is another version of the symbol on each of the two circuit "legs", each marking the point where that part of the dual circuit starts. These bus-tap symbols allow various reports to report accurately on a one-line circuit, whether a single circuit or a dual circuit representation.
Example: VTK1_ver_tank.dwg Vertical standalone cyclone; ver_tank is the meaningful name for the symbol Panel Layout Footprint Symbols There is not a required naming convention to follow, but the name must adhere to the AutoCAD 32-character block name limit.
Parametric Twisted Pair Symbols A parametrically generated twisted pair representation consists to two instances of the same symbol (there are no parent/child versions). This symbol must carry attribute ACE_FLAG with a value of "3." Parametric twisted pair symbols follow this naming convention: ■ The first four characters are "HT0_" or "VT0_" for horizontal or vertical parametric symbols. ■ The remaining characters can be anything (default is set to "TW") Examples: HT0_TW.
Plug/Jack Connector Pin Symbols AutoCAD Electrical connector symbols follow this convention: ■ The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion. ■ The next two characters are "C0" if the connector does not trigger a wire number change through it. (The "0" means that the wire number does not change, or "CN" if the connector DOES trigger a wire number change.) ■ The fourth character is either 1 or 2: 1 for parent marker or a 2 for child marker.
VSP1001.dwg Vertical splice #1 HSP1003.dwg Horizontal splice #3 Source/Destination Wire Signal Arrow Symbols AutoCAD Electrical wire signal arrow symbols follow this convention: ■ The first four characters of these symbol names are either "HA?S" for source signal arrows or "HA?D" for destination symbol arrows. The "?" character is the arrow style digit (1 through 4 are provided in the AutoCAD Electrical library and 5 through 9 can be user-defined). ■ Characters 5 through 11 can be user-defined.
Examples: PLCIO50E1761-L16AWA.dwg AB 1761 model L16-AWA with 0.5 unit rung spacing PLCIOI1T.dwg Standalone input point, single wire connection Standalone Terminal Symbols Stand-alone terminals follow this naming convention: ■ The first two characters are "HT." ■ The third character is "0" if the wire number does not change through the terminal, "1" if the terminal symbol should trigger a wire number change.
Dumb, square terminal with no annotation, no wire number change HT0_01.dwg User-defined Symbols AutoCAD Electrical user-defined symbols follow this convention: ■ The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion. ■ The next two characters are "ZA" through "ZZ." ■ The remaining characters can be user-defined. Wire Dot Symbols AutoCAD Electrical expects this symbol name to be "WDDOT.dwg.
VT0_W1.dwg Inline wire number marker, vertical wire insertion, short wire number VT0_W2.dwg Inline wire number, vertical wire insertion, medium wire width, vertical wire insertion Family type The second and third characters of the symbol name are reserved for family type (for example, PB for push buttons, CR for control relays, LS for limit switches). The family type can be used to determine the catalog lookup table name on page 1265 and the tag name for a component.
Family Type Description EN Enclosures/hardware FL Level switches FM Frequency meters FS Flow sensors FT Foot switches FU Fuses GV Gate valves LR Latching relays LS Limit switches LT Lights, pilot lights LV Globe valves MO Motors MS Motor starters/contactors OL Overloads PB Push buttons PC Pull cord switches PE Photo switches PG A-plug switches PM Power meters PS Pressure switches PW Power supplies Overview of symbol naming conventions | 297
Family Type Description PX Proximity switches RE Resistors SP Splices SS Selector switches SU Surge suppressors SV Solenoids SW, TG Toggle switches T0, T1 Terminals TC Thermocouples TD Timer relays TS Temperature switches VM Volt meters VR Variable resistors WO Cables, multi-conductor cables XF Transformers Split a tag name into two pieces Split a tag name into two pieces TAG1_PART1, TAG1_PART2, TAG1_PARTX (as well as TAG2_PART1, TAG2_PART2, TAG2_PARTX) are alternatives to TA
1 Open up the .dwg library symbol drawing that you want to modify. 2 Rename the TAG1 attribute definition to read TAG1_PART1. 3 Add a new attribute definition TAG1_PART2. 4 Position both attribute definitions inside of the circle graphics of the symbol (one above the other). With this setup, AutoCAD Electrical automatically splits tags like CR104 and 104CR into two pieces (where characters split from numbers to letters) and apply the pieces to these attributes.
You can also include a series of library paths for AutoCAD Electrical to use. Enter the names of the libraries (in order) with a semicolon between them. For example: C:/Documents and Settings/All Users/Documents/Autodesk/Acade {version}/Libs/;C:/{user path}/{user library}. AutoCAD Electrical search sequence AutoCAD Electrical runs through specific search sequences when looking for your symbols. 1 Looks on the drawing for a copy of the requested symbol.
7 Click Next to continue. Set a symbol library as the default 1 Exit AutoCAD Electrical. 2 Make a back-up copy of your environment (.env) file. To find the full name and path of your environment (.env) file, right-click a project name inside the Project Manager, and select Settings. 3 Open the .env file in a text editor such as WordPad. 4 Look for a line in the environment file that begins with "WD_LIB." 5 Edit this line to reflect the path of your default library.
A one-line symbol can be a parent, child, or terminal. These one-line symbols use the same attributes as the schematic parent, child, and terminal symbols but with the following exceptions. Attribute Description WDTYPE The attribute must be present and carry a value of “1-” to indicate it is a one-line symbol, or “1-1” for the one-line bus-tap symbols. A bus-tap symbol is used to mark the beginning of a one-line circuit.
■ Tagging of schematic or panel components using existing commands can reference a pick list that includes components pulled from the one-line diagrams. ■ Certain component and Bill of Material reports can report only one-line diagram components. Bus-tap symbols The bus-tap symbol can have two functions: ■ Provide an anchor point for the one-line circuit representation that begins at this location. ■ Break into the one-line bus where the circuit connects.
Overview of Hydraulic and P&ID symbols The hydraulic symbol library consists of all the hydraulic symbols and is found under ■ Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\hyd_iso125 ■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\hyd_iso125 Hydraulic family names Family Name Description FI Filter CYL Cylinder VAL Valves (directional, throttle valve, pressure valve) FC Flow control valve CK Check valve MAN Manifo
valves, equipment, instrumentation, and control interlocks. The P&ID are used to operate the process system. The P&ID symbol library consists of all the P&ID symbols and is found under ■ Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\pid ■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\pid P&ID family names Family Name Description CT Equipment: Cooling tower TK Equipment: Cyclone E Equipment: Engine, exchanger C Equipme
Attribute Requirements Schematic attributes Overview of schematic attributes The following items are attribute requirements for various categories of schematic symbols. Some attributes are used in multiple categories. Schematic parent and child components Attribute Description TAG1 (Parent only) Attribute for required component tag name (64 characters maximum).
Attribute Description the component. To include a delimiter character in the tag name but not show it on the drawing (for example, "MOT-123" but just show "MOT" and "123"), then a third attribute definition marked invisible, "TAG1_PARTX" can be added to carry the dash delimiter. NOTE The default for the %F tagging parameter, as described in TAG1 previously, is carried on the TAG1_PART1 piece of the attribute pair.
Attribute Description value for this attribute is set automatically when you make a selection from the catalog lookup that carries subassembly information. ASSYCODE01 - ASSYCODE10: Optional invisible attributes for subassembly code for up to 10 additional Multiple Catalog part number assignments (24 characters maximum each). If these attributes are not present and AutoCAD Electrical stores the additional part number information, it is saved on the inserted symbol as Xdata.
Attribute Description NOTE If XREF is not present then non-NO/NC contacts are included with the XREFNO annotation. CONTACT Invisible attribute that is present when the symbol is a contact. The value of this attribute is the de-energized state of the contact (for example, "NO" or "NC" or any text string with an embedded "NO" or "NC" such as "NO-TC". Use "NULL" as the value of the contact attribute to exclude the contact from being included in any AutoCAD Electrical cross-reference text annotation.
Attribute Description any related pin list data is automatically stored on the symbol as Xdata. PEER_PINLIST (Parent only) Like previous attribute, but is used to hold a second pin list temporarily that is later retrieved during insertion of a peer parent device. For example, a reversing motor starter contactor might be a single component with a single part number, but has a parent coil and a peer reversing coil. Each is to receive its own unique pin list.
Attribute Description NOTE The WDTYPE value can be a user-defined value. AutoCAD Electrical reserves all two character values. User-defined values must be three or four characters long. WD_WEBLINK Attribute carried on a parent symbol for embedding Internet URL's, ".pdf", ".xls", or ".doc" links that can be surfed on. The attribute value should be the URL, .pdf, .xls, or .doc document file name that should be displayed when selected from the Surf dialog box of the component.
Wire connection/terminal pin number pairs Attribute Description X?TERMn Invisible wire connection attributes where an external wire connects to the origin point of the attribute. The "n" character is an incremented digit starting at "01" used to keep multiple wire connection point attribute names unique. It also provides a link to an associated terminal number (TERMn) and a terminal description (TERMDESCn) attribute.
Attribute Description can carry four wire connection attributes to allow connection from any direction. All four wire number attribute names would end with 01 to link them all to the common terminal pin number attribute. WD_JUMPERS Optional internal wire jumpers attribute that can be encoded to link sets of terminals together so AutoCAD Electrical considers them internally jumpered when calculating wire number assignments and processing wire connection and from/to reports.
Attribute Description MFG CAT ASSYCODE (Parent only) Same as the FAMILY attribute definition. FAMILY Same as the FAMILY attribute definition. GENDER Invisible attribute with blank value. ACE_FLAG Invisible attribute with a value of "2" for all parametric connector symbols and a value of "1" for splice symbols (1 character maximum). DESC1 DESC2 DESC3 Same as the FAMILY attribute definition. X?LINK Same as the FAMILY attribute definition.
Attribute Description X?WIRE01P X?WIRE01J Attribute for wire connection annotation for plug side and receptacle side respectively. The "?" digit is same as the FAMILY attribute definition. X?_TINY_DOT_DONT_REMOVE_01P X?_TINY_DOT_DONT_REMOVE_01J Visible attribute, small, single character value (a ".") that must remain visible and must be placed at the exact insertion location of the XnTERM01P and XnTERM01J attributes.
Attribute Description INST Same as previous attribute. LOC Same as previous attribute. MFG CAT ASSYCODE Same as previous attribute. WDBLKNAM Optional invisible attribute with value of "TRMS" to force access of the TRMS table in catalog lookup (32 characters maximum). Special Multiple Connection Sequence Terminal symbol Use the following attributes for this special type of terminal symbol.
Source/Destination wire signal symbols These symbols allow a wire to jump from one place to another, either within a drawing or across multiple drawing. Default library symbol names are HAxSn.dwg, HAxDn.dwg where "x" = style digit and "n" = orientation 1, 2, 3 or 4. Attribute Description SIGCODE Attribute carries unique signal code that is user defined as the symbol is inserted (32 characters maximum).
ends. They symbols can dynamically adjust their gap to accommodate the width of the in-line text. Default library symbol block names are HT0_*.dwg, VT0_*.dwg. Attribute Description COLOR or WIRENO Visible attribute for the text label (COLOR) or in-line wire text (WIRENO) (24 characters maximum). This attribute is center or middle justified and placed midway between the pair of wire connection attributes listed below. X?TERM01 Pair of invisible wire connection attributes where the wires connect.
Attribute Description XREF Same as above. TERM01L TERM01R Attribute for terminal pin number on each side (ten characters maximum). If just a single wire connection then the attribute name is TERM01. X?TERM01L X?TERM01R Attributes for wire connections on each side. If just a single wire connection then the attribute name is X?TERM01 where the "?" character is the wire connection direction.
Parametric Twisted Pair symbols Attribute Description X?TERM01 Pair of invisible wire connection attributes where the wires connect. Connection is made to the origin point of each attribute.
you assign to this attribute definition at the library symbol level (that is, ".dwg" file of the symbol opened and displayed in AutoCAD) becomes the family code character string AutoCAD Electrical uses to build the tag name of the component when the block is inserted into your wiring diagram. This default value character string is used as the Family Code (%F) portion of the tag format code of the drawing you set up in the Drawing Properties ➤ Components dialog box (example %F%N).
or attribute requirements, these libraries can be used as is. When AutoCAD Electrical inserts such a block footprint symbol, it immediately becomes AutoCAD Electrical smart. Footprint block attribute/Xdata names The following table is a list of footprint block data names that are inserted or read by AutoCAD Electrical. If the footprint block has an attribute with any name listed here, AutoCAD Electrical uses that attribute to carry the specific piece of data.
P_TAGSTRIP terminal strip ID (terminal footprints only) TERM terminal number (terminal footprints only) WIRENO wire number (terminal footprints only) Minimum attribute/Xdata requirements The following tables are the minimum requirements for AutoCAD Electrical to recognize a block as a panel footprint, terminal, or nameplate.
are needed to accommodate the position of text relative to the terminal block symbol. Attribute Description P_TAGSTRIP Invisible attribute to carry terminal strip number (24 character maximum) for terminal footprint. LOC Invisible attribute for optional terminal location code (for example, “JBOX1”; 16 characters maximum). INST Invisible attribute for optional terminal installation code (for example, “MACH1”; 24 characters maximum).
Attribute Description WIRENOR WIRENOL Optional attributes for schematic interconnection annotation (24 characters maximum). TERMDESCR TERMDESCL Optional attributes for schematic interconnection annotation (128 characters maximum). Attributes for other symbol categories Overview of attributes for other symbol categories WDTYPE attribute The WDTYPE attribute value specifies a component category for a non-schematic, non-panel component. It is limited to four characters and can be user-defined.
One-line symbols A one-line symbol can be a parent, child, or terminal. These one-line symbols use the same attributes as the schematic parent, child, and terminal symbols but with the following exceptions. Attribute Description WDTYPE The attribute must be present and carry a value of “1-” to indicate it is a one-line symbol, or “1-1” for the one-line bus-tap symbols. A bus-tap symbol is used to mark the beginning of a one-line circuit.
Attribute Description FAMILY Invisible attribute that carries the components family type (for example, "FI", "INS"; eight characters maximum). Generally, the default value of the FAMILY attribute definition is the same as the default value for the TAG1 or TAG2 attribute of the component. A generic child device can be linked to any type of parent symbol when the Family attribute value of the child is left blank.
Attribute Description ence tag name of a related symbol shown on a different drawing type (for example, instrument drawing or pneumatic drawing vs. electrical schematic). For example, an instrument drawing might be included in an AutoCAD Electrical project drawing set with a valve marked "FY201". On the electrical schematics, the solenoid for this instrument valve is tagged "SV456". You can annotate the The WDTAGALT attribute carried on the schematic valve symbol with the "FY201" instrument tag name.
Copy attributes COPYTAG is the optional TAG copy attribute. When AutoCAD Electrical updates a TAG1, TAG2 or TAGSTRIP attribute, it also looks for and updates any COPYTAG attributes present on the symbol with a copy of the TAG text. A special replaceable parameter, "%T", can be encoded onto the COPYTAG attribute prompt value of the definition. It allows for adding a suffix and/or prefix to the TAG text. If you need more than one extra TAG copy on a symbol, name the attributes COPYTAG01, COPYTAG02, and so on.
Change appearance of existing library symbols Change appearance of existing library symbols The AutoCAD Electrical symbol libraries are installed in ■ Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\ ■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: \Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\ The default {library} folder depends on installation choices, for example JIC or IEC. You can modify the ".
layers the various parts and pieces of your symbol get put on at insertion time. This layer naming scheme is set up in the Define Layers dialog box If you want certain layer naming maintained on your inserted components, select Apply to entities on layer "0" only. With it checked, non-layer "0" entities maintain their existing layer names as the component inserts into the drawing.
Swap blocks The block swapper tool can operate in several different modes: ■ Swap Block: Exchanges one block for another, retaining the scale of the old block, rotation, wire connections, attribute values, and attribute positions (if Retain is selected). For example, use the tool to swap out a red standard pilot light with a green one, or drawing-wide, swap out all standard red pilot lights with red press-test pilot lights.
Option A: Select to swap a block one at a time, drawing-wide, or project-wide. ■ Indicate whether to pick a new block from the icon menu, pick a new block just like another block, or pick a new block from the File dialog box. ■ Determine whether you want to retain old attribute locations, old block scales, or retag if parent swap causes family changes. Option B: Select to update a block by replacing it with a new version or substitute new versions of all blocks.
Toolbar: Insert Component Menu: Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤ Swap/Update Block Command entry: AESWAPBLOCK ■ Swap Block: Exchanges one block for another. Select Retain to keep the scale of the old block, rotation, wire connections, attribute values, and attribute positions. ■ Update: Updates all instances of a given block with an updated version of the same block. Wire connections are also maintained even if the new symbol is slightly wider or narrower than the original.
Browse to new block from file selection dialog box Specifies to select a new block from the file selection dialog box. Retain old attribute locations Specifies to retain the attribute locations from the original block. Retain old block scale Specifies to retain the scale value from the original block. Allow undefined Wire Type line reconnections Specifies to include non-wire lines for reconnection when the new block swaps in.
with a space separating the current attribute name from the new attribute name. Library swap -- all drawing Updates all instances of a library symbol with an updated version of the same symbol on the active drawing or in a project. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Swap/Update Block. Toolbar: Insert Component Menu: Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤ Swap/Update Block Command entry: AESWAPBLOCK Select the Library Swap option and click OK.
Copy attribute values of old block to new swapped block Specifies whether to copy the attribute values to the new block, to discard all old values, or to copy the old values only if the new value is blank. Update block - path\filename of new block Substitutes a new version of a component block for all inserted instances of that block found on a drawing or in a project. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Swap/Update Block.
Create a library symbol Create a library symbol AutoCAD Electrical uses stock AutoCAD blocks and attributes in its library symbols. The symbols can be any size and width. You do not have to edit an external support file or database to register a symbol for use in an AutoCAD Electrical wiring diagram drawing. NOTE You can also use the Symbol Builder tool, but the quickest way to create a symbol might be to start with an existing AutoCAD Electrical compatible symbol.
Avoid putting wire pigtails on your new symbols. Pigtails can defeat the AutoCAD Electrical SCOOT command and automatic wire numbering when two symbols with pigtails bump up against each other. A wire connection pigtail is mandatory when you insert a short pigtail at a wire connection point that has no other visible symbol geometry nearby since AutoCAD Electrical must see something tangible on a symbol at a wire connection point.
You can exit the Symbol Builder command and re-enter it at any time. You can also exit the command and use regular AutoCAD commands to edit or finish the symbol you are creating. The AutoCAD Wblock command writes it to disk. Each time you re-enter the Symbol Builder tool, select objects from within the Select Symbol/Objects dialog box. Selecting the objects allows the tool to track what standard attributes and wire connection points you already inserted.
Panel Nameplate Panel nameplate symbol. Must have a P_TAG1 and NP attribute or xdata. NOTE Panel symbols do not require any attributes but uses xdata for any missing attributes. This xdata is added when the symbol is inserted using the appropriate AutoCAD Electrical panel insertion command. All xdata values have a VIA_WD_ prefix followed by the name of the attribute it takes the place of. For example, if a panel footprint does not have a P_TAG1 attribute it gets a VIA_WD_P_TAG1 xdata when inserted.
NOTE The attribute templates do not carry wire connection attributes. Add wire connection attributes to your symbol as needed. You can create your own wire connection templates on page 2107 which are used when inserting wire connections. Creating a symbol Creating an AutoCAD Electrical symbol includes adding the necessary attributes based on the symbol type, and for a schematic symbol, selecting an appropriate file name. Symbol builder uses attributes templates to facilitate adding the attributes.
Toolbar: Miscellaneous Menu: Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder Command entry: AESYMBUILDER Name Lists all block definitions in the current drawing. Select an existing block to edit or use as a starting point for a new symbol. Select to create a symbol from scratch. Browse to select a drawing file not listed in the current drawing. Select From Drawing Select any existing objects that are to be part of the symbol you want to create or edit.
Select the type used to find the appropriate attribute template. Type Preview Displays a preview of the selected named block or the objects selected on the drawing. Selected blocks are shown exploded. Symbol Configuration Use this dialog box to select a different attribute template or redefine the insertion point. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder drop-down ➤ Symbol Builder.
Type Select the type. This value is used to find the appropriate attribute template. Insertion Point Enter the insertion point coordinates for the symbol or select Pick point to select on the drawing. Select Specify on Screen to specify the insertion point after selecting OK, before entering the Block Editor. The coordinates become the 0,0,0 insertion base point for the symbol. Inserting Attributes 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder drop-down ➤ Symbol Builder.
3 Click Insert to insert the new attribute or click OK to add it to the list. Symbol Builder Attribute Editor Use the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor to add, modify, and remove attributes on the symbol. Menu sections which differ depending on the symbol type. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder drop-down ➤ Symbol Builder.
Required/Optional Attributes Tools Insert the selected attributes. NOTE You can also drag to insert the selected attributes. Opens the Insert/Edit Attributes dialog box to set the properties for the selected attributes. Convert existing text objects to the selected attributes. Add an attribute to the list and define its properties. Remove the selected attributes from the list. Delete the selected attributes from the symbol. Indicates the attribute exists on the symbol.
NOTE A right-click menu is available containing functions appropriate for the selected attributes. Pin Tools Pin attributes are added automatically when you add a wire connection attribute. You can also insert them individually. Use this section to add optional wire connection attributes, fill in default attribute values, or change attribute properties. Opens the Insert/Edit Attributes dialog box to set the properties for the selected attributes. Convert existing text objects to the selected attributes.
Indicates the attribute exists on the symbol. NOTE A right-click menu is available containing functions appropriate for the selected attributes. Rating/Position Tools AutoCAD Electrical allows up to 12 rating and position attributes. To insert the next available attribute, select the Add Next tool and pick an insertion point. Add the next attribute to the list and prompt for the insertion point. Indicates the attribute exists on the symbol.
3 Select an attribute in the grid and click the Property tool, or double-click an attribute in the grid. NOTE The Insert button is only available for new attributes added to the list using the Add tool. Inserting Wire Connections Symbol Builder inserts a wire connection template drawing when adding a wire connection to your symbol. The list of wire connection options is built dynamically based on the template drawings found in the symbol library path.
NOTE If the wire connection template contains the optional TERMn and TERMDESCn attributes, they are inserted with the wire connection attribute and added to the Pins section. Others Selecting Others on the Wire Connection Direction/Style list opens the Insert Wire Connection dialog box. On the Insert Wire Connection dialog box you can insert multiple wire connection attributes, select from a style other than the default, or change the default style. 1 Define the style and direction.
Toolbar: Miscellaneous Menu: Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder Command entry: AESYMBUILDER 1 Select options on the Select Symbol / Objects on page 342 dialog box. 2 Click OK to enter the block editor environment. 3 Expand the Wire Connection section and select Others from the Direction/Style list. Configuration Select the wire connection style from the list. The list is built dynamically based on the wire connection templates in the library folder. Wire connection templates start with “BB”.
Pin Information Name/Default List of optional related pin attributes inserted with the wire connection attributes. Modify the default values. Convert Dismisses the dialog box. Select a text object for conversion to the selected attribute. Delete Removes the selected attributes from the list so they are not inserted with the wire connection attributes. Properties Opens the Insert/Edit Attributes dialog box used to define the properties for the selected attributes.
4 If the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor is not visible, click Symbol Builder tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Palette Visibility Toggle. 5 Click the arrow on the Link Lines section of the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor to expand the section. 6 Click the Direction list to expand the list of link line options. 7 Select a direction. 8 Click the Insert Link Line tool. 9 Select an insertion point for the attribute. Converting Text You can convert text objects to attribute definitions on your symbol.
4 Select the text object. Converting multiple text objects to attribute definitions 1 Select the Text Convert tool at the top of the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor to launch the Convert Text to Attribute dialog box. 2 Select the text within the Text list. 3 Select the arrow next to the attribute name in the Attribute list. 4 Repeat for each text object you want to convert. 5 Click OK. Convert Text to Attribute Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder drop-down ➤ Symbol Builder.
To convert an existing text object to an attribute, select the text and click the arrow pointing at the attribute. The text string is used as the default value for the attribute and the text object is deleted. Saving the Symbol Once you have added the attributes and completed the symbol graphics, you are ready to save your library symbol. The following steps save your symbol as a .dwg file for insertion on a drawing. They also create an icon image to use when you add this symbol to an icon menu.
See also: ■ Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard on page 1231 Save Symbol Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder drop-down ➤ Symbol Builder. Toolbar: Miscellaneous Menu: Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder Command entry: AESYMBUILDER 1 Select options on the Select Symbol / Objects on page 342 dialog box. 2 Click OK to enter the block editor environment. 3 Modify the symbol as needed as described in related topics. 4 Click Symbol Builder tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Done.
Symbol Name: The next two characters of the symbol name indicate the family type and can match the symbol to a catalog lookup table. Catalog name NOTE Schematic terminals use “T1” for a terminal that triggers a wire number change. They use “T0” for a terminal that does not trigger a wire number change. WDBLKNAM: On a schematic symbol, the WDBLKNAM value overrides the catalog lookup table defined by the second and third characters of the symbol name.
See Also: Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard on page 1231 Name The image file name. Image files are created as a .png file type. File path The name of the folder for the image file. Browse to a folder or enter in the folder name. See also: Overview of symbol naming conventions on page 282 ■ Symbol Audit This dialog box provides audit information on the attributes and symbol name. The audit information is based on the symbol type.
Missing values Lists attributes with default values defined on the attribute template but are missing on the attributes on the symbol. Missing prompts Lists attributes with default prompts defined on the attribute template but are missing on the attributes on the symbol. Missing group attributes Lists attributes missing from common groups, such as MFG, CAT, ASSYCODE. Template mismatch Lists the attributes on the attribute template but removed from the list.
Symbol Preview Guide 361
362
6 JIC Symbols Push Buttons Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Push Button Normally Open HPB11 VPB11 Push Button Normally Closed HPB12 VPB12 Mushroom Head Normally Open HPB11M VPB11M 363
Mushroom Head Normally Closed HPB12M VPB12M Illuminated Push Button Normally Open HPB11L VPB11L Illuminated Push Button Normally Closed HPB12L VPB12L Illuminated Mushroom Head Normally Open HPB11ML VPB11ML Illuminated Mushroom Head Normally Closed HPB12ML VPB12ML 2nd+ Normally Open Contact HPB21 VPB21 364 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
2nd+ Normally Closed Contact HPB22 VPB22 2nd+ Red Light HPB2R VPB2R 2nd+ Green Light HPB2G VPB2G 2nd+ Amber Light HPB2A VPB2A 2nd+ Yellow Light HPB2Y VPB2Y 2nd+ Blue Light HPB2B VPB2B Push Buttons | 365
2nd+ White Light HPB2W VPB2W 2nd+ Clear Light HPB2C VPB2C NOTE Lights will receive text to indicate the color at the time of insertion.
2 Position Normally Open Return From Left HSS112L VSS112L 2 Position Normally Closed Return From Left HSS122L VSS122L 2 Position Normally Open Return From Right HSS112R VSS112R 2 Position Normally Closed Return From Right HSS122R VSS122R 3 Position Normally Open HSS113 VSS113 3 Position Normally Closed HSS123 VSS123 Selector Switches | 367
3 Position Normally Open Return From Left HSS113L VSS113L 3 Position Normally Closed Return From Left HSS123L VSS123L 3 Position Normally Open Return From Right HSS113R VSS113R 3 Position Normally Closed Return From Right HSS123R VSS123R 3 Position Normally Open Return From Both HSS113B VSS113B 3 Position Normally Closed Return From Both HSS123B VSS123B 368 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
4 Position Normally Open HSS114 VSS114 4 Position Normally Closed HSS124 VSS124 6 Position Normally Open HSS116 VSS116 6 Position Normally Closed HSS126 VSS126 8 Position Normally Open HSS118 VSS118 8 Position Normally Closed HSS128 VSS128 Selector Switches | 369
2nd+ Normally Open Contact HSS21 VSS21 2nd+ Normally Closed Contact HSS22 VSS22 Illuminated Selector Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description 2 Position Normally Open HSS112I VSS112I 2 Position Normally Closed HSS122I VSS122I 2 Position Normally Open Return From Left HSS112LI VSS112LI 370 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
2 Position Normally Closed Return From Left HSS122LI VSS122LI 2 Position Normally Open Return From Right HSS112RI VSS112RI 2 Position Normally Closed Return From Right HSS122RI VSS122RI 3 Position Normally Open HSS113I VSS113I 3 Position Normally Closed HSS123I VSS123I 3 Position Normally Open Return From Left HSS113LI VSS113LI Illuminated Selector Switches | 371
3 Position Normally Closed Return From Left HSS123LI VSS123LI 3 Position Normally Open Return From Right HSS113RI VSS113RI 3 Position Normally Closed Return From Right HSS123RI VSS123RI 3 Position Normally Open Return From Both HSS113BI VSS113BI 3 Position Normally Closed Return From Both HSS123BI VSS123BI Red Light HSS2R VSS2R 372 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Green Light HSS2G VSS2G Amber Light HSS2A VSS2A Yellow Light HSS2Y VSS2Y Blue Light HSS2B VSS2B White Light HSS2W VSS2W Clear Light HSS2C VSS2C Illuminated Selector Switches | 373
Fuses, Circuit Breakers, Transformers Fuses and Transformers Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Fuse (Tag) HFU1 VFU1 Fuse HFU0 VFU0 2nd+ Fuse HFU2 VFU2 Fuse Switch (Right) HDS11FR VDS11FR Fuse Switch (Left) HDS11FL VDS11FL 374 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
2nd+ Fuse Switch(Right) HDS21FR VDS21FR 2nd+ Fuse Switch (Left) HDS21FL VDS21FL Transformer HXF1 VXF1 Transformer Dual HXF1D VXF1D Circuit Transformer HXF1CT VXF1CT Potential Transformer HXF1PT VXF1PT Fuses and Transformers | 375
Circuit Breakers and Disconnects Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Circuit Breaker 1 Pole HCB1 VCB1 Thermal Circuit Breaker HCB11TH VCB11TH Motor Circuit Protector HCB11M VCB11M Motor Circuit Protector with Fuse HCB11ML VCB11ML 2nd+ Circuit Breaker 1 Pole HCB2 VCB2 376 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
2nd+ Thermal Circuit Breaker HCB21TH VCB21TH 2nd+ Motor Circuit Protector HCB21M VCB21M 2nd+ Motor Circuit Protector with Fuse HCB21ML VCB21ML Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contact Normally Open HCB21IT VCB21IT Disconnect Switch HDS11 VDS11 Fused Disconnect Switch HDS11F VDS11F Circuit Breakers and Disconnects | 377
Disconnect Switch Auxiliary Contact Normally Open HDS21IT 2nd+ Disconnect Switch HDS21 VDS21 2nd+ Fused Disconnect Switch HDS21F VDS21F Relays and Contacts Relays and Contacts Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Relay Coil HCR1 VCR1 378 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Relay Normally Open Contact HCR21 VCR21 Relay Normally Closed Contact HCR22 VCR22 Standard Coil with Pins HCR1T VCR1T Relay Normally Open Contact with Pins HCR21T VCR21T Relay Normally Closed Contact with Pins HCR22T VCR22T Latch Relay Coils Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Latch Relay Coils | 379
Latch Relay Coil HLR1 VLR1 Latch Relay Coil with pins HLR1T VLR1T UnLatch Relay Coil HLR1U VLR1U UnLatch Relay Coil with pins HLR1UT VLR1UT Timers Time Delay Relays Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol 380 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols Description
ON Delay Coil HTD1N VTD1N ON Delay Coil with Pins HTD1NT VTD1NT ON Delay Starter HTD1NM ON Delay Normally Open - TC HTD21N VTD21N ON Delay Normally Closed - TO HTD22N VTD22N ON Delay Normally Open - TC with Pins HTD21NT VTD21NT Time Delay Relays | 381
ON Delay Normally Closed - TO with Pins HTD22NT VTD22NT Instantaneous Normally Open HTD21I VTD21I Instantaneous Normally Closed HTD22I VTD22I Instantaneous Normally Open with Pins HTD21IT VTD21IT Instantaneous Normally Closed with Pins HTD22IT VTD22IT OFF-Delay Timers Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol 382 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols Description
OFF Delay Coil HTD1F VTD1F OFF Delay Coil with Pins HTD1FT VTD1FT OFF Delay Starter HTD1FM OFF Delay Normally Open-TO HTD21F VTD21F OFF Delay Normally Closed-TC HTD22F VTD22F OFF Delay Normally Open-TO with Pins HTD21FT VTD21FT OFF-Delay Timers | 383
OFF Delay Normally Closed-TC with Pins HTD22FT VTD22FT Instantaneous Normally Open HTD21IF VTD21IF Instantaneous Normally Closed HTD22IF VTD22IF Instantaneous Normally Open with Pins HTD21ITF VTD21ITF Instantaneous Normally Closed with Pins HTD22ITF VTD22ITF Motor Control Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol 384 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols Description
Motor Starter Coil HMS1 VMS1 Motor Starter Coil with Pins HMS1T VMS1T Overload HOL11 VOL11 3 Phase Motor HMO13 VMO13 2nd+ Starter Contact Normally Open HMS21 VMS21 2nd+ Starter Contact Normally Open with Pins HMS21T VMS21T Motor Control | 385
2nd+ Overload HOL21 VOL21 1 Phase Motor HMO12 VMO12 2nd+ Starter Contact Normally Closed HMS22 VMS22 2nd+ Starter Contact Normally Closed with Pins HMS22T VMS22T 2nd+ Overload Contact Normally Open HOL21I VOL21I 2nd+ Overload Contact Normally Closed HOL22I VOL22I 386 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
KVAR Capacitor HCA11 VCA11 3 Phase KVAR HCA113 VCA113 2nd+ KVAR Capacitor HCA21 VCA21 NOTE Multi-pole devices are constructed using parent and child symbols to adhere to the underlying ladder spacing.
Green Standard HLT1G VLT1G Amber Standard HLT1A VLT1A Yellow Standard HLT1Y VLT1Y Blue Standard HLT1B VLT1B White Standard HLT1W VLT1W Clear Standard HLT1C VLT1C 388 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Red Press To Test HLT1RP VLT1RP Green Press To Test HLT1GP VLT1GP Amber Press To Test HLT1AP VLT1AP Yellow Press To Test HLT1YP VLT1YP Blue Press To Test HLT1BP VLT1BP White Press To Test HLT1WP VLT1WP Pilot Lights | 389
Clear Press To Test HLT1CP VLT1CP NOTE Lights receive text to indicate the color at the time of insertion.
Blue Master Test HLT1BM VLT1BM White Master Test HLT1WM VLT1WM Clear Master Test HLT1CM VLT1CM NOTE Lights receive text to indicate the color at the time of insertion.
Clear Standard HLT1CN VLT1CN NOTE Lights receive text to indicate the color at the time of insertion.
OUT, 1st Point, 2 Wires PLCIOO2T PLCIOO2TV IN, 2nd+ Child, one Wire PLCIOI1 PLCIOI1V IN, 2nd+ Child, 2 Wires PLCIOI2 PLCIOI2V OUT, 2nd+ Child, 1 Wire PLCIOO1 PLCIOO1V OUT, 2nd+ Child, 2 Wires PLCIOO2 PLCIOO2V PLC I/O | 393
Terminals and Connectors Terminals Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Square HT0_01 VT0_01 Square with Wire Number HT0W01 VT0W01 Square with Terminal Number HT0001 VT0001 Square with Wire Number Change HT1001 VT1001 Round HT0_02 VT0_02 394 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Round with Wire Number HT0W02 VT0W02 Round with Terminal Number HT0002 VT0002 Round with Wire Number Change HT1002 VT1002 Hexagon HT0_03 VT0_03 Hexagon with Wire Number HT0W03 VT0W03 Hexagon with Terminal Number HT0003 VT0003 Terminals | 395
Hexagon with Wire Number Change HT1003 VT1003 Diamond HT0_04 VT0_04 Diamond with Wire Number HT0W04 VT0W04 Diamond with Terminal Number HT0004 VT0004 Diamond with Wire Number Change HT1004 VT1004 Triangle HT0_05 VT0_05 396 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Triangle with Wire Number HT0W05 VT0W05 Triangle with Terminal Number HT0005 VT0005 Triangle with Wire Number Change HT1005 VT1005 In-Line Wire Labels Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description In-Line Wire Label HT0_LGENERIC VT0_LGENERIC In-Line Wire Labels | 397
Wire Number Copy HT0_WGENERIC VT0_WGENERIC Power Distribution Blocks Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description 3 Terminal, 0.5 Spacing HDB1350 VDB1350 3 Terminal, 0.75 Spacing HDB1375 VDB1375 3 Terminal, 1.
Connectors - No Wirenumber Changes Connectors - No Wirenumber Changes Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Plug/Jack HC01PJ VC01PJ Jack/Plug HC01JP VC01JP Plug/Jack (Combined Tag-Pin) HC01PJ1 VC01PJ1 Jack/Plug (Combined Tag-Pin) HC01JP1 VC01JP1 2nd+ Plug/Jack HC02PJ VC02PJ Connectors - No Wirenumber Changes | 399
2nd+ Jack/Plug HC02JP VC02JP 2nd+ Plug/Jack (Combined Tag-Pin) HC02PJ1 VC02PJ1 2nd+ Jack/Plug (Combined Tag-Pin) HC02JP1 VC02JP1 Connectors - No Wirenumber Changes - Spare/Single Side Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Plug Right or up HC01P_ VC01P_ Jack Left or Down HC01_J VC01_J 400 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Plug Right or up (Combined tag/pin) HC01P_1 VC01P_1 Jack Left or Down (Combined) HC01_J1 VC01_J1 2nd+ Plug Right or up HC02P_ VC02P_ 2nd+ Jack Left or Down HC02_J VC02_J 2nd+ Plug Right or up (Combined) HC02P_1 VC02P_1 2nd+ Jack Left or Down (Combined) HC02_J1 VC02_J1 Connectors - No Wirenumber Changes | 401
Jack Right or up HC01J_ VC01J_ Plug Left or Down HC01_P VC01_P Jack Right or up (Combined) HC01J_1 VC01J_1 Plug Left or Down (Combined) HC01_P1 VC01_P1 2nd+ Jack Right or up HC02J_ VC02J_ 2nd+ Plug Left or Down HC02_P VC02_P 402 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
2nd+ Jack Right or up (Combined) HC02J_1 VC02J_1 2nd+ Plug Left or Down (Combined) HC02_P1 VC02_P1 Connectors - Wirenumber Changes Connectors - Wirenumber Changes Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Plug/Jack HCN1PJ VCN1PJ Jack/Plug HCN1JP VCN1JP Connectors - Wirenumber Changes | 403
2nd+ Plug/Jack HCN2PJ VCN2PJ 2nd+ Jack/Plug HCN2JP VCN2JP Connectors - Wirenumber Changes - Spare/Single Side Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Plug Right or up HCN1P_ VCN1P_ Jack Left or Down HCN1_J VCN1_J Plug Right or up (Combined tag/pin) HCN1P_1 VCN1P_1 404 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Jack Left or Down (Combined) HCN1_J1 VCN1_J1 2nd+ Plug Right or up HCN2P_ VCN2P_ 2nd+ Jack Left or Down HCN2_J VCN2_J 2nd+ Plug Right or up (Combined) HCN2P_1 VCN2P_1 2nd+ Jack Left or Down (Combined) HCN2_J1 VCN2_J1 Jack Right or up HCN1J_ VCN1J_ Connectors - Wirenumber Changes | 405
Plug Left or Down HCN1_P VCN1_P Jack Right or up (Combined) HCN1J_1 VCN1J_1 Plug Left or Down (Combined) HCN1_P1 VCN1_P1 2nd+ Jack Right or up HCN2J_ VCN2J_ 2nd+ Plug Left or Down HCN2_P VCN2_P 2nd+ Jack Right or up (Combined) HCN2J_1 VCN2J_1 406 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
2nd+ Plug Left or Down (Combined) HCN2_P1 VCN2_P1 Limit Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Limit Switch Normally Open HLS11 VLS11 Limit Switch Normally Closed HLS12 VLS12 Limit Switch Normally Open Held Closed HLS11H VLS11H Limit Switch Normally Closed Held Open HLS12H VLS12H Limit Switches | 407
2nd+ Normally Open Contact HLS21 VLS21 2nd+ Normally Closed Contact HLS22 VLS22 2nd+ Normally Open Contact Held Closed HLS21H VLS21H 2nd+ Normally Closed Contact Held Open HLS22H VLS22H Pressure and Temperature Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Pressure Switch, Normally Open HPS11 VPS11 408 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Pressure Switch, Normally Closed HPS12 VPS12 Temperature Switch, Normally Open HTS11 VTS11 Temperature Switch, Normally Closed HTS12 VTS12 2nd+ Pressure Normally Open Contact HPS21 VPS21 2nd+ Pressure Normally Closed Contact HPS22 VPS22 2nd+ Temperature Normally Open Contact HTS21 VTS21 Pressure and Temperature Switches | 409
2nd+ Temperature Normally Closed Contact HTS22 VTS22 Flow and Level Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Flow Switch Normally Open HFS11 VFS11 Flow Switch Normally Closed HFS12 VFS12 Level Switch Normally Open HFL11 VFL11 Level Switch Normally Closed HFL12 VFL12 410 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
2nd+ Flow Normally Open Contact HFS21 VFS21 2nd+ Flow Normally Closed Contact HFS22 VFS22 2nd+ Level Normally Open Contact HFL21 VFL21 2nd+ Level Normally Closed Contact HFL22 VFL22 Miscellaneous Switches Miscellaneous Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Miscellaneous Switches | 411
Proximity Switch Normally Open HPX11 VPX11 Proximity Switch Normally Closed HPX12 VPX12 2nd+ Proximity Normally Open Contact HPX21 VPX21 2nd+ Proximity Normally Closed Contact HPX22 VPX22 Foot Switch Normally Open HFT11 VFT11 Foot Switch Normally Closed HFT12 VFT12 412 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
2nd+ Foot Normally Open Contact HFT21 VFT21 2nd+ Foot Normally Closed Contact HFT22 VFT22 Toggle Switch Normally Open HTG11 VTG11 Toggle Switch Normally Closed HTG12 2nd+ Toggle Normally Open Contact HTG21 VTG21 2nd+ Toggle Normally Closed Contact HTG22 VTG22 Miscellaneous Switches | 413
Pull cord Switch Normally Open HPC11 VPC11 Pull cord Switch Normally Closed HPC12 VPC12 2nd+ Pull Cord Normally Open Contact HPC21 VPC21 2nd+ Pull Cord Normally Closed Contact HPC22 VPC22 A-Plug Normally Open HPG11 VPG11 A-Plug Normally Closed HPG12 VPG12 414 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
2nd+ A-Plug Normally Open Contact HPG21 VPG21 2nd+ A-Plug Normally Closed Contact HPG22 VPG22 Photo Eye Switch Normally Open HPE11 VPE11 Photo Eye Switch Normally Closed HPE12 VPE12 Single Pole Double Throw Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Single Pole Double Throw Maintained HTG112 VTG112 Single Pole Double Throw Switches | 415
Single Pole Double Throw Return From Down HTG112D VTG112D Single Pole Double Throw Return From Up HTG112U VTG112U Single Pole Double Throw Return From Both HTG112B VTG112B 2nd+ Maintained HTG212 VTG212 2nd+ Return From Down HTG212D VTG212D 2nd+ Return From Up HTG212U VTG212U 416 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
2nd+ Return From Both HTG212B VTG212B Single Pole Double Throw Maintained HTG112R VTG112R Single Pole Double Throw Return From Down HTG112DR VTG112DR Single Pole Double Throw Return From Up HTG112UR VTG112UR Single Pole Double Throw Return From Both HTG112BR VTG112BR 2nd+ Maintained HTG212R VTG212R Single Pole Double Throw Switches | 417
2nd+ Return From Down HTG212DR VTG212DR 2nd+ Return From Up HTG212UR VTG212UR 2nd+ Return From Both HTG212BR VTG212BR Solenoids Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Solenoid HSV1 VSV1 Manual Reset Solenoid HSV1M VSV1M 418 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Normally Open Contact HSV21 VSV21 Normally Closed Contact HSV22 VSV22 Instrumentation Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Thermocouple HTC1L VTC1L Thermocouple HTC1R VTC1R Thermocouple with Terminal Board HTC1LTB VTC1LTB Instrumentation | 419
Thermocouple with Terminal Board HTC1RTB VTC1RTB Ball valve HBV1M VBV1M Gate valve HGV1M VGV1M Globe valve HLV1M VLV1M Volt Meter HVM1 VVM1 Amp Meter HAM1 VAM1 420 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Bell HAN1B VAN1B Buzzer HAN1Z VAN1Z Horn HAN1H VAN1H Ground HGND2 VGND2 Earth/Ground HGND1 VGND1 Miscellaneous | 421
Battery HBA1 VBA1 Battery (Flipped) HBA1R VBA1R Suppressor (tag) HSU1 VSU1 Suppressor HSU0 VSU0 Enclosure Light HLT1ENC VLT1ENC Splice HSP1001 VSP1001 422 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Electronics Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Fixed Resistor HRE1 VRE1 Fixed Resistor (Box) HRE1B VRE1B Fixed Resistor with Pins HRE1T VRE1T Fixed Resistor (Box) with Pins HRE1TB VRE1TB Variable Resistor HVR1TZ VVR1TZ Electronics | 423
Variable Resistor HVR1TZR VVR1TZR Variable Resistor HVR1 VVR1 Variable Resistor HVR1R VVR1R Diode HDI1 VDI1 Diode HDI1R VDI1R Diode with Pins HDI1T VDI1T 424 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Diode with Pins HDI1TR VDI1TR Zener Diode HDI1Z VDI1Z Zener Diode HDI1ZR VDI1ZR Zener Diode with Pins HDI1TZ VDI1TZ Zener Diode with Pins HDI1TZR VDI1TZR Capacitor HCA1 VCA1 Electronics | 425
Capacitor with Pins HCA1T VCA1T Cable Markers Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Cable Marker HW01 VW01 2nd+ Child Marker HW02 VW02 Extra Marker HT0_CABLE VT0_CABLE Twisted Pair HT0_TW VT0_TW 426 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Power Receptacles Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Duplex Receptacle HCN1RDUP VCN1RDUP Single Receptacle HCN1RSGL VCN1RSGL Generic Device Boxes Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description 4 Terminals HDV1TFL VDV1TFL 3 Terminals HDV1TC VDV1TC Power Receptacles | 427
3 Terminals HDV1TB VDV1TB 2 Terminals HDV1T6 VDV1T6 4 Terminals HDV1TF VDV1TF 3 Terminals HDV1TE VDV1TE 3 Terminals HDV1T7 VDV1T7 Stand-alone Cross-reference Symbols Symbol Description 428 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Source Rectangle HA2S1_REF Source Hexagon HA3S1_REF Source Ellipse HA5S1_REF Destination Rectangle HA2D1_REF Destination Hexagon HA3D1_REF Destination Ellipse HA5D1_REF Stand-alone Cross-reference Symbols | 429
Wire Arrows - Reference Only Symbol Description Generic Arrow - Left HA1X1 Generic Arrow - Up HA1X2 Generic Arrow - Right HA1X3 Generic Arrow - Down HA1X4 Arrow Tail - Left HA1X1Y 430 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Arrow Tail - Up HA1X2Y Arrow Tail - Right HA1X3Y Arrow Tail - Down HA1X4Y One-Line Components Connector Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Jack/Plug HC01PJ_1- VC01PJ_1- Motor Control Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description One-Line Components | 431
Circuit breaker HCB11_1- VCB11_1- Motor circuit protector HCB11M_1- VCB11M_1- Thermal circuit breaker HCB11TH_1- VCB11TH_1- Disconnect HDS11_1- VDS11_1- Fused disconnect HDS11F_1- VDS11F_1- Fuse HFU1_1- VFU1_1- 432 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Motor HMO13_1- VMO13_1- Motor starter HMS11_1- VMS11_1- Overload HOL1_1- VOL1_1- Capacitor VCA113_1- Transformer Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Transformer 1 HXF1_1- VXF1_1- Transformer | 433
Transformer 2 HXF2_1- VXF2_1- Terminal Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Square terminal HT0001_1- VT0001_1- Round terminal HT0002_1- VT0002_1- Cable Marker Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Cable marker HW01_1- VW01_1- 434 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
Bus-tap Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Bus-tap - main/dot HDV1_BT_1- VDV1_BT_1- Bus-tap - dual/tee HDV1_BTT_1- VDV1_BTT_1- Bus-tap - dual/corner HDV1_BTL_1- VDV1_BTL_1- Miscellaneous Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Power receptacle HC01WR_1- VC01WR_1- Generic load HDV1_1- VDV1_1- Bus-tap | 435
436
7 IEC Symbols Push Buttons Push Buttons Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Push Button Normally Open HPB11 VPB11 Push Button Normally Closed HPB12 VPB12 Push Button Normally Open Latching HPB11L VPB11L 437
Push Button Normally Closed Latching HPB12L VPB12L Mushroom Head Normally Open HPB11M VPB11M Mushroom Head Normally Closed HPB12M VPB12M Mushroom Head Normally Open Latching HPB11ML VPB11ML Mushroom Head Normally Closed Latching HPB12ML VPB12ML Mushroom Head Normally Open Twist Latch HPB11MTL VPB11MTL 438 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Mushroom Head Normally Closed Twist Latch HPB12MTL VPB12MTL Mushroom Head Normally Open Latching, Pull to Disengage HPB11S80 VPB11S80 Mushroom Head Normally Closed Latching, Pull to Disengage HPB12S80 VPB12S80 Mushroom Head Normally Open Latching, Key Operated HPB11S82 VPB11S82 Mushroom Head Normally Closed Latching, Key Operated HPB12S82 VPB12S82 Normally Open Push Button Recessed HPB11RE VPB11RE Push Buttons | 439
Normally Closed Push Button Recessed HPB12RE VPB12RE Normally Open Push Button Recessed Latched HPB11REL VPB11REL Normally Closed Push Button Recessed Latched HPB12REL VPB12REL Normally Open Push Button Positive Make HPB11PM VPB11PM Normally Closed Push Button Positive Break HPB12PB VPB12PB 2nd+ Normally Open Contact HPB21 VPB21 440 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
2nd+ Normally Closed Contact HPB22 VPB22 Illuminated Push Button Normally Open HPB11S75 VPB11S75 Illuminated Push Button Normally Closed HPB12S75 VPB12S75 Illuminated Push Buttons Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Non-Auto Return Illuminated Push Button Normally Open HPB11S76 VPB11S76 Non-Auto return Illuminated Push Button Normally Closed HPB12S76 VPB12S76 Illuminated Push Buttons | 441
Selector Switches Selector Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description 2 Position Maintain, Normally Open HSS112 VSS112 2 Position Maintain, Normally Closed HSS122 VSS122 2 Position Normally Open Return From Left HSS112L VSS112L 2 Position Normally Closed Return From Left HSS122L VSS122L 2 Position Normally Open Return From Right HSS112R VSS112R 442 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
2 Position Normally Closed Return From Right HSS122R VSS122R 2 Position Normally Open with Lamp HSW11S77 VSW11S77 2 Position Normally Closed with Lamp HSW12S77 VSW12S77 Normally Open Contact with Manual Unlatching HSS2121F VSS2121F Normally Open Contact with Maintained Position HSS2122F VSS2122F Normally Open Anticipated Contact HSS217F VSS217F Selector Switches | 443
Normally Open Delayed Contact HSS218F VSS218F Normally Closed Contact with Manual Unlatching HSS2221F VSS2221F Normally Closed Contact with Maintained Position HSS2222F VSS2222F Normally Closed Anticipated Contact HSS227F VSS227F Normally Closed Delayed Contact HSS228F VSS228F Non-Latched, Normally Open HSS11NL VSS11NL 444 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Non-Latched, Normally Closed HSS12NL VSS12NL 2nd+ Normally Open Contact HSS21 VSS21 2nd+ Normally Closed Contact HSS22 VSS22 3 Position Selector Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description 3 Position Maintain, Normally Open HSS113 VSS113 3 Position Maintain, Normally Closed HSS123 VSS123 3 Position Selector Switches | 445
3 Position Normally Open Return From Left HSS113L VSS113L 3 Position Normally Closed Return From Left HSS123L VSS123L 3 Position Normally Open Return From Right HSS113R VSS113R 3 Position Normally Closed Return From Right HSS123R VSS123R 3 Position Normally Open Return From Both HSS113B VSS113B 3 Position Normally Closed Return From Both HSS123B VSS123B 446 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
3 Position Normally Open Neutral 0 HSS11S31 VSS11S31 3 Position Normally Closed Neutral 0 HSS12S31 VSS12S31 3 Position Normally Open Neutral 1 HSS11S32 HSS11S32 3 Position Normally Closed Neutral 1 HSS12S32 HSS12S32 3 Position Normally Open Neutral 2 HSS11S33 HSS11S33 3 Position Normally Closed Neutral 2 HSS12S33 HSS12S33 3 Position Selector Switches | 447
3 Position Normally Open Key Operated Neutral 0 HSS11S40 HSS11S40 3 Position Normally Closed Key Operated Neutral 0 HSS12S40 HSS12S40 3 Position Normally Open Key Operated Neutral 1 HSS11S41 HSS11S41 3 Position Normally Closed Key Operated Neutral 1 HSS12S41 HSS12S41 3 Position Normally Open Key Operated Neutral 2 HSS11S42 HSS11S42 3 Position Normally Closed Key Operated Neutral 2 HSS12S42 HSS12S42 448 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
3 Stable Position Normally Open Key Operated Neutral 0 HSS11S43 HSS11S43 3 Stable Position Normally Closed Key Operated Neutral 0 HSS12S43 HSS12S43 3 Stable Position Normally Open Key Operated Neutral 1 HSS11S44 HSS11S44 3 Stable Position Normally Closed Key Operated Neutral 1 HSS12S44 HSS12S44 3 Stable Position Normally Open Key Operated Neutral 2 HSS11S45 HSS11S45 3 Stable Position Normally Closed Key Operated Neutral 2 HSS12S45 HSS12S45 3 Position Selector Switches | 449
4 Position Selector Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description 4 Position Maintain, Normally Open HSS114 VSS114 4 Position Maintain, Normally Closed HSS124 VSS124 4 Position Key Selector Normally Open HSS11S46 VSS11S46 4 Position Key Selector Normally Closed HSS12S46 VSS12S46 4 Stable Positions Key Selector Normally Open HSS11S49 VSS11S49 450 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
4 Stable Positions Key Selector Normally Closed HSS12S49 VSS12S49 4 Stable Positions Key Selector Normally Open-Rotating in 2 Ways HSS11S50 VSS11S50 4 Stable Positions Key Selector Normally Closed-Rotating in 2 Ways HSS12S50 VSS12S50 4 Stable Positions Key Selector Normally Open-Rotating CW HSS11S51 VSS11S51 4 Stable Positions Key Selector Normally Closed-Rotating CW HSS12S51 VSS12S51 4 Position Selector Switches | 451
Breakers, Disconnects 1 Pole Circuit Breakers Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Circuit Breaker 1 Pole HCB1 VCB1 Thermal Circuit Breaker HCB11TH VCB11TH Current Limit/Thermal HCB11THI VCB11THI Magneto/Thermal HCB11Q9 VCB11Q9 Magneto/Thermal with Differential HCB11Q13 VCB11Q13 452 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Differential HCB11Q17 VCB11Q17 With Current Protection HCB11Q29 VCB11Q29 With Current Protection and Lack of Voltage Protection HCB11Q33 VCB11Q33 With Max. Current and Min. Voltage Protection HCB11Q37 VCB11Q37 With Max. Thermal/Current and Min. Voltage Protection HCB11Q41 VCB11Q41 With Max. Thermal and Min.
With Max. Thermal and Current Protection HCB11Q21 VCB11Q21 With Max.
Circuit Breaker 2nd+ Pole HCB2 VCB2 Thermal 2nd+ Pole HCB21TH VCB21TH Current Limit/Thermal 2nd+ Pole HCB21THI VCB21THI Disconnect 2nd+ Pole HDS21 VDS21 Disconnect Normally Open Auxiliary Contact HDS21AUX VDS21AUX Disconnect Normally Closed Auxiliary Contact HDS22AUX VDS22AUX 2nd+ Pole Circuit Breakers | 455
Auto Return HCB2120F VCB2120F With Mechanical Block and Manual Unlatching HCB2121F VCB2121F With Maintained Position HCB2122F VCB2122F Anticipated Contact HCB217F VCB217F Delayed Contact HCB218F VCB218F Circuit Breaker Normally Open Auxiliary Contact HCB21 VCB21 456 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Circuit Breaker Normally Closed Auxiliary Contact HCB22 VCB22 Auto Return HCB2220F VCB2220F With Mechanical Block and Manual Unlatching HCB2221F VCB2221F With Maintained Position HCB2222F VCB2222F Anticipated Contact HCB227F VCB227F Delayed Contact HCB228F VCB228F 2nd+ Pole Circuit Breakers | 457
2 P Magneto-Thermal Switch, 1P Protected HCB1Q142 VCB1Q142 4 P Magneto-Thermal Switch, 3P Protected HCB1Q143 VCB1Q143 2 P Magneto-Thermal Switch with Differential, 1P Protected HCB1Q144 VCB1Q144 4 P Magneto-Thermal Switch with Differential, 3P Protected HCB1Q145 VCB1Q145 3 P 2 Way Disconnect Switch with Fuses HDS1Q93 VDS1Q93 Power Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol 458 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols Description
1P with Semiconductors HCB11Q53 VCB11Q53 1P with Semiconductors - unidirectional HCB11Q57 VCB11Q57 2P Power Switch HCB11Q50 VCB11Q50 Fusible Disconnects Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Fused switch HDS11F VDS11F 2nd+ Pole Fused Switch HDS21F VDS21F Fusible Disconnects | 459
Auxiliary Contact, Normally Open HDS21AUX VDS21AUX Auxiliary Contact, Normally Closed HDS22AUX VDS22AUX 1 Pole on load HDS1OL VDS1OL 2nd+ Pole on load HDS2OL VDS2OL 1 Phase Disconnect with Fuse HDS11Q81 VDS11Q81 1 Phase maneuver Switch/Disconnect with Fuse HDS11Q85 VDS11Q85 460 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Disconnect 1 Pole Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Disconnect 1 Pole HDS11Q65 VDS11Q65 Disconnect 1 Pole Non-Fused HDS11 VDS11 Maneuver Switch with Fuse HDS11Q119 VDS11Q119 PE Earthing Switch HDS11Q123 VDS11Q123 Power Auto Switch/Disconnect HDS11Q5 VDS11Q5 Disconnect 1 Pole | 461
Maneuver Switch/Disconnect HDS11Q69 VDS11Q69 Disconnect with Lock Device HDS11Q73 VDS11Q73 Switch/Disconnect with Lock Device HDS11Q77 VDS11Q77 Two Way Disconnect with 3 Positions HDS11Q89 VDS11Q89 Fuses, Transformers, Reactors Reactors Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol 462 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols Description
Reactors - General HRT1 VRT1 Reactors - Iron cored HRT1IC VRT1IC Inductor With Magnetic Core Air Gap HRT1L3 VRT1L3 Inductor With Magnetic Core Continuously Variable HRT1L4 VRT1L4 Fuses Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Fuse HFU1 VFU1 Fuses | 463
Fuse Auxiliary Contact, Normally Open HFU21 VFU21 Fuse Auxiliary Contact, Normally Closed HFU22 VFU22 Stiker HFU1ST VFU1ST With alarm contact HFU1AC VFU1AC With separate alarm contact HFU1LS VFU1LS 1 Pole - Live Side HFU2LS VFU2LS 464 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Fuse Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description 1 Pole HFU1FS VFU1FS 1 Pole Child HFU2FS VFU2FS Transformers Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Transformer HXF1 VXF1 Transformer Dual HXF1D VXF1D Fuse Switches | 465
Transformer Dual (flipped) HXF1DR VXF1DR Potential Transformer HXF1PT VXF1PT Single phase auto HXF1P1AUTO VXF1P1AUTO 1 Phase Autotransformer HXF1T18 VXF1T18 3 Phase Autotransformer Star Connected HXF1T19 VXF1T19 Power Transformer 1 with 2 Windings HXF1T2 VXF1T2 466 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Power Transformer 2 with 2 Windings HXF1T4 VXF1T4 Power Transformer with 2 Windings and Screen HXF1T3 VXF1T3 Power Transformer with 3 Windings HXF1T6 VXF1T6 Adjustable Power Transformer with 2 Windings HXF1T5 VXF1T5 Voltage Transformer HXF1T34 VXF1T34 Current Transformers Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Current Transformers | 467
CT Current Transformer HXF1CT VXF1CT CT (Flipped) HXF1CTR VXF1CTR Current Transformer 2 HXF1T1 VXF1T1 With 2 Secondaries - Independent Magnetic Circuits HXF1T30 VXF1T30 With 2 Secondaries - Common Magnetic Circuit HXF1T31 VXF1T31 With Tapped Secondary Winding HXF1T32 VXF1T32 468 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
With Conductor Indication HXF1T33 VXF1T33 3 Phase Transformers Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description 3 Phase HXF1P3 VXF1P3 3 Phase Star/Delta HXF1P3SD VXF1P3SD 3 Phase Star/Delta Primary with Sockets HXF1T11 VXF1T11 3 Phase Star/Zigzag HXF1T12 VXF1T12 3 Phase Transformers | 469
3 Phase Delta/Delta HXF1T13 VXF1T13 3 Phase Delta/Star HXF1T14 VXF1T14 3 Phase Star/Star/Delta with 3 Windings HXF1T15 VXF1T15 3 Phase Delta/Delta HXF1T20 VXF1T20 3 Phase Star/Star HXF1T7 VXF1T7 3 Phase Star/Star Secondary with Neutral HXF1T8 VXF1T8 470 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
3 Phase Star/Star Primary with Plugs HXF1T9 VXF1T9 3 Phase Dy5 HXF1T21 VXF1T21 3 Phase Dd6 HXF1T22 VXF1T22 3 Phase Yd5 HXF1T23 VXF1T23 3 Phase Yy6 HXF1T24 VXF1T24 3 Phase Yd11 HXF1T25 VXF1T25 3 Phase Transformers | 471
3 Phase Dy11 HXF1T26 VXF1T26 3 Phase Dz0 HXF1T27 VXF1T27 3 Phase Yz5 HXF1T28 VXF1T28 3 Phase Dz6 HXF1T29 VXF1T29 3 Phase Yz11 HXF1T30 VXF1T30 472 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Relays, Contacts Relays and Contacts Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Relay Normally Open Contact HCR21 VCR21 Relay Normally Closed Contact HCR22 VCR22 Relay Form C HCR23R VCR23R Relay Form C Flipped HCR23 VCR23 Relay Coil HCR1 VCR1 Relays, Contacts | 473
Latch Relay Coil HLR1 VLR1 Latch relay (child coil) HLR2 VLR2 Solid State HCR1SSD VCR1SSD High Speed HCR1HSP VCR1HSP AC Unaffected HCR1ACU VCR1ACU AC HCR1AC VCR1AC 474 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Polarized HCR1POL VCR1POL Measuring HCR1MSR VCR1MSR With Mechanical Block and Manual Unlatching HCR2121F VCR2121F With Maintained Position HCR2122F VCR2122F Anticipated Contact HCR217F VCR217F Delayed Contact HCR218F VCR218F Relays and Contacts | 475
With Mechanical Block and Manual Unlatching HCR2221F VCR2221F With Maintained Position HCR2222F VCR2222F Anticipated Contact HCR227F VCR227F Delayed Contact HCR228F VCR228F Magnetic Protection HCR1F34 VCR1F34 Relays with Suppression Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol 476 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols Description
Relay with Integrated Block Diode HCR1K33 VCR1K33 Relay with Integrated Block Diode and Integrated LED HCR1K35 VCR1K35 Relay with Capacitor HCR1K37 VCR1K37 Relay with RC Circuit HCR1K39 VCR1K39 Current Protection Relays Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Come Back Current Protection HCR1F28 VCR1F28 Current Protection Relays | 477
Differential Current Protection HCR1F29 VCR1F29 Differential Current Protection - Relative Value HCR1F30 VCR1F30 Maximum Current Protection HCR1F25 VCR1F25 Minimum Current Protection HCR1F26 VCR1F26 Minimum and Maximum Current Protection HCR1F27 VCR1F27 In Neutral HCR1F32 VCR1F32 478 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
In Neutral between 2 Multi-Phase Systems HCR1F33 VCR1F33 Ground Failure Current Protection HCR1F37 VCR1F37 Voltage Protection Relays Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Minimum Voltage Protection HCR1F35 VCR1F35 Maximum Voltage Protection HCR1F36 VCR1F36 Residual Voltage Protection HCR1F38 VCR1F38 Voltage Protection Relays | 479
Ground Failure Voltage Protection HCR1F31 VCR1F31 Lack of Voltage Protection HCR1F39 VCR1F39 Counter Relays Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Counter No Reset HCR1CNN VCR1CNN Counter Manual Reset HCR1CNM VCR1CNM Counter Electronic Reset HCR1CNE VCR1CNE 480 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Miscellaneous Relays Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Frequency Relay HCR1F40 VCR1F40 Minimum Impedance Relay HCR1F41 VCR1F41 Relay Sensing Lack of Phase in Three Phase System HCR1F42 VCR1F42 Minimum Active Power Relay HCR1F43 VCR1F43 Insulating Relay HCR1F44 VCR1F44 Miscellaneous Relays | 481
Quick Relay Coil HCR1K1 VCR1K1 Mechanical Resonance Relay HCR1K11 VCR1K11 Time Delay Relays Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description ON Delay Coil HTD1N VTD1N OFF Delay Coil HTD1F VTD1F ON/OFF Delay HCR1OOD VCR1OOD 482 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
3 Clamp Delay Relay - Energized HTD1K25 VTD1K25 3 Clamp Delay Relay - De-energized HTD1K27 VTD1K27 3 Clamp Delay Relay - Energized/De-energized HTD1K29 VTD1K29 Latency Relay HTD1K5 VTD1K5 ON Delay Normally Open(Delay Close) HTD21N VTD21N ON Delay Normally Closed(Delay Open) HTD22N VTD22N Time Delay Relays | 483
OFF Delay Normally Open (Instant Close/Delay Open) HTD21F VTD21F OFF Delay Normally Closed (Instant Open/Delay Close) HTD22F VTD22F Normally Open Contact (Instant) HTD21I VTD21I Normally Closed Contact (Instant) HTD22I VTD22I Normally Open Contact (Instant-for Delay Close) HTD21IF VTD21IF Normally Closed Contact (Instant-for Delay Close) HTD22IF VTD22IF 484 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Normally Open Delay ON/OFF HTD21DOO VTD21DOO Normally Closed Delay ON/OFF HTD22DOO VTD22DOO Motor Control Motor Control Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Overload, 1 Pole HOL1 VOL1 2nd+ Overload Pole HOL2 VOL2 Motor Control | 485
2nd+ Overload, Normally Open Contact HOL21 VOL21 2nd+ Overload, Normally Closed Contact HOL22 VOL22 3 Phase KVAR Capacitor HCA113 VCA113 NOTE Multi-pole devices are constructed using parent and child symbols to adhere to the underlying ladder spacing.
1 Phase Motor with Fan HMO1M3M VMO1M3M 1 Phase AC Motor HMO1M9 VMO1M9 1 Phase AC Motor in Series Connection HMO1M10 VMO1M10 1 Phase Synchronous AC Motor HMO1M16 VMO1M16 3 Phase Motors Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description 3 Phase Motor HMO13 VMO13 3 Phase Motors | 487
3 Phase Motor (4 Connections) HMO14 VMO14 3 Phase Motor with Fan HMO1M2 VMO1M2 3 Phase Asynchro Motor with Series Excitation HMO1M3 VMO1M3 3 Phase Asynchro Wound-Rotor Motor HMO1M4 VMO1M4 3 Phase Asynchro Star Connected Stator Auto Starter on Rotor HMO1M5 VMO1M5 3 Phase Asynchro Motor - 6 Pole HMO1M11 VMO1M11 488 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
3 Phase Synchronous AC Motor HMO1M17 VMO1M17 DC Motors Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description DC Motor HMO1M6 VMO1M6 DC Motor with Permanent Magnets HMO1M13 VMO1M13 DC Motor - Linear with Permanent Magnets HMO1M14 VMO1M14 DC Motor - Stepping with Permanent Magnets HMO1M15 VMO1M15 DC Motors | 489
DC Motor - Series Excitation HMO1M7 VMO1M7 DC Motor - Derived Excitation HMO1M8 VMO1M8 DC Motor - Independent Excitation HMO1M12 VMO1M12 Generators Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description DC Generator HPW1G9 VPW1G9 DC Generator with Compound Excitation HPW1G10 VPW1G10 490 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
3 Phase Synchro Generator with Permanent Magnets HPW1G6 VPW1G6 3 Phase Synchro Generator 1 HPW1G7 VPW1G7 3 Phase Synchro Generator 2 HPW1G8 VPW1G8 Motor Starters Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Motor Starter Coil HMS1 VMS1 Motor Starter 1 Pole Normally Open (Power) HMS21P VMS21P Motor Starters | 491
Motor Starter 1 Pole Normally Closed (Power) HMS22P VMS22P 2nd+ Motor Starter Normally Open HMS21 VMS21 2nd+ Motor Starter Normally Closed HMS22 VMS22 NOTE Multi-pole devices are constructed using parent and child symbols to adhere to the underlying ladder spacing.
Neon Lamp HLT1H22 VLT1H22 Incandescent Lamp HLT1H24 VLT1H24 Standard Lights Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Red Standard HLT1R VLT1R Green Standard HLT1G VLT1G Orange Standard HLT1A VLT1A Standard Lights | 493
Yellow Standard HLT1Y VLT1Y Blue Standard HLT1B VLT1B White Standard HLT1W VLT1W Clear Standard HLT1C VLT1C NOTE Lights receive text to indicate the color at the time of insertion.
Indicator Lamp Energized by Built-in Transformer HLT1H23A VLT1H23A Red HLT1RT VLT1RT Green HLT1GT VLT1GT Orange HLT1AT VLT1AT Yellow HLT1YT VLT1YT Blue HLT1BT VLT1BT Transformer Lights | 495
White HLT1WT VLT1WT Clear HLT1CT VLT1CT NOTE Lights receive text to indicate the color at the time of insertion.
Yellow Press To Test HLT1YP VLT1YP Blue Press To Test HLT1BP VLT1BP White Press To Test HLT1WP VLT1WP Clear Press To Test HLT1CP VLT1CP NOTE Lights receive text to indicate the color at the time of insertion.
LED Indicator Lamp HLT1H25 VLT1H25 Red HLT1RL VLT1RL Red 180 HLT1RLR VLT1RLR Green HLT1GL VLT1GL Green 180 HLT1GLR VLT1GLR Orange HLT1AL VLT1AL 498 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Orange 180 HLT1ALR VLT1ALR Yellow HLT1YL VLT1YL Yellow 180 HLT1YLR VLT1YLR Blue HLT1BL VLT1BL Blue 180 HLT1BLR VLT1BLR White HLT1WL VLT1WL LEDs | 499
White 180 HLT1WLR VLT1WLR Clear HLT1CL VLT1CL Clear 180 HLT1CLR VLT1CLR NOTE Lights receive text to indicate the color at the time of insertion.
Orange HBE1AFL VBE1AFL Yellow HBE1YFL VBE1YFL Blue HBE1BFL VBE1BFL White HBE1WFL VBE1WFL Clear HBE1CFL VBE1CFL NOTE Lights receive text to indicate the color at the time of insertion.
Beacons - Rotating Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Red HBE1RRT VBE1RRT Green HBE1GRT VBE1GRT Orange HBE1ART VBE1ART Yellow HBE1YRT VBE1YRT Blue HBE1BRT VBE1BRT 502 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
White HBE1WRT VBE1WRT Clear HBE1CRT VBE1CRT NOTE Lights receive text to indicate the color at the time of insertion.
OUT, 1st Point, 2 Wires PLCIOO2T PLCIOO2TV IN, 2nd+ Child, 1 Wire PLCIOI1 PLCIOI1V IN, 2nd+ Child, 2 Wires PLCIOI2 PLCIOI2V OUT, 2nd+ Child, 1 Wire PLCIOO1 PLCIOO1V OUT, 2nd+ Child, 2 Wires PLCIOO2 PLCIOO2V 504 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Terminals, Connectors Terminals Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Square HT0_01 VT0_01 Square with Wire Number HT0W01 VT0W01 Square with Terminal Number HT0001 VT0001 Square with Wire Number Change HT1001 VT1001 Round HT0_02 VT0_02 Terminals, Connectors | 505
Round with Wire Number HT0W02 VT0W02 Round with Terminal Number HT0002 VT0002 Round with Wire Number Change HT1002 VT1002 Hexagon HT0_03 VT0_03 Hexagon with Wire Number HT0W03 VT0W03 Hexagon with Terminal Number HT0003 VT0003 506 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Hexagon with Wire Number Change HT1003 VT1003 Diamond HT0_04 VT0_04 Diamond with Wire Number HT0W04 VT0W04 Diamond with Terminal Number HT0004 VT0004 Diamond with Wire Number Change HT1004 VT1004 Triangle HT0_05 VT0_05 Terminals | 507
Triangle with Wire Number HT0W05 VT0W05 Triangle with Terminal Number HT0005 VT0005 Triangle with Wire Number Change HT1005 VT1005 In-Line Wire Labels Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description In-Line Wire Label HT0_LGENERIC VT0_LGENERIC Wire Number Copy HT0_WGENERIC VT0_WGENERIC 508 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Power Distribution Blocks Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description 3 Terminal, 10 Unit Spacing HDB1308 VDB1308 3 Terminal, 15 Unit Spacing HDB1312 VDB1312 3 Terminal, 20 Unit Spacing HDB1316 VDB1316 Connectors - No Wirenumber Changes Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Plug/Jack HC01PJ VC01PJ Power Distribution Blocks | 509
Plug/Jack (common pin number) HC01PJ1 VC01PJ1 Plug Up or Left HC01P_ VC01P_ Jack Down or Right HC01_J VC01_J 2nd+ Plug/Jack HC02PJ VC02PJ 2nd+ Plug/Jack (common pin number) HC02PJ1 VC02PJ1 2nd+ Plug Up or Left HC02P_ VC02P_ 510 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
2nd+ Jack Down or Right HC02_J VC02_J Jack/Plug HC01JP VC01JP Jack/Plug (common pin number) HC01JP1 VC01JP1 Plug Down or Right HC01_P VC01_P Jack Up or Left HC01J_ VC01J_ 2nd+ Jack/Plug HC02JP VC02JP Connectors - No Wirenumber Changes | 511
2nd+ Jack/Plug (common pin number) HC02JP1 VC02JP1 2nd+ Plug Down or Right HC02_P VC02_P 2nd+ Jack Up or Left HC02J_ VC02J_ Plug/Jack HCN1PJ VCN1PJ Plug/Jack (common pin number) HCN1PJ1 VCN1PJ1 Plug Up or Left HC01P_ VC01P_ 512 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Jack Down or Right HC01_J VC01_J 2nd+ Plug/Jack HCN2PJ VCN2PJ 2nd+ Plug/Jack (common pin number) HCN2PJ1 VCN2PJ1 2nd+ Plug Up or Left HC02P_ VC02P_ 2nd+ Jack Down or Right HC02_J VC02_J Connectors - Wirenumber Changes Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Connectors - Wirenumber Changes | 513
Plug/Jack HCN1PJ VCN1PJ Plug/Jack (common pin number) HCN1PJ1 VCN1PJ1 Plug Up or Left HC01P_ VC01P_ Jack Down or Right HC01_J VC01_J 2nd+ Plug/Jack HCN2PJ VCN2PJ 2nd+ Plug/Jack (common pin number) HCN2PJ1 VCN2PJ1 514 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
2nd+ Plug Up or Left HC02P_ VC02P_ 2nd+ Jack Down or Right HC02_J VC02_J Jack/Plug HCN1JP VCN1JP Jack/Plug (common pin number) HCN1JP1 VCN1JP1 Plug Down or Right HC01_P VC01_P Jack Up or Left HC01J_ VC01J_ Connectors - Wirenumber Changes | 515
2nd+ Jack/Plug HCN2JP VCN2JP 2nd+ Jack/Plug (common pin number) HCN2JP1 VCN2JP1 2nd+ Plug Down or Right HC02_P VC02_P 2nd+ Jack Up or Left HC02J_ VC02J_ Limit Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Limit Switch Normally Open HLS11 VLS11 516 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Limit Switch Normally Closed HLS12 VLS12 Limit Switch, Roller Normally Open HLS11C VLS11C Limit Switch, Roller Normally Closed HLS12C VLS12C Limit Switch Normally Open - Cam Driven HLS11S13 VLS11S13 Limit Switch Normally Closed - Cam Driven HLS12S13 VLS12S13 Limit Switch Normally Open - Events Driven HLS11S16 VLS11S16 Limit Switches | 517
Limit Switch Normally Closed - Events Driven HLS12S16 VLS12S16 2 Position Switch Normally Open with Detents and Lamp HLS11S78 VLS11S78 2 Position Switch Normally Closed with Detents and Lamp HLS12S78 VLS12S78 Bi-directional Lever Actuated - Normally Open HLS11S84 VLS11S84 Bi-directional Lever Actuated - Normally Closed HLS12S84 VLS12S84 Four-directional Lever Actuated - Normally Open HLS11S85 VLS11S85 518 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Four-directional Lever Actuated - Normally Closed HLS12S85 VLS12S85 Bi-directional Lever Actuated - Normally Open with Detent HLS11S87 VLS11S87 Bi-directional Lever Actuated - Normally Closed with Detent HLS12S87 VLS12S87 Four-directional Lever Actuated - Normally Open with Detent HLS11S88 VLS11S88 Four-directional Lever Actuated - Normally Closed with Detent HLS12S88 VLS12S88 2nd+ Normally Open Contact HLS21 VLS21 Limit Switches | 519
2nd+ Normally Closed Contact HLS22 VLS22 Pressure and Temperature Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Pressure Switch, Normally Open HPS11 VPS11 Pressure Switch, Normally Closed HPS12 VPS12 Temperature Switch 1, Normally Open HTS11 VTS11 Temperature Switch 1, Normally Closed HTS12 VTS12 520 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Temperature Switch 2, Normally Open HTS11S18 VTS11S18 Temperature Switch 2, Normally Closed HTS12S18 VTS12S18 Temperature Switch 3, Normally Open HTS11S74 VTS11S74 Temperature Switch 3, Normally Closed HTS12S74 VTS12S74 2nd+ Normally Open Contact HSW21 VSW21 2nd+ Normally Closed Contact HSW22 VSW22 Pressure and Temperature Switches | 521
Proximity Switches Inductive Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Ferrous HPX1I VPX1I Ferrous Proximity Switch, Normally Open HPX11I VPX11I Ferrous Proximity Switch, Normally Closed HPX12I VPX12I Normally Open 3 Wire HPX11IN3 VPX11IN3 Normally Open 3 Wire 180 HPX11IN3R VPX11IN3R 522 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Normally Closed 3 Wire HPX12IN3 VPX12IN3 Normally Closed 3 Wire 180 HPX12IN3R VPX12IN3R Normally Open 3 Wire with connector HPX11IN3C VPX11IN3C Normally Open 3 Wire 180 with connector HPX11IN3RC VPX11IN3RC Normally Closed 3 Wire with connector HPX12IN3C VPX12IN3C Normally Closed 3 Wire 180 with connector HPX12IN3RC VPX12IN3RC Inductive Switches | 523
Capacitive Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Capacitive HPX1C VPX1C Capacitive Switch, Normally Open HPX11C VPX11C Capacitive Switch, Normally Closed HPX12C VPX12C Normally Open 3 Wire HPX11C3 VPX11C3 Normally Open 3 Wire 180 HPX11C3R VPX11C3R 524 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Normally Closed 3 Wire HPX12C3 VPX12C3 Normally Closed 3 Wire 180 HPX12C3R VPX12C3R Normally Open 3 Wire with connector HPX11C3C VPX11C3C Normally Open 3 Wire 180 with connector HPX11C3RC VPX11C3RC Normally Closed 3 Wire with connector HPX12C3C VPX12C3C Normally Closed 3 Wire 180 with connector HPX12C3RC VPX12C3RC Capacitive Switches | 525
Magnetic Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Magnetic HPX1M VPX1M Magnetic Proximity Switch, Normally Open HPX11M VPX11M Magnetic Proximity Switch, Normally Closed HPX12M VPX12M Normally Open 3 Wire HPX11M3 VPX11M3 Normally Open 3 Wire 180 HPX11M3R VPX11M3R 526 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Normally Closed 3 Wire HPX12M3 VPX12M3 Normally Closed 3 Wire 180 HPX12M3R VPX12M3R Normally Open 3 Wire with connector HPX11M3C VPX11M3C Normally Open 3 Wire 180 with connector HPX11M3RC VPX11M3RC Normally Closed 3 Wire with connector HPX12M3C VPX12M3C Normally Closed 3 Wire 180 with connector HPX12M3RC VPX12M3RC Magnetic Switches | 527
Photoelectric Emitter Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Emitter - AC Driven HPE1B14 VPE1B14 Emitter - DC Driven HPE1B15 VPE1B15 Emitter - Receiver with Form C HPE13B16SC VPE13B16SC Emitter - DC Driven HPE1B20 VPE1B20 Normally Open 4 wire HPE11PE4 VPE11PE4 528 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Normally Open 4 wire 180 HPE11PE4R VPE11PE4R Normally Closed 4 wire HPE12PE4 VPE12PE4 Normally Closed 4 wire 180 HPE12PE4R VPE12PE4R Normally Open 4 wire with connector HPE11PE4C VPE11PE4C Normally Open 4 wire 180 with connector HPE11PE4RC VPE11PE4RC Normally Closed 4 wire with connector HPE12PE4C VPE12PE4C Photoelectric Emitter Switches | 529
Normally Closed 4 wire 180 with connector HPE12PE4RC VPE12PE4RC Photoelectric Receiver Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Normally Open Receiver 2 wire HPE11PE2 VPE11PE2 Normally Closed Receiver 2 wire HPE12PE2 VPE12PE2 Normally Open Receiver 2 wire with connector HPE11PE2C VPE11PE2C Normally Closed Receiver 2 wire with connector HPE12PE2C VPE12PE2C 530 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Normally Open Receiver 3 wire HPE11PE3 VPE11PE3 Normally Open Receiver 3 wire 180 HPE11PE3R VPE11PE3R Normally Closed Receiver 3 wire HPE12PE3 VPE12PE3 Normally Closed Receiver 3 wire 180 HPE12PE3R VPE12PE3R Normally Open Receiver 3 wire with connector HPE11PE3C VPE11PE3C Normally Open Receiver 3 wire 180 with connector HPE11PE3RC VPE11PE3RC Photoelectric Receiver Switches | 531
Normally Closed Receiver 3 wire with connector HPE12PE3C VPE12PE3C Normally Closed Receiver 3 wire 180 with connector HPE12PE3RC VPE12PE3RC Normally Open Receiver - AC Driven HPE11B14 VPE11B14 Normally Closed Receiver - AC Driven HPE12B14 VPE12B14 Normally Open Receiver - DC Driven HPE11B15 VPE11B15 Normally Closed Receiver - DC Driven HPE12B15 VPE12B15 532 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Photoelectric Emitter/Receiver Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Normally Open Emitter-Receiver - DC Driven HPE11B16 VPE11B16 Normally Closed Emitter-Receiver - DC Driven HPE12B16 VPE12B16 Normally Open Emitter-Receiver AC/DC Driven 2 PIN HPE11B22 VPE11B22 Normally Closed Emitter-Receiver AC/DC Driven 2 PIN HPE12B22 VPE12B22 Normally Open Emitter-Receiver AC Driven 3 PIN HPE11B23 VPE11B23 Photoelectric Emitter/Receiver Switches | 533
Normally Closed Emitter-Receiver AC Driven 3 PIN HPE12B23 VPE12B23 Normally Open Emitter-Receiver DC Driven 3 PIN HPE11B24 VPE11B24 Normally Closed Emitter-Receiver DC Driven 3 PIN HPE12B24 VPE12B24 Normally Open Emitter-Receiver AC Driven 4 PIN HPE11B25 VPE11B25 Normally Closed Emitter-Receiver AC Driven 4 PIN HPE12B25 VPE12B25 Normally Open Emitter-Receiver DC Driven 4 PIN HPE11B26 VPE11B26 534 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Normally Closed Emitter-Receiver DC Driven 4 PIN HPE12B26 VPE12B26 FORM C Emitter-Receiver AC Driven 5 PIN HPE13B25SC VPE13B25SC FORM C Emitter-Receiver DC Driven 5 PIN HPE13B26SC VPE13B26SC Ultrasonic Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Ultrasonic HPX1U VPX1U Ultrasonic Switch, Normally Open HPX11U VPX11U Ultrasonic Switches | 535
Ultrasonic Switch, Normally Closed HPX12U VPX12U Normally Open 3 Wire HPX11U3 VPX11U3 Normally Open 3 Wire 180 HPX11U3R VPX11U3R Normally Closed 3 Wire HPX12U3 VPX12U3 Normally Closed 3 Wire 180 HPX12U3R VPX12U3R Normally Open 3 Wire with connector HPX11U3C VPX11U3C 536 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Normally Open 3 Wire 180 with connector HPX11U3RC VPX11U3RC Normally Closed 3 Wire with connector HPX12U3C VPX12U3C Normally Closed 3 Wire 180 with connector HPX12U3RC VPX12U3RC Touch Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Touch HPX1TS VPX1TS Touch Sense Proximity Switch, Normally Open HPX11TS VPX11TS Touch Switches | 537
Touch Sense Proximity Switch, Normally Closed HPX12TS VPX12TS Normally Open 3 Wire HPX11TS3 VPX11TS3 Normally Open 3 Wire 180 HPX11TS3R VPX11TS3R Normally Closed 3 Wire HPX12TS3 VPX12TS3 Normally Closed 3 Wire 180 HPX12TS3R VPX12TS3R Normally Open 3 Wire with Connector HPX11TS3C VPX11TS3C 538 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Normally Open 3 Wire 180 with Connector HPX11TS3RC VPX11TS3RC Normally Closed 3 Wire with Connector HPX12TS3C VPX12TS3C Normally Closed 3 Wire 180 with connector HPX12TS3RC VPX12TS3RC Miscellaneous Switches Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Generic Switch, Normally Open HSW11 VSW11 Generic Switch, Normally Closed HSW12 VSW12 Miscellaneous Switches | 539
Float/Level Switch, Normally Open HFL11 VFL11 Float/Level Switch, Normally Closed HFL12 VFL12 Key Switch, Normally Open HPB11KS VPB11KS Key Switch, Normally Closed HPB12KS VPB12KS Key Switch Latched, Normally Open HPB11KSL VPB11KSL Key Switch Latched, Normally Closed HPB12KSL VPB12KSL 540 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Pull Cord Switch, Normally Open HPC11 VPC11 Pull Cord Switch, Normally Closed HPC12 VPC12 Pull Cord Switch Latched, Normally Open HPC11L VPC11L Pull Cord Switch Latched, Normally Closed HPC12L VPC12L Foot Switch, Normally Open HFT11 VFT11 Foot Switch, Normally Closed HFT12 VFT12 Miscellaneous Switches | 541
Foot Switch Latched, Normally Open HFT11L VFT11L Foot Switch Latched, Normally Closed HFT12L VFT12L Lever Switch, Normally Open HPB11LS VPB11LS Lever Switch, Normally Closed HPB12LS VPB12LS Lever Switch Latched,Normally Open HPB11LSL VPB11LSL Lever Switch Latched,Normally Closed HPB12LSL VPB12LSL 542 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Flow Switch Normally Open HFS11 VFS11 Flow Switch Normally Closed HFS12 VFS12 Flow Switch Normally Open - Gas HFS11S20 VFS11S20 Flow Switch Normally Closed - Gas HFS12S20 VFS12S20 3 Voltage Phase Switch HSW1S90 VSW1S90 3 Voltage Phase-to-Neutral Switch HSW1S91 VSW1S91 Miscellaneous Switches | 543
3 Voltage Phase-to-Phase and Phase-to-Neutral Switch HSW1S92 VSW1S92 3 Voltage, 2-Network Phase-to-Phase Switch HSW1S93 VSW1S93 Current Switch For 3 Measurement Points HSW1S94 VSW1S94 Current Switch For 4 Measurement Points HSW1S95 VSW1S95 Change-Over Contact with Mechanical Block and Manual Unlatching HSW1SC21_F VSW1SC21_F Transfer Make Before Break Contact HSW1SC7_F VSW1SC7_F 544 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Voltmetric Commutator HSW1S53 VSW1S53 2nd+ Normally Open Contact HSW21 VSW21 2nd+ Normally Closed Contact HSW22 VSW22 Solenoids Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Standard Solenoid Valve HSV1 VSV1 Standard Solenoid Valve with Connection HSVC1 VSVC1 Solenoids | 545
Open Solenoid Valve - Closing HSV1Y1 VSV1Y1 Open Solenoid Valve - Closing According to Solenoid HSV1Y1A VSV1Y1A Magnetic Brake HSV1Y3 VSV1Y3 Electromagnetic Brake HSV1Y4 VSV1Y4 Solenoid Valve Auxiliary Normally Open Contact HSV21 VSV21 Solenoid Valve Auxiliary Normally Closed Contact HSV22 VSV22 546 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Instrumentation and Sensors Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Voltage Meter HVM1 VVM1 Amperage Meter HAM1 VAM1 Power Factor Meter HIN1PFM VIN1PFM Phase Meter HIN1PHM VIN1PHM Frequency Meter HIN1FRM VIN1FRM Instrumentation and Sensors | 547
Thermometer HIN1THM VIN1THM Tachometer HIN1TAC VIN1TAC Hour Meter HIN1HRM VIN1HRM Ampere-Hour meter HIN1AHM VIN1AHM Recording Wattmeter HIN1P17 VIN1P17 Varmeter HIN1P21 VIN1P21 548 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Synchronoscope HIN1P11 VIN1P11 Thermocouple HTC1L VTC1L Thermocouple HTC1R VTC1R Thermocouple with Terminal Board HTC1LTB VTC1LTB Thermocouple with Terminal Board HTC1RTB VTC1RTB Active Power Indicator HIN1P19 VIN1P19 Instrumentation and Sensors | 549
Thermometer/Pyrometer HIN1P25 VIN1P25 Clock HIN1P29 VIN1P29 Normally Open Clock Closing Every Minute HIN1P33 VIN1P33 Differential Voltmeter HVM1P7 VVM1P7 Accumulator Battery HPW1G4 VPW1G4 Pressure/Current Converter HIN1B10 VIN1B10 550 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
AC-DC Current Converter Single Phase HIN1G1 VIN1G1 Tachometric Dynamo HIN1B11 VIN1B11 Tachometric Dynamo - Impulse HIN1B12 VIN1B12 Tachometric Dynamo - Optical Type HIN1B13 VIN1B13 Qualifying Symbols Operating Devices Symbol Description Qualifying Symbols | 551
Positive Operation Direction Q070109 Manual Command General Sign Q021301 Manual Command with Protected Access Q021302 Push Button Command Q021305 Emergency Command Q021308 Rotary Command Q021304 552 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Command with Key Q021313 Foot Actuated Command Q021310 Lever Command Q021311 Crank Command Q021214 Fixed Manual Command Q021312 Manual Command with Wheel Q021309 Operating Devices | 553
Actuated by the Level of a Fluid Q021401 Actuated by the Number of Events Q021402 Actuated by a Flow of Fluid Q021403 Actuated by a Gas Flow Q021404 Motorized Command Q021326 Timing Command Q021327 554 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Command with Roll Q021315 Command with Cam Q021316 Cam Profile Q021317 Switch Position Function Q070106 Switch Position (Flipped) Q070106R Disconnector Isolator Q070103 Operating Devices | 555
Switch Disconnector Isolator Q070104 Circuit Breaker Function Q070102 Power Contactor Function Q070101 Auto Trip Function Q070105 Auto Return (Spring Return) Q070107 Non Auto Return (Stay) Q070108 556 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Linear Direction of Force or Motion Symbol Description One Way Force Or Movement Q020401 Two Way Force Or Movement Q020402 Transition Q101101 Rotative Direction of Force or Motion Symbol Description One Way Force Or Movement Q020403 Linear Direction of Force or Motion | 557
Two Way Force Or Movement Q020404 Limited Two Way Force Or Movement Q020405 Propagation Flow or Signal Symbol Description One Way Propagation Q020501 Two Way Simultaneous Transmission Propagation Q020502 Two Way Alternate Transmission Propagation Q020503 558 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Signal Transmission Q020504 Signal Reception Q020505 Energy Flow Symbol Description Outbound Energy Flux Q020506 Inbound Energy Flux Q020507 Inbound and Outbound Energy Flux Q020508 Energy Flow | 559
Effect Symbol Description Thermal Effect Q020801 Magnetic Effect Q020802 Magnetostriction Effect Q020803 Magnetic Field Effect Q020804 Radiation Symbol Description 560 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Non Ionizing Coherent Electromagnetic Radiation Q020901 Non Ionizing Coherent Radiation Q020902 Ionizing Radiation Q020903 Fault Symbol Description Indication Of Presumed Location Of Failure Q021701 Failure For Lack Of Insulation Q021702 Fault | 561
Winding Symbol Description 2 Phase Winding Q060201 3 Phase Partial V Winding Q060202 4 Phase Winding with Accessible Ground Q060203 3 Phase T Winding Q060204 3 Phase Delta Winding Q060205 562 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
3 Phase Open Delta Winding Q060206 3 Phase Star Winding Q060207 3 Phase Star Winding with Accessible Ground Q060208 3 Phase Zigzag Winding Q060209 Esaphase Winding with Double Delta Q060210 Esaphase Polygonal Winding Q060211 Winding | 563
Esaphase Star Winding Q060212 Esaphase Double Zigzag Winding with Accessible Ground Q060213 DC Direct Current Indication Q020201 DC Direct Current Indication Q020203 Indication of Rectified Current with an Alternate Component Q020212 AC Alternate Current Indication Q020204 564 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Mechanical Controls Symbol Description Auto Return Q021207 Auto Non Return Stop Latch Q021208 Stop Latch in Neutral Position Q021209 Stop Latch Engaged Q021210 Interlock Between Two Devices Q021211 Mechanical Controls | 565
Mechanical Controls, Latching Device Symbol Description Latch Device Engaged Q021212 Latch Device in Neutral Position Q021213 Two Ways Latch Device Q1020603 Latch Device with Manual Unlatching Q1020604 Two Ways Latch Device with Key Q1029603 566 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Mechanical Controls, Coupling Symbol Description Clutch Joint Q021216 Disconnected Joint Q021217 Engaged Joint Q021218 Engaged Joint Q021219 Gear Joint Q021223 Mechanical Controls, Coupling | 567
Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Bell HAN1B VAN1B Buzzer HAN1Z VAN1Z Horn HAN1H VAN1H Siren HAN1S VAN1S Whistle HAN1W VAN1W 568 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Earth/Ground HGND2 VGND2 Functional Earth HGND3 VGND3 Protective Earth HGND4 VGND4 Protective equipotential bond HGND5 VGND5 Functional Equipotential Bond HGND1 VGND1 Battery HBA1 VBA1 Miscellaneous | 569
Battery (Flipped) HBA1R VBA1R Power Source 1 Phase HPW1_1PH VPW1_1PH Power Source 3 Phase HPW1_3PH VPW1_3PH Electronics Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Fixed Resistor HRE1B VRE1B Variable Resistor HVR1B VVR1B 570 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Variable Resistor HVR1BR VVR1BR Variable Resistor 2 HVR1R2 VVR1R2 Light dependent HRE1LDR VRE1LDR Heater Element HRE1HT VRE1HT 2nd+ Element HRE2HT VRE2HT RC Network HRE1RCN VRE1RCN Electronics | 571
Varistor HVR1R3 VVR1R3 Resistor with Mobile Contact HVR1R4 VVR1R4 Resistor with Mobile Contact and Disconnecting Position HVR1R5 VVR1R5 Shunt HVR1R7 VVR1R7 Variable Resistor with Carbon Disks HVR1R8 VVR1R8 Diode HDI1 VDI1 572 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Diode 180 HDI1R VDI1R Diode Photosensitive HDI1B4 VDI1B4 Diode Photosensitive 2 HDI1B5 VDI1B5 Zener Diode - One Way HDI1V2 VDI1V2 Diac Diode - Two Way HDI1V3 VDI1V3 Bridge rectifier HDI1BR VDI1BR Electronics | 573
3 Phase Bridge Rectifier HDI1V5 VDI1V5 SCR HDI1V4 VDI1V4 Capacitor HCA1 VCA1 Electrolytic HCA1EL VCA1EL Electrolytic 180 HCA1ELR VCA1ELR Feedthrough Capacitor HCA1C2 VCA1C2 574 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Photosensitive PNP Transistor HDV1B6 VDV1B6 Cable Markers Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Cable Marker HW01 VW01 2nd+ Child Marker HW02 VW02 Extra Marker HT0_CABLE VT0_CABLE Twisted Pair HT0_TW VT0_TW Cable Markers | 575
Power Receptacles Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Duplex Receptacle HCN1RDUP VCN1RDUP Single Receptacle HCN1RSGL VCN1RSGL Generic Device Boxes Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description 4 Terminals HDV1TFL VDV1TFL 3 Terminals HDV1TC VDV1TC 576 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
3 Terminals HDV1TB VDV1TB 2 Terminals HDV1T6 VDV1T6 4 Terminals HDV1TF VDV1TF 3 Terminals HDV1TE VDV1TE 3 Terminals HDV1T7 VDV1T7 Stand-alone Cross-reference Symbols Symbol Description Stand-alone Cross-reference Symbols | 577
Source Rectangle HA2S1_REF Source Hexagon HA3S1_REF Source Ellipse HA5S1_REF Destination Rectangle HA2D1_REF Destination Hexagon HA3D1_REF Destination Ellipse HA5D1_REF 578 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Wire Arrows - Reference Only Symbol Description Generic Arrow - Left HA1X1 Generic Arrow - Up HA1X2 Generic Arrow - Right HA1X3 Generic Arrow - Down HA1X4 Arrow Tail - Left HA1X1Y Wire Arrows - Reference Only | 579
Arrow Tail - Up HA1X2Y Arrow Tail - Right HA1X3Y Arrow Tail - Down HA1X4Y Splice Symbols Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Splice HSP1001 VSP1001 Annunciations Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol 580 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols Description
Loudspeaker HAN1B7 VAN1B7 Loudspeaker - Microphone HAN1B8 VAN1B8 Microphone HAN1B9 VAN1B9 One-Line Components Connector Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Jack/Plug HC01PJ_1- VC01PJ_1- Motor Control Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description One-Line Components | 581
Circuit breaker HCB11_1- VCB11_1- Motor circuit protector HCB11_1M- VCB11_1M- Thermal circuit breaker HCB11TH_1- VCB11TH_1- Disconnect HDS11_1- VDS11_1- Fused disconnect HDS11F_1- VDS11F_1- Fuse HFU1_1- VFU1_1- 582 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Motor HMO13_1- VMO13_1- Motor starter HMS11_1- VMS11_1- Overload HOL1_1- VOL1_1- Capacitor HCA113_1- VCA113_1- Transformer Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Transformer 1 HXF1_1- VXF1_1- Transformer | 583
Transformer 2 HXF2_1- VXF2_1- Terminal Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Square terminal HT0001_1- VT0001_1- Round terminal HT0002_1- VT0002_1- Cable Marker Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Cable marker HW01_1- VW01_1- 584 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
Bus-tap Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Bus-tap - main/dot HDV1_BT_1- VDV1_BT_1- Bus-tap - dual/tee HDV1_BTT_1- VDV1_BTT_1- Bus-tap - dual/corner HDV1_BTL_1- VDV1_BTL_1- Miscellaneous Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Power receptacle HC01WR_1- VC01WR_1- Generic load HDV1_1- VDV1_1- Bus-tap | 585
586
8 PLC Generate PLC layout modules AutoCAD Electrical can generate any of hundreds of different PLC I/O modules on demand, in a variety of different graphical styles, all without a single, complete I/O module library symbol resident on the system. Modules automatically adapt to the underlying ladder rung spacing, whatever that value is, and can stretch or break into two or more pieces at insertion time.
Parametric PLC symbols vs. Full Units Parametric PLC symbols are stored in ■ Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\ ■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: \Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\ The file names begin with the characters "HP" (Horizontal ladder rungs / PLC) or "VP" (Vertical ladder rungs) followed by a digit that corresponds to a PLC I/O style number.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert PLC drop-down ➤ Insert PLC (Parametric). Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ Insert PLC (Parametric) Command entry: AEPLCP Generate PLC I/O modules on demand in a variety of graphical styles with no complete I/O module library symbols. Modules adapt to the underlying ladder rung spacing. You can stretch or break them into two or more pieces at insertion time. A PLC database, ACE_PLC.MDB, drives generation.
Graphics Style Specifies the graphical appearance of the PLC module. Styles 1-5 are provided with AutoCAD Electrical. Styles 6-9 may be user-defined. Select a style number and a sample portion of a PLC module displays. To create a user-defined style: There are about two dozen symbols associated with each style. They are located in ■ Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\{library}\ ■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: \Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\
the rung spacing. For example, if the rung spacing is 0.5 then each time you click ">" the number increases by 0.5. I/O points Specifies whether to include all of the points or break the module into many pieces. You can break a module into as many pieces as you want at insertion time. It is useful for a module that does not fit into a single ladder column. You can also add extra space between adjacent I/O points. It allows for the extra room needed for parallel components.
3 Specify the insertion point on the drawing. 4 Add or edit any information in the Edit PLC Module dialog box, and click OK. Edit PLC module Use this dialog box when inserting or editing a PLC module. Specify the values you need and press OK. The values are then annotated onto the selected module.
Tag Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each I/O point. The tag value can be manually typed in the edit box. Options Substitutes a fixed text string for the %F part of the tag format. Retag Component can then use this override format value to calculate a new tag for the PLC module. For example, a certain PLC module must always have an "IO" family tag value instead of "PLC" so that retag, for example, assigns IO-100 instead of PLC100.
Assembly Lists the assembly code for the component. The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together. Item Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each component. The tag value can be manually typed in the edit box. Catalog Lookup Opens the PLCIO table in the catalog database from which you can manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values. Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected component.
part numbers to the main catalog part number in the various BOM and component reports. Displays what the selected item looks like in a Bill of Material template. Catalog Check Description Optional line of description text. May be used to identify the module type (for example, "16 Discrete Inputs - 24VDC") I/O Point Description Address Specifies the I/O address assignment. Description 1-5 Optional description text. Enter up to five lines of description attribute text.
Pins Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the module. Show/Edit Miscellaneous View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes. Ratings Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings attributes on a module. Select Defaults to display a list of default values. NOTE If Ratings is unavailable, the module you are editing does not carry rating attributes.
There are two tables for each module type. The Module Specification table contains information such as the model number, type, description, rating, and rectangle offset values. The Module Terminal Information table (ends with "_Data") contains terminal information such as code value, terminal sequence number, block name, and terminal attributes.
■ 1 = inserted near the right or bottom bus line of the ladder. ■ 2 = inserted near the left or top bus line of the ladder. ■ 3 = inserted centered between the bus lines of the ladder. The following are optional parameters for parametric build symbol placement: Box color/linetype/layer You can instruct AutoCAD Electrical to draw the rectangular box using non-default line properties for color, layer, linetype, or ltscale.
breaks, reprompt of I/O address, including unused terminals and special spacing. The following are optional parameters for parametric build symbol placement: Use of %%x prompt values After entering values such as rack, group or slot, the values are available for use on any subsequent I/O point of the module. If you want to use each I/O point's TERMDESC_ attribute to carry the I/O address in Rack/Group, bit number format, do the following: 1 Prompt for Rack and Group values in the first entry of the module.
CODE BLOCK ATTRIBUTES D2-08ND3 HP?WA-DR TERM_=4;TAGA_=%%A+4 D2-08ND3 HP?WA-DQ TERM_=1;TAGA_=%%A+1 D2-08ND3 HP?WA-DR TERM_=5;TAGA_=%%A+5 D2-08ND3 HP?WA-DQ TERM_=2;TAGA_=%%A+2 D2-08ND3 HP?WA-DR TERM_=6;TAGA_=%%A+6 D2-08ND3 HP?WA-DQ TERM_=3;TAGA_=%%A+3 D2-08ND3 HP?WA-DR TERM_=7;TAGA_=%%A+7 Forcing a break You can pre-define a module break point in the Module Terminal Information table. Add "\SPECIAL=BREAK" on the line where you want the break to occur.
Special spacing Normally when AutoCAD Electrical generates a PLC module, it uses the current rung spacing for I/O and wire connection point spacing. You can override it by using the "\SPECIAL=SPACINGFACTOR= in the Module Terminal Information table. When AutoCAD Electrical sees it on an I/O point or wire connection entry line, it uses a factor of the rung spacing. For example, a "\SPECIAL=SPACINGFACTOR=0.5" for a given I/O or wire connection entry flags AutoCAD Electrical to insert this point down 0.
3 Right-click the Type in the tree that you want to copy to. For example, if you want to copy the new module to Allen-Bradley, 1746, Discrete Input, you would find Discrete Input under Allen Bradley ➤ 1746 in the tree. 4 Select Paste Module. If you attempt to copy a PLC Module part number into a PLC Type that already has a module with the same name, the PLC Database File Editor prompts you to change the name of the new module being copied.
■ If you want to modify multiple terminals at the same time, select the terminals, click the right mouse button, and select Edit Terminal from the menu. 4 In the Select Terminal Information dialog box, make any modifications to the selected terminals. Changes that you make in this box will be applied to all of the selected terminals in the terminal grid control. 5 Click OK to save your changes and return to the PLC Database File Editor.
New Series (available only for the Manufacturer branch of the tree structure) Defines a new PLC series underneath the respective Manufacturer. The series then appears in the PLC Selection tree structure in alphabetical order. New Type (available only for the Series branch of the tree structure) Defines a new PLC type underneath the respective Manufacturer and Series. The type then appears in the PLC Selection tree structure in alphabetical order.
defined for the module. When creating a PLC module, the PLC Database File Editor lists as many blank Terminal Type fields since are terminals defined within the New Module dialog box. Terminal Type Specifies the type for the terminal. Select from the various predetermined types of addressable terminals and non-addressable terminals. Show Shows terminals that are not used.
New Module Opens a dialog box for defining the module descriptions and parameters. A series of boxes are used to type in or select the values required to define the module. NOTE If you right-click a type or module in the PLC Selection window and select New Module, the New Module dialog box opens with data already specified for the Manufacturer, Series, and Series Type. Module Specifications Opens a dialog box for modifying some of the specifications previously defined during the creation of a new module.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Database Editors drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor. Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor Command entry: AEPLCDB Click the Settings button, then click the Add Blocks From Module button. The dialog box provides a complete list of the PLC modules available to AutoCAD Electrical. The Manufacturer Catalog list is compiled from the "ace_plc.mdb" file.
Module Box Dimensions NOTE Enter at least one of the Top, Bottom, Left or Right dimension values to assign settings specific to this module. Sets the right, left, top, and bottom offsets for the rectangle that surrounds the module. The optional Split Top and Split Bottom specify the offsets for a split module where Split Top specifies the offset for the top of a split module and Split Bottom specifies the offset for the bottom of the split module.
The dialog box options enable depending on the fields selected at the time the dialog box was activated. For example, if you select the Show and Spacing Factor fields for multiple terminal entries in the Terminal Grid Control section of the PLC Database File Editor dialog box and then you activate this dialog box, you can update both fields through this dialog box for the selected terminals. Category Lists the terminal categories to select from.
Spacing Factor Overrides the current rung spacing for I/O and wire connection point spacing. For example, a value of 2 causes AutoCAD Electrical to insert the point down two times the rung spacing instead of a full rung spacing. New module Defines the module descriptions and parameters. A series of boxes are used to type in or select the values required to define the module. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Database Editors drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor.
Prompt asks you at module insertion time for Octal, Decimal, and Hexadecimal. Rating Specifies the power rating value for the PLC module. Terminals Specifies the total number of terminals defined on the PLC module. NOTE It is not active since it is under the control of the total number of terminals listed in the Terminal Type grid control. Addressable Points Specifies the total number of termination points on the PLC module that receives the PLC address attributes.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Database Editors drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor. Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor Command entry: AEPLCDB Click Settings. You can add a terminal to the list by clicking in any box in the last entry of the list. A blank entry line is added to the bottom of the list.
can create corresponding bitmap files. Enter your bitmap name in the box or Browse for it. The next time you select a terminal type, the bitmap is displayed. Graphics Style Specifies the graphical appearance of the PLC module. Styles 1-5 are predefined, styles 6-9 may be user-defined. Select a style number - a sample portion of a PLC module displays. There are about two dozen symbols (with a file name "HP?*.dwg" where "?" is the style number) associated with each style. They are located in ■ Windows XP: \
Command entry: AEPLCDB Click Style Box Dimensions. NOTE Set a value for the Split Top and Split Bottom dimensions before specifying their line properties. Graphics Style Specifies the graphical appearance of the PLC module. Styles 1-5 are predefined, styles 6-9 may be user defined. Select a style number - a sample portion of a PLC module displays. There are about two dozen symbols (with a file name "HP?*.dwg" where "?" is the style number) associated with each style. They are located in ■ Windows XP: \Doc
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Database Editors drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor. Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor Command entry: AEPLCDB Click Module Specifications. Module Controls Specifies the Manufacturer, Series, Series Type, and Code (Catalog Number) for the module. NOTE These fields are not active since they are under the control of the tree structure in the PLC Selection window.
Specifies the total number of termination points on the PLC module that receives the PLC address attributes. Addressable Points AutoCAD Block to insert Specifies an AutoCAD block file to insert directly below the last I/O point inserted parametrically. They are typically used for block files that represent DIP switch settings and notes on how to configure the PLC module.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Database Editors drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor. Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor Command entry: AEPLCDB Click the New Module or Module Specifications button, then click the Module Prompts button. You can define up to nine different prompts at insertion time. ■ To assign a prompt, select the prompt number from the list, enter the prompt text in the edit box, and click Change.
■ Combination module - inserted centered between the bus lines of the ladder. Before AutoCAD Electrical 2009, the Spreadsheet to PLC/IO utility determined the module category based on the value in the DESCRIPTION field or the database table name. For example, if the DESCRIPTION field contained the string “*IN*”, it was considered an input module. In AutoCAD Electrical 2009 and later, the PLC database contains a CATEGORY field.
■ 2 - Output module ■ 3 - Combination module Input Enter text, comma delimited, used to match to the DESCRIPTION value. If there is a match, the module is assigned a CATEGORY value of 1 for input. Output Enter text, comma delimited, used to match to the DESCRIPTION value. If there is a match, the module is assigned a CATEGORY value of 2 for output. Combination Enter text, comma delimited, used to match to the DESCRIPTION value.
Single, Stand-alone I/O Points Modify single, stand-alone PLC layout symbols The single, stand-alone PLC I/O symbols are in ■ Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\ ■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: \Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\ The symbols do not follow the normal AutoCAD Electrical naming convention.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. 2 On the main icon menu select PLC I/O. NOTE Single I/O points are selected from the second and third rows of the sub dialog box. 3 Select the component to insert and specify an insertion point. NOTE Select from the upper row for the first I/O point of a module. These symbols carry attributes for catalog BOM assignment.
6 Click OK and the values are annotated onto the I/O point. Edit PLC I/O point Use this dialog box when inserting or editing a stand-alone I/O point symbol. Specify the values you need and press OK. The values are then annotated onto the selected I/O point. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT Select to insert a PLC I/O point.
Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the I/O point. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Catalog Lists the catalog number for the I/O point. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Assembly Lists the assembly code for the I/O point. The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together. Catalog Lookup Opens the Catalog Information dialog box from which you can: ■ Manually enter the Manufacturer or Catalog values.
Installation/Location codes Changes the installation or location codes. You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation and location codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of codes used so far is returned. Select from the list to update the module automatically with the installation or location code. Pins Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the module.
For example, copy style 1 to style 6 by copying "\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\hp1*.dwg" to "\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\hp6*.dwg" (or, if you are using Windows Vista or Windows 7, copy "\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\hp1*.dwg" to "\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\hp6*.dwg"). Open the hp6*.
Create PLC I/O Drawings from Spreadsheets Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format The PLC information can be read from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, Access database table, or a comma-delimited file. AutoCAD Electrical expects to find certain columns containing the information needed to generate the drawings. The columns can be in any order defined by your settings. All columns are optional except the Module part number (Code) column.
Module's Installation The value assigned to the installation attribute of the module. Module's Location The value assigned to the location attribute of the module. Description 1-5 (DESC1-DESC5) The values assigned to the module's 5 description attributes. Voltage/Input/Output (VOLTAGE) The value used to determine if a module is an input or output module if it cannot be determined from the parametric data file. For input modules, AutoCAD Electrical looks for DI, AI, or IN as part of the text string.
Place an asterisk (*) in front of a device block name to trigger an Insert Circuit instead of an Insert Component. Any associated TAG, DESC, MFG, and CAT column values for this entry are annotated onto the first AutoCAD Electrical symbol found on the inserted circuit. * You can predefine other attributes on the module, such as Installation, Location, and Ratings, using the format "mainval;attributename2=attributevalue2,” and so on.
Installation The value assigned to the installation (INST) attribute of the component. Manufacturer The value assigned to the manufacturer (MFG) attribute of the component. Catalog The value assigned to the catalog (CAT) attribute of the component. Assembly The value assigned to the assembly code (ASSYCODE) attribute of the component.
back to the right, insert "|XWXW" as the first inline device. To loop back to the left use "|WXWX". Automatically generate I/O schematic drawings The PLC I/O requirements of a project, in spreadsheet or database format, can drive automatic generation of the I/O schematic drawings. 1 Click Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ PLC I/O Utility. 2 Select the spreadsheet and click Open.
3 In the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Click Setup to define how the drawings should be set up (based on the default settings). It includes how many ladders you want inserted, the type and orientation of the ladders, spacing, and number of rungs. You can also define the module placement, style, scale, and in-line device placement and spacing. ■ Click Browse to select an existing setting file that you can then edit and save.
Ribbon: Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ PLC I/O Utility. Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Command entry: AESS2PLC Select the spreadsheet output file and click Open. The PLC I/O requirements in spreadsheet or database format can drive automatic generation of the I/O schematic drawings. The program finds the columns containing the information necessary to generate the drawings. Your settings can define the order of the columns.
1 User subdirectory Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\User\ Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\User\ 2 Active project's .wdp file subdirectory 3 Symbol library paths defined for the active project 4 AutoCAD Electrical lookup subdirectory Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {vers
Column to column Indicates whether to use the next sequential number for the first ladder on each successive column or to use the specified value to skip for the first ladder reference of the next column. Drawing to drawing Indicates whether to use the next sequential number for the first ladder on each successive drawing or to use the specified value to skip for the first ladder reference of the next drawing. Module Placement There are three options related to module placement.
Drawing File Creation Indicates to use the open and active drawing file to begin the PLC placement process. Use active drawing NOTE It is unavailable if a Starting file name is specified. Starting file name Specifies the drawing file to begin with for your PLC drawings. Enter a name or click Browse to select a file. The .dwg extension is not required and the file is saved in the same folder as the active .wdp file.
Ribbon: Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ PLC I/O Utility. Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Command entry: AESS2PLC Select the spreadsheet output file and click Open. In the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box, click Setup. NOTE New default values can be programmed into the source file. The program source file name is "wdio.lsp." Open the file with any ASCII text editor and carefully edit the values near the top of the file.
■ X Zones: Like X-Y Grid, but there is not a Y-axis. Set your horizontal labels, spacing, and origin of the drawing on the X Zones setup dialog box. TIP Use a negative zone spacing value if you want the zone reference origin to be at the right side of the drawing. Width Specifies the width of each ladder (offset distance between the ladder's two bus wires) from left to right rail.
+X direction from right-hand vertical bus; horizontal ladder orientation - measured in +Y direction from lower horizontal bus). Output offset from hot bus Specifies the Output module insertion offset distance (vertical ladder orientation - measured in -X direction from the left-hand vertical bus; horizontal ladder orientation - measured in the -Y direction from the upper horizontal bus).
Spacing between multiple devices Specifies the insertion point offset distance between one in-line device and the next. Spreadsheet/Table Columns Displays the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Drawing Generator dialog box for reviewing and mapping spreadsheet columns to attributes on the PLC module symbol. Drawing Template You can force the tool to use a specific template for new drawings.
Export I/O information using RSLogix Creates a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file from a RSLogix file to import into AutoCAD Electrical using the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool. 1 In RSLogix, export your RSLogix 500 file into .EAS format. 2 Click Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ RSLogix 500. 3 Select an .EAS or .CSV file and click Open. 4 In the RSLogix 500 Import dialog box, select whether the I/O points should be displayed in 8, 16, or 32-point groupings.
Ribbon: Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ RSLogix 500. Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ RSLogix 500 Export To Spreadsheet Command entry: AERSLOGIX Select an .EAS or .CSV file and click Open. The text “Input Module x of x” displays underneath the dialog box title bar to keep track of which module you are editing out of the total number of modules found in the RSLogix import file.
Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ RSLogix 500 Export To Spreadsheet Command entry: AERSLOGIX Select an .EAS or .CSV file and click Open. Select one of the module assignments and click Change. The text “Change Module x” displays underneath the dialog box title bar to keep track of which module you are changing. Select below for module part number assignment Displays the I/O modules already picked for each set of I/O points.
Panel Layouts or separate Rack Layout drawings using the Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet tool. Data structure from the Unity Pro Hardware Configuration File The tree structure data that displays in the Hardware File section of the Unity Pro Import dialog box is as follows: Project node The Project node is the topmost node defined in the tree structure. The label given to the node is the file name of the hardware configuration (.xhw) file that was defined during the export from Unity Pro.
■ Module Location: displays the location of the module in the rack and is specified in the topoAddress of the .xhw file. (that is, 1.1\1.1) ■ Module Catalog Number: displays the catalog number of the module and is specified in the partNumber element of the .xhw file. (that is, 140CPS21400) Unity Pro to AutoCAD Electrical Mapping File The Unity Pro to AutoCAD Electrical mapping file, DEFAULT_UNITY.
■ Column 3 = ASSYCODE; column defined (left blank) ■ Column 4 = TAG; column defined (left blank) ■ Column 5 = LOC; column defined (left blank) ■ Column 6 = INST; column defined (left blank) ■ Column 7 = DESC1; partFamily variable from the .xhw file ■ Column 8 = WDBLKNAM; PLCIO Import Unity Pro files to a spreadsheet 1 In Unity Pro, right-click the configuration file in the project browser and select Export. 2 Enter a file name for the .xhw file and click Export.
■ Indicate whether to include inner or outer terminals. Select whether to place the terminal symbol names in every row or only the names that have a defined I/O point. ■ In the Hardware File section, select the module to modify. The data relative to the I/O variable file for the selected module displays in the I/O Variable File section of the dialog box. If you select a module that does not have addresses (such as power supplies or CPUs) the grid remains empty.
Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet Command entry: AEUNITYPROSS Imports Unity Pro hardware (.xhw) and I/O variable (.xsy) files and formats the data into a PLC import spreadsheet in preparation for the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O utility. After you create the spreadsheet file, create PLC style drawing files automatically with the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O utility. When you click OK, you are prompted to enter a name for the PLC spreadsheet file. You can save this file in .
Show only I/O modules Indicates to display only modules in the .xhw file that contains I/O addressing (PLCs). If a rack node only includes modules that are not PLC I/O modules, the entire rack is removed from the tree structure. If a rack node contains modules with and without I/O addressing, the modules that do not have I/O addresses are removed.
the I/O variable file created from Unity Pro (.xsy) displays at the top of this section of the dialog box. I/O variable file grid Displays a list of the I/O variables found inside of the Unity Pro I/O Variable export file (.xsy). Remains empty if the selected module does not have addresses (such as power supplies and CPUs). All I/O points for the respective PLC card display in the grid (including the points that are undefined).
■ Device Tag: Displays the tag value. If left blank, the normal tagging method for parent components is followed while children components remain untagged. Click in the column to enter a value or right-click to copy, cut, or paste a value into the cell. Inner terminal symbol Specifies the symbol name to insert for inner terminals in the spreadsheet. The default symbol name is HT0001 (a terminal that maintains the wire number potential, has a tag strip ID and terminal number, and is square).
Paste Pastes in the selected value from one or more grids into the selected grids. Apply Terminal Inner Selects all inner terminals in the grid. Apply Terminal Outer Selects all outer terminals in the grid. OK + Run Displays the Save As dialog box where you can quickly save the data to a spreadsheet and start the PLC drawing creation automatically. The Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box then opens with the saved spreadsheet already selected.
defined on the module then Boolean characters are used. Export a file in the Unity Pro XML format The AutoCAD Electrical Unity Pro export file is generated from the PLC drawings and their respective PLC symbols. The variable names and types are maintained on the PLC module so that the file can be imported back into Unity Pro. 1 Click Import/Export Data tab ➤ Export panel ➤ Unity Pro. 2 In the Unity Pro Export dialog box, select to create an export file (.
Circuits 9 Circuit Builder Circuit Builder overview The Circuit Builder tool comes prepopulated with data to build and annotate a sampling of motor control circuits and power feed circuits. Circuits include 3-phase, single-phase, and one-line circuit representations. Each circuit is built dynamically, adjusting the power bus to match the wire bus for the drawing, adding wiring between components, and annotating the elements with suggested values based upon the selected load.
Workflow 1 Circuit Builder opens the spreadsheet and reads in the first sheet named “ACE_CIRCS”. 2 Circuit Builder shows the list of defined circuits in the Circuit Selection dialog box. 3 Select a circuit to insert or configure. The associated line from the ACE_CIRCS sheet provides the base drawing template name, and the name of a circuit code sheet. The circuit code sheet is a separate sheet within the Circuit Builder spreadsheet.
Spreadsheet The Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls, along with the template drawings that it references, control what is displayed in the Circuit Selection and Circuit Configuration dialog box options. The first sheet in the spreadsheet, ACE_CIRCS, contains the main circuit categories, for example “3ph Motor Circuit”, and types, for example “Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing”. Along with this first sheet, are one or more circuit code sheets.
ANNO_CODE Code maps to the ANNO_CODE table in the spreadsheet. Allows you to predefine the description, installation, location, and other key information, for the motor or load and the individual components that might be inserted into the circuit.
!PF_CTRL - invokes the Select Load on page 711 dialog box when the Browse button on the Load Setup section of the Circuit Configuration on page 708 dialog box is selected. It must be combined with the ace_cb_power_feed_select API call in the LOOKUP_CMD entry. NOTE Include the ace_cb_wire_select API call in the LOOKUP_CMD entry to invoke the Wire Size Lookup on page 712 dialog box when the Browse button in the Wire Setup section of the Circuit Configuration dialog box is selected.
LOOKUP_CMD Optional command calls to perform the electrical standards database or catalog lookups for the selected circuit element. This field controls the right-hand side of the Circuit Configuration dialog. TABLEn Optional catalog lookup table name. If the option contains multiple components, such as a disconnect switch and a fuse, there are multiple columns where “n” increments for each component.
3 If any matching entries are found, the Special Annotation: Presets section of the Circuit Selection dialog box, is enabled. 4 If you select Presets and click the Presets List button, the Annotation Presets dialog box displays. The rows displaying the entries with non-blank DEFAULT values are initially marked as Selected. 5 Edit the attribute values as necessary and click OK. 6 Select to Insert or Configure the circuit. 7 Circuit Builder processes each marker block on the circuit template.
■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\{library}\1- NOTE This template drawing naming convention is recommended but is not required for Circuit Builder to function. A circuit template contains the wiring framework for the circuit and special marker blocks. These marker blocks are nothing more than instances of a standard AutoCAD block, ace_cb_marker_block, carrying three attributes.
of a 3-phase bus there are three marker blocks with a common CODE value and a common ORDER value. The ORDER value can be an integer or a decimal number value. Support for decimal number order values makes it easy to add a marker block between two others without having to reorder everything. MISC1 This attribute value contains miscellaneous annotation values, actions, and flags. Annotation values are in the format =.
■ X= - reposition the marker block in the "X" direction. For example, "_X=(* 0.5 DIST01)" means adjust the position of this marker block in the X direction by an amount equal to 0.5 times the bus spacing distance defined by marker block with a CODE attribute value of "DIST01". This example can be used to position a marker block for a single phase motor insertion point, halfway between two power bus wires.
One-line circuit templates One-line circuit templates use the same marker block concept as three-phase motor and power feed circuit templates. However, there are a few differences. There is a single line wire that represents a multi-wire bus. Most of the one-line circuit templates contain a special "bus-tap" symbol. The bus-tap symbol can have two functions: ■ Provide an anchor point for the one-line circuit representation that begins at this location.
ace_electrical_standards.mdb, is located in the catalog folder. The default location is: ■ Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Catalogs\ ■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Catalogs\ Sizing and wire type values are based on information from the electrical standards database. Circuit Builder looks for a match on the motor size, supply voltage, and phase.
FEED Contains the values used to populate the Select Load on page 711 dialog box. This table name can have an optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code. OPT Options tables contain values defining defaults and options lists specific to an electrical standard. For example, default to copper wiring, AWG size standard, and feet for conductor length units.
NOTE Each table name can have an optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code. Motor table The data in the Motor table is used to populate the Select Motor on page 710 dialog box. Filter the selection list by type, voltage, and frequency. The load and FLA values for the selected motor are passed back to the Circuit Configuration dialog box and are used in wire size calculations.
Options tables Options tables contain values defining defaults and options lists specific to an electrical standard. For example, default to copper wiring, AWG size standard, and feet for conductor length units. The OPT table follows this table naming convention: ■ OPT - if no specific electrical standards table is found, the default table name to use. ■ _{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code.
Name Description V_DROP Maximum allowable % voltage drop in power wiring. This value can be used to help calculate an appropriate wire size when the wire run distance is also defined. W_INSUL Default insulation type used to determine the ambient temperature correction factor. LEN_LIST Wire run distance values for pick list in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. The run distance is used for estimated voltage drop calculations in the motor or load power wiring.
Name Description PARALLEL_MAX_CNT Default value for the maximum number of wire conductors when displaying paralleled wire option in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. For example, “4” for up to four paralleled wires per phase. T_AMBIENT Default ambient temperature correction factor. This value is used in wire type sizing. It must match up with one of the temperature de-rating column labels found in the INSUL_* tables. For example, “30C”. M_POWERFACTOR Default power factor for a motor.
Wire ampacity tables The wire ampacity tables provide the wire conductor sizes, descriptions, and maximum FLA ampacity values based on wire size and standard insulation temperature ratings. This information is used in the following ways: ■ Automatically select a default wire size based upon the maximum load amp value displayed in the Select Motor on page 710 or Select Load on page 711 dialog boxes.
■ Automatically calculate or recalculate suggested wire sizes in the Wire Size Lookup on page 712 dialog box as various parameters and de-rating factors are applied. The wire ampacity tables use the following naming convention: ■ AMP - the table name prefix. ■ _{type} - the wire metal type such as CU for copper, or AL for aluminum. ■ _{size} - wire size standard such as AWG, or MM2 for metric. ■ _{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code.
Grounding conductor sizing tables The grounding conductor sizing tables provide the grounding wire conductor sizes and maximum FLA ampacity values. This information is used in the following ways: ■ Provide a suggested minimum grounding conductor size based on the amp value returned by the expression defined in the AMPG_MAX entry in the OPT table.
■ Provide a selection list on the Wire Size Lookup on page 712 dialog box giving this minimum suggested size plus all larger grounding conductor sizes. The grounding conductor sizing tables use the following naming convention: ■ AMPG - the table name prefix ■ _{type} - the wire metal type such as CU for copper, or AL for aluminum. ■ _{size} - wire size standard such as AWG, or MM2 for metric. ■ _{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code.
■ Automatically calculate or recalculate suggested wire sizes in the Wire Size Lookup on page 712 dialog box as various insulation and temperature de-rating factors are applied. The wire insulation tables use the following naming convention: ■ INSUL - the table name prefix. ■ _{type} - the wire metal type such as CU for copper, or AL for aluminum. ■ _{size} - wire size standard such as AWG, or MM2 for metric. ■ _{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code.
Conductor Reactance / AC Resistance tables The optional conductor reactance/AC resistance tables provide the reactance and resistance values for wire size based on conduit type. These values are used to calculate the voltage drop percentage in power wiring when a run distance is supplied. There are two types of tables for this feature. A conduit type description table and the reactance/resistance data tables.
The description table, XL&R_DESC, contains the labels used on the Wire Size Lookup on page 712 dialog box for the conduit or raceway type selection list. The labels also map to the columns in the data tables. Data tables The conductor reactance/AC resistance data tables use the following naming convention: ■ XL&R - the table name prefix ■ _{type} - the wire metal type such as CU for copper, or AL for aluminum. ■ _{size} - wire size standard such as AWG, or MM2 for metric.
For example, a table named XL&R_CU_AWG_NEC contains the conductor reactance/AC resistance information for copper, AWG sizes, and parallels values found in the National Electrical Code. Name Description SIZE Wire size code. C1-C3 A set of reactance and resistance values, semi-colon delimited for the conduit type. The first element is the estimated reactance and the second element is the AC resistance. NOTE see the XL&R_DESC table for the corresponding label for each.
Fill tables When multiple current carrying wire conductors are in the same conduit, duct, or raceway, the wire ampacity may need to be de-rated. Current carrying wire conductors are defined as power wiring, not ground, neutral, or control wires. The Fill table provides the de-rating factor based on the maximum number of power wire conductors. The FILL table follows this naming convention: ■ FILL - the table name prefix. ■ _{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code.
MOTOR_I* tables A set of three tables containing values used for calculating suggested breaker size, fuse size, and disconnect switch ratings for a given motor or load amp value. Each table name can have an optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code such as “_NEC” for National Electrical Code. MOTOR_I_DESC Lists the component type descriptions whose sizing ties directly into the full load amps value (FLA) of the motor or load.
MOTOR_I_CALC Lists the formula to calculate the maximum amp value for various types of components on a per motor type basis. Each row gives a motor type followed by columns marked with the codes given in the MOTOR_I_DESC table. Each cell contains an expression to calculate a FLA value. The FLA value for the selected motor corresponds to the symbol "I" in the expression. Valid operations are +-*/^. The “^” character is the exponential function. For example, I^2 is I squared, while I^0.
time-delay fuses is selected for the new circuit, the previously used catalog selection appears as the default. If the circuit is configured using the Reference an existing circuit on page 721 feature, the values are not used from the CATALOGSEL table but from the referenced circuit. However, if a new motor is then selected from the Select Motor on page 710 dialog box, the CATALOGSEL tables values are checked for a match.
5 To close a table, move the mouse over the tab for the table. An X is displayed. Click the X. 6 Select Yes to save the changes if prompted. Copy and paste a table 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Database Editors drop-down ➤ Electrical Standards Database Editor. 2 Expand the tree list on the left-hand side of the dialog box. 3 Select the table you want to copy and paste. NOTE Use the shift or ctrl keys to select multiple tables. 4 Right click and select Copy on the context menu.
2 Expand the tree list on the left-hand side of the dialog box. 3 Select the table you want to delete. NOTE Use the shift or ctrl keys to select multiple tables. 4 Right click and select Delete on the context menu. The Delete Tables task dialog displays. 5 Click Yes. NOTE This change is written to the database file immediately and cannot be canceled or undone. Edit a table 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Database Editors drop-down ➤ Electrical Standards Database Editor.
The new record is added at the end of the table. 4 Enter values in each cell of the new row. 5 Click Save. Delete a record 1 Click to the left of a row to highlight a row. 2 Right-click to display the context menu. 3 Click Delete Record. 4 Click Save. Copy and paste 1 Click to the left of a row to highlight a row. 2 Right-click to display the context menu. 3 Click Copy. The contents of the row are placed in memory. 4 Right-click to display the context menu. 5 Click Paste.
7 Enter the cell values. 8 Click Save. NOTE Columns can only be added to the AMP, INSUL, MOTOR_I_CALC, and XL&R tables. Delete a column 1 Click a column label. 2 Right-click to display the context menu. 3 Click Delete Column. The Delete Column task dialog displays. 4 Click Yes. NOTE This change is written to the database file immediately and cannot be canceled or undone. NOTE Columns can only be deleted from the AMP, INSUL, MOTOR_I_CALC, and XL&R tables.
Menu: Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Electrical Standards Database Editor Command entry: AEDBEDITOR Tree structure The left-hand side lists the existing tables in a tree structure. The highest level is separated by electrical standard as defined by the table suffix. Any tables without a suffix are listed under Default. A right-click context menu is available for the following functions. Open Select a table, right-click, and select Open. Double-click the table name to open.
Delete Record Click to the left of a row to highlight a row. Right-click and select Delete Record. Edit contents Click the cell to edit. Type to overwrite the contents. Double-click the cell to edit the contents. Insert Column Place the mouse over a column label. Right-click and select Insert Column. A blank column is appended to the table. NOTE Columns can only be added to the AMP, INSUL, MOTOR_I_CALC, and XL&R tables. Click the column label. Right-click and select Delete Column.
Each time a circuit is configured, it is added to a history list of circuits. This list provides for quick re-insertion at a later time. You can customize on page 2005 Circuit Builder to insert other circuit types. One-line motor control Circuit Build supplies and uses a one-line symbol library when building a one-line circuit. Each one-line symbol has a WDTYPE attribute on page 325 with a value of “1-” or “1-1”. The WDTYPE attribute value distinguishes the one-line symbol from a schematic symbol.
these annotation values from a database based on engineering standards, motor horsepower, and supply voltage. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder. 2 Select the circuit from the Circuits list. For example: Circuits: 3ph Motor Circuit, Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing NOTE You can also select History to display the list of previously configured circuits.
■ Reference an existing circuit on page 723 - reference values from an existing circuit selected from a list of circuits extracted from the active project. The state of the Retag new components check box controls the retagging of the components within the new circuit. Values can include catalog assignment, component descriptions, annotation values, and more. NOTE This option is not available if the circuit is selected from the History list. 8 Select Insert.
the retagging of the components within the new circuit. Values can include catalog assignment, component descriptions, annotation values, and more. NOTE This option is not available if the circuit is selected from the History list. 8 Select Configure. 9 Select an insertion point location on the drawing. The template drawing for the selected circuit is inserted at the specified location. The template drawing contains marker blocks.
15 (Optional) Modify values in the Setup & Annotations section for the selected circuit element. NOTE Depending upon how this circuit element is set up in the circuit builder spreadsheet, this section may not be available for circuit element modification. Select the Browse button to make a part number assignment from the Catalog lookup dialog box. The “TABLE” entry defines the catalog lookup table for the component in the circuit builder spreadsheet. You can also type in values for each entry.
■ The selection information for the circuit is applied to the main component of the circuit, for example the motor or load symbol. ■ The remaining marker blocks are removed from the circuit template for any circuit elements not inserted. NOTE The Circuit Elements list is built dynamically based on the template for the selected circuit. As the circuit elements are inserted, if the element contains a nested circuit, the circuit element becomes expandable so you can configure the nested circuit elements.
■ Reference an existing circuit on page 723 - reference values from an existing circuit selected from a list of circuits extracted from the active project. The state of the Retag new components check box controls the retagging of the components within the new circuit. Values can include catalog assignment, component descriptions, annotation values, and more. NOTE This option is not available if the circuit is selected from the History list. 8 Select Insert.
the retagging of the components within the new circuit. Values can include catalog assignment, component descriptions, annotation values, and more. NOTE This option is not available if the circuit is selected from the History list. 8 Select Configure. 9 Select an insertion point location on the drawing. The template drawing for the power feed is inserted at the specified location. The template drawing contains marker blocks, with instructions for building the circuit, and the circuit wiring.
16 (Optional) Enter a name for the circuit. This name is added to the History list on the Circuit Selection dialog box and makes it easier to find for future re-insertion. 17 Select from one of three ways to insert the circuit elements. Click to insert just the highlighted circuit element. Click to insert all the circuit elements up to and including the highlighted circuit element. Click to insert all the circuit elements.
2 Select the circuit from the Circuits list. For example: Circuits: 3ph Power Feed, Horizontal - Dual feed. NOTE You can also select History to display the list of previously inserted circuits. 3 (Optional) Enter a Circuit Scale. This value sets an insertion scale value for the circuit template. 4 (Optional) Enter a Component Scale. This value sets an insertion scale value for the individual components inserted while building the circuit. 5 (Optional) Enter a Horizontal Rung Spacing.
The options for this circuit element, driven from the circuit builder spreadsheet, are displayed in the Select section. 11 Select the option for this circuit element, for example: Load: Generic box 12 Select another circuit element, for example: Circuit Elements: Load Setup 13 Click the Load Setup Browse button to display the Select Load dialog box. This dialog box is where you select the load from the electrical standards database. For other components, the Catalog lookup dialog box displays.
NOTE If the circuit contains a nested template you, go back and configure the circuit elements in the nested template. 18 Select Done. The circuit is finalized by: ■ Remaining untagged child components are matched up with parent components and tags are assigned. ■ The selection information for the circuit is applied to the main component of the circuit. ■ The remaining marker blocks are removed from the circuit template for any circuit elements not inserted.
5 (Optional) Select to apply some specific annotation: ■ Presets on page 2072 - defined in the ANNO_CODE sheet of the Circuit Builder spreadsheet file that map to the selected circuit. ■ Reference an existing circuit on page 723 - reference values from an existing circuit selected from a list of circuits extracted from the active project. The state of the Retag new components check box controls the retagging of the components within the new circuit.
3 (Optional) Enter a Circuit Scale. This value sets an insertion scale value for the circuit template. 4 (Optional) Enter a Component Scale. This value sets an insertion scale value for the individual components inserted while building the circuit. 5 (Optional) Select to apply some specific annotation: ■ Presets on page 2072 - defined in the ANNO_CODE sheet of the Circuit Builder spreadsheet file that map to the selected circuit.
based on an analysis of the load and various installation parameters. You can also type in values for each entry. 11 Select a circuit element, for example: Circuit Elements: Disconnecting means The options for this circuit element, defined in the circuit builder spreadsheet, are displayed in the Select section.
Click to insert all the circuit elements. NOTE If the circuit contains a nested template, go back and configure the circuit elements in the nested template. 17 Select Done. The circuit is finalized by: ■ Remaining untagged child components are matched up with parent components and tags are assigned. ■ The selection information for the circuit is applied to the main component of the circuit. ■ The remaining marker blocks are removed from the circuit template for any circuit elements not inserted.
5 (Optional) Select to apply some specific annotation: ■ Presets on page 2072 - defined in the ANNO_CODE sheet of the Circuit Builder spreadsheet file that map to the selected circuit. ■ Reference an existing circuit on page 723 - reference values from an existing circuit selected from a list of circuits extracted from the active project.The state of the Retag new components controls the retagging of the components within the new circuit.
Circuit Elements: Disconnecting means The options for this circuit element, defined in the circuit builder spreadsheet, are displayed in the Select section. 12 Select the options for this circuit element, for example: Main Disconnect: Disconnect switch and fuses 13 (Optional) Modify values in the Setup & Annotations section for the selected circuit element.
17 Select Done. The marker blocks are removed from the circuit template for any circuit elements not inserted. Circuit Selection Select to insert a circuit. A circuit is built based on a circuit template assigned to the selected circuit type. The rung spacing of the circuit adjusts to match the rung spacing setting for the drawing (Drawing properties: drawing format tab on page 231). Each individual device is inserted at a location predefined on the circuit template.
NOTE This option is not available if Reference existing circuit is selected. Circuit Scale Sets an insertion scale value for the entire template. Component Scale Sets an insertion scale value for the individual components inserted while building the circuit. Horizontal Rung Spacing Sets the 3-phase horizontal rung spacing for the circuit. The ladder rung spacing for the drawing is the default value. Vertical Rung Spacing Sets the 3-phase vertical rung spacing for the circuit.
Opens the Circuit Configuration dialog box. Modify the options for the circuit and insert it. Configure Annotation Presets Predefine component attribute values in the ANNO_CODE on page 2072 sheet of the Circuit Builder spreadsheet file. The values are applied to the components when the circuit is inserted. Selection grid Specifies which preset annotation values to apply. Double click to edit a value.
Circuit Elements Displays the circuit elements for the selected circuit for configuring. The tree structure is created dynamically based on the circuit template. Select a circuit element to configure it. Select Select the options for the highlighted circuit element. NOTE The displayed options, along with default values, are defined in the circuit builder spreadsheet. Setup & Annotation Enter device annotation values, rung spacing, and wire type for the circuit.
Displays the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. Use this dialog to select a wire size based on load and various other parameters. Wire Setup Select Motor Browse the motor lookup table in the electrical standards database, ace_electrical_standards.mdb, and select the appropriate motor and annotation values. You can also modify the motor lookup table from this dialog box. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder.
Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can select an existing motor symbol and reuse the values from the motor. FLA Displays or sets the full load amps (FLA) value. The FLA value is multiplied by the FLA Multiplier value to calculate the Maximum load value. FLA multiplier Sets the multiplier factor. The FLA value is multiplied by this value to calculate the Maximum load value. Maximum load Displays the calculated maximum load based on the product of FLA and FLA multiplier.
Phase Filter the listing based on phase. Select from the list to turn off filtering for this field. Selection grid Select a load to pass the values back to the Circuit Configuration dialog box. Edit or add records Specifies whether you can edit or select the values. Values you edit are written back to the electrical standards database file. Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can select an existing power feed load symbol and reuse its values.
On the Select Circuit dialog box, select a circuit, click Configure, enter the Motor Setup parameters, and then select the Wire Setup Browse button. Load Voltage Sets the voltage for the wire conductor. Phase Sets the phase of the electrical power. FLA Sets the full load amps carried by the wire conductors. FLA multiplier Sets the value that is multiplied by the FLA value to calculate the maximum load for the wire conductors.
Type/method Sets the wire metal type. Directs Circuit Builder to use specific tables from the electrical standards database for that wire metal type. The available values are extracted from the electrical standards database table names. Insulation Sets the wire insulation and temperature rating type. The available values are extracted from the electrical standards database file.
Parameters Run distance Specifies whether to consider the length of the wire run in calculation of the voltage drop. When Run distance is on, sets the distance. Units When Run distance is on, sets the distance units. Via When Run distance is on, sets the type of conduit or raceway which affects the voltage drop calculation. The available types are extracted from the electrical standards database file.
Wire grid Displays the available wire conductors, extracted from the electrical standards database, for selection. Wires that do not meet the ampacity requirements are shown in red. Size Wire sizes extracted from the wire ampacity table in the electrical standards database. Count When Include Paralleled Wire options is on, indicates the number of conductors per phase. Fill When Include Paralleled Wire options is on, indicates the fill calculation which takes into account the fill correction.
%Voltage Drop The Voltage Drop value divided by the applied voltage and multiplied by 100. Wire KW Loss Calculated from the Voltage Drop and FLA.
Wire Loss estimate (maximum annual cost) 718 | Chapter 9 Circuits Maximum cost of wire losses for continuous use at rated load.
Specifies whether to display entries where the %Ampacity value is greater than 100%. When Show all is on, values that are greater than 100% are shown in red. Entries >= 300% ampacity are never shown in the list. Show all Grounding conductor size Displays the minimum size grounding conductor based on the FLA of the motor or power feed. Select a larger conductor size from the list.
Assigns a description for the parameters and wire options. Uses this description when you select Save as to save the current settings and wire options as an external file. Description Recalculate wire size Recalculating wire size Displays Wire Size Lookup dialog box with previous calculated data for selected motor or power feed load representation. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder drop-down ➤ Recalculate Wire Size. 2 Select the motor or power feed load symbol.
Displays Wire Size Lookup dialog box with previous calculated data for selected motor or power feed load representation. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder drop-down ➤ Recalculate Wire Size. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Wires ➤ Recalculate Wire Size Command entry: AEEDITWS When Circuit Builder inserts a circuit, the parameters used to size the wires are saved on the motor or load symbol as xdata. To recalculate the wire size, select the motor or load symbol when prompted.
values. The template marker code maps the values from the components in the existing circuit to the components in the new circuit. VIA_WD_CB_CIRCPARAMS - comma-delimited list that includes data returned from any Select Motor or Select Load dialog box. VIA_WD_CB_CIRCPARAMS2 - list of motor or load wire size assignments. VIA_WD_CB_CIRCSELECT - comma-delimited list that includes the template name, spreadsheet file name, and sheet name.
Main Disconnecting Means Option UI_VAL Disconnect switch and fuses (time-delay) 6 Fuses 8 Fuses (time-delay) 10 Circuit Breaker 12 Circuit Breaker-thermal/inverse-time 14 Circuit Breaker-magnetic/instantaneous 16 None 0 For example, the one-line circuit used the Disconnect switch and fuses (time-delay) option with a UI_VAL of “6”. When the 3-phase circuit references this one-line circuit, the disconnecting means option with a UI_VAL of “6” becomes the default.
8 Select the List button. The Existing Circuits dialog box displays with a row for each circuit carrying the necessary xdata. 9 Select a circuit row. 10 Select OK. 11 Select to Retag new components or use the same tags as the referenced circuit. 12 Select Insert or Configure. Default circuit elements and values for the circuit are based on the referenced circuit. 13 Continue as described in Insert a 3-phase circuit on page 688 or Configure a 3-phase circuit on page 690. 14 Select Done.
The components are retagged automatically based on their new line reference locations. If the circuit you copied contains fixed wire numbers or component tags, you have the options to keep them or update them based on the new line reference locations. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Circuit drop-down ➤ Copy Circuit. 2 Select the components and wires to copy.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Circuit drop-down ➤ Move Circuit. 2 Select the circuit to move. Carefully window (from left to right) around the circuit, making sure to capture the connection wires and dots that tie in to the vertical bus. 3 Press Enter. 4 Select the base point, and then the second point for the move. Save circuit portions for later use Use this tool to save circuit portions for later use.
4 On the Create New Circuit dialog box, specify: ■ Name of the icon. ■ Image file to use. Make sure to select Create PNG from current screen image. ■ Circuit drawing file name. NOTE If you did not zoom in on the circuit in the previous step 1, you can click Zoom on the Create New Circuit dialog box to zoom around the circuit to save. 5 Click OK. 6 Select the insertion base point of the circuit.
3 On the Add Existing Circuit dialog box, specify: ■ Name of the icon. ■ Image file to use. Make sure to select Create PNG from current screen image. ■ Existing circuit name. 4 Click OK. The existing circuit is added to the bottom of the symbol preview window. Insert a saved circuit Inserts a previously saved circuit you select from the icon menu. After you specify an insertion point, the circuit inserts and the component tags update.
4 On the Circuit Scale dialog box, click OK to use the defaults or specify a scale and then click OK. 5 Specify the insertion point on the drawing. Insert a WBlocked circuit Inserts WBlocked circuitry (external drawing file) with automatic update of the component tag. Inserts a previously saved group of components, wires, ladders, and other entities as circuits. Saved circuits insert as a single object and are then exploded. Component tags update according to the tag settings in the drawing.
Menu Wizard to modify the menu. The default icon menu can also be redefined in wd.env. Add entry "WD_MENU" for schematic icon menu and "WD_PMENU" for panel layout icon menu. Insert Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT Multiple Insert (Icon Menu) Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Multiple Insert drop-down ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).
■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view. Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (.dat). The tree structure is based on the arrangement order of submenus defined in the .dat file. Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure.
detail later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit. Always display previously used menu Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open the Insert Component dialog box. For example, if you insert a push button from the Push Buttons menu, the next time you open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu displays by default. Scale schematic Specifies the component block insertion scale.
■ Properties: (available for icons only) Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name, image, block names and so on. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties. Pneumatic, Hydraulic, and P&ID icon menus The Menu tree structure displays the symbols for the selected component type (pneumatic, hydraulic, or P&ID).
TIP To get a good icon picture for the circuit button, zoom in close to the circuit you plan to save so that it fills the screen. Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (*.dat). The tree structure is based on the arrangement order of submenus defined in the .dat file. Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view. ■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the current menu in the Menu tree view.
Symbol Preview right-click menu Right-click in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display the following options: ■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window. The current view option is marked with a check mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only, or List view. ■ Add Icon: Adds new circuit icons or an existing circuit into the Symbol Preview window. ■ New Submenu: Creates a submenu in the Symbol Preview window and the tree structure.
Command entry: AESAVEDCIRCUIT Insert WBlocked Circuit Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit drop-down ➤ Insert WBlocked Circuit. Toolbar: Circuits Menu: Components ➤ Insert WBlocked Circuit Command entry: AEWBCIRCUIT Custom scale Specifies the insertion scale. Move all lines to wire layers Moves all non-layer "0" line entities to a valid wire layer. Keep all fixed wire numbers Indicates not to erase wire numbers if they are fixed.
Component Tools 10 Insert schematic components Insert schematic components Inserts a component you select from the icon menu. Pick an insertion point on the drawing. The orientation of the symbol tries to match the underlying wire. The wire breaks automatically if the symbol lands on it or very near it. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. 2 In the Insert Component dialog box, select the starting orientation for the component: horizontal or vertical.
3 (Optional) If you want to turn off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing select No Edit dialog box. 4 (Optional) If you want to insert the component, untagged (for example, without assigning a unique Component Tag) select No Tag. The untagged value that displays is the TAG1/TAG2 default value of the component. 5 Select the component to insert (such as Push Buttons ➤ Push Button N.O.) Select an icon picture or the component type from the left-hand list.
Multiple Insert (Icon Menu) Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Multiple Insert drop-down ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu). Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Multiple Insert ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu) Command entry: AEMULTI NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable markers; and saved circuits. Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure.
NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information. Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing session; the most recently used icon displays in the top. This list follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window (icon only, icon with text or list view). The total number of icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit box.
Browses to and selects the component to insert. Browse Right-click menus Options for the Menu tree structure view Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to display the following options: ■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus. ■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name, image, or submenu title. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.
Insert P&ID Component Insert/edit component Edits a component, PLC module, terminal block, wire number, or signal arrow. Insert Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. Edit Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit.
components found on different drawing files in the project, the relationship must be established before editing. The steps to link the new component with related components are: 1 Insert a new component and change the component tag as needed. 2 Click OK and insert the component on the drawing. 3 Right-click the component and select Edit Component. 4 Change the description, catalog data, and so on, as needed. 5 Click OK.
Tags Used: Schematic Lists used component tag names. Select a tag from the list to copy, or to increment for this new component. Initially, the list includes schematic parent components in the same family as the current component. Select to include children, all families, panel, and one-line components in the list. Tags Used: Panel Lists used panel component tag names. Select a tag from the list to copy, to this new component.
Count Specifies the quantity number for the part number (blank=1). This value gets inserted into the "SUBQTY" column of the BOM report. Lookup Opens the catalog database of the component from which you can manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values. Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected component. Previous Scans the previous project to find an instance of the selected component and returns the component values.
Multiple Catalog Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the selected component. You can add up to 99 part numbers to any component. These multiple BOM part numbers appear as sub-assembly part numbers to the main catalog part number in the various BOM and component reports. Catalog Check Displays what the selected item looks like in a Bill of Material template. Ratings Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings attributes on a component.
Click Setup to edit the component cross-reference settings manually. Reference NO/ Reference NC A pin list database table is consulted when a part number is added or an existing part number is changed on a parent symbol. If a match on the Manufacturer, Catalog, and Assembly values of the part number in the database table is found, the associated contact count and pin number information is retrieved and placed on the parent component. Click NO/NC Setup to view or manually edit pin list data values.
Switch Positions Labels the positions of a selector switch. OK-Repeat (not available when editing components) Inserts the new component onto the drawing and then inserts another 'just like' component. Insert/edit component: IEC Assign values on the component such as tag, catalog, location, installation, descriptions, ratings, and miscellaneous values. Related components update to match the new values. The Insert/Edit Component dialog box is for working in IEC mode.
Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. Edit Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit. You can go back to any component at any time and make changes.
Assign short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can extract cable from/to reports and location-specific BOM reports later. (For example, BOM for all field cables, BOM for all PNL cables.) Component Tag Any existing tags appear in the edit box. To define the component tag, edit the tag or type a specific tag in the edit box. Select Fixed if you do not want this tag to update on a retag.
Description Up to three lines of description attribute text can be entered. Drawing Displays a list of descriptions found in the current drawing so you can pick similar descriptions to edit. Project Displays a list of descriptions found in the project so you can pick similar descriptions to edit. Defaults Opens an ASCII text file from which you can quickly pick standard descriptions. Pick Picks a description from a component on the current drawing.
Previous Scans the previous project to find an instance of the selected component and returns the component values. Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the current drawing. Project Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the project. Multiple Catalog Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the selected component. You can add up to ten part numbers to any component.
Show/Edit Miscellaneous View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes. Pins Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the component. For Connectors: Once a connector is inserted onto the block definition of the drawing file, you can edit the connector pins found inside of the connector. Pins Displays pairs of pins in the first column, the plug pin values in the second column, and the receptacle pin values in the last column.
Catalog Data Specifies the catalog part number information such as the manufacturer and catalog number. Count Specifies the quantity number for the extra part number (blank=1). This value gets inserted into the "SUBQTY" column of a BOM report. Unit Specifies the unit of measure, which can be displayed in the component list report. Parts Catalog Lookup Lists the catalog database table that is to be referenced for the description information for the given Manufacturer/Catalog/Assembly combination.
assigned to this catalog. If a match is not found, a dialog box displays where you enter an item number or use the next available. NOTE If the Item Numbering Mode on page 211 is Accumulate Project Wide, this button is disabled. Drawing: List Lists the item numbers along with each manufacturer, catalog, assembly code combinations in use on the active drawing. NOTE If the Item Numbering Mode on page 211 is Accumulate Project Wide, this button is disabled.
NOTE You can also access this dialog box by clicking Multiple Catalog on the Copy Catalog Assignment on page 1299dialog box and clicking Sequential Code: List. To change the order, highlight the part number and click Move Up or Move Down to move it in the list. Tags in use Displays a listing of all component tags found on the schematic for the project. Insert Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu.
Show parent/stand-alone references Shows all parent components for related family codes in the project. (Default) Show child references Shows the children along with the parent for related family codes in the project. Show all components for all families Shows all devices from all families in the project. Show all panel components Displays all panel components. Show one-line components Shows all one-line components for related family codes in the project.
Edit Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click Tags Used: Panel. Sort Sorts the list by component tag, installation code, location code, or sheet number. Freshen Changes the current drawing visible in the tag list and updates the data in the project database.
Edit Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click the Options button in the Component Tag area. You can substitute a fixed text string for the %F part of the tag format for a component. Retag can then use the override format value to calculate a new tag for the component.
the .wdx, .csv, or .txt file to reference and click Open. Select a line of data from the list and click OK. Edit Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click External List. Select the .wdx, .csv, or .txt file to reference and click Open. Select a line of data from the list and click OK.
Select the component to edit. Click Defaults in the Description section of the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. Highlight an entry from the list and click OK, or click Pick File to select a different file and description list. Descriptions panel Displays the values for the description file. Pick File Selects a different file and description list. Language Displays the Language Database file (WD_LANG1.MDB) for the AutoCAD Electrical Language Conversion tool. Project Displays a project .
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit. Click the Defaults button in the Description section of the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, and click Language. NOTE Use the Edit Language Database File on page 1203 tool to modify the language table. Selects a predefined language. Select language NOTE Language matches are not case sensitive, but phrase substitutions are made exactly as entered in the language table.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Description section, click Defaults. In the Descriptions dialog box, click Language. Select the phrase and language to edit and click OK. 1 Line, 2 Lines, 3 Lines Specifies whether to display the selected description text in one line or across multiple lines. Examples of what the description looks like appear next to the options.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Pins section, click List. Pin List The three lists display all available pins to assign to the component. The number in parenthesis () indicates the single or pair of pins for the component. Pins can be Unused NO Pairs, Unused Form-C contacts, and undefined.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT Select the child component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. Multiple Insert (Icon Menu) Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Multiple Insert drop-down ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).
Component Tag The parent tag value can be manually typed into the edit box or selected from a drawing-wide or project-wide list of similar components. If the parent is visible on the screen, click Parent/Sibling and select the parent (or another related contact). This transfers all information automatically to the child contact being inserted or edited. NOTE Only components of the same category are displayed in the Drawing or Project lists.
Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the current drawing. Project Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the project. You can search in the active project, another project, or an external file. ■ Active project: All the drawings in the current project are scanned and the results are listed in a dialog box. Select from the list to assign your new component with a catalog number that is consistent with other similar components in the project.
NOTE If Ratings is grayed out, the component you are editing does not carry rating attributes. Description Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered. These lines are automatically filled with a copy of the parent's description text if the parent Tag name is picked using one of the methods above. You can enter descriptions or select a description from a component on the current drawing.
Pins Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the component. OK-Repeat (not available when editing components) Inserts the new component onto the drawing and then inserts another 'just like' component. Insert or edit child component: IEC This is Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box for working in IEC mode. If you are working in JIC mode, the dialog box will display differently.
Edit Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the child component to edit. You can go back to any component at any time and make changes. Installation Changes the installation codes. You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation codes.
NOTE Only components of the same category are displayed in the Drawing or Project lists. For example, if the child is a one-line component, only one-line components are listed. The category for a component is defined by the WDTYPE attribute on page 325 value. Description Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered. These lines are automatically filled with a copy of the parent's description text if the parent Tag name is picked using one of the methods described previously.
Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the current drawing. Project Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the project. You can search in the active project, another project, or an external file. ■ Active project: All the drawings in the current project are scanned and the results are listed in a dialog box. Select from the list to assign your new component with a catalog number that is consistent with other similar components in the project.
NOTE If Ratings is grayed out, the component you are editing does not carry any rating attributes. Show/Edit Miscellaneous View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes. Cross-reference AutoCAD Electrical automatically fills in cross-reference text when the cross-reference command is run. NOTE If the Cross-reference edit box is grayed out, the component you are editing does not carry an XREF attribute.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Copy Component. 2 Select a component from the drawing just like the new one you want to insert. 3 Select the insertion point. This inserts a copy of the symbol you selected and then displays the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, so you can finish annotating the component. 4 Click OK. Insert similar components at fence crossing points Inserts a component selected from the icon menu at points where the fence you define crosses a wire.
4 Select a point above the first wire that you want to process. 5 Select a point below the final wire for processing, and then right-click to end the command. 6 With each possible insertion point (that is, fence crossing point with a wire) a dialog box displays, prompting you to decide whether to keep the insertion, keep all of the insertions, or skip to the next one. If you keep the insertion point, the regular Insert/Edit dialog box is displayed, where you finish annotating the component.
5 With each possible insertion point (that is, fence crossing point with a wire) a dialog box displays. Specify whether to keep the insertion, keep all of the insertions, or skip to the next one. If you keep the insertion point, the regular Insert/Edit dialog box is displayed, where you finish annotating the component. 6 Click OK to complete the operation.
Inserts schematic or panel symbols by choosing a catalog number or a component description from a user-defined pick list. The data displayed in this pick list is stored in a database in generic Access format. The file name is wd_picklist.mdb and can be edited with Access or from Add/Edit/Delete along the bottom of the dialog box for the pick list. The AutoCAD Electrical normal search path sequence is used to locate this file.
of the path to append to one of these search paths (or you can enter the full path). If the new record is like an existing record, highlight the existing record before you click Add. Edit Opens a dialog box for editing a record. Highlight the record and click Edit. Modify the record in the displayed dialog box. Delete Removes an existing record. Add or edit record Insert Component (Catalog List) Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Catalog List.
NOTE When you add a record you must indicate if the component or circuit is Schematic or Panel and you need to indicate if it should be inserted as a block or exploded upon insert (as you would for a circuit). Then, at a minimum, you need to define the block name and either the catalog number or description. Select Schematic or Panel Device Specifies if the component (or circuit) is Schematic or Panel.
The TEXTVALS value can be used to filter your pick list based on the component's FAMILY code value. For this to work, the text substring "FAMILY=" needs to be somewhere in each line of text to be displayed. The TEXTVALS field can also be used to auto-fill attribute values on insertion. For example, if the line includes the substring "MFG=AB;CAT=1492;LOC=PNL1" then the MFG, CAT, and LOC edit boxes will auto-fill with the values "AB", "1492", and "PNL1" respectively.
the exception of SCHEMATIC_BLKNAM. Each record consists of these fields (in this order): MANUFACTURER Manufacturer name (same as attribute value) CATALOG Catalog part number ASSEMBLYCODE Assembly code part number link FUNCTION_DESCRIPTION Assigned description text (DESC1-DESC3) PANEL_BLKNAM Block name of the panel footprint insert CATEGORY Blank for component queries, 'T' or 'W' for terminal queries WDBLKNAM Name used to tie into catalog lookup table (ex.
found or if matches are found and you choose not to use any of them, the displayed Insert dialog box offers several other options.
Use this tool to add or modify records in the schematic_lookup.mdb file to use for mapping panel footprints and terminal representations to the equivalent schematic component block names. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Database Editors drop-down ➤ Schematic Database File Editor. Toolbar: Panel Miscellaneous Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Database File Editor ➤ Schematic Database File Editor Command entry: AESCHEMATICDB This lookup database table is a catalog lookup Access .
Removes the selected record from the database. Delete Edit record Edit new, existing, or copied records in the schematic_lookup.mdb database. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Database Editors drop-down ➤ Schematic Database File Editor. Toolbar: Panel Miscellaneous Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Database File Editor ➤ Schematic Database File Editor Command entry: AESCHEMATICDB Click Add New, Add Copy, or Edit or double-click on a record in the Edit dialog box.
Insert from equipment lists This tool lists BOM data extracted from your equipment list and finds the appropriate schematic symbol by querying the schematic_lookup.mdb on page 780. It inserts the schematic components at your pick point. Each line or record in the equipment list represents a single entry into the Equipment in dialog box for schematic component selection. The quantity for a selected catalog number is not considered when inserting schematic components.
8 On the Settings dialog box, click OK. 9 In the Schematic equipment in (or the Panel equipment in) dialog box, review the components by sorting or performing a catalog check. 10 Select the component to insert on the drawing. 11 Make any changes to the scale, orientation, or rotation angle for the component. 12 Select the method for inserting the component into the drawing: ■ Insert: Finds and inserts a schematic (or panel) component for the highlighted equipment list component.
Toolbar: Insert Component (Lists) Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component (Lists) ➤ Insert Component (Equipment List) Command entry: AECOMPONENTEQ Select the spreadsheet file to use and click Open. Click the table to edit and click OK. Insert Footprint (Equipment List) Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert Footprints drop-down ➤ Equipment List.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Equipment List. Toolbar: Insert Component (Lists) Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component (Lists) ➤ Insert Component (Equipment List) Command entry: AECOMPONENTEQ Select the spreadsheet file to use and click Open. Specify to use default or previously saved settings and click OK. Sort List Sorts the list of components. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list.
Insert Finds and inserts a schematic component for the highlighted equipment list component. The query of the schematic_lookup.mdb file returns one or more block names based on data that appears in the pick list. The results are displayed in the Insert dialog box along with a short description of each choice. Pick File Picks a file for the insert.
Insert components or terminals from panel lists After the schematic component is selected and inserted in the drawing, all panel-related information is copied to the schematic. Use the Insert/Edit Component dialog box to make any additional changes to the new schematic component. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Panel List. or to insert terminals Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Terminal (Panel List).
This tool lists panel components extracted from your panel drawing, finds the appropriate schematic symbol, and inserts the schematic components at your pick point. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Panel List. Toolbar: Insert Component Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component (Panel List) Command entry: AECOMPONENTPNL Extract component list for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire active project.
schematic symbol is found and inserted in the drawing at your pick point. After the selection of the schematic component and the annotation of the device tag, all panel-related information such as descriptions, installation, and location codes are copied to the schematic. You can select to insert a single schematic component or multiple components from the panel list. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Panel List.
Catalog Check Performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result. This is enabled if the selected panel item contains catalog data. TAG Options Specifies whether to use the panel tag as is, or recalculate the schematic tag based on the tagging settings of the drawing. When a component that doesn't have a tag is selected from the list, this switch is automatically set to Use auto-generated schematic TAG.
Panel terminal list -> schematic terminals insert This report provides error checking between the schematics and the panel layout drawings. The program looks at the selected drawings, both schematic and panel, looking for a match. For each panel component, the routine tries to find a matching schematic component based on tag, location, and installation information. If a match is found, then it compares catalog information looking for any discrepancies.
Panel terminals This presents a list of all panel terminals extracted from the project's panel layout drawings. As you pick an item from the pick list, the appropriate schematic terminal is found and inserted in the drawing at your pick point. After the selection of the schematic terminal and the annotation of the device tag, all panel-related information such as descriptions, installation, and location codes are copied to the schematic.
Last symbol used Displays the last symbol selected through the insert process. You can clear the selection and go back through the insert process to select the schematic terminal symbol or you can automatically insert the last symbol used by not making any changes. Scale Specifies the block insert scale. (1.0 = full) Rotate Changes the default drawing orientation. Insert Finds and inserts a schematic terminal for the highlighted panel terminal. A query of the schematic_lookup.
Scoot components/wire segments The Scoot command lets you quickly reposition components and wire segments. Select directly on a component to slide just that component along its connected wire(s). Wires remain connected to components and existing wire numbers re-center. The component’s movement will be constrained along the wire segment. To scoot a ladder rung, including all its components and wire numbers, select directly on any wire segment that makes up the rung.
Move component attributes The Move/Show Attributes command removes the selected attribute from its current location and inserts it into a new position. If you accidentally pick on the block's graphics instead of an attribute, this move command will kick into the attribute Display/Edit mode instead. Stretch PLC modules The Stretch PLC Module command is a very handy feature, especially for PLC modules.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Delete Component. 2 Select the components to delete. 3 Press Enter. NOTE If you erase a parent schematic component, you have the option to search for related child components, surf to them, and delete them. Scoot components/wire segments Scoots wire numbers, components, wire segments, link lines, PLC text, and signal arrows. Scoot quickly repositions components and wire segments. Click a component to slide just that component along its connected wires.
NOTE You can run the Auto-Retag operation on the components if they move to a new line reference, or update the child cross-references only. Align components/wire numbers Aligns selected components or wire numbers with the selected master. Select the components individually or with a window. Align adjusts all connected wires, and recenters wire numbers. Align vertically or horizontally by flipping the command with a V or H character followed by a [space] entered on the command line.
and removes unnecessary wire numbers left in the position the component vacated. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components drop-down ➤ Move Component. 2 Select the component to move. 3 Select the insertion point for the move. The component automatically moves to the selected position. Stretch PLC modules Stretches or compresses a windowed portion of a PLC module (or any block insert). Maintains all the original block information, including attributes.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components drop-down ➤ Stretch PLC Module. 2 Select the blocks to stretch using a crossing window or crossing polygon window. 3 Press Enter. 4 Select your base and second point of displacement. The exploded blocks stretch and are then rebuilt (maintaining all the original block information, including attributes). Split PLC modules 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components drop-down ➤ Split PLC Module.
Split PLC Module Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components drop-down ➤ Split PLC Module. Toolbar: Scoot Menu: Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤ Split PLC Module Command entry: AESPLITPLC Select the block to split and specify the split point.
Menu: Components ➤ Insert Connector ➤ Split Connector Command entry: AESPLIT Select the connector to split and specify the split point. You specify the following: ■ Origin point for the new block ■ Break type ■ Layer for the child block ■ Whether to reposition the child block Child Base Point Specifies the origin point for the new block. The default is in-line with the first set of pins on the split-off piece.
Reverse/flip components Use this tool to reverse or flip selected component graphics and its associated attributes. NOTE This tool only operates on a component with 2-wire connections (for example, limit switch contact symbol). 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components drop-down ➤ Reverse/Flip Component. 2 Select whether to reverse or flip the component.
Reverse Reverses the component graphics and the attributes perpendicular to the axis formed by the two wire connections. Flip Flips the component graphics and the attributes along the axis of the wire connection (for example, from top-side of the wire to the bottom and vice versa). Graphics only Specifies to reverse or flip only the graphics; component attributes are not modified.
Notice that a single line may carry multiple values with each value separated by a "|" character. Any text that follows a semi-colon is considered a comment and will be ignored. 5 Choose whether to select a different file or add a new entry to the ratings defaults file. 6 Click OK to finish the operation. You may create multiple .WDR files. AutoCAD Electrical will look for a generic defaults file called WD_RATINGS.WDR stored in the AutoCAD Electrical support directory.
Project Displays a project .WDD file (if it is not already displayed). Family Displays family-specific files named for the Family code of the component. For example, if the component has the family code "PB" for push buttons and a file called PB.WDD exists, it will display when you select the Family button. Generic Displays a generic file (WD_DESC.WDD) if it is not already displayed. Add/Edit Adds a new entry to the rating defaults file.
3 (Optional) Type Ctrl + Z to undo the contact swap if you selected the wrong component. Existing attribute text is preserved on the flipped contact. If the maximum contact counts are carried by the parent symbol, the maximum counts are checked so that they are not exceeded by the flip. Component Cross-References Cross-Referencing Cross-referencing is based on collecting and annotating groups of components that carry the same TAG text string value (for example, 101CR).
3 Click OK. 4 If Active drawing (all) is not selected, select the components or drawings to process. The components are cross-referenced and the Cross-Reference Report or Error/Exception Report dialog box displays. 5 Select from the options: ■ Cross-reference - display the Cross-Reference Report which gives a listing of each component and quantity and locations of child contacts. ■ Exception - display the Error/Exception Report which lists the exceptions found.
Cross-referencing is based upon collecting and annotating groups of components that carry the same TAG text string value (such as "101CR"). Components do not have to be of the same family to be cross-referenced; they must have the same TAG1/TAG2/TAG_*/TAG attribute values. Cross-reference data is annotated on to attributes "XREFNO" and "XREFNC" for N.O and N.C. references respectively. Alternately, if attribute XREF is present, both N.O. and N.C.
Surfing on Cross-Reference Exception reports 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Component Cross-Reference drop-down ➤ Component Cross-Reference. 2 Select to process: the project, active drawing, or selected components. ■ Project - select from a list of project drawings to process. ■ Active drawing (all) - process all components on the active drawing. ■ Active drawing (pick) - select components to process. 3 Click OK.
3 Right-click to end the selection and apply the command. Exclude contacts when cross-referencing You can exclude the contact from being included in any AutoCAD Electrical cross-reference text annotation. 1 Enter ATTEDIT at the command line. 2 Select the contact that you want to exclude from cross-referencing. 3 Change the CONTACT attribute value to “NULL”. 4 Click OK. NOTE Run the Cross-reference command to update the cross-referencing on the parent symbol.
A complete list of components is extracted from the project drawing set. The tag of the component is read, then all associated components are found and listed in the dialog box. A bill of material check can be performed to see if the description of the item indicates that the quantity of contacts can be accommodated. References ■ N.O. references: Lists the number of normally open contacts assigned to the selected component. ■ N.C.
Overview of cross-reference settings Cross-reference settings are supported at the project, drawing, and component level. Project Cross-Reference Settings Settings are maintained inside of the project definition file (.wdp). Once settings are created for the project, AutoCAD Electrical applies those settings to new, existing, and copied drawings inside of the project. Ultimately, cross-reference settings are written to the WD_M block of the drawing file to use during normal operations.
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project or drawing name, and select Properties. NOTE Selecting the project applies changes to the project definition file and not the drawing. Apply the settings to drawings to see display changes. 3 Click the Cross-references tab. In the Component Cross-reference Display section, select Text, Graphical, or Table Format and click Setup.
7 Click OK. If you selected to use the Table Format style, the table location is based on the cross reference attribute position. You can move the table to any location on the drawing and the table remains in the new position for that symbol. Cross-reference component override You can define components to have different cross-referencing styles. The settings specified using this tool override the drawing properties.
NOTE If your format includes the sheet number %S parameter or the drawing number %D parameter, enter the values in the edit boxes in Sheet Values section of the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box. Component Cross-Reference Display There are different styles of cross referencing AutoCAD Electrical supports: ■ Text Format: Displays cross-referencing as text with any user-defined string as a separator between references on the same attribute.
Project and Active drawing (all) remove overrides on all components on the drawings while Active drawing (pick) removes overrides for selected components only. Text cross-reference format setup This format displays cross-referencing as text with any user-defined string as a separator between references on the same cross-reference attribute. NOTE Mtext cross-referencing can still be used on selected components that use text cross-referencing. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.
NO 20.3,21.3 Preview Displays an image that shows an example of the cross-referencing format being defined. Options Display Unused Children (Contacts) Displays the child symbols that are not referenced or being used in the project pin list. Separate Reference Displays each unused child symbol in its own reference. Contact Count Totals Displays the total count of all unused child symbols in a single reference.
assigned in the project properties. This setting is taken from drawing properties if there are no cross-reference overrides specified on the inserted component. IEC JIC The following example displays cross-referencing next to the symbol in the graphic font format while the unused children (contacts) are displayed as separate references. The Fill Reference With value is “SP.
Displays the cross-reference format using cross-referencing type values (NO, NC, NONC). IEC JIC Graphical cross-reference format setup This format displays cross-referencing using the AutoCAD Electrical graphical font or using contact mapping edit boxes while displaying each reference on a new line. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.
Format In the event where there are 2 or more references for the same component, each reference is entered into a new line. Displays the cross-reference format using a graphical font. Select to use the JIC font or the IEC font. The setting is applied to the graphical font regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project properties. Graphic Font The JIC image font style displays the cross-referencing using the JIC style normally open, normally close, and Form C contact types.
Overview of table cross-reference formats When you use the table cross-reference format style, the preview image changes to show what the cross-reference looks like in the drawing. Graphic Font Format: Displays the cross-reference format using the JIC or IEC graphical font. The setting is applied to the graphical font regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project properties. The following examples display the table cross-referencing using the graphic font format inside the table style.
Displays the cross-reference format using cross-referencing type values (NO, NC, NONC). JIC IEC Symbol Mapping Format: Displays the cross-reference format using an AutoCAD block (.dwg) file to represent the contact type. The _XREF_GRAPHICS table in the catalog lookup database defines the symbol mapping. The schematic library folders for the active project are searched for the mapped symbols for insertion.
Form C contacts and tables A typical type of contact is a Form C contact type. It is comprised of 2 contacts; 1 open and 1 closed where they share a common terminal pin number. You can choose to insert both of the Form C contacts as two individual symbols, or together as one symbol. Example: Two symbols make up the Form C contact The common pin is on the right-hand side next to the referencing column and displays in the P2 column of the table.
The common pin is on the right-hand side next to the referencing column and displays in the P2 column of the table. JIC IEC Table cross-reference format setup This format displays cross-referencing in a table object that automatically gets updated in real time, so you can define the columns to display. To display component cross-referencing in a table, select a predefined table style and define the column labels to display. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.
NOTE You can also access this dialog box by selecting Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Icon Menu. Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Cross-reference section, select Component override, and click Setup. In the Cross-reference component override dialog box, select Table Format, and click Setup. Format Displays the cross-reference format using a graphical font. Select to use the JIC font or the IEC/GB/JIS font.
Display Unused Children (Contacts) Displays the child symbols that are not referenced or being used in the project pin list. Separate Reference Displays each unused child symbol in its own reference. Contact Count Totals Displays the total count of all unused child symbols in a single reference. Fill Reference With Specifies what to display in the unused reference position for both Separate and Contact Count options. If left empty, a space appears where the referencing would be displayed.
NOTE If the replaceable parameter does not include a value from the drawing, a blank space is displayed in the table title. If the title line is left blank, the table does not show the title row. Edit cross-reference symbol mapping table AutoCAD Electrical checks a cross-reference symbol mapping table when the cross-reference table uses the symbol mapping format. This table maps a contact block name to a graphic drawing name.
NOTE You can also access this when you use Insert Component on page 742. Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Cross-Reference section, select Component override, and click Setup. In the Cross-reference component override dialog box, select Table Format, and click Setup. On the Cross-Reference Format Setup dialog box select Symbol Mapping, and click Edit. This database table is a table within the catalog lookup Access .
Table Format SEARCHORDER Arranges the order of the records so that certain wildcard patterns are used before others. For example, the contact symbol HCR217F.dwg matches two different SYMBOL values, “*217F*” and “*21*”. Since “*217F*” has a lower SEARCHORDER value, its GRAPHIC symbol is used in the cross-reference table. SYMBOL The contact symbol block name or wild card to map to a graphic block name. The following codes are supported to handle special cases.
Component Retag If a component is retagged (retag, move component, move circuit, edit component) the cross-reference table updates if the tag is part of the title. Edit Component If a replaceable parameter is modified for a component that has a crossreference table, the table title updates to reflect the changes. Copy Catalog Assignment When copying a different catalog number to a parent symbol, the PINLIST and contact count may update and the cross-reference table updates in real time.
TIP To set display settings for a specific component that are different from the drawing, use the Copy/Add Component Override tool. 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project or drawing name, and select Properties. NOTE Selecting the project applies changes to the project definition file and not the drawing. Apply the settings to drawings to see display changes. 3 Click the Cross-references tab.
■ Enter the replaceable parameter ■ Enter text 7 Click OK. If you selected to use the Table Format style, the table location is based on the cross reference attribute position. You can move the table to any location on the drawing and the table remains in the new position for that symbol. Table cross-reference format setup This format displays cross-referencing in a table object that automatically gets updated in real time, so you can define the columns to display.
Format Displays the cross-reference format using a graphical font. Select to use the JIC font or the IEC/GB/JIS font. The setting is applied to the graphical font regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project properties. Graphic Font The JIC image font style displays the cross-referencing using the JIC style normally open, normally close, and Form C contact types.
Fill Reference With Specifies what to display in the unused reference position for both Separate and Contact Count options. If left empty, a space appears where the referencing would be displayed. For example if you enter the text "SP" for spares, "SP" displays in the referencing. Table Style Table styles are defined within a drawing file to determine the size, shape, style, and font of a table object. There is always a table style on a drawing. The standard table style cannot be deleted.
it. They can be on the same drawing or scattered across the project drawing set. Insert stand-alone cross-reference symbols You use stand-alone cross-reference symbols just as you would wire source/destination arrow symbols but without the wires. Insert a source reference symbol, and then tie one or more destination reference symbols to it. They can be on the same drawing or scattered across the project drawing set.
Update stand-alone cross-reference symbol annotations 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Component Cross-Reference drop-down ➤ Update Stand-Alone Cross-Referencing. The Update Wire Signal and Stand-Alone Cross-Reference dialog box displays. 2 Specify whether to update the cross-reference annotation between pairs of stand-alone cross-reference symbols. 3 Specify to update the cross-references for the entire drawing or one at a time. 4 Click OK.
Multiple Insert (Icon Menu) Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Multiple Insert drop-down ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu). Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Multiple Insert ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu) Command entry: AEMULTI NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable markers; and saved circuits. Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure.
NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information. Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing session; the most recently used icon displays in the top. This list follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window (icon only, icon with text or list view). The total number of icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit box.
Browses to and selects the component to insert. Browse Right-click menus Options for the Menu tree structure view Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to display the following options: ■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus. ■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name, image, or submenu title. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.
Insert P&ID Component Stand-alone source or destination cross-reference symbol You use stand-alone cross-reference symbols just as you would wire source/destination arrow symbols but without the wires. Insert a source reference symbol and then tie one or more destination reference symbols to it. They can be on the same drawing or scattered across the project drawing set. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Dashed Link Line drop-down ➤ Insert Stand-Alone Cross-Referencing.
Project Displays project-wide pick lists of all source/destination codes used so far. Pick Picks the matching symbol from the active drawing. OK+ Update Destination Saves changes and updates the related destination symbols with any changes. Update wire signal and stand-alone cross-reference Updates signal source and destination cross-reference text and wire numbers. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ ➤ Update Signal References.
Wire Signals Update source/destination cross-references Updates the from/to cross-reference annotation on each wire network source and destination arrow symbol. Update source/destination wire number tags Makes the wire number tags on the destination end match the wire number carried on the source end of each wire signal pair. Stand-Alone Cross-Reference Symbols Set up the desired cross-reference format in the Cross-Reference Format section of the Drawing Properties ➤ Cross-Reference dialog box.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Dashed Link Line drop-down ➤ Link Components with Dashed Line. 2 Select the contacts in the order you want the dashed link line drawn. AutoCAD Electrical changes the contact's annotation to invisible and draws a dashed link line from the bottom of the upper contact to the top of the new contact. The line is a polyline drawn on the layer name defined on the Define Layers dialog box.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Dashed Link Line drop-down ➤ Insert Reference Arrow - To. 2 Select the contact to draw the line from. 3 Select where the arrow endpoint should be on the drawing. 4 Insert a description for the dashed link line in the Description dialog box and click OK. The line is a polyline drawn on the layer name defined on the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format ➤ Layers:Define ➤ Define Layers dialog box.
6 (Optional) Use the Scoot command to reposition any jog in the dashed link line. 7 (Optional) Use the AutoCAD Erase command to remove the dashed link line. Follow signals Follow a signal for a source or destination signal Use the List Signal Code tool to follow a signal from a specific source or destination symbol. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ ➤ List Signal Code. 2 Select the signal marker to list. The signal code dialog box appears.
Menu: Wires ➤ Signal References ➤ List Signal Code Command entry: AELISTSIG All source and destination references for the signal code are listed in the three boxed groups: Previous drawings (sheet/reference) Shows the references on upstream (previous) drawings. Current drawing Shows the references on the current drawing. Downstream drawings (sheet/reference) Shows references on downstream (next) drawings. Surf Navigates to any of the references.
defines some parameters based on the number of slots calculated from the rail length. Spreadsheet fields MFG Manufacturer. CAT Catalog Number. ASSYCODE Assembly code. DESC Description used for dialog listing only. RAILWID Din rail width; distance between the top and bottom rail lines. RAILCEN Distance between the din rail centerlines. RAILCEN1 Distance between the din rail centerlines; used for nonsymmetrical din rails.
CHANNEL Distance from channel line to the origin; repeated for each channel line. CHANNEL_END Distance from origin to channel end for each channel. MIN_SHIFT Length of rail to shift from one piece of rail to the next to make sure last piece is not less than the minimum length. NCHOLE Name of AutoCAD block for the drill hole. BRKT Allow standoff brackets, Yes or No. If No, then the button is disabled on the dialog. If Yes, the button is enabled and you can select standoff brackets.
■ RAILLENSTD = 72 ■ WDBLKNAM = WW ■ MFG = PANDUIT ■ CAT = Generic ■ DESC = Wire duct, 3.92"x1.89" tall, slotted ■ RAILLENSTD = 78.72 ■ WDBLKNAM = WW In the Din Rail dialog box, select one of these records as the Rail Type and click OK. In the Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box, Catalog section, click Catalog Lookup. The Parts catalog dialog box now displays wire ways with Manufacturer = PANDUIT and Type = Slotted. Select a suitable wire way from the list.
Use this field to define the properties for the channel lines. CHANNEL_PROP Din rail Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert Footprints drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. Toolbar: Panel Layout Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Icon Menu) Command entry: AEFOOTPRINT Select DIN Rail from the list. Once the information is entered and you click OK, the Din Rail is generated. Each Din Rail section is created as a separate block.
footprints, wire numbers, terminals, wire jump arrows). A copy of this information is extracted and maintained in a USER table in the project database. This allows you to do queries on the project database file (in Microsoft Access format) and access all of this user information carried on all entities project-wide. This data is stored on the entities as invisible extended entity data. You are free to use this data in any way you see fit.
Removes the selected record number from the database. If no user data records are found on the block insert, an alert is displayed in the dialog box prompting you to add a new record. Delete record Wire Jumpers Define wire jumpers Define wire jumpers You can create internal jumpers on a selected component using the Add/Edit Internal Jumper tool. When wire numbers are inserted using AutoCAD Electrical, these internal jumpers are read and wire numbers are assigned accordingly.
Add wire jumpers by picking 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Internal Jumper. 2 Select the component. 3 Click Pick. The dialog closes. You can select as many terminals as you want. Try to select as near the terminal as you can since AutoCAD Electrical finds the closest connection terminal to your selected point. 4 After you select the terminals, press Enter and the dialog displays. Notice that the selected terminals are highlighted in the list.
the two pins on the component; you need to rerun the Insert Wire Numbers tool to reconcile these two different wire numbers now jumpered together. If you click Cancel, the internal jumper data is not inserted. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Internal Jumper. Toolbar: Edit Component Menu: Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤ Add/Edit Internal Jumper Command entry: AEINTERNALJUMPER Add Adds an internal jumper assignment.
858
Component Attribute Tools 11 Edit attribute values Edit the attribute text value of a component You can use three different tools to edit component information. Using the Edit Component tool The standard way is to use the regular Edit Component command and edit the tag value from the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit. 2 Select the component to edit. 3 Edit the tag value in the Insert/Edit Component dialog box.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Edit Selected Attribute. 2 Select the attribute to edit. A dialog box displays and lets you type in a new attribute value. 3 Enter a new attribute value in the Edit Attribute dialog box. Click Pick to select another attribute whose text you want to use for the selected attribute. You can also click the arrow keys to increment or decrement the attribute value. 4 Click OK.
5 Type in a new attribute value in the Edit Attribute dialog box. You can click the arrow keys to increment or decrement the attribute value. 6 Click OK. NOTE You can also use any attribute editing command to edit an AutoCAD Electrical attribute values of the component. For example, use the AutoCAD DDATTE command. Edit attribute This tool lets you edit the text an attribute by picking right on the attribute. A dialog box pops up and you type in a new attribute value.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Change Attribute Layer. 2 Specify the target layer: ■ Type the name in the box. ■ Click List to select from a list of layers in the active drawing. ■ Click Wires to change to the layer used for wire numbers on wires. The default layer is WIRENO. It is defined on the WIRENO_LAY attribute of the WD_M block. ■ Click Terminals to change to the layer used for wire numbers on terminals and source or destination signal arrows.
List Lists the layers in the active drawing. Select a layer from this list or enter the layer name in the Change to Layer box. Wires Forces the tool to change to the layer used for wire number text placed on wires. The default layer is WIRENO. It is defined on the WIRENO_LAY attribute of the WD_M block. Terminals Forces the tool to change to the layer used for wire number text placed on terminals and source or destination signal arrows. The default layer is WIREREF.
6 Select to find and replace the exact text value or substrings within the attribute value. 7 Click Start Search to begin the find and replace operation. Each found match is displayed in a separate dialog box. You can edit, replace, skip to the next, or replace all of the found values. An example of search criteria To change all of the Location Codes marked "PNL1" to "PNL2A" you would: ■ Set the Location Code find value to "PNL1." ■ Set the Location Code replace value to "PNL2A.
Find Specifies the value to find. Initially, only the Find (F) toggles are enabled. Replace Replaces the find value with the new text string that you specify. List Displays a list of the current text values for the selected attribute. Select from this list to define your find parameter. All Replaces the text only if the entire text value matches the find value. Part Replaces the text if any part of the text value matches the find value.
Toolbar: Retag Menu: Components ➤ Component Tagging ➤ Find/Edit/Replace Component Text Command entry: AEFINDCOMPTEXT Decide if you want to run the component retag across selected components, the active drawing, or the entire project. Manipulate terminal text Find or replace terminal text 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Retag Components drop-down ➤ Find/Replace Terminal Text. 2 Select to replace the Full, exact match, or a substring match.
This tool lets you find and replace terminal number text values or find and replace substrings within those values. You can do it on a selection from the active drawing, the entire active drawing, or across the project drawing set. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Retag Components drop-down ➤ Find/Replace Terminal Text.
2 Select the schematic components to process. ■ Push Description Up: DESC2 and DESC3 are pushed up to the DESC1 and DESC2 attribute positions when blanks are found. ■ Push Description Down: DESC1 and DESC2 are pushed up to the DESC2 and DESC3 attribute positions when blanks are found. Move attributes Move component attributes 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Move/Show Attribute. 2 Select the attributes to move and press Enter.
Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Hide Attributes (Window/Multiple). 2 Select the attributes to hide or pick on block graphics to display a list of attributes. The attribute is hidden immediately after it is selected. You can window attributes to hide by typing W and [space]. Do a crossing window (right to left) to capture the attributes you want to hide. 3 (Optional) Type U and [space] to unhide the attribute.
2 Select the attribute text, text, or MTEXT string to rotate 90 degrees from its current orientation. After rotation, press M and [space] to flip into the Move Attribute mode. Change attribute justification Change attribute justification Use this tool to change the justification of wire number text, component description text, or any attribute. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Change Attribute Justification.
Pick Master Selects an attribute or text entity on the drawing whose justification you want to use. Once you select your attributes or text objects, each object updates to match the selected justification. Change attribute text style Change attribute text style Use this tool to adjust the font assignment (either project-wide or drawing-wide) to the text style “WD” or “WD_IEC.” 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Utilities.
Use the change attribute size utility 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Change Attribute Size. 2 Select your new attribute size by either picking on a similar text or attribute entity or by manually entering the size value into the edit box. 3 Enter the new width factor into the edit box. Make sure that you click to apply the width. 4 Select to change the attribute name by picking individual attributes, by type, or by typing a specific attribute name.
6 In the Batch Process Drawings dialog box, select to process the project and click OK. 7 In the Select Drawings to Process dialog box, select the drawings to process and click OK. AutoCAD Electrical processes the selected drawings and adjusts the target attributes to the specified value. Use the squeeze and stretch text utilities Use the Squeeze attribute tool to compress an attribute to make it fit into a tight spot (such as between closely spaced components).
Toolbar: Edit Attributes Menu: Components ➤ Attributes ➤ Change Attribute Size Command entry: AEATTSIZE Pick Selects the new attribute size by picking a similar text or attribute. Size Specifies the attribute size value. Width Specifies the attribute width value. Apply Applies the new size or width values to the selected attributes. Single Changes the size of the attributes as you select them. By name Changes all attributes of a certain type.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Rename Attribute. 2 Select directly on the attribute you want to rename. 3 Enter the new attribute name. 4 Press Enter. Add attributes to blocks Add an attribute to a block Use this tool to add an attribute to one insert instance of a block. The block does not need to be an AutoCAD Electrical block. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Add Attribute. 2 Select the block.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Add Attribute. Toolbar: Edit Attributes Menu: Components ➤ Attributes ➤ Add Attribute Command entry: AEATTRIBUTE Name Specifies text used to identify the attribute (attribute tag). Value Specifies the attribute text. This value is displayed on the drawing and used in reports. NOTE It can be left blank. Height Specifies the height for the attribute value. Justification Specifies the justification for the attribute value.
2 In the Fixed/Unfixed Component Tag Marking dialog box, select whether to force selected tags to fixed or switch a tag between being fixed or unfixed and click OK. ■ Force selected tags to fixed: Select the component to fix. Right-click to accept the selection. ■ Single edit switch fixed/unfixed: Select the component to fix. In the Fix/Unfix Component Tag dialog box, select Make it Fixed and click OK. Fix tags project-wide 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Utilities.
Select whether to force selected tags to fixed, force selected tags to unfixed, or switch a tag between being fixed or unfixed. AutoCAD Electrical changes the attribute of the component to a fixed layer as defined in the Define Layers dialog box. Retag components Retag recalculates each selected primary component tag, and updates the related components. You can update a single component, a group of components, a drawing, drawings within your project, or the entire project.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Retag Components drop-down ➤ Retag Components. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Component Tagging ➤ Retag Components Command entry: AERETAG Retag recalculates each selected primary component tag, and updates the related components. You can update a single component, a group of components, a drawing, drawings within your project, or the entire project.
2 Select the text string to change. 3 Type a new text string for the selected text. Use the Text Formatting dialog box to change the text style and size. You can also right-click and select from the context menu options. 4 Use the grips or double-click the text to bring up text formatting options to reformat the reference string into multiple lines. 5 Click OK.
TIP You can click Drawing or Project to select a Location value that was already in either the active drawing or project. The next time you insert a new component on this drawing, the Location code are prefilled with the drawing default. Add a Location code to a saved component 1 Open a .dwg file of the saved symbol in AutoCAD. 2 Use the ATTDEF command to add the new attribute or copy an attribute definition and rename it. 3 Save the drawing file.
Child contact and panel update from schematic parent This tool updates child and panel components with installation, location, and description values carried by the associated parent schematic component. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Component Cross-Reference drop-down ➤ Child Location/Description Update.
Manufacturer/Catalog to always match schematic parent Specifies that the Manufacturer/Catalog should always match the parent Manufacturer/Catalog values. Manufacturer/Catalog update only if child is blank Specifies that the Manufacturer/Catalog should only be updated to match the parent Manufacturer/Catalog text if the child Manufacturer/Catalog values are blank.
4 Click OK. Insert a location mark symbol 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Location Box drop-down ➤ Location Symbols. 2 Select a component to add the symbol to and press Enter. 3 From the Location Symbols dialog box, select the symbol to associate with the component and click OK. The attribute text becomes invisible and the location symbol inserts at its location. You can reposition the location marks with the AutoCAD Move command. If you scoot the symbol, the mark moves with it.
with a file name that begins with "WDXX" (for example, "WDXXSQ1.DWG") Create an AutoCAD slide of the symbol and save the resulting .sld file. 2 Open the drawing in AutoCAD and center it on the screen. 3 Type MSLIDE at the command prompt. 4 Enter Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\wdxxsq1.sld Windows Vista, Windows 7: \Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\wdxxsq1.sld as the file name to create. 5 Click Save.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Location Box drop-down ➤ Location Symbols. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Components ➤ Component Tagging ➤ Location Symbols Command entry: AELOCATIONSYMBOL Select a component to add the symbol to and press Enter. Some location symbol options include: Filled Triangle, Filled Square, Filled Diamond, Filled Circle, 1/2 Filled Triangle, 1/2 Filled Square, 1/2 Filled Diamond, and 1/2 Filled Circle.
REMOTESTATIONSYMBOLS Main Operator sta | wdxx_mos | wdxx_mos Wash-down sta | wdxx_wds | wdxx_wds **M101 L2 CUSTOMERSYMBOLS Customer power | wdxx_cp | wdxx_cp Customer furnished | wdxx_cf | wdxx_cf NOTE You only need to define the L*W row if you plan on using this .dat file in a version of AutoCAD Electrical before AutoCAD Electrical 2008. Location box A location box is drawn around devices to designate that they are physically in a different location/installation than the other devices in the drawing.
The layer assigned to the Location Box feature determines the color and linetype of the polyline. Assign the layer on the Drawing properties: drawing format tab on page 231 dialog box. Insert Location Box Inserts a location box around one or more components. You have the option to update the location and installation codes for the parent components within the box to match the location box. You can assign a description to the location box.
■ Pick “Like” - temporarily exits the Location Box dialog box so you can select an existing location code value on the drawing. 5 Enter the Installation value for the box. ■ Browse - displays the Installation Codes dialog box where you can select an installation code used in the project, on the active drawing, or from an external .INST file. ■ Pick “Like” - temporarily exits the Location Box dialog box so you can select an existing installation code value on the drawing.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Location Box drop-down ➤ Location Box. Toolbar: Location Symbols Menu: Components ➤ Component Tagging ➤ Location Box Command entry: AELOCATIONBOX You have the option to update the location and installation codes for the parent components within the box to match the location box. You can assign a description to the box. Installation/Location Codes Location Installation Specifies the location code.
■ Pick “Like” - temporarily exits the Location Box dialog box so you can select an existing installation code value on the drawing. Update existing parent symbols values to match the location box By default, all location and installation values on schematic parent symbols inside the location box, update to match the values of the location box. Uncheck this option to keep the values on the symbols.
Picks a description from a component in the active drawing. Pick “Like” NOTE Use the AutoCAD Electrical Edit Component to change the Location Box values. Modify library symbols Change library symbol attribute size Use the Modify Symbol Library tool to change the attribute description size for library symbols. NOTE Make a backup copy of the library you plan to modify (such Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic1 library, or Windows Vista, Windows 7: \User
Symbol library attribute text/scale resize Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder drop-down ➤ Modify Symbol Library. Menu: Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Modify Symbol Library Command entry: AEUPDATESYMLIB Select the folder and click OK. Re-scale symbol Specifies the new scale for the symbol. A value of 1.0 = no change. Change polyline width Specifies the new polyline width for the symbol.
894
Wire/Wire Number Tools 12 Overview of wires AutoCAD Electrical treats line entities as wires when the lines are found on an AutoCAD Electrical-defined wire layer. You can have many wire layers set up on your drawing. Each wire layer has a descriptive name like "RED_16" or "BLK_14_THW" and is assigned a screen color to mimic the wire color visually. Wires do not have to begin or end at snap points, and they do not have to be orthogonal (they can be skewed at any angle).
whether the wire layer is processed for wire numbers) are saved in the drawing file. The following rules determine the wire layer for a new wire: ■ When a wire is created from an existing wire, the new wire takes on the same layer as the existing wire. It ignores the current layer and the current wire type. ■ When the new wire is started in empty space but ends at an existing wire, the new wire takes on the wire layer of the ending wire. The current layer and current wire type are ignored.
5 To import wire types from an existing drawing or template, click Import. ■ Select the drawing or drawing template containing the wire types for import. ■ On the Import Wire Types dialog box, select the wire types for import. ■ Define how the import function behaves if a wire type exists on the active drawing. 6 Click Color, Linetype, or Lineweight to assign values for the new layer. NOTE If you want the new wire layer to be the default, click Mark Selected as Default. 7 Click OK.
Defines and edits wire types. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Type drop-down ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type. Toolbar: Wires Menu: Wires ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type Command entry: AEWIRETYPE The program saves the wire layer name and associated properties, such as wire color, size, and whether the wire layer is processed for wire numbers, in the drawing file. Use the grid control to sort and select wire types to modify.
NOTE Manually maintain wire layer type consistency through signal arrows. To rename the User1- User 20 column headers, right-click the project name in the Project Manager and select Properties. In the Project Properties ➤ Wire Numbers dialog box, Wire Type section, click Rename User Columns. In the Rename User Columns dialog box, specify a new column name and click OK. Renaming of user-defined columns is project-specific. You cannot rename the Color, Size, or Layer Name columns.
Layer Allows you to format the layer name, define or edit the layer color, linetype, and line weight. Layer Name Format Format the layer name. The program fills the layer name automatically once you enter a value in color, size based on the format. For example, if you enter BLK for color and 10AWG for size, the layer name is filled in as BLK_10AWG based on default %C_%S format. Placeholders are supported at any place in the format (that is, "CUST%C-THIN%S).
lineweight while creating the layer. Multiple selection is allowed. All wire layers that were selected can be changed to the desired lineweight. Add Existing Layer Displays the Layers for Line Wires dialog box for specifying a layer name. Click Pick to select the layer name from the existing layer list consisting of all the layers in the drawing inclusive of the non-wire layers. Only lines on pre-selected layers are processed as wires. Enter a wire layer name in the dialog box.
■ The layer name cannot be left blank ■ The layer name cannot contain special characters such as / \ " : ; ? * | , = ' >< Import wire types 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Type drop-down ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type. 2 Click Import. The Wire Type Import - Select Master Drawing dialog box displays. 3 Select the drawing or drawing template containing the wire types for import. 4 Click Open. The Import Wire Types dialog box displays. 5 Select the wire types for import.
Import wire types project-wide 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Utilities. 2 Select the Import from specified drawing check box. 3 Browse to or enter the name of the drawing or drawing template containing the wire type definitions for import. 4 Click Setup to display the Import Wire Types dialog box. 5 Select the wire types for import. 6 Define how the import function behaves if a wire type exists on the drawing being processed.
Toolbar: Wires Menu: Wires ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type Command entry: AEWIRETYPE Click the Import button in the Option section. Project-wide utilities Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Utilities. Toolbar: Project Menu: Projects ➤ Project-Wide Utilities Command entry: AEUTILITIES Select the Import from specified drawing check box. Browse to or enter the name of the drawing or drawing template containing the wire type definitions for import. Click Setup.
Provides the means for operations on wire numbers, component tags, attribute text, wire types, and item numbers. You can define scripts and apply them project-wide. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Utilities. Toolbar: Project Menu: Projects ➤ Project-Wide Utilities Command entry: AEUTILITIES Select project drawings and perform any of the following: ■ Erase, reset, fix, or unfix wire numbers. ■ Fix or unfix component tags. ■ Fix or unfix item numbers. ■ Clear signal cross-referencing.
Parent Component Tags: Fix/Unfix Select to maintain the component tags or to set all parent component tags to fixed or normal across the current project. Item Numbers: Fix/Unfix Select to maintain the item numbers or to set all item numbers to fixed or normal across the current project. If you run Resequence Item Numbers on page 1602 later on, fixed item numbers do not change.
Change wire types Change wire types You can change the wire type using the Change/Convert Wire Type tool or by typing a "T" at the command prompt during wire insertion commands. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Type drop-down ➤ Change/Convert Wire Type. Optionally, you can right-click on an existing wire and select Change/Convert Wire Type.
■ Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wires drop-down ➤ 22.5 Degree. ■ Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wires drop-down ➤ 45 Degree. ■ Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wires drop-down ➤ 67.5 Degree. ■ Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Multiple Bus. ■ Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Ladder drop-down ➤ Add Rung.
Wire type grid Displays the wire types used in the active drawing. The wire layer name and the wire properties like color, size, whether the wire layer is processed for wire numbers, and user-defined properties are listed in the grid. An 'x' in the Used column indicates that the layer name is currently used in the drawing. A blank value in this column indicates that the layer name exists in the drawing but it is not currently being used.
Convert Line(s) to Wire(s) Changes the lines to the selected wire type in the wire type grid. OK NOTE This option is available only when one wire type record is selected in the list. Makes the selected wire type the current wire type. If the selected wire type does not exist on the drawing, the wire layer is created on the fly. The wire layer name and properties are saved in the drawing file.
Wire type grid Displays the wire types used in the active drawing. The wire layer name and the wire properties like color, size, whether the wire layer is processed for wire numbers, and user-defined properties are listed in the grid. An 'x' in the Used column indicates that the layer name is currently used in the drawing. A blank value in this column indicates that the layer name exists in the drawing but it is not currently being used.
■ The layer name cannot contain special characters such as / \ " : ; ? * | , = ' > <. Insert wires Insert wires Inserts wire with automatic connection and wire crossing gaps or loops. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wires drop-down ➤ Wire. Click the Insert Wires drop-down to access the Insert 22.5, 45, or 67.5 Degree Wire tools. 2 Select the starting point of the wire.
an existing component. If it ends at a wire segment, a dot (wddot.dwg) is applied, if appropriate. If it ends at another component, the nearest wire connection attribute is found and connected to your pick point on that symbol. NOTE If the distance between two horizontal wires is relatively small, the vertical wire crossing them avoids inserting loop gaps. The wire trap distance setting is used to see whether wire loop gaps are possible or not.
You can insert single or angled (22.5, 45, or 67.5 degree) line wire segments on a wire layer (the wire layer does not have to be the current layer). AutoCAD Electrical supports scooting components along angled wires. NOTE The AutoCAD Insert Line command can also be used to insert AutoCAD Electrical wires on a valid wire layer. Wiretype Displays the Set Wire Type dialog box where you set the wire type for new wires.
collision checking. A value of nil or 0 means to do collision checking. The default setting is nil.
Insert multiple wires Insert multiple wires 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Multiple Bus. 2 Set the horizontal and vertical spacing for the wires. 3 Specify where to start the wires. 4 Set the number of wires to 3, and click OK. During wire insertion, the current wire type displays at the command prompt. The current wire type indicates the layer name in which the new wires are drawn.
As you pull the 3-phase wire out, you can turn a corner by moving your cursor out of line with the bus. To reverse the phase sequence of the turn, press F. 6 Right-click to terminate the wires. The wires and wire connection dots insert, and loops are automatically inserted at wire crossing points. NOTE If the distance between two horizontal wires is relatively small, the vertical wire crossing them avoids inserting loop gaps.
Inserts vertical or horizontal bus wiring. Bus spacing defaults to the default ladder rung spacing for horizontal bus. For a vertical bus, the spacing is the default value defined in the Ladder Defaults section in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box. NOTE You can use the Scoot command to adjust bus spacing after insertion. Horizontal Specifies the horizontal spacing between the wires. Vertical Specifies the vertical spacing between the wires.
Trim wires Trim wires Use this tool to remove a wire segment and wire tees as required. You can pick on a single wire or draw a fence through multiple wires to trim. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Trim Wire. 2 Select the wire segment to remove on the drawing or type F followed by a [space] to remove multiple wires at once. 3 If you are removing multiple wires, draw a fence through the wires to trim. A Zoom Extents is triggered when a wire runs off the screen.
Fence Draw a fence line through all wire segments to trim. Zext Zoom Extents so that all wire segments are visible on the screen. Crossing Draw a crossing window selecting all wire segments to trim. Select wire to trim Select a single wire segment to trim. Stretch wires Stretch wires Stretches or trims the end of a wire segment to the nearest wire or in-line component wire connection point. Select the wire, and the program automatically finds the wire or component in its path.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wires drop-down ➤ Stretch Wire. 2 Select the end of the wire to stretch. Bend wires at right angles Bend wires at right angles Bends a wire in a right angle and makes three right angle turns to avoid or add geometry. You can modify the wire defined at a right angle. You can replace the right angle bend while maintaining the original wire connections to the components.
4 Right-click to exit the command. Overview of wire color/gauge labels When you select a wire to label, AutoCAD Electrical reads the layer name of the wire, retrieves the matching text label, and inserts it as a label/leader on the drawing. The resulting wire color/gauge label is automatically revised if you change the wire layer of a labeled wire. The mapping file is an ASCII text file with a ".wdw" extension. The default mapping file, default.wdw, is referenced if a project-specific .
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Wire Number Leader drop-down ➤ Wire Color/Gauge Labels. 2 Click Setup to change the text size, arrow style, and layers for the label. ■ Select the layer name to add/modify the default color/gauge text string for wire labels and leaders. To add or modify the default color/gauge text string, select the layer name from the list in the Wire label color/gauge setup dialog box.
In Setup, set the default color/gauge text string, text size, arrow size, gap size, and arrow type for the wire label/leaders. In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, add new wire layer names. Sets the default color/gauge text string, text size, arrow size, gap size, and arrow type for the wire label/leaders. To add or modify the default color/gauge text string, select the layer name from the list in the Wire label color/gauge setup dialog box.
NOTE The wire breaks around the inline marker. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Wire Number Leader drop-down ➤ In-Line Wire Labels. The Insert Component dialog displays with a selection of predefined in-line markers and user-defined markers. 2 Select a marker and place it on a wire. NOTE If the label is too wide, use the Squeeze Attribute/Text tool. You can also use the Adjust In-Line Wire/Label Gap tool to adjust the gap width rather than squeezing the attribute to fit the gap.
section of the Project properties: project settings tab on page 204. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to modify the menu. The default icon menu can also be redefined in wd.env. Add entry "WD_MENU" for schematic icon menu and "WD_PMENU" for panel layout icon menu. Insert Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu.
■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view. Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (.dat). The tree structure is based on the arrangement order of submenus defined in the .dat file. Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure.
detail later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit. Always display previously used menu Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open the Insert Component dialog box. For example, if you insert a push button from the Push Buttons menu, the next time you open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu displays by default. Scale schematic Specifies the component block insertion scale.
■ Properties: (available for icons only) Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name, image, block names and so on. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties. Pneumatic, Hydraulic, and P&ID icon menus The Menu tree structure displays the symbols for the selected component type (pneumatic, hydraulic, or P&ID).
Insert cable markers into wires You can insert parent and child cable markers into wires. These markers carry a cable TAG value, just like any parent/child device combination. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Cable Markers drop-down ➤ Cable Markers. 2 In the Insert Component dialog box, select the cable marker to insert and pick the insertion point on the drawing. The Insert/Edit Cable Marker dialog box displays.
NOTE If the parent is a one-line symbol, the Insert Some Child Components dialog box does not display. 7 If you want to insert child markers, change the dialog box and click Ok insert Child. If you do not want any child markers to be associated with the parent marker, click Close. NOTE You can use the Dashed Link Line command to insert linked lines between the symbols. Insert component This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with a custom menu.
Command entry: AEMULTI NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable markers; and saved circuits. Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure. The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just above the menu tree structure. Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.
Display Specifies the number of icons to display in the Recently Used list box. Enter integer numbers only; the default value is 10. Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This value is opposite the default ladder rung orientation for the drawing. No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit.
Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to display the following options: ■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus. ■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name, image, or submenu title. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.
Inserts parent and child cable markers. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Cable Markers drop-down ➤ Cable Markers. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Wires ➤ Cables ➤ Cable Markers Command entry: AECABLEMARKER In the Insert Component dialog box, select the marker to insert from the Symbol Preview window and specify the insertion point. A cable marker carries a component tag value, like any parent/child device combination.
Make sure that you select Fixed if you want AutoCAD Electrical to mark this tag so it is not updated on a retag. Use PLC Address Searches for a wire connection to a nearby PLC I/O address and, if found, uses the PLC address number in the tag name of the component. Use End Locations Uses the location codes of the connecting components. Tags: Used so far Lists any cable tag names in the same family as the current cable. Select a tag from the list to copy, or to increment for this new cable marker.
previous component is set as the default. (The assumption is that a previous one was made during the current editing session). Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the cable marker. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Catalog Lists the catalog number for the cable marker. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Assembly Lists the assembly code for the cable marker. The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together.
sheet or database program. A dialog box displays the contents of the selected text file. Find and highlight the desired entry. AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from the file and breaks it into its component parts. They are displayed in the left-hand dialog box list. For each relevant item, highlight it and then pick the appropriate category button in the center column. The highlighted item is transferred to the corresponding category (and then to the Insert/Edit dialog box once OK is clicked).
Installation Code Changes the installation codes. You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation codes. AutoCAD Electrical does a quick read of all the current or selected drawing files and returns a list of all installation codes used so far. Pick from the list to update the component automatically with the installation code. Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Wires ➤ Cables ➤ Cable Markers Command entry: AECABLEMARKER Select Cable Marker from the list. It is Insert/Edit Cable Marker (Parent wire) dialog box for working in IEC mode. If you work in JIC mode, the dialog box displays differently. Installation Changes the installation codes. You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation codes.
Tags: Used so far Lists any cable tag names in the same family as the current cable. Select a tag from the list to copy, or to increment for this new cable marker. External list file Assigns a tag from an external list file. Description Up to three lines of description attribute text can be entered. These lines are automatically filled with a copy of the description text of the parent if the parent TAG name is picked using one of the methods previously described.
Item Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each cable marker. The tag value can be manually typed in the edit box. Count Specifies the quantity number for the part number (blank=1). This value gets inserted into a “SUBQTY" column of a BOM report. Lookup Opens the catalog database of the cable marker from which you can manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values. Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected cable marker.
Multiple Catalog Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the selected cable markers. You can add up to ten part numbers to any cable markers. These multiple BOM part numbers appear as subassembly part numbers to the main catalog part number in the various BOM and component reports. Catalog Check Displays what the selected item looks like in a Bill of Material template.
Menu: Wires ➤ Cables ➤ Cable Markers Command entry: AECABLEMARKER Select 2+ Child Marker from the list. Component Tag If the parent is visible on screen, click Parent/Sibling and select the parent (or another related marker). It automatically transfers all information to the child marker being inserted or edited. Tag The parent cable tag value can be manually typed in the edit box or selected from a drawing-wide or project-wide list of existing cables.
Description Up to three lines of description attribute text can be entered. These lines are automatically filled with a copy of the description text of the parent if the parent TAG name is picked using one of the methods previously described. Click Pick to copy a description from a cable marker on the current drawing. Parent cable marker cross-reference AutoCAD Electrical automatically fills in cross-reference text when the cross-reference command is run. Installation Code Changes the installation codes.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Cable Markers drop-down ➤ Cable Markers. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Wires ➤ Cables ➤ Cable Markers Command entry: AECABLEMARKER Select 2+ Child Marker from the list. It is Insert/Edit Cable Marker (2nd+ wire of cable) dialog box for working in IEC mode. If you work in JIC mode, the dialog box displays differently. Installation Changes the installation codes. You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation codes.
Description Up to three lines of description attribute text can be entered. These lines are automatically filled with a copy of the description text of the parent if the parent TAG name is picked using one of the methods previously described. Wire Color/ID Set the conductor color code by manually entering it in the edit box or selecting from the project, drawing, or generic pick list. If the parent marker carries a part number, you can select the next unused color from a used/unused pick list.
Insert multiple cable markers 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Cable Markers drop-down ➤ Multiple Cable Markers. 2 Select to run a report for the project or drawing and click OK. AutoCAD Electrical processes the drawing or project before the Location Code Selection for From/To Reporting dialog box displays. 3 Pick the location codes from the left and right-hand lists. NOTE Components that have no assigned location code are grouped under a generic "(??)" code.
Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Cable Markers Update from the ribbon. ➤ Multiple Multiple cable markers This tool first extracts components and wiring. Then you select "From" and "To" location code combinations to report. AutoCAD Electrical filters and formats the wiring and connected component data and reports each wire and what is connected at each end. Components that have no assigned location code are grouped under a generic "(??)" code.
Cable markers carry a cable TAG value and a conductor color value (carried as a RATING1 attribute value on the marker block symbol). Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Cable Markers drop-down ➤ Multiple Cable Markers. Toolbar: Cable Markers Menu: Wires ➤ Cables ➤ Multiple Cable Markers Command entry: AEMULTICABLE Make your selections and click OK on the Wire From/To Report and the Location Code Selection for From/To Reporting dialog boxes.
Assigns a tag from an external list file. External List File Description Up to three lines of description attribute text can be entered. Use List Drawing and List Project to pick similar descriptions to edit. Default opens an ASCII text file from which you can quickly pick standard descriptions. Installation Code Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to create location-specific BOM and component lists later.
Previous Scans the previous project to find an instance of the selected cable and returns the cable values. You can then make your catalog assignment by picking from the dialog box list. Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar cables in the current drawing. Project Lists the part numbers used for similar cables in the project. You can search in the active project, another project, or in an external file.
To assign a color to a particular wire, select the wire in the list of wires for the cable. Assign the color by selecting it from the list or type it in the edit box. You can assign a color to all wires at one time by selecting Follow Color List. It assigns a color to each wire of the selected cable even if the wire already has a color assigned to it. Setup Opens a dialog box for setting the parent cable marker symbol, the cable marker placement on the wire, and options for hiding children attributes.
Manufacturer 24 Manufacturer code Conductor 24 Conductor color or ID code Gauge 24 Conductor gauge description Recnum N/A Auto number field (used internally) For a given cable part number, there is a record for each conductor within that cable. For example, a 15-conductor Belden type 8486 cable has 15 records; one for each conductor in that cable type. The Manufacturer and Catalog fields for all 15 records are marked "BELDEN" and "8486.
them one at a time and relate them as you would any other component or insert a group at a time. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. 2 On the Insert Component dialog box, click the Miscellaneous button. 3 Click the Shields button. 4 Select the type of shield to insert into the drawing. 5 Pick the points on each wire for the shield/cable marker and right-click to end the selection. The shield inserts into the drawing.
a top (HW01_#), middle (HW02_#B), and bottom (HW02_#) symbol. The “#” indicates whether the connecting lines should cross or not. A “1” results in straight connecting lines, and a “2” results in crossing connecting lines. You can create you own custom top and bottom shield symbols by copying the existing symbols and adding a suffix to the symbol names after the “_#”. For example, a new top shield symbol might be called HW01_1U, and the corresponding bottom symbol, HW02_1U.
2 Select the wire to remain solid. 3 Select the crossing wire to have the gap. The gap inserts into the second wire. NOTE You can turn off the automatic gap/loop feature by selecting Solid in the Wiring Style section of the Drawing Properties ➤ Style dialog box. Remove wire gaps Deletes gaps/loops that are no longer needed in an existing wire. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ ➤ Modify Wire Gap drop-down ➤ Delete Wire Gap. 2 Select the wire segments near the unneeded gaps.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ ➤ Modify Wire Gap drop-down ➤ Flip Wire Gap. 2 Select the wire that has the gap/loops to flip. You can also window the wires containing the gaps to flip by pressing a W, then windowing the wires. AutoCAD Electrical makes the gapped wire solid and flips the gap/loop to the crossing wires.
2 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. 3 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Drawing Format tab. 4 In the Ladder Defaults section, make the appropriate changes and click OK. 5 Save and exit the template drawing. Changing attribute values 1 Open the WD_M drawing found at: Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\WD_M.dwg Windows Vista, Windows 7: \Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade
■ WD_MLRHX.dwg: hexagon-shaped user block (horizontal rung / vertical ladders) ■ WD_MLRVX.dwg: hexagon-shaped user block (vertical rung / horizontal ladders) 2 Change the default values as desired, but do not delete any of the attributes you find. 3 Move or change the text size of the RUNGFIRST attribute definition. 4 Save and exit the drawing. Insert new ladder There is no limit to the number of ladders that can be inserted into a drawing, but ladders cannot overlap each other.
Electrical Add Rung command or the Insert Wire tool. Select Yes to include a rung automatically at every reference location (skip = 0) or every other line reference position (skip = 1). You can specify whether to skip rungs; specifying a value of Skip = 4 means that four rungs are skipped for every one that is drawn. 6 Click OK. 7 Specify the start position of the ladder. Enter a start and end value or pick a point on the drawing.
During ladder insertion, the current wire type displays at the command prompt. You can override it by typing in the hotkey “T” and selecting a new wire type from the Set/Edit Wire Type dialog box. The new wire type becomes the current wire type and the command continues with the ladder insertion. Width Specifies the width of the ladder. Spacing Specifies the spacing between each rung. Length Specifies both the length of the ladder and the number of rungs.
rungs; specifying a value of Skip = 4 means that four rungs are skipped for every one that is drawn. Modify an existing ladder Renumber an existing ladder 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Ladder drop-down ➤ Revise Ladder. 2 Enter the new beginning line reference number and click OK. NOTE It does not update existing components or wire numbers.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Ladder drop-down ➤ Revise Ladder. 2 Change the column of line reference numbers to match the appropriate ladder length and click OK. 3 Select the AutoCAD Stretch command from the menu to lengthen or shorten the ladder. To widen or compress the ladder: 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components drop-down ➤ Scoot. 2 Select the vertical rail of the ladder and pull it out or push it in.
This forces AutoCAD Electrical to reread and update its internal ladder location list. Change rung spacing 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Ladder drop-down ➤ Revise Ladder. 2 Change the column of line reference numbers to the desired rung spacing and ladder length. 3 Scoot (or the AutoCAD Stretch command) to move the existing rungs to their new rung locations. Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components drop-down ➤ Scoot.
2 Select a blank space anywhere between the hot and neutral bus wires to add the rung. During rung insertion, the current wire type displays at the command prompt. You can override it by typing in the hotkey "T" and selecting a new wire type from the Set/Edit Wire Type dialog box. The new wire type becomes the current wire type and the command continues with the rung insertion. If the new rung encounters a schematic device floating in space, it tries to break the wire across the device.
Convert Ladder Ribbon: Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Convert Ladder. Toolbar: Conversion Tools Menu: Wires ➤ Ladders ➤ Convert Ladder Command entry: AE2LADDER Select the top line reference number and press Enter. When converting line reference numbering using the Convert Ladder tool, select only the first line reference number to determine location, size, and justification of the new line reference numbers being converted.
text entities (that can be erased, but do not erase the top or first line reference number). Index Specifies the line reference number increment value (default=1). Selecting Redo forces a refresh of line reference numbering. Wire number format Specifies the format for placing wire numbers.
Wire Numbers Overview of wire numbers Wire numbers are blocks or attributes inserted on a line wire entity. AutoCAD Electrical assigns each wire number type to its own layer. You can assign a different color to each of these layers so you can easily tell them apart. There are four types of wire numbers: Normal, Fixed, Extra, and Signal. Normal Wire numbers that are free to update when you rerun the Insert Wire Numbers command. Fixed Wire numbers that are fixed to their current value.
%P IEC-style project code (default for drawing) %I IEC-style "installation" code (default for drawing) %L IEC-style "location" code (default for drawing) Examples: Wire beginning on line reference "100" of sheet "02" yields these wire number tags for the following formats: %N wire number = 100 W%N wire number = W100 %S-%N wire number = 02-100 %S%N wire number = 02100 %S : %N wire number = 02:100 Automatically insert wire numbers This tool quickly processes and tags wires on the current drawi
5 Select to tag the selected wires, wires on a drawing, or wires in a project. Wire tagging Inserts wire numbers as specified in drawing properties. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Wire Numbers. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Wires ➤ Insert Wire Numbers Command entry: AEWIRENO Wire numbers are blocks with attributes inserted on a line wire entity. There are four types of wire numbers: Normal, Fixed, Extra, and Signal.
Use wire layer format overrides Overrides the default wire number format (set in the Layers section of the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box) by using layer-defined formats. Insert as fixed Forces all wire numbers to be fixed (they do not update if wire number retagging is run again at a later date). Cross-reference Signals Updates cross-reference text on wire signal source and destination symbols.
Properties > Wire Numbers on page 979 dialog box). A starting wire number must be assigned for each drawing. Sequential (consecutive drawing to drawing) Allows you to type in a starting wire number and increments from there, ignoring the defined setting of the starting wire number. Reference-based tags Sets the wire number based on the line-reference value. To do Specifies to process all the wiring or just the untagged (new) wires.
2 Enter a base starting number in the edit box or click Pick to select an existing attribute value on the active drawing. If the picked text carries a numeric substring, it is extracted and inserted into the Base edit box. 3 Enter an optional Prefix and/or Suffix value or choose from a default pick list by clicking List. The prefix or suffix value can be a comma-delimited string with each entry applied in sequence to the Wire Numbers section. The section is at the right-hand side of the dialog box.
3 phase wire numbering Inserts fixed wire numbers using incrementing prefixes and suffixes for 3 phase circuits. This tool speeds up the process of inserting special wire numbering associated with 3-phase bus and motor circuits. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ 3 Phase. Toolbar: Insert Wire Numbers Menu: Wires ➤ Wire Numbers Miscellaneous ➤ 3 Phase Wire Numbers Command entry: AE3PHASEWIRENO You can use 3 Phase Wire Numbers in a continuous mode.
Suffix Specifies the suffix value for the wire numbers. Enter a value or click List to choose from a default pick list. Hold/Increment Specifies whether to hold or increment the prefix, base, and suffix values for all wire numbers that are entered onto the drawing. For example, if you set Base = 100/Increment and Suffix = L1/Hold, the wire numbers are 100L1, 101L1, 102L1. Wire Numbers Displays a preview of the wire numbers to insert onto the drawing.
I/O Wire Tag Format: Specifies the wire tag format for the plc wire. Predefined: Uses an exact wire number match on the address. The options are I:%n or O:%n. NOTE For automatic wire numbering based strictly on the actual I/O address, open the Drawing Properties dialog box, and click the Wire Number tab. In the Wire Numbering section, select Search for I/O address on insert.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wires drop-down ➤ Show Wires. 2 Select whether to show the wires. All lines (wires) on wire layers are highlighted in: ■ Bright red - regular wires. ■ Magenta - wires on layers defined as No Wire Numbering. 3 Select whether to show the origin point for each wire number attribute text entity. The origin of a wire number block must lie on the wire segment, though the text attribute may be moved away from the wire.
NOTE You can also automatically set wire number placement using the Drawing Properties tool. Follow these steps. 3 In the Project or Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Wire Numbers tab. 4 In the Wire Number Placement section, select how you want to place new wire numbers automatically: above, below, or inline of the wire. ■ Above Wire: Places the wire number above the physical wire. ■ In-Line: Places the wire number in line with the wire.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: AEPROPERTIES Select the Wire Numbers tab. Wire Number Format Wire number tags can be sequential or reference-based. Format Specifies the way new wire number tags are created. The wire number tag format must include the %N parameter that is the base sequential or reference-based value per the selection above.
that a new sequential wire number tag is not repeated on any other drawing. If you set DEMO1 to 100 and DEMO2 to 200, the wire numbers on DEMO1 start at 100 and wire numbers on DEMO2 start at 200. If DEMO1 has more than 100 wire numbers it starts using wire number 200 and above. DEMO2 would begin its wire numbers where DEMO1 left off (making sure that duplicate wire numbers are not assigned). Increment The default is "1.
Offset Specifies to insert the wire number tags the specified offset distance. Centered Specifies to insert the wire number tags in the center of each wire segment. Offset Distance Specifies a fixed, user-defined offset distance from the left or top of the first wire segment found on the wire network. Leaders (This option is unavailable for in-line wire numbers.) AutoCAD Electrical places wire numbers on leaders when it determines that the wire number text bumps into something.
number %S parameter or the drawing number %D parameter, enter the values in the edit boxes in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box. NOTE For reference-based wire number tagging, individual items in the suffix list are applied to the wire tags to keep multiple wires in the same reference location unique. These items are added to the end of the tag, but you can force AutoCAD Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within the tag format.
Increment The default is "1". Setting it to "2" with a starting sequential of "1" would yield wire numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, and so on. Line Reference Sets the wire number tag suffix. This list is used to create unique reference-based wire number tags for multiple wire networks. It begins at the same reference location (such as wire network beginning at a location per line reference number, X-Y grid reference, or X-Zone reference). Suffix Setup Displays a suffix list.
Exclude If using sequential wire numbers, specifies the wire number ranges to exclude. (applied to the %N part of the wire number tag format) Syntax is - to show range (for example 1000-1499). Multiple ranges are allowed and must be separated with a comma or semi-colon (for example, 10001099;2500-2599;). You can also use 2;4;6 or 2,4,6 for values not in a range.
Wire Type Displays the Rename User Columns dialog box used for renaming User1 to User20 header columns in the Set Wire Type, Create/Edit Wire Type, and Change/Convert Wire Type dialog boxes. Find or replace wire number text Find or replace wire number text Find and replace wire number text values, or find and replace substrings within those values. Process the active drawing or the project drawing set. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Find/Replace.
Find and replace wire number text values, or find and replace substrings within those values. Process the active drawing or the project drawing set. Full, exact match Specifies to replace the text only if the entire text value matches the find value. Substring match Specifies to replace the text if any part of the text value matches the find value. First occurrence only Specifies to replace only the first occurrence within the text value. Find Specifies the value you wish to find.
3 In the Project Properties dialog box, click the Wire Numbers tab. 4 In the Wire Number Options section, select Based on Wire Layer and then click Layer Setup. The Assign Wire Numbering Formats by Wire Layers dialog box opens. Enter each wire layer name and the wire number format that you want to see for wire numbers on that wire layer. For example, let's say that you routinely use wire layers "RED_14_THHN" and "BLK_10_XHHN" in drawings in your project.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Wire Numbers. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Wires ➤ Insert Wire Numbers Command entry: AEWIRENO Click Use Wire Layer Format Overrides Setup. NOTE You can also access this dialog box by selecting Based on Wire Layer and then clicking Layer Setup in the Wire Number Options section of the Project Properties ➤ Wire Numbers dialog box. Wire list Lists all defined wire layer formats.
Replaceable parameters for device tagging and wire numbering %F Component family code string (ex: "PB", "SS", "CR", "FLT", "MTR") %S Sheet number of the drawing (ex: "01" entered in upper right) %D Drawing number %G Wire layer name of the drawing %N Sequential or Reference-based number applied to the component %X Suffix character position for reference-based tagging (not present = end of tag) %P IEC-style project code (default for drawing) %I IEC-style installation code (default for drawing)
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Edit Wire Number. 2 Select a wire or select an existing wire number. If a wire number exists, the Modify/Fix/Unfix dialog box displays. However, if a wire number does not exist on the selected wire, the Insert Wire Number dialog box displays. NOTE If the selected wire is on a layer defined as No Wire Numbering, the Insert Wire Number dialog box does not display.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Fix. 2 Select a wire number or component to fix. 3 Right-click when you are done selecting the wires. You can check whether the wire is fixed by clicking the Edit Wire Number tool, selecting the wire, and reviewing the dialog box. Fix/unfix all wire numbers project-wide You can quickly fix or unfix all wire numbers across the active project using the Project-Wide Utilities tool.
■ Fix or unfix the wire number ■ Change the visibility of the wire number When a wire number is fixed, the wire number attribute is renamed and moved to a special fixed wire number layer. Assigning a different color to this layer makes it easy to identify which wire numbers are fixed and which are normal. The layer name for fixed wire numbers is entered in the Define Layers dialog box (from the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box). Wire Number Specifies the wire number to edit.
Make it Fixed Fixes the wire number so that it does not change if later processed by the automatic wire numbering utility. Visible/Hidden Displays or hides the wire number on the drawing. Hidden wire numbers are still present and appear in wire reports. See also: Erase or hide wire numbers on page 1008 Zoom Restores the previous screen view. Do a zoom extents to follow an untagged wire that travels off screen.
Wire Numbers Select to keep wire numbers the same, erase specified wire numbers, reset specified wire numbers, or set wire numbers to fixed or normal. Signal Arrow Cross-reference text Select to maintain the signal arrow cross-reference text or to remove all signal arrow cross-reference text across the current project. Parent Component Tags: Fix/Unfix Select to maintain the component tags or to set all parent component tags to fixed or normal across the current project.
Click Setup to display the Import Wire Types on page 903 dialog box where you: ■ Select the wire types to import. ■ Define whether to overwrite any Wire Numbering and USERn differences for existing wire types. ■ Define whether to overwrite color and linetype differences for existing wire layers. Reposition Wire Numbers Reposition wire numbers Scoot wire numbers If you want to move a wire number along its wire segment, use Scoot and pick right on the wire number.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Move Wire Number. 2 Select the wire segment where you want the wire number repositioned. It is not required that you pick on the existing wire number first. The wire number automatically moves to the selected position. Rotate a wire number 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Attributes drop-down ➤ Rotate Attribute. 2 Select the wire number text to rotate 90 degrees from its current orientation.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Wire Number Leader drop-down ➤ Wire Number Leader. 2 Select the wire number text. 3 Select the new position for the wire number. Right-click or press Enter to position the wire number. NOTE You can type "C" at the command prompt to collapse the wire leader back to the wire number block. You can do it immediately after inserting a leader if you determine that you do not want the leader.
NOTE Avoid using the AutoCAD MOVE command to reposition a wire number. An AutoCAD Electrical smart wire number is an invisible block with one visible wire number attribute associated with it. The X-Y insertion point of the block must physically lie on the wire segment. If it is forced off the segment during an AutoCAD MOVE command, then AutoCAD Electrical no longer sees it linked to the wire.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Copy Wire Number drop-down ➤ Copy Wire Number. 2 Select the wire location where you want the extra wire number to insert. Position wire numbers in-line with the wire Inserts an extra copy of a wire number in-line at a pick point. Positions wire numbers in-line with the wire rather than above or below the wire. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Copy Wire Number drop-down ➤ Copy Wire Number In-line.
2 Specify the insertion point for the wire number. 3 In the Insert Wire Number dialog box, enter the wire number. Use Pick to select similar text from the drawing, or click the arrows to increment or decrement the wire number. 4 Click OK. The wire number is automatically inserted in-line with the wire. If the gap between the wire and the wire number text is not large enough you can change the gap setup.
Mirror a wire number Moves a selected wire number to the same position on the other side of the wire. Select each wire number to flip. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Flip Wire Number. 2 Select the wire number to mirror. Each wire number selected is mirrored across its associated wire.
TIP Use the Toggle Wire Number In-Line tool to move a wire number from above/below the wire to in-line. If the wire number is already in-line, the wire number moves to the position defined in the Drawing properties: wire numbers tab on page 225. Toggle wire number position Switches a wire number between drawing properties above or below and in-line. If the wire number you select is in-line, it switches to above or below based on the drawing properties.
Any drawing Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. Select the Wire Numbers tab. Active drawing Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: AEPROPERTIES Select the Wire Numbers tab.
NOTE For reference-based wire number tagging, individual items in the suffix list are applied to the wire tags to keep multiple wires in the same reference location unique. These values are added to the end of the tag, but you can force AutoCAD Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within the tag format. Use the Suffix position parameter, %X, in the component tag format (for example, %X%N).
Suffix Setup Displays a suffix list. List suffix characters for wire numbers beginning on the same line reference or in the same zone (to keep wire numbers unique). Select one of the four predefined suffix lists or enter your own custom suffix list. New Wire Number Placement NOTE The Insert Wire Number tool does not take the current wire number setting (in-line, above or below) into account when updating existing wire numbers. This setting is used only when inserting new wire numbers.
Modify Wire Numbers Modify wire numbers Increment wire numbers You can force new incremental wire numbers (as opposed to line referenced numbers) to increment by more than one during insertion. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. 2 Click the Wire Numbers tab. 3 In the Wire Number Format section, select Sequential and set the increment value.
2 Change the text size of the WIRENO attribute definition. 3 Save the drawing. 4 Open drawings "wd_wnv.dwg", "wd_wch.dwg", and "wd_wcv.dwg." 5 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each. NOTE You will not see these new, resized wire numbers on existing drawings unless you erase all the wire numbers and purge the drawing of the old block inserts.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Delete Wire Numbers. 2 Select the wire number or pick on any wire in the network. 3 Press Enter. The wire number is automatically deleted. Extra wire number copies can also be deleted. Erase all wire numbers project-wide 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Utilities. 2 Select to remove all wire numbers or keep fixed wire numbers and click OK. 3 Select which drawings you want to process and click OK.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Hide. 2 Select a wire number or the wire it is associated to. AutoCAD Electrical moves the wire number to a special hide layer and the number is no longer visible on the screen. The new hide layer is created from the wire number layer name with a "_HIDE" suffix. For example, if the wire number text layer is called WIRENO then the hide layer name is called "WIRENO_HIDE".
continuation of the same wire number, whether on the same drawing or a different drawing in the project, insert a destination arrow. Give it the same code name that you gave to its source. AutoCAD Electrical matches source code names with destination names and copies source wire numbers over to the destination wire networks. Add custom signal arrow styles The icon menu graphics that display for the various signal styles are bitmap files saved to your C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Acade\
Modify signal arrow prefix When a source or destination signal arrow is inserted it is cross-referenced. The source arrow has the reference for the destination arrow. The destination arrow has the reference for the source arrow. The cross-reference text can carry a prefix, for example “to” on a source arrow and “from” on a destination arrow. This prefix value is defined on the signal arrow library symbol. You can change the prefix by modifying the library symbol. 1 Open the signal arrow library symbol.
NOTE A Destination signal arrow cannot be tied to a wire network that carries a pre-assigned fixed wire number. Code Specifies the code for the destination signal. Enter a unique number/word/phrase, 32-character maximum, for AutoCAD Electrical to use to link the destination wire network internally to any source wire networks. Description (optional) Specifies the description for the destination signal. Defaults Opens an ASCII text file from which you can quickly pick standard descriptions.
Signal - source code Inserts a wire Source signal arrow and transfers its wire number to destination wire networks. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Signal Arrows drop-down ➤ Source Arrow. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Wires ➤ Signal References ➤ Source Signal Arrow Command entry: AESOURCE The wire number from a source-arrowed wire network copies to all associated destination-arrowed wire networks.
Defaults Opens an ASCII text file from which you can quickly pick standard descriptions. Recent Picks from recently inserted codes. Drawing Displays drawing-wide pick lists of all source/destination codes used so far. Project Displays project-wide pick lists of all source/destination codes used so far. Search Follows the selected wire network looking for a destination arrow at the other end. If found, repeat its signal code for this new source arrow. Pick Picks on an existing wire network.
In the Project Manager, right-click on the project name and select Properties. Select the Styles tab. Specifies the default wire signal arrow style. Select from the four predefined styles or a user-defined style. You can override the default style setting at insertion time. Arrow Style TIP For instructions on how to add custom wire arrow styles, see Add custom signal arrow styles on page 1011. Specifies the default PLC module style. Select from the five predefined styles or a user-defined style.
Any drawing Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. Select the Styles tab. Active drawing Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: AEPROPERTIES Select the Styles tab.
Fan-In/Out Marker Style Defines the default Fan In/Out marker style and the layers for wires going out of a Fan In/Out Source marker and those coming into a Destination marker. TIP For instructions on how to add custom Fan-In/Out marker styles, see Add custom fan-in/out marker styles on page 1023. Layer List Lists the Fan In/Out layers. Add Defines layer names as Fan In/Out layers. Remove Removes the selected layer from the defined layer list.
Stand-alone Reference Source/Destination codes report Runs a report that lists all the stand-alone source and destinations used on the project drawing set. The exception report lists problem areas such as a destination reference with no source found or a source reference that does not tie to a destination. Click Format on the subdialog to select from a listing of report settings files found that have a prefix equal to the selected report type.
Add source markers 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Signal Arrows drop-down ➤ Fan In Source. 2 Select the style and orientation for the markers and click OK. 3 Select the insertion point on the screen for the marker. The Signal-Source Code dialog box displays. 4 Enter a source code for the marker and optionally a description.
■ Pick on an existing wire network. AutoCAD Electrical searches it for an existing destination arrow and retrieves its signal code for use on this new source arrow. 6 Specify the arrow style to use for the destination signal. 7 Click OK. The Source/Destination Signal Markers (for Fan In/Out) dialog box displays. You have a few options for inserting the matching destination marker: ■ Do not insert the matching destination marker. ■ Do not insert the matching destination marker after each source.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. 2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Style tab. If you have an older drawing, you may be warned about an older version of the WD_M block. If that happens, go ahead and swap the WD_M block and try again. 3 In the Fan-In/Out Marker Style section, set the default marker style. 4 Define the layers for the wires. Click Add to define layer names as Fan In/Out layers. 5 Click OK.
Add custom fan-in/out marker styles The icon menu graphics that display for the various Fan In/Out marker styles are bitmap files saved to your C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Acade\ folder where s Fan In/Out utilities and Drawing Properties tool can access them. 1 Create the style in AutoCAD. 2 Zoom in to the new Fan In/Out marker style. 3 Save the file as a bitmap using the following name definition: StylexVI.bmp and StylexVO.bmp where "x" is the fan-in/out marker style 1-9.
Uses set of in-line source/destination symbols that follow the naming format of ha#s?_inline.dwg and ha#d?_inline.dwg where # = style number and ? = 1,2,3,4 orientation number (just like with existing source/destination arrows). Running new commands inserts in-line source marker symbols and changes the connected wire on the fan-in side to be on a non-wire layer. Putting matching destination in-line markers at the fan-out end does the same.
Menu: Wires ➤ Signal References ➤ Fan In/Out Destination Command entry: AEFANINDEST Show source and destination markers on the individual wires of a cable, but show the wires coming together to form the cable. Uses set of in-line source/destination symbols that follow the naming format of ha#s?_inline.dwg and ha#d?_inline.dwg where # = style number and ? = 1,2,3,4 orientation number (just like with existing source/destination arrows).
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ ➤ Fan In/Out - Single line Layer. Toolbar: Signals Menu: Wires ➤ Signal References ➤ Fan In/Out - Single line Layer Command entry: AEFANIN Fan-In/Out Line Layers Displays only layers that are already assigned as Fan In/Out Layers as defined in the drawing properties setup. Pick Picks similar fan-in/out lines from the drawing. You can use it if the layer of the line is not defined as a Fan In/Out layer and you want to add it on the fly.
the inter-wiring of each group. It then ties each common Location group with a single from/to wire connection. For wire connections with the same Location group (or if all devices have the same Location value or no Location value), AutoCAD Electrical attempts to sort the wire connections by physical location on the drawing and report the from/to connections in that order. NOTE You can keep jumpers from displaying in Wire From/To reports by placing the jumpers on a layer that contains the substring "JUMPER.
point. It is saved as a three-digit Xdata value, starting with “001” on the wire connection attribute. When any of the AutoCAD Electrical From/To reports processes wire networks containing this incrementing sequencing data, the from/to wire connections order accordingly. NOTE Schematic wire connection and Direct-to-Terminal sequencing methods on a given wire network take precedence over all other sequencing methods.
Edit the connection sequence of a wire network You can explicitly define the wire connection sequence of any wire networks consisting of three or more interconnected devices.
NOTE Pick Mode is unavailable when you are working with a wire network that crosses multiple drawing files. If you are working with wire networks that jump to one or more additional drawings, click Freshen to update the wire connectivity database with any out-of-date files. 4 (Optional) To connect additional components directly to a given terminal, select the components and the terminal (marked with a “t” in the left-hand column) in the Wire Connection Sequence list and click Add.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ ➤ Wire Sequence drop-down ➤ Show Wire Sequence. NOTE You can also access this tool by right-clicking on any wire segment in the wire network. 2 Press the Space bar to step through the defined wire sequence.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Dot, Tee Markers drop-down ➤ Insert Dot Tee Markers. 2 Select at or near the intersection point. Right-click on the marker and select Delete Component to remove an inserted tee connection symbol and heal the wires. Insert angled tee markers Inserts an angled tee connection symbol at an existing wire intersection. Replaces any existing dot wire connection symbol with an angled connection symbol.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Dot, Tee Markers drop-down ➤ Insert Angled Tee Markers. 2 Select at or near the intersection point. If a dot marker is present, it is deleted and replaced by the angled tee symbol. 3 After the symbol inserts and reconnects to the wiring, press the spacebar or Enter to switch the inserted tee through four different orientations. Press Esc when the appropriate orientation displays.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ ➤ Toggle Angled Tee Markers. 2 Select or window the tee connections to change. 3 Right-click or press the spacebar to toggle through the various tee connection orientations, and press Esc when the appropriate one displays. Replaces any dot tee symbols with angled tee symbols and then cycles through the four possible orientations for each. Edit wire connection sequence Defines a wire connection sequence to control wire from/to reporting.
Defining the sequence gives you control over how AutoCAD Electrical analyzes the circuits including: ■ The order of the contents in the WFRM2ALL table in the project database file ■ How from/to connection information is output to various reports ■ Annotation on physical footprint representations (using the Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint on page 1588 tool). NOTE You can also access it by right-clicking on any segment of a wire network and selecting Wire Sequence ➤ Edit Wire Sequence.
Pick Mode Defines the sequence by actual picks at or very near each wire connection point. Pick near each wire connection in the order of how you want the wiring sequence to proceed from component to component. NOTE Pick Mode is unavailable when you are working with a wire network that crosses multiple drawing files. Sort Location Automatically sorts the wire connection display by the installation and location values. If previously sorted, the sort is reversed.
selected, an I or E displays in the PD1 or PD2 column (Point Description) of the Wire From/To report. Freshen Updates the wire connectivity database (the WFRM2ALL table) with wire connection information from any out-of-date files. NOTE If all drawings are up-to-date, this button is disabled. If not, the button is enabled and the count of out-of-date drawings displays next to the button. Remove All Removes the wire connection sequence override information from a wire network.
1038
Terminal Tools 13 Insert terminals and connectors Terminal symbols on the schematic are a representation of wire connection points. The terminal symbol representation on the schematic can have associations with the physical terminal block on the panel drawing. To insert a terminal, select the Insert Component command to display the icon menu, and then select Terminals/Connectors.
Insert terminals You can select from five main terminal styles (square, round, hexagon, diamond, and triangle). Each type of terminal behavior is controlled by the terminal block name. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. 2 Click the Terminals/Connectors button. 3 Select a terminal symbol to insert. 4 Specify the insertion point.
Edit Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the terminal to edit. Terminal These controls determine the overall tagging of the terminal block in the project. The Installation, Location, and Tag Strip values define which strip the terminal belongs to. The symbol block file name displays at the top of the Terminal group.
Specifies the terminal number. If there is not PINLIST information, the < and > buttons increment or decrement the terminal number. You can also click Pick to select a text object or an attribute on the active drawing to use for the terminal number. When inserting a new terminal, the highest terminal number in the strip is identified and the default terminal number for the new terminal increments by 1.
NOTE While in selection mode, you can use Pan or Zoom to find the terminal symbol to select. Break Out Removes the terminal being edited out of the defined association. The properties from the original association and the levels of the terminal are maintained. Block Properties Displays the Block Properties dialog box where you can define and maintain terminal block properties. NOTE It is disabled if the active drawing is not part of the active project.
PinR Lists the pin numbers defined on the right side of the terminal block. This data is entered into the LnnPINR attribute if present; otherwise, it is placed into xdata. Reference Lists the reference location of the terminal symbol in the project. The syntax is ‘Sheet,Reference’ based on the drawing configuration. NOTE This area is disabled if the terminal is a one-line symbol. Multi-level or panel relationships are not supported for one-line terminals.
Assembly Lists the assembly code for the terminal. The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together. Item Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each terminal. The value can be manually typed in the edit box. Catalog Lookup Opens the catalog database of the terminal from which you can select the Manufacturer and Catalog values. Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected terminal.
Extracts the details from the catalog database to display what the selected item looks like in a Bill of Material template. Catalog Check Descriptions Specifies the optional description attribute text to assign to the terminal block (up to three lines of text can be specified). Click Browse to search for all terminal descriptions in the project or active drawing. Select the description you want to copy to the edited terminal block by selecting it in the list and clicking OK.
Insert Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT Select Terminals and Connectors from the dialog box and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Modify Properties/Associations section, click Add/Modify. Edit Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit.
Active Association Use this section to modify the terminal number. The Installation, Location, and Tag Strip values are not editable. Installation Displays the Installation value defined for the edited terminal symbol. Location Displays the Location value defined for the edited terminal symbol. Tag Strip Displays the tag strip value defined for the edited terminal symbol. Number (Unavailable for panel terminals) Specifies the terminal number.
minal symbols do not display terminal numbers. Terminal levels with an assignment and a terminal that has not been assigned a terminal number display a “???” in this column. ■ PinL: Lists the pin numbers defined on the left side of the terminal block. This data is entered into the LnnPINL attribute if present; otherwise, it is placed into Xdata. ■ PinR: Lists the pin numbers defined on the right side of the terminal block.
levels defined in the block properties displays at the end of the node string in parenthesis. For example, 1,21,GND (3). If a level is not represented on the schematic, an empty space represents it: 1, , GND (3). If a terminal has been assigned to the level, but the terminal does not have a number assignment, a ‘???’ represents it: 1,???,GND (3). Select Association grid Displays all levels of the terminal selected in the tree.
Insert Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT Select Terminals and Connectors from the dialog box and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, click Block Properties. Edit Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit.
Assembly Code Displays the Assembly Code value that is currently assigned to the terminal being edited. Levels Specifies the number of levels for the terminal. The grid expands for editing based on the number of levels specified. You can then define the level description, wires per connection and pins. Terminal Block Property Definition grid Displays the terminal levels. You can edit and maintain properties of the terminal block here.
Terminal block property attributes The values in the grid are stored as follows.
The number of levels for the block is defined as a block property. Each level carries certain characteristics, such as a label, wires per connection, left pin, and right pin. Each schematic terminal symbol carries all the block properties for each level so that removing one terminal symbol does not remove the block properties. If a block property is modified, all the terminal symbols update. An ID value held on the LINKTERM attribute or Xdata, associates the terminal symbols.
relationship is like component relationships, which are based on the TAG value. The TAGSTRIP, Installation, and Location values must match for the terminals to associate together. The association number on the LINKTERM is also taken into account when creating a relationship between the schematic terminal and its panel representation. Block properties are not required to associate a schematic to panel terminal. Once they are associated, modifications on one results in modifications on the other.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Associate Terminals. 2 Select a terminal symbol to use as the master. It is used as the basis for any terminal property definition. NOTE Your terminal symbol must have block properties defined. To define block properties, right-click on the symbol and select Edit Component. In the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, click Block Properties. 3 Select additional terminal symbols to add to the association of the master terminal.
Show terminal associations Use the Show Terminal Associations tool to display the current associations for the selected terminals. AutoCAD Electrical draws temporary lines between the associated terminals. These graphics disappear the next time you do a Regen. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Show Terminal Associations. 2 Select the terminals you want to view the associations of. Red dashed lines are drawn between the terminals that are associated to the selected terminal.
reduces the number of levels and the number of schematic terminal symbols in the association exceeds the total allowed, an alert displays and the properties are not copied. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Copy Terminal Block Properties. 2 Select the master terminal to copy properties from. 3 Select the terminals to apply the properties to. 4 Press Enter.
MANUFACTURER Manufacturer code (value must be consistent with the catalog lookup files; 24 characters maximum) CATALOG Catalog number (use wild cards as much as possible; 60 characters maximum) ASSEMBLYCODE AutoCAD Electrical internal assembly code (must be consistent with the catalog lookup files; 60 characters maximum) LEVELS Number of levels for the terminal LEVELDESCRIPTION Levels description/level definition (255 characters maximum) TPINL Pin label definition for the left side of the termina
Edit terminal properties database Use the Terminal Properties Database Editor tool to edit the terminal properties database, located in the catalog database. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Database Editors drop-down ➤ Terminal Properties Database Editor. 2 In the Select Terminal Properties Table dialog box, select the table to edit and click Edit. NOTE You can also create a table by entering the manufacturer name in the edit box and clicking Create.
Command entry: AETERMDBEDITOR Select or Type Manufacturer Lists all of the TERMPROPS tables that are in the catalog database. The “(Default)” manufacturer is used to edit the generic _TERMPROPS table. Select the table to edit or enter a name for a new one. Table Displays the proper table name in the catalog database. This text changes depending on which manufacturer is selected. For example, if you select SQD, then _TERMPROPS_SQD displays.
Specify the table to create and click Create or select the table to edit and click Edit. This lookup database table is a table within the catalog lookup Access .mdb file. The default file name is default_cat.mdb, table _TERMPROPS, and comes populated with a sample of vendor data. You can expand this table as needed. Use your own copy of Microsoft Access or use this dialog box to add new entries, add entries based on existing entries, edit, and delete entries from the table.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Database Editors drop-down ➤ Terminal Properties Database Editor. Menu: Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Terminal Properties Database Editor Command entry: AETERMDBEDITOR Specify the table to create and click Create or select the table to edit and click Edit. In the Edit dialog box, click Add New, Add Copy, or Edit.
used as a delimiter between jumper definitions within a terminal. For example, if all levels of a four level terminal are jumpered together, the value is “1,2,3,4”. If levels 1 and 2 are jumpered together, and 3 and 4 are jumpered together, the value is “1,2;3,4”. When dealing with a multi-tier terminal, a comma (,) is used as a delimiter for the LevelDescription, TPINL, TPINR, and WiresPerConnection fields. For example, the LevelDescription may be “UPPER, LOWER” and the WiresPerConnection may be “2,2.
NOTE If you change an existing graphical terminal strip, the Terminal Strip Editor requires that the terminal strip is refreshed or placed on a drawing in the active project so the information is saved. If the Terminal Strip Editor encounters an error and is unable to start, a log file (named TSE_Error_.log) is created in the same location as the project file. The log information includes details about the user name, project name, date, time, terminal strip tag, installation, and location.
NOTE If you want to use the Installation, Location, and Tag Strip values from an existing terminal, select the terminal before you click New. 3 On the Terminal Strip Definition dialog box, specify the Installation code, Location code, Tag Strip value, and number of terminal blocks to define on the terminal strip. 4 Click OK. 5 Select the tab to edit: Terminal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, Cable Information, or Layout Preview.
1 Click Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Editor. 2 Select which terminal strip to edit on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. 3 Select the tab to edit: Terminal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, Cable Information, or Layout Preview. ■ Terminal Strip tab: Modify the terminal block properties, spare terminals, accessories, multi-level terminals, and destination locations.
Insert a terminal strip table in multiple sections A terminal strip table can be added through the Terminal Strip Editor or with the Terminal Strip Table Generator tool. A terminal strip can be split into multiple table sections by changing your table settings. Terminal Strip Editor 1 Click Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Editor. 2 Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. 3 Click the Layout Preview tab. 4 Select Settings.
11 Specify the file name for the first drawing. The last character of the file name is incremented for each new drawing. 12 (Optional) Specify a template file to use. 13 Click OK. Terminal Strip Table Generator 1 Click Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Table Generator. 2 Select Settings. 3 Enter the number of rows you want for each section. If the table break falls between rows within one terminal definition, the entire terminal definition is placed in the next table section.
10 (Optional) Specify a template file to use. 11 Click OK. Assign a jumper Use this method to assign an external jumper between one or more terminals within the same terminal strip. 1 Click Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Editor. 2 Select which terminal strip to edit on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. 3 Select the terminal rows you wish to jumper together. If you wish to jumper to a specific level within a multi-level terminal, select the row for just that level.
1 Click Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Editor. 2 Select which terminal strip to edit on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. 3 Select the Layout Preview tab. 4 Select Jumper Chart (Table Object). 5 Select your options: ■ Table Style: Select from a list of table styles. ■ Define Columns: Define the columns to include, column order, column titles, and the jumper circles display.
Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor Command entry: AETSE NOTE Empty fields from the schematic display empty boxes in the selection window to indicate that no value was defined by the user in the schematic drawing. Sort the entire table by selecting the individual column headers. Do any of the following: ■ To edit a terminal strip, select the terminal strip and click Edit. ■ To create a terminal strip, click New.
location values found in the active drawing, entire project, or an external list (default.inst). Pick from the list to update the component automatically with the location code. Terminal Strip Specifies the strip tag name for the new terminal strip. You cannot have duplicate terminal strip names in the active project. Number of Terminal Blocks Specifies the number of blocks the terminal strip is made up of.
Terminal Listing There are three sections to the grid: Internal Destination, Terminal Block Information, and External Destination. The bold vertical grid lines make it easier to determine the differences in these sections. The horizontal grid lines delineate between wires connected to the terminal blocks. Each row indicates one wire per side. The bold horizontal grid lines make it easier to distinguish separations between terminal blocks on the strip. Select the terminal blocks for editing.
Copy Terminal Block Properties Copies terminal block properties from one terminal to paste into another terminals. Paste Terminal Block Properties Pastes the previously copied terminal block properties into the selected terminals. Terminal Edit Terminal Modifies the selected terminal block. Any modifications to the ID (Installation, Location, Terminal Strip) removes the terminal block from its current terminal strip into the modified or newly defined terminal strip.
number of spares to insert, and to insert the spare terminals previous or below the highlighted terminal. You can add up to 10,000 spare terminals into the terminal block. NOTE Spare terminal assignments are temporary for the current session of the Terminal Strip Editor. Place the graphical terminal strip layout on the drawing during the current session if you want to keep the spare terminal assignments. You are prompted to Insert or Rebuild the terminal strip before you can exit Terminal Strip Editor.
Switch Terminal Destinations Switches both destination values for the highlighted terminal block. The Internal destinations switch to the External (right) destinations, while all External destinations switch to Internal destinations. Move Destination Moves the destinations within the terminal/level definition. All the selected destinations are moved up or down within the level they belong to.
occupy the same level in their new terminal definition, and new terminals are assigned the same properties as the original definition from which they were originally associated in. Terminal strip editor: catalog code assignment tab Modifies terminal catalog numbers. The terminals display in the center of the list box, with associated catalog number information and destinations on both sides. Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Editor.
NOTE You can right-click on any row in the terminal listing to access any of the editing tools found in the button groupings at the bottom of the dialog box. You can also right-click to select or deselect all of the terminals in the strip. Internal Destination Displays the devices on the left side of the terminal strip. Terminal Block Information Displays the terminal block number, terminal device pin connection descriptions, jumpers, and catalog data.
Terminal Edit Terminal Modifies the selected terminal block. Any modifications to the ID (Installation, Location, Terminal Strip) removes the terminal block from its current terminal strip into the modified or newly defined terminal strip. You can perform a search of the project for current installation and location codes. Reassign Terminal Moves the highlighted terminal blocks from the active terminal strip to the terminal strip defined in the Reassign Terminal dialog box.
NOTE Spare terminal assignments are temporary for the current session of the Terminal Strip Editor. Place the graphical terminal strip layout on the drawing during the current session if you want to keep the spare terminal assignments. You are prompted to Insert or Rebuild the terminal strip before you can exit Terminal Strip Editor. Insert Accessory Inserts one or more accessories (such as terminal end barriers or partitions) into the terminal strip.
External (right) destinations, while all External destinations switch to Internal destinations. Move Destination Moves the destinations within the terminal/level definition. All the selected destinations are moved up or down within the level they belong to. Only the destinations for cloned blocks due to wire constraints can cross the boundary of the level they originally belong to. Jumpers Assign Jumper Jumpers together the selected terminals or levels.
same properties as the original definition from which they were originally associated in. Catalog Assign Catalog Number Assigns catalog part numbers to the selected terminal blocks, spare terminals, or accessories. The catalog number assignments are written back to the schematic and panel drawings. It displays the Parts Catalog dialog box. Once the catalog number is selected from the Parts Catalog dialog box, the Catalog Manufacturer and Part Number are entered into the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box.
Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit or New. Click the Cable Preview tab. You can sort the terminal blocks inside of the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box by selecting the column headers. The first click on the header sorts the column in ascending order. The second click sorts in descending order. The sort criteria applies to all tabs inside of the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box so you do not have to sort again if you switch between tabs.
Properties Edit Terminal Block Properties Defines or edits terminal block properties. When a multi-level terminal block is selected, the properties are edited for all levels of the terminal. The defined properties are assigned to every terminal symbol in its association. You can define up to 99 terminal levels in the block properties. Copy Terminal Block Properties Copies terminal block properties from one terminal to paste into another terminal.
up or down in the listing or manually pick a new position on the terminal strip listing. Spare Insert Spare Terminal Inserts spare terminal blocks on the active terminal strip. Use the Insert Spare Terminal dialog box to define a terminal block number or name, specify the number of spares to insert, and to insert the spare terminals previous or below the highlighted terminal. You can add up to 10,000 spare terminals into the terminal block.
Toggle Installation Toggles an entire installation code from an Internal destination to an External destination or from an External destination to an Internal destination. You do not have to select any terminal blocks from the terminal listing. Toggle Terminal Destinations Changes the destination from Internal (left) to External (right) or from External to Internal. Switch Terminal Destinations Switches both destination values for the highlighted terminal block.
Toolbar: Panel Layout Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor Command entry: AETSE Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit or New. Click the Layout Preview tab. Graphical Terminal Strip/Table Object Terminal Strip/Jumper Chart Specifies the type of terminal strip to generate. The dialog box options change depending on whether you are creating a graphical, tabular, or jumper chart type of terminal strip.
NOTE You can leave this field blank if you do not want the annotation format added to the preview. Scale on Insert Specifies the scale to use when inserting the graphical representation onto the drawing file. Angle on Insert Specifies the angle to use when inserting the graphical representation onto the drawing file. Select from the list of pre-defined angles. NOTE The angle and scale values are reflected in the preview.
Total Rows Displays the total number of rows needed to create the terminal strip table layout. For example, even though the terminal strip contains only 86 terminals, the table format may present more rows in a multi-line terminal situation. Number of Rows per Section Displays the number of rows per section as defined on the Table Settings dialog box. Number of Sections Displays the number of sections needed based on the total rows and the number of rows per section.
NOTE All table sections are inserted or updated, not just the table sections in the drawing preview. NOTE The selections are stored in the table when it is inserted and the next time the terminal strip is edited, the settings are read back in. Jumper Chart The following options are available if you selected to create a Jumper Chart (Table Object). Table Style Specifies the table style to use for the tabular report.
Display only jumpered terminals and accessories Include only the terminals that are jumpered and all accessories for the terminal strip in the table, leaving out any terminals that are not jumpered. Display only jumpered terminals Include only the terminals that are jumpered in the table, leaving out all accessories and any terminals that are not jumpered. Show Unused Wire Connections in Table Select to display all rows for each terminal even if there is no connected component.
Use icons or the right-click menu to zoom and pan inside of the preview window. Zoom In Increases the apparent size of the objects in the preview. Zoom Out Decreases the apparent size of the objects in the preview. Zoom Extents Zooms to display the terminal strip extents. Zoom Original Restores the original view. Zoom Window Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular window. Insert Places the terminal strip.
Defines the settings for the Terminal Strip table object. Terminal Strip Editor Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Editor. Toolbar: Panel Layout Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor Command entry: AETSE Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. Click the Layout Preview tab and select Tabular Terminal Strip (Table Object). Click Settings. Terminal Strip Table Generator Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Table Generator.
unless the option “Insert All Sections on Active Drawing” is selected. NOTE The “Insert All Sections on Active Drawing” option is not available when using the Terminal Strip Table Generator tool. Section Placement Specifies where to place the table in the drawing. You can enter x and y values or pick a point on the screen. Section Offset Specifies the distance between sections, offset direction, and the base point for the distance measurement. ■ Distance: Specifies the distance between sections.
NOTE A terminal without any connected components has one row in the table. Opens a preview dialog box to view each drawing as it will look when generated. All table settings are reflected in the preview. Preview Terminal block properties Use this dialog box to control the number of levels assigned to a multiple level terminal block. You can control the level description, number of wires per connection, pins right, pins left and internal jumpers.
Select the terminal to edit. In the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, click Block Properties. NOTE You can also access this dialog box by clicking Edit Terminal Block Properties on the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box. The default level for any terminal symbol that is placed into the project that is not associated to another is 0. Manufacturer Displays the Manufacturer value that is currently assigned to the terminal being edited.
Internally jumper the levels currently selected in the grid. Delete the internal jumper currently assigned to the levels selected in the grid Clears all terminal block properties. Clear NOTE Properties for a level cannot be cleared if there is a schematic terminal representing that level (other than the terminal being edited), or there is an external jumper on that level. Terminal block property attributes The values in the grid are stored as follows.
Toolbar: Panel Layout Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor Command entry: AETSE Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Terminal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, or Cable Information tab, select the level to modify. In the Terminals section, click Edit Terminal. Installation Code Changes the installation codes. Click Browse to display a list of existing installation values found in the active drawing, entire project, or an external list (default.inst).
NOTE It is unavailable when the terminal symbol does not have a TERM01 attribute or when the terminal number is the same as the wire number. NOTE Installation Code, Location Code, and Terminal Strip are disabled when editing an accessory. Reassign terminal Reassigns the selected terminals to another terminal strip within the active project. Multiple selection is allowed.
Location Code Specifies the Location code for the selected terminal. If there is an existing name, it appears in the edit box. If not, you can enter a new value. Click Browse to display a list of existing location values found in the active drawing, entire project, or an external list (default.inst). Pick from the list to update the component automatically with the location code. Terminal Strip Specifies the Tag ID given to the terminal strip. If there is an existing name, it appears in the edit box.
Ignore Alphanumeric Terminals Indicates to process only the terminals that are a numeric value, all terminals containing an alpha character are ignored and are not renumbered. Ignore Accessories Indicates to ignore any accessories in the terminal strip during the renumber command. Renumber Specifies whether to renumber the terminal based on terminal or level. Per Terminal processes the entire terminal at a time while Per Level processes each level at a time.
Quantity Specifies a numeric value for the number of spare terminals to insert. The default value is 1. Use < or > to increment the value by a single step. Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the spare terminal. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Catalog Lists the catalog number for the spare terminal. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Assembly Lists the assembly code for the spare terminal.
Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Terminal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, or Cable Information tab, select the terminal in the list. In the Spare section, click Insert Accessory. Number Defines the starting terminal number for inserting accessories. Select Increment if you want to increment the terminal ID when the accessory is inserted. If the quantity is set to less than 2, you cannot increment the ID.
Toolbar: Panel Layout Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor Command entry: AETSE Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Terminal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, or Cable Information tab, Destinations section, click Toggle Location. NOTE If components are present that have a blank value for the location code, question marks (??) display in the dialog box.
NOTE If components are present that have a blank value for the installation code, questions marks (??) displays in the dialog box. Internal Destination Lists connections to the terminal that reside in the same location as the terminal. External Destination Lists connections to the terminal that reside in a different location than the terminal. Toggle External to Internal/Toggle Internal to External Toggles/moves locations from one side of the terminal to the other.
■ Level numbering: Displays a level number for each level that is defined in the terminal properties. The level numbering of the panel symbol is a pound symbol (#). ■ Label: Lists the level description defined in the terminal block properties. ■ Number: Lists the terminal numbers defined in the association. Only one terminal number is allowed per level and each level displays its respective terminal number or text. Panel terminal symbols do not display terminal numbers.
Move Up/Move Down Moves the selected terminal up or down one level within the terminal definition. Edit/Delete Jumpers Use this to edit the jumper information, such as catalog data, remove terminals from a jumper, or delete a jumper. Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Editor. Toolbar: Panel Layout Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor Command entry: AETSE Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit.
are jumpered together, you can have a single catalog item represent a jumper bar that spans the selection, or single jumpers between each terminal. Delete ■ Lookup: Displays the catalog database from which you can select the Manufacturer and Catalog values. ■ Project: Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the active project. ■ Copy: Copies catalog values from the selected jumper in to memory for this session of AutoCAD Electrical, to b paste into another jumper.
Toolbar: Panel Layout Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor Command entry: AETSE Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Layout Preview tab, select Tabular Terminal Strip (Table Object). Click Row Styles. Table Style Selects a table style from the active drawing to use. This overrides what is defined in the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box. Terminal Lists available row cell styles from the selected table style.
Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the table. Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list. Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list. Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Cell Style Specifies the cell style for the table. Within the table styles, you can define different cell styles to use. They give the added flexibility to customize how the terminal strip appears.
Device1 Left Device column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids. Pin1 Left Pin column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids. Wire1 Left Wire column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids. Type1 Left Type column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids. Cable1 Left Cable column in the Terminal Strip Editor Cable Information grid. Conductor1 Left Conductor column in the Terminal Strip Editor Cable Information grid. T1 Left T column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.
Column for displaying defined jumpers. Jumper Generate terminal strip tables Use the Terminal Strip Table Generator tool to insert one terminal strip or multiple terminal strips as table objects. There are options to insert a terminal strip as a single table object or to split the terminal strip into multiple table objects. New drawings are created as needed and are automatically added to the active project.
Insert a terminal strip table in multiple sections A terminal strip table can be added through the Terminal Strip Editor or with the Terminal Strip Table Generator tool. A terminal strip can be split into multiple table sections by changing your table settings. Terminal Strip Editor 1 Click Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Editor. 2 Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. 3 Click the Layout Preview tab. 4 Select Settings.
11 Specify the file name for the first drawing. The last character of the file name is incremented for each new drawing. 12 (Optional) Specify a template file to use. 13 Click OK. Terminal Strip Table Generator 1 Click Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Table Generator. 2 Select Settings. 3 Enter the number of rows you want for each section. If the table break falls between rows within one terminal definition, the entire terminal definition is placed in the next table section.
10 (Optional) Specify a template file to use. 11 Click OK. Terminal strip table generator Creates drawing files with tabular terminal strip layouts. Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Table Generator. Toolbar: Terminal Footprint Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Table Generator Command entry: AETSEGENERATOR Terminal Strip Table Generator inserts one terminal strip or multiple terminal strips as table objects.
Table Settings Table Style Specifies the table style to use for the table. Select from the list or click Browse to browse to and select another drawing file whose table styles you want to use. NOTE If the selected table style is not in the TableStyle.dwg file, it is added. Define Columns Defines the columns on page 1110 to include, order, headings, justification, and jumper circles display for the jumper chart. Row Styles Defines specific row styles to use for the selected table style.
Number of Drawings Displays the number of drawings necessary to generate the terminal strip using the current table settings. Settings Defines the table settings on page 1093 such as number of rows per section, number of sections per drawing, table, and section placement, section offset, scale, angle, first drawing name if a new drawing is needed, and the template to use for any new drawings generated. Browse Browses for any saved settings (in a *.tsl file) that you previously created.
Refreshes the data within an existing tabular terminal strip; a new table is not inserted. Refresh NOTE If the selected terminal strip is not found in the project, an alert displays asking if you want to insert the missing strip in a new drawing. If you click Yes, the terminal strip is inserted. If you click No, the terminal strip is not inserted. The terminal strips that were found are updated. Terminal strip table settings Defines the settings for the Terminal Strip table object.
minal definition, the entire terminal definition is placed in the next table section. This results in a table section with fewer rows than defined. NOTE If the terminal definition is the first one in the section and exceeds the number of rows per section, the entire terminal definition is kept together in one section. Sections Per Drawing Specifies how many table sections to insert on each drawing.
of the drawing file name is incremented for each drawing created. ■ Show Unused Wire Connections in Table Template: Specifies the template file to use for any new drawings. Enter a template file name or click Browse to search for and select a template file. Select to display all rows for each terminal even if there is no connected component. The Wires per Connection value for the terminal defines the number of rows. NOTE A terminal without any connected components has one row in the table.
the jumper from within Terminal Strip Editor on page 1070. A catalog value can be assigned to an external jumper. Edit terminal jumpers Use the Edit Jumper tool to jumper two or more terminals together in a schematic diagram. The terminals to be jumpered can be on the same drawing or span multiple drawings within the same project. Choose one of the following workflows for editing terminal jumpers: Workflow 1: 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Edit Jumper. 2 Select the primary terminal.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Edit Jumper. 2 Press Enter at the command line. 3 Select the terminals to be jumpered (from the left tree view) and click the arrow to copy to the right tree view. 4 Do one of the following: ■ Click Edit to create the jumper or edit the jumpers on the selected terminal. ■ Click Close to return to the command prompt and: ■ (Optional) Select additional terminals in the drawing to add to the jumper.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Edit Jumper. Menu: Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Edit Jumper Command entry: AEJUMPER Enter Browse (B) at the command line or first select a terminal and then enter Browse (B) to select additional terminals. As you select a terminal, the drawing in which that terminal resides displays under the tree views or under the terminal preview window. Schematic Terminals Lists all of the terminal strips and terminals in the active project.
NOTE You can select to view a schematic terminal or tabular view of the entire terminal strip. If you select a terminal strip from the Schematic Terminal list and click View, a tabular view of the terminal strip displays, showing a layout of the connected terminals. By default the preview window is hidden. It can be toggled using Show and Hide once a terminal is viewed. Hide/Show Switches the visibility of the preview window at the bottom of the dialog box.
Delete 1126 | Chapter 13 Terminal Tools ■ Manufacturer: Specifies the manufacturer name. ■ Catalog: Specifies the catalog number. ■ Assembly: Specifies the assembly code. ■ Item: Specifies the item value. ■ Count: Specifies how the catalog data is used in the Bill of Materials. When multiple terminals are jumpered together, you can have a single catalog item represent a jumper bar that spans the selection, or single jumpers between each terminal.
View Displays the selected terminal in a preview window at the bottom of the dialog box. By default the preview window is hidden. It can be switched using Show and Hide once a terminal is viewed. Hide/Show Switches the visibility of the preview window at the bottom of the dialog box. Preview window Shows a graphical representation of the selected terminals. You can pan the image using the left mouse button or Pan tool. You can zoom the image using the mouse wheel or the various zoom tools.
Modify an existing terminal strip 1 Re-invoke the command, window the existing terminal strip to capture the existing terminal numbers. 2 Cancel the command. 3 Delete the old terminal strip. 4 Re-invoke the terminal strip utility. 5 Make any edits and re-insert the terminal strip. Terminal strip representation Terminal List (Manual Picks) Menu: Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Terminal Strip Utilities ➤ Terminal List (Manual Picks) Command entry: AETERMLIST Terminal List (From File).
Edit Opens the Edit dialog box so you can change the terminal text or count. Cut Removes the selected terminal from the terminal list. Copy Makes a copy of the selected terminal and stores it in the Paste clipboard. Paste Adds the copied terminal into the terminal list from the clipboard. Pick Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and allows you to select more terminals for the list.
Terminal pitch and Terminal width Terminal pitch (spacing) Sets the spacing between entries in the terminal strip. Terminal width Sets the width for the terminal strip. Use .750 Changes the terminal width value to .750 if selected. Terminal Ruling Box Around Creates a single box around the terminal strip. Between Entries Creates lines between entries in the terminal strip. Start Line Specifies which line the terminal strip starts at. End Specifies which line the terminal strip ends at.
Show terminal internal/external connections This tool shows the state of the invisible attribute values for selected objects. The values are shown with red and green arrows. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Terminal: Show Internal/External Connections. 2 Select the objects to show the connection codes for. You can pick on individual objects or select a group of objects using a boundary box. Mark internal connections This tool marks attributes with an 'I' for internal wiring.
Erase connection codes 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Terminal: Erase Internal/External Connections. 2 Select near the wire connection point of a terminal to erase the connection code. (I= internal, E= external) Resequence terminal numbers Resequence terminal numbers AutoCAD Electrical provides utilities to make it easy to resequence the terminal numbers across one or many drawings. These utilities do not resequence terminals that carry a wire number as the terminal number.
5 In the Select Drawings to Process dialog box, select the drawings to search through, and click OK. NOTE These tools do not renumber panel terminals. Use the Terminal Strip editor Renumber on page 1101 to resequence a terminal strip that contains panel terminals. Project-wide schematic terminal renumber Resequences the terminal numbers across one or many drawings.
must pass through a series of shipping split terminal strips can be represented by a single in-line wire schematic symbol (instead of having to show each individual terminal in the sequence). Two sample symbols are provided. Their appearance may be edited or new ones created as required. They are inserted using the AutoCAD Electrical Insert Component tool. Browse to insert. The symbol names are H - - 1_MULTI_CONN.dwgwire number changes through the symbol H - - 1_MULTI_CONN_NOCHG.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT Enter "H--1_MULTI_CONN_NOCHG" in the Type It box and click OK. Specify the insertion point on the drawing. Select any entry within a group to view/edit that group. Edit Opens the Edit entry dialog box so you can change values such as the tag-ID, terminal number, or Installation code.
For example, you might have a wire that connects from a push button and goes out to a field device. But to get to the field device, the wire connection must pass through a local terminal strip, then a shipping split terminal strip, on to a field connection terminal strip, and finally a terminal strip near the field device.
diagram is remembered. When you insert another component of that type, the previous catalog assignment of the component is set as the default (assuming a previous one was made during the current editing session). Find Scans each drawing for the target component type and returns a list of what was found. You can make your catalog assignment by selecting from the list. Catalog Lookup Opens the catalog database of the catalog from which you can manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values.
Wire entering this connection Click Internal, External, or Both to change the Connection Code (I=Internal, E=External). The code changes the Miscellaneous value as follows: LEFT_TERMDESC=I (for Internal), LEFT_TERMDESC=E (for External). Wire leaving this connection Click Internal, External, or Both to change the Connection Code (I=Internal, E=External). The code changes the Miscellaneous value as follows: RIGHT_TERMDESC=I (for Internal), RIGHT_TERMDESC=E (for External).
Point-to-Point Wiring Tools 14 Working with Connectors Use point-to-point wiring tools Point-to-Point Style Schematic Ladder Style Schematic In addition to the tools specifically related to connectors, you can utilize other AutoCAD Electrical tools for editing your point-to-point wiring diagrams. Edit Pin Numbers Use the Edit Component tool to edit the pin assignments on the parametrically generated connectors.
Scoot Wire Use the Scoot tool to move wires attached to pins on the connectors. The wire scoots and the connector pin along with it while the overall connector shell stays fixed. Insert Wires Use the Insert Wires tool to route single-wire connections. Use the Multiple Wire Bus tool, Component mode, to insert and route multiple wires in one tool. NOTE A wire connection point should only have up to three wire connections tied to it.
A preview outline of the connector displays for placement on the drawing. It shows rounded corners for the plug side of the connector. An 'x' indicates the insertion point of the connector and the arrow indicates the plug side wire connection direction. 8 Specify the insertion point on the drawing or enter Z (zoom), P (pan), X, V, or Tab at the command prompt to change the connector orientation before insertion. Review the sections below to see how Tab, V key, or X key changes your connector orientation.
horizontal orientation, a series of Tabs cycles the image through these four orientations Start point TAB 1 TAB 2 TAB 3 Switch layout using the X key Press "X" at the command prompt to toggle between "Fixed Spacing" and "At Wire Crossings." Press the X key, and then move the connector preview over the wires so the connector stretches to align each pin with the underlying wire spacing. The connector stretches only to meet the underlying spacing when the first pin lands on a wire.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Rotate Connector. 2 Specify whether to hold the current attribute orientation. If you select Yes (default), the attribute text orientation does not rotate as the connector rotates. 3 Select the connector to rotate. The connector automatically rotates 90 degrees. 4 Keep clicking the connector until the appropriate position is reached. 5 Press Enter or Esc to exit the command.
Existing wire connections do not automatically reroute to the reverse side of the connector. Use the wire editing tools to resolve wiring. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Reverse Connector. 2 Select the connector to reverse. The connector automatically reverses depending on its original orientation.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Stretch Connector. 2 Specify the end of the connector to stretch. 3 Specify where you want the connector to end (second point of displacement). Either drag your mouse to the appropriate location or enter coordinates. NOTE You can press TAB during the stretch to change the visibility of the connector attributes. See the Tips and Hints below for more information. 4 Press Enter or Esc to exit the command.
■ Avoid stretching one end of a connector all the way to the other end of the connector. Split connector Use this tool to split the parametric connector into two separate block definitions (for example, parent and a child or a child and another child). You specify: ■ Origin point for the new block ■ Break type ■ Layer for the child block ■ Whether to reposition the child block 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Split Connector.
6 (Optional) Select to reposition the child block to move it as part of this command. 7 Click OK. 8 To reposition the child block, select a point on the screen to place the block. 9 Press Enter or Esc to exit the command. Add pins to a connector Adds connector pins to an existing connector.
defined on the parent symbol are queried in the project database to determine the next available pin number on the connector component. This checks across the entire project to find the pin numbers used on both parent and any child connector symbols. If a PINLIST value is not defined, then the next available sequential pin number (based on existing pins) is used. Pin assignments can be numbers or letters or combinations of both. 4 Press Enter or Esc to exit the command. Tips and Hints ■ Turn Snap ON.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Delete Connector Pins. 2 Pick the pins to delete from the connectors. The pin number attribute on the connector block disappears. This attribute along with associated wire connection and description attributes are not immediately removed from the connector. They are renamed so that they are effectively ignored.
NOTE You cannot swap a combination connector with a single plug or receptacle connector. Additionally, you cannot use this tool to swap pins from one side of a connector to the other. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Swap Connector Pins. 2 Select the connector pin to swap. Temporary graphics are drawn around the selected pin number indicating that it has been included in the "swap" list. 3 Select the pin that you want to swap with the selected pin.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Move Connector Pins. 2 Select the connector pin to move. 3 Specify the new location for the pin. The pin relocates along the connector's centerline axis, even if your pick point is far off to one side of the connector. You can also specify a location beyond either end of the current connector shell, and then use the Stretch Connector tool to extend the shell to enclose these pins. 4 Press Enter or Esc to exit the command.
4 In the Connector Pin Numbers in Use dialog box, select a pair of pins to modify. 5 In the Pin Number section, enter a new pin number value in the edit boxes or click the arrows to either increase or decrease both plug and receptacle values by one. 6 (Optional) Enter a description for the plug or receptacle terminal. 7 Click OK. Insert connector Generates a connector dynamically from parameters you specify, and inserts it at a specified location.
Click Details to expand the dialog box to provide more options to define settings for the size, shape, and display of the parametrically built connector symbols. Layout Determines the overall appearance of the parametric connector, including pin spacing and pin count. Pin Spacing Specifies the distance between the pin wire connections. This value initially defaults to the Rung Spacing defined in Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format ➤ Ladder Defaults - Spacing setting for the drawing file.
a pin list entry of "1" for a connector with the Pin Count set to 8 generates a connector with pins labeled "1" through "8." On the other hand, a pin list entry of "1,2,3,4,A,B,C,GND" generates an 8-pin connector with pins labeled "1", "2", "3", "4", "A", "B", "C", "GND." If the Pin List edit box is left blank, the connector numbering starts at 1 and continues up through the Pin Count value. If you define more pin list data than pin count, the pins are used in the order they are defined.
NOTE This insert of a continued, broken connector must be done during the current AutoCAD Electrical session. ■ Cancel Custom: Inserts the remaining pins into the connector without any further prompts. Start Connector As Child Defines the new connector block definition as a child of a parent connector. This means that after it is created it needs to be linked to a parent connector through a common tagID value (select Edit Component and link to parent using any of the normal methods).
Wire Number Change Sets the property of the connector symbol to change the wire number through a plug/receptacle connector symbol. By default, the wire numbers are maintained through a plug/receptacle connector. Add Divider Line Creates a plug/receptacle combination connector with a line down the middle of the block to indicate the separation of the plug and receptacle. This line becomes part of the block definition for the connector.
Hidden pins are still present on the symbol, but they are marked invisible. Values assigned to the hidden pins will still show up in various wire connection from/to reports. You can unhide hidden attributes using the Move/Show Attribute tool. Size The values in the edit boxes define the parameters used to build the graphical outline that represents the shell of the connector. Receptacle Specifies the width of the receptacle side of the connector. This value can be the same as the plug side.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Connector drop-down ➤ Insert Connector. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Connector ➤ Insert Connector Command entry: AECONNECTOR In the Insert Connector dialog box, select Allow Spacers/Breaks and click Insert. In the Custom Pin Spaces/Breaks dialog box, click Break Symbol Now.
Allow Spacers/Breaks Gives you manual control over the insertion of the connector. Displays the Custom Pin Spaces/Breaks dialog box that prompts you for the insertion of each connector pin prior to committing the connector block definition to the drawing file. The running count of pins inserted versus total pins defined for the connector is listed at the top of the dialog box.
Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the connector to edit. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Pins section, click List. NOTE You can edit pin numbers when a row is selected in the grid. Pin List Displays all available pins to be assigned to the parametrically-built connector. The number in parenthesis () indicates the single or pair of pins for the connector.
Displays the plug and receptacle pin numbers for the selected row. Enter a new value in the edit box or click the arrows to increment or decrement both numbers on the plug and receptacle. Pin Numbers NOTE If you replace pin numbers through editing, the replaced pin numbers may go back into the Pin List if they were originally defined in the Pin List range. Pin Descriptions Edits the plug and receptacle terminal descriptions.
3 Select the opposing wire that makes up the right-angle turn. The additional wire segments are added based on the right-angle direction. 4 Right-click to exit the command. Insert multiple bus wiring Insert multiple bus wiring 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Multiple Bus. 2 Set the horizontal and vertical spacing for the wires. 3 Select the mode for defining the "starting at" position. ■ Starting at component wire connection points: Select the radio button and click OK.
display displays in red when it detects that the routing approaches within a wire connection trap distance of another wire. 4 Click a point on the screen to set the endpoint of the wires or press "C" + Enter to lock down the current routing and continue to draw multiple wires. If the bus approaches a multi-connection device, such as a connector, it attempts to align the spacing of the bus wires to match with the wire connections. 5 Right-click to create the wires.
inserted as the parent and the subsequent markers of the same reference designator (Cable Tag) are inserted as children. Certain Autodesk Inventor Professional wire property names need to be maintained inside of AutoCAD Electrical. You must make sure that your column header names (set in the Rename User Columns dialog box) match the property names coming out of the Autodesk Inventor Professional XML export (set in the Autodesk Inventor Custom Properties dialog box).
Wire ID Occurrence Unique wire number ID (occurrence name) - AutoCAD Electrical wire number; WIRENO attribute in AutoCAD Electrical Wire Definition Definition Wire library definition data saved in Cable & Harness library XML - wire layer name in AutoCAD Electrical Various user-defined * Definition, Custom Defined in the wire library definition (part editing) - Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical Various user-defined * Occurrence, Custom Defined in the harness occurrence level - Xdata in AutoCAD Electrica
Various user-defined * Definition, Custom Defined in the splice library definition (part editing) - Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical Various user-defined * Occurrence, Custom Defined in the harness occurrence level - Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical * Properties that are not defined in Autodesk Inventor Professional but are still usable in AutoCAD Electrical.
If the connector is placed or was previously placed into the project, an 'x' displays in the Placed column. ■ (Optional) Specify whether to build the connector using fixed pin spacing or to have it compress or expand to match up the pins with underlying wire crossings. ■ (Optional) Specify whether to insert the entire connector all at once or to insert it manually, pin by pin, with an option to insert spacers or to break the connector into two or more pieces.
Toolbar: Insert Connector Menu: Components ➤ Insert Connector ➤ Insert Connector from List Command entry: AECONNECTORLIST The first time you run this tool, select the connector list file (.xml, .xls, .mdb, and.csv) in the Connector List File Selection dialog box and click Open. The connector list file is retained in memory for subsequent selections of this tool. NOTE If you select to open a spreadsheet or database that contains multiple sheets or tables, the Select Input Source dialog box appears.
Connectors Displays all connectors found in the import file in the grid display. The static text shows the total number of connector components listed in the grid control. Splices Displays all splices found in the import file in the grid display. The static text shows the total number of splices listed in the grid control.
Allow Spacers/Breaks Splice Symbol Name Displays the Custom Pin/Spaces dialog box that prompts you for the insertion of each connector pin before committing the connector block definition to the drawing file. The number of pins inserted in the block definition out of the total number of pins defined in the connector is indicated at the top of the dialog box.
Wire Number Change Sets the property of the connector symbol to change the wire number through the connector symbol. By default, the wire numbering is the same on both sides of the connector. Add Divider Line Creates the connector with a line down the middle of the block to indicate the separation of the plug and receptacle. This line becomes part of the block definition for the connector. Plug Only Creates the connector as a single block file with the plug representation only.
If you selected Plug Only or Receptacle Only for the Type, the pin display options are show or hide only. These show or hide the pin numbers on a single plug or receptacle symbol. Size Defines the outside shell size for the connector. The values in the edit boxes build the graphical shell that represents the connector on the point to point diagram. Receptacle Specifies the overall thickness of the receptacle side of the connector. This value can be the same as the plug side.
distance, the radius value is erased. The radius is not created on the plug connector. Pick File Displays the Connector List File Selection dialog box to select a new file for import. Wire It Reviews connectors placed on the active drawing and runs the wiring commands to make connections between the connectors. ■ When both ends of the wire connections are found on the active drawing, the wires are generated between the two points. Wire numbering is added based on current configurations.
dialog box, placing them in the drawing one at a time. After the connectors are created the Connector Selection dialog box appears with the connector rows marked as 'x.' Overview of the spreadsheet import file structure You can select various file types (including XLS, CSV, MDB, and XML) to import into AutoCAD Electrical. For the Insert Connector from List tool to work, the spreadsheet and CSV import file must have the following structure. The spreadsheet for import allows 27 columns per record.
13 CMP2 Component 2 Text 14 PIN2 Connected pin on CMP2 Text 15 DESC2 Description of CMP2 Text 16 CAT2 Catalog number of CMP2 Text 17 MFG2 Manufacturer of CAT2 Text 18 ASM2 Assembly code for CMP2 Text 19 WIRENO Wire number (may be blank) Text 20 WIRELAY Wire layer name Text 21 CBLINST Cable Installation Code Text 22 CBLLOC Cable Location Code Text 23 CBL Cable tag name Text 24 CBLWCLR Cable wire (conductor) color Text 25 CBLCAT Cable catalog item Text 26 C
NOTE If the AutoCAD Electrical drawing is missing one end of the connector or if a connection was not found, wiring information is displayed next to the pin. The information is written into a log file so you know AutoCAD Electrical was unable to resolve the wire connections in the drawing. The log file name is {drawing file name.LOG} and is found in the same folder as the drawing file. 1 In Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness, define wire names and connections for your assembly file.
8 Select the connectors to insert from the list and click Insert. 9 Click the insertion point in the drawing for each connector. 10 In the Connector Selection dialog box, continue selecting the connectors to insert and place them onto the drawing. 11 When all connectors are placed on the drawing, click Wire It. Wires are generated in the drawing. Layers and XRECORDS are defined in the drawing and applied to the lines. Wire numbers are also placed in the drawing based on wire placement settings.
Connector List Columns are not editable. You can sort the connector details alphanumerically by clicking the column headers. Placed Displays an "x" if the connector is placed or was previously placed into the project. Installation Displays the Installation code for the connector, if defined in the XML import file. Location Displays the Location code for the connector, if defined in the XML import file.
Layout Pin Spacing Specifies the spacing for the distance between pin connections on their parametrically built connector symbol. The default spacing is defined from the Rung Spacing setting for the drawing. The edited value is persistent for the AutoCAD Electrical session and reverts to the default upon every time you start the application Fixed Spacing Creates the connector pin spacing as fixed. The fixed spacing value is driven from the Pin Spacing setting.
■ Splice Symbol Name Cancel Custom: Places connector in as if you selected Insert all on the portion it is working on. Does not remove preceding break commands. Defines a symbol to use to display a splice in the wire. Type in a symbol name to use when inserting splices or click Browse to select the symbol name to use. If left blank, once you click Insert, an error message displays. Select a Splice Symbol Name to insert the splice onto the drawing.
Creates the connector as a single block file with the receptacle representation only. Receptacle Only Display Defines the placement for the connector on the drawing relative to other connectors and the drawing border. This controls which side of the connector the plug is displayed, whether the connector goes in vertically or horizontally, and whether the pins are visible.
When the connector is built, the receptacle side wire connection attribute is moved from the insertion point on the divider line to the outside line representing the receptacle. The associated terminal pin attribute (TERM01_) travels half the distance as the wire connection attribute placing itself in the middle between the dimension on the divider line. Plug Specifies the overall thickness of the plug side of the connector. This value can be the same as the receptacle side.
Wire It Reviews connectors placed on the active drawing and runs the wiring commands to make connections between the connectors. ■ When both ends of the wire connections are found on the active drawing, the wires are generated between the two points. Wire numbering is added based on current configurations. ■ When only one end of the wire connection is found on the active drawing, text is placed next to the connector in the X?WIREnn wire annotation attribute on the connector symbol.
Insert splices Insert splices Inserts a splice symbol selected from the icon menu. The splice symbol is an in-line connection symbol allowing one or more wires to connect at each end. The default splice symbol triggers a wire number change through the symbol. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Connector drop-down ➤ Insert Splice. The Splice Symbols dialog box displays.
Project-Wide Tools 15 Move from reference to reference Move from reference to reference Use the Surfer tool to move from reference to reference across the project drawing set. A new window opens and the original window closes when Surf is selected unless you hold the Shift key while running the command. Start the Surfer 1 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Surfer drop-down ➤ Surfer. 2 Select a component tag, catalog number, wire number, or item number on the current drawing.
All references relating to the component, including panel layout and panel nameplate references, display in the Surf dialog box 3 Double-click any reference listed in the Surf dialog box to zoom in on the selected reference. If the reference is on one or more drawings, each drawing opens automatically. TIP Use the Type column to select the object to surf to.
If the reference is on one or more drawings, each drawing is opened automatically. 3 Using the Surf dialog box, edit the component, display a BOM listing for each reference or select a different component reference. 4 Click Close. Surf Surfs to related references of an item you select. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Surfer drop-down ➤ Surfer. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Surfer Command entry: AESURF Moves from reference to reference across the project drawing set.
NOTE Your dialog box can differ depending on whether you are moving from reference to reference across the project drawing set or looking for problems related to wire signal source or destination codes. When surfing for source or destination signals, the Surf dialog box displays the type (Src or Dst), sheet/reference value and description. Show more Displays the extra non-Installation/Location matching references when in IEC tagging mode. If unselected, only the exact surf matches display in the list.
Zoom Out Reduces the apparent magnification of the drawing area. Go to Goes directly to the reference of the highlighted entry. Special codes in the surf list box c Component symbol p Parent or standalone schematic or one-line symbol NOTE A one-line symbol is indicated by a “1-” value in the Category column.
Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Previous DWG. 3 Continue moving among the drawings until the file you are looking for is opened. 4 Select Window ➤ {drawing file name} to close the drawing after you modify anything. You can also close a drawing file by right-clicking the file name in the Project Manager and selecting Close from the context menu. Plot one or more drawings Plot one or more drawings Batch plot the full drawing set or a subsection of the drawing set.
7 Click Detailed Plot Configuration mode to turn on or turn off the options set within the Detailed Plot Configuration Option dialog box. 8 Click ON or OFF. 9 Select the order to output the plot: ■ OK: Output plots in the selected order. ■ OK-Reverse: Output plots in the reverse order. 10 Click OK to save any open drawings. 11 Click OK Project. Batch plotting options and order Batch plot the full drawing set or a subsection of the drawing set. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.
Run a post-plot command script file Run an optional script file containing a list of commands to execute AFTER the plot command is issued. The default script file name is postplot.scr, located in AutoCAD Electrical user subdirectory. NOTE Changes to drawings are not saved during the plotting process. Additionally, the plot time and date stamp text is discarded after the plot is complete. To preserve changes made during the plotting process, add the QSAVE command into the pre- or post-plot script file.
Order OK Outputs plots in the selected order OK-Reverse Outputs plots in the reverse order. Project-wide utility Project-wide utilities Provides the means for operations on wire numbers, component tags, attribute text, wire types, and item numbers. You can define scripts and apply them project-wide. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Utilities.
Wire Numbers Select to keep wire numbers the same, erase specified wire numbers, reset specified wire numbers, or set wire numbers to fixed or normal. Signal Arrow Cross-reference text Select to maintain the signal arrow cross-reference text or to remove all signal arrow cross-reference text across the current project. Parent Component Tags: Fix/Unfix Select to maintain the component tags or to set all parent component tags to fixed or normal across the current project.
Click Setup to display the Import Wire Types on page 903 dialog box where you: ■ Select the wire types to import. ■ Define whether to overwrite any Wire Numbering and USERn differences for existing wire types. ■ Define whether to overwrite color and linetype differences for existing wire layers. Create a project-wide script file Create a project-wide script file You can run an AutoCAD script file against one or more drawings in the current project.
Renumbers ladder references project-wide. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Ladder drop-down ➤ Renumber Ladder Reference. Toolbar: Ladders Menu: Wires ➤ Ladders ➤ Renumber Ladder Reference Command entry: AERENUMBERLADDER 1st drawing, 1st ladder, 1st line reference number Enter the first ladder line reference number. 2nd drawing and beyond Select an option for ladders on subsequent drawings.
Component Retag Retag all nonfixed components. NOTE If Ladder References Resequence is selected, the component retag process is performed after the ladder resequencing is complete. Component Cross-reference Update Updates the cross-referencing for components on selected drawings. NOTE Cross-references are updated after other options such as component retag or ladder resequencing are performed. Wire Number and Signal Tag/Retag Sets options for wire number retagging.
2 For all subsequent drawings: ■ Select to use the next sequential reference. ■ Select Skip, drawing to drawing count to enter an amount to skip for the first ladder reference of the next drawing. Bump Up or Down Moves ladder references up if drawings were added to the middle of a project or moves ladder references down if drawings were removed from the project. NOTE Enter a negative number to move ladder references down. Sheet (%S value) Automates resequencing the sheet value on consecutive drawings.
Track drawing changes The Mark/Verify tool can help you track changes made to a project drawing set during any phase in the engineering process. Before you send your drawings out for review, use the Mark option. Each AutoCAD Electrical component, wire number, and beginning ladder reference is invisibly marked and referenced in a table in the scratch database file of the current project. When the drawings are returned, you can use the Verify option to generate a report of changes.
Track changes made to a drawing set Use this tool to insert comments in your drawings before sending them for review. Once the drawings are returned to you, run this tool again to see any changes that were made to the drawing set. 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Mark/Verify DWGs. 2 Specify to mark either the project or the current drawing. 3 Specify to mark AutoCAD Electrical components.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Mark/Verify DWGs. Toolbar: Project Menu: Projects ➤ Mark/Verify Drawings Command entry: AEMARKVERIFY Creates a list of changes made after the drawings are marked. The report includes added, changed, copied, and deleted components or wire numbers. Detects changes made using AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, or AutoCAD Electrical. This tool places invisible data on each component to track additions and modifications.
Translate description text Translate description text Converts description or switch position component text from one language to another. When AutoCAD Electrical finishes it displays a report listing what was successfully translated and what was not. You can use this report to surf to the problem areas (where a phrase could not be translated) and make manual edits one by one. 1 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Language Conversion.
Menu: Projects ➤ Language Conversion ➤ Language Conversion Command entry: AELANG Run language swap on Performs language translation on the entire project, the active drawing, selected drawings, or on selected objects in the drawing. From To Translates from the current language to another language. What to do Translates the selected item. Translation on Determines if multiple lines of the component description text are translated based on exact or partial matches.
Phrase list in selected language Displays a phrase list for the selected language. New phrase Adds a blank entry to the end of each language list and the translations for phrase list at the bottom of the dialog box. Copy phrase Adds a copy of each translation of the selected phrase to the end of each language list. Delete phrase Deletes all translations of the selected phrase from the database. Translations for phrase above - Select to edit Displays phrases from the selected language.
5 Select one or more drawing to publish to the Web. ■ Do All: Selects all drawings from the project drawing list to publish to the web. ■ Process: Selects one or more drawings from the project drawing list to publish to the web. ■ Reset: Moves all selected drawings back to the project drawing list. ■ Un-select: Moves one or more drawings back to the project drawing list. ■ by Section/sub-section: Selects drawings by sections and subsections. 6 Click OK.
On the Project Manager, click the arrow on the Publish/Plot tool select Plot Project. Select the drawings to process and click OK. , and Menu: Projects ➤ Publish to Web Command entry: AEPUBLISH2WEB DWF Design Web format files are vector-based representations of drawing (.DWG) files. NOTE DWF is the recommended image format as it supports intradrawing surfing from a component tag or component description list. JPEG Joint Photographics Experts Group files are raster-based.
Layout to output Creates the drawing images using the AutoCAD Plot to DWF function. The plot mode can be Model, Layout1, or As Saved. Configuration name Uses the plot configuration file for generating the .DWF drawing images. NOTE To override, set WD_DWF_PC3 in the wd.env environment settings file. Build intra-drawing surf pick lists Automates the surf and zoom capabilities on components on the drawing image displayed on the Web.
4 Click OK. 5 Click Publish. The progress of the plot job is displayed. When complete, you are notified that the plot and publish job is complete. Title Block Utility Title block AutoCAD Electrical can link to your drawing title block if it consists of an AutoCAD block with attributes. The title block border drawing can be inserted as a block on any AutoCAD drawing or on an AutoCAD drawing template on page 1228 file.
Create a title block The title block is a border drawing inserted as an AutoCAD block on another drawing. The title block utility can update attributes on the title block. 1 Start a blank new drawing. 2 Draw your drawing border using standard AutoCAD commands and objects. 3 Enter ATTDEF at the command prompt to insert attribute definition objects. NOTE When the border drawing is inserted as a block on another drawing, attribute definition objects become attributes.
4 Enter the Tag name, for example DESC1, DESC2, SHEET, SHEET_TOTAL. 5 Set any other attribute definition properties and values. 6 Select OK. 7 Specify the insertion point. 8 Repeat for each attribute definition for the title block. 9 Save the border drawing as a DWG file. This drawing is inserted as a block on another drawing. It can be also be inserted when creating a drawing template on page 1228 file, DWT.
AutoCAD Electrical values AutoCAD Electrical can map the following project and drawing specific values to attributes on the title block.
Mapping Code Description DWGNAM drawing name value (the %D value) assigned in the Drawing Properties dialog box DD1 (or DWGDESC), DD2, DD3 the drawing descriptions assigned in the Drawing Properties dialog box DWGSEC optional Section code assigned in the Drawing Properties dialog box DWGSUB optional Subsection code assigned in the Drawing Properties dialog box FILENAME drawing file name without path or extension FULLFILENAME drawing file name with path and extension FILENAMEEXT drawing file n
NOTE The Title Block Setup utility maps the appropriate codes based on selections on the Title Block Setup dialog box. Set up multiple descriptions AutoCAD Electrical allows three description lines per drawing. If more description lines are needed, each description line can be broken into multiple pieces by the “|” character. Each piece is then mapped to a different attribute on the title block.
Method 1 Project.wdt Create a project-specific mapping file that only references for drawings in the current project. The file name is the same as the project name with a .wdt extension. DEFAULT.WDT Create a default mapping file in the project's subdirectory that is referenced if a project-specific file is not found and if a WD_TB attribute is not present in the title block. DEFAULT.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Title Block Setup. Menu: Projects ➤ Title Block Setup Command entry: AESETUPTITLEBLOCK Specify the title block link method, enter a block name, and click OK. Title block name Lists the available title block names. Add New Adds new title blocks to the project. Enter a block name. For multiple blocks, separate with a comma. For example, DEMOTBLK,DEMOTBLK2,DEMOTBLK3 Edit Edits the selected title block. Remove Removes the selected title block.
Assigns text constants and AutoLISP expressions to a title block attribute. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Title Block Setup. Menu: Projects ➤ Title Block Setup Command entry: AESETUPTITLEBLOCK Specify the title block link method, enter a block name, and click OK. Click User Defined on the Title Block Setup dialog box. Current User-defined Assignments Lists the attributes and assigned text constant or AutoLISP expression.
Map a title block using the WD_TB attribute method Create a mapping for the title block on the WD_TB attribute definition. 1 Open the title block base drawing that contains the attribute definition objects. IMPORTANT Do not open a drawing with the title block inserted as a block. 2 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Title Block Setup. 3 Select the title block link method: Method 2: WD_TB attrib. An invisible attribute contained in the title block defines the attribute mapping. 4 Click OK.
NOTE Ann alert displays if no attribute definition objects are found. 5 In the Title Block Setup dialog box, select the attribute from each list to map to its corresponding AutoCAD Electrical value. 6 Click Drawing Values to assign drawing specific and plotting values. 7 Click User Defined to map attributes to text constants or AutoLISP values. 8 Click OK. 9 Title Block Setup updates the WD_TB attribute definition with the selected mappings.
BLOCK = TB,TB-REV,TB-ISSUE You can also use wildcards to define title blocks. For example, the drawing could have any of three different title block sizes, named TITLE-SIZEB, TITLE-SIZEC, or TITLE-SIZED. The following line tells AutoCAD Electrical to find and update the title block no matter what size is used on the drawing. BLOCK = TITLE-SIZE* The lines that follow the block definition, map the attribute names on that block to specific AutoCAD Electrical values.
■ DEFAULT.WDT Create a default mapping file in the same folder as the project file. This file is used if a project-specific file does not exist. ■ DEFAULT.WDT Create a default mapping file in the default AutoCAD Electrical support folder. This file is used if a project-specific file does not exist and no DEFAULT.WDT file exists in the project folder. NOTE Title Block Update looks first for any blocks with a WD_TB attribute. If the WD_TB attribute is found, the WDT file is ignored. 4 Click OK. If the .
■ Maps AutoCAD Electrical per-drawing values to specific attributes. ■ Maps AutoLISP values, system variables, or environment variables to specific attributes. ■ Provides two title block linking methods, WD_TB attribute on page 1216 and WDT file on page 1218. Update the title block project-wide Before running the Title Block Update, enter the project description on page 203 lines and drawing values on page 220 that are mapped to attributes on the title block.
This tool assumes that you have a border with mapped attributes using the WDT file or a mapping attribute (WD_TB) inside of the border. It specifies which attribute on the border to update with text from the Update Title Block dialog box. NOTE The labels for each Project Description Line are customized by an optional WDL on page 1224 file. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Title Block Update.
Saves the list of checked boxes to a file called default.wdu. The default.wdu file is saved in the user folder. Save Select Lines to Update (per-drawing values) Lists drawing-specific values. Drawing Description The drawing descriptions assigned in the Drawing Properties dialog box. Up to three drawing descriptions can be added to a drawing. The drawing description codes DD1 (or DWGDESC), DD2 and DD3 are used for the three description lines.
Resequence sheet %S values Renumbers the sheet number for each drawing in the project set or for a selected portion of the project drawing set. Activate each drawing to process Specifies to activate every drawing so you can update the title block lines on selected drawings in the project. This option is necessary only if there are some user-defined values that require activating the drawing. OK Active Drawing Only Updates the text for the selected lines on the active drawing only.
1 _wdtitle.wdl - where matches the name of the active project in the same folder as the project WDT file. 2 default_wdtitle.wdl - in the same folder as the project WDT file. 3 default_wdtitle.wdl - in a folder in the AutoCAD Electrical search sequence. The file contains one line per label in the format LINEx=label. The entries do not have to be in order and line numbers can be skipped.
LINE8 = Checked By LINE9 = Scale 3 Save and exit the text file. 4 Open AutoCAD Electrical and test. Search sequence for .wdl files You can create different WDL files for different projects. The search sequence is as follows: 1 Look in the same folder as the .WDP file for the project, for a file called _WDTITLE.WDL where matches the name of the active project. 2 Look in the same folder as the .WDP file for the project for a file called DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL.
NOTE If the expression is a full AutoLISP function, it must return a string value (not an integer, real, list, or nil value). The program must be encoded into the project description data as "(load 'filename.lsp')." It must be self-starting upon load. See also: ■ Set project descriptions on page 203 Assign a variable to a project description line For example, the environment variable “USERNAME” contains a value that must show up on the drawing title block.
description line (mapped in the .wdt file or on the WD_TB attribute value carried by the title block). Drawing template A drawing template file is used to provide consistency in the drawings that you create by providing standard styles and settings. When a drawing template file is used to start a new drawing it can: ■ Predefine AutoCAD Electrical drawing properties such as component tagging, wire numbering format, and so on. ■ Predefine layers and layer properties. ■ Predefine wire layers.
7 Set the default drawing properties such as component tagging, wire numbering, cross-referencing, and so on. 8 Click OK. 9 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type. 10 Add wire layers as needed. Set the properties, color, linetype, and lineweight for each layer. 11 Click OK. 12 Enter SAVEAS at the command prompt. 13 Enter the file name. 14 Set the file type as AutoCAD Drawing Template (*.dwt). 15 Click Save.
1230
Icon Menus 16 Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard Use the Icon Menu Wizard to customize the icon menus easily. ■ Copy, cut, and paste icons from one submenu into another. ■ Drag icons to place those icons that are commonly used at the top, and those icons that are used less frequently at the bottom of the window. ■ Create new icons to use when inserting components. ■ Add new icon menu pages.
N:\Electrical\Menu\Images is created and used. If you browsed to an existing image, the image is copied to the Images folder. NOTE You can enclose the image path within quotation marks if you do not want the images copied to the Images folder. The .dat file saves the absolute path instead. For example, if the image file edit box contains “C:\Desktop\push_button.png,” then the push_button.png is not copied to the Image folder.
2 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Icon Menu Wizard. 3 On the Select Menu File dialog box, select the menu file (.dat) to modify and click OK. 4 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, select Add ➤ Component to add a new icon to the menu. You can alternately select Command, New Circuit, Add Circuit or New Submenu depending on which type of icon you want to add. ■ Component: Adds an icon that inserts a component into the drawing.
8 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. On the Insert Component dialog box, select the new icon. Edit the properties of an existing icon in the menu 1 Create an AutoCAD Electrical compatible library symbol. For schematic symbols, follow the guidelines regarding the symbol ".dwg" file naming convention and required attributes. 2 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Icon Menu Wizard.
Toolbar: Miscellaneous Menu: Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard Command entry: AEMENUWIZ NOTE You can lock the icon menu (.dat) file using the Windows File Properties dialog box so unauthorized users cannot modify the .dat file. In the Windows File Properties dialog box, set the file attributes to Read-only. Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (.dat). The displayed nodes are based on the order of arrangement of submenus defined in the .dat file.
■ New submenu: Creates a submenu in the tree structure and the Symbol Preview window. ■ Cut: (available for submenus only) Removes the selected submenu and its contents from the list. You can then paste the submenu into another submenu or a main menu. NOTE The menu number does not change during a Cut and Paste. For example, if you cut menu number 100 and paste it into another submenu page, the pasted menu page is still menu number 100.
■ Cut: Removes the selected icon from the Symbol Preview window. You can then paste the icon into the desired submenu. ■ Copy: Makes a copy of the highlighted icon and stores it in the Paste clipboard. You can then paste the icon into the appropriate submenu. ■ Paste: Adds the copied or cut icon to the highlighted submenu. ■ Delete: Deletes the icon. ■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to modify the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name, image, or block names.
Icon Details Defines the icon name and image. Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file. Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the description text, and the tool tip for the icon. Image file Specifies the image file to use for the new icon. You can enter the image file name (or complete path) or select it using one of the following methods: ■ Browse: Finds an existing image to use for the icon. You can browse for .sld or .png images.
option is selected by default. If you do not want to create the icon from the displayed image of the current drawing, clear the check box. NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an image file name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)}. For example, “S2(pb)” or “S7(control_relay)”. It is also unavailable if the Image File edit box contains the image file path instead of the image file name. Zoom (Available only when Create PNG from current screen image is selected.
An icon can be configured to trigger an AutoCAD command, trigger an AutoCAD Electrical command, or run a script file. The icons that trigger insertion of multi-pole schematic symbol assemblies, one-line symbols, and panel footprints are examples that require encoding of special AutoCAD Electrical commands. The icon name and command string are saved in the active *.dat file (such as ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT) once you click OK on the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box.
Image file Specifies the image file to use for the new icon. You can enter the image file name (or complete path) or select it using one of the following methods: ■ Browse: Finds an existing image to use for the icon. You can browse for .sld or .png images. ■ Pick: Selects an existing block name on the current drawing to use as the image file name. For example, if you select block HPB11, the image file name edit box displays “HPB11.
the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)} for the image file, the path of the .dat file or the WD_SLB folder displays here. Command to Execute NOTE If you select an AutoCAD Electrical command, manually enter the additional parameters as indicated. Command Specifies to start an AutoCAD command or AutoCAD Electrical routine. You can enter the command name to execute with arguments.
TIP To determine which *.dat file is active, in the Project Properties dialog box, Project Settings tab, Library, and Icon Menu Paths section, expand the Schematic Icon Menu File option. It is the schematic icon menu file listed in the *.wdp file. Icon Details Defines the icon name and image. Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file. Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the description text, and the tool tip for the icon.
NOTE The image file name cannot contain invalid characters such as \ / : " ? < > | and only .png and .sld image files are supported. Create PNG from current screen image Creates the .png image file from the current screen image. If the specified image file does not exist, this option is selected by default. If you do not want to create the icon from the displayed image of the current drawing, clear the check box.
The icon name and circuit drawing name are saved in the active *.dat file (such as ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT) once you click OK on the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box. The icon then displays at the end of the existing icon images in the Symbol Preview window of the Insert Component dialog box. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Icon Menu Wizard. Toolbar: Miscellaneous Menu: Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard Command entry: AEMENUWIZ Select the menu file to modify and click OK.
■ Active: (It is unavailable if the drawing is a new drawing and was not saved) Selects the active drawing name to use as the Image file. For example, if the active drawing name is “demo005,” then the image file edit box has “demo005” listed as the file name. If the circuit drawing file name contains the path of the drawing file referring to the User folder or the wd_userckt_dir defined folder, the browsed image is copied to the User folder if wd_userckt_dir is disabled in the .
Circuit Name to Insert Defines the circuit to insert when you click the icon. Specifies the file name for the circuit. Enter a drawing file name to use, click Browse to select a drawing, or click Active to use the active drawing name as the circuit name. File Name Create new submenu The icon name and submenu are saved in the active *.dat file (such as ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT) once you click OK on the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box.
Image file Specifies the image file to use for the new icon. You can enter the image file name (or complete path) or select it using one of the following methods: ■ Browse: Finds an existing image to use for the icon. You can browse for .sld or .png images. ■ Pick: Selects an existing block name on the current drawing to use as the image file name. For example, if you select block HPB11, the image file name edit box displays “HPB11.
the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)} for the image file, the path of the .dat file or the WD_SLB folder displays here. Submenu This section displays the menu number of the submenu page and allows you to define the submenu title. Menu Number Displays the menu number of the submenu page for reference. Menu Title Specifies the submenu title that is used in the Insert Component dialog box. It is automatically specified but you can edit the title.
Properties - component Use this tool to modify the existing symbol icon properties such as changing the icon name, image, or block name. Your changes overwrite the information in the .dat file. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Icon Menu Wizard. Toolbar: Miscellaneous Menu: Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard Command entry: AEMENUWIZ Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box right-click on the component icon to modify and select Properties.
■ Active: (This option is unavailable if the drawing is a new drawing and was not saved) Selects the active drawing name to use as the Image file. For example, if the active drawing name is “demo005,” then the image file edit box has “demo005” listed as the file name. The browsed image is copied to the Images folder and saved as a relative path in the .dat file.
the new images are created or the browsed images are copied to. If you entered a file name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)} for the image file, the path of the .dat file or the WD_SLB folder displays here. Block Name to Insert Defines the symbol block that is inserted when you click the icon in the Insert Component dialog box. Specifies the symbol block name.
TIP To determine which *.dat file is active, in the Project Properties dialog box, Project Settings tab, Library, and Icon Menu Paths section, expand the Schematic Icon Menu File option. It is the schematic icon menu file listed in the *.wdp file. Icon Details Defines the icon name and image. Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file. Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the description text, and the tool tip for the icon.
the icon from the displayed image of the current drawing, clear the check box. NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an image file name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)}” For example, “S2(pb)” or “S7(control_relay)”. It is also unavailable if the Image File edit box contains the image file path instead of the image file name. Zoom (Available only when Create PNG from current screen image is selected) Zooms in on the current screen image using AutoCAD Zoom command.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Icon Menu Wizard. Toolbar: Miscellaneous Menu: Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard Command entry: AEMENUWIZ Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box right-click on the circuit icon to modify and select Properties. TIP To determine which *.dat file is active, in the Project Properties dialog box, Project Settings tab, Library, and Icon Menu Paths section, expand the Schematic Icon Menu File option.
If the circuit drawing file name contains the path of the drawing file referring to the User folder or the wd_userckt_dir defined folder, the browsed image is copied to the User folder if wd_userckt_dir is disabled in the .env file or the wd_userckt_dir defined folder if wd_userckt_dir is enabled in the .env file. If the file does not exist, the Create Circuit alert dialog box displays asking you if you want to create the circuit.
Location (This option appears once the Image file is specified) Indicates the full path of the image file location where the new images are created or the browsed images are copied to. If you entered a file name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)} for the image file, the path of the .dat file or the WD_SLB folder displays here. Circuit Name to Insert Defines the circuit file name that is created.
Icon Details Defines the icon name and image. Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file. Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the description text, and the tool tip for the icon. Image file Specifies the image file to use for the new icon. You can enter the image file name (or complete path) or select it using one of the following methods: ■ Browse: Finds an existing image to use for the icon. You can browse for .sld or .png images.
NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an image file name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)}” For example, “S2(pb)” or “S7(control_relay)”. It is also unavailable if the Image File edit box contains the image file path instead of the image file name. Zoom (Available only when Create PNG from current screen image is selected) Zooms in on the current screen image using AutoCAD Pan command.
■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCADElectrica {version}l\{release}\{country code}\Support\ You can create alternate or project-specific icon menus and have AutoCAD Electrical automatically use them instead of these defaults. An icon menu can be tied to a project so that when the project is active, AutoCAD Electrical references that special icon menu instead of the AutoCAD Electrical normal menu.
is defined by the contents of file ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT file and the panel menu is ACE_PANEL_MENU.DAT. These menu files are found in: ■ Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\ ■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: \Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\ The other icon menu files include: ACE_AS_MENU, ACE_GB_MENU, ACE_JIS_MENU, ACE_IEC_MENU, ACE_HYD_MENU, ACE
Page structure of the icon menu Each menu page starts with a menu number line preceded by two asterisks (**). The next line is an AutoCAD Electrical code, which defines the menu page format (such as how many rows, how many icon buttons per row). It is used for .dat files that are used before AutoCAD Electrical 2008. The next line is the title, with optional column labels, for the menu page. The rest of the lines define the information for each icon button on the menu page.
used to structure .dat files in older versions of AutoCAD Electrical. JIC: Push Buttons Submenu page title. This displays below the main menu (JIC Symbols) in the Menu tree structure view of the Insert Component dialog box. Add submenu pages Enter the definition for any new submenu pages at the bottom of the .dat file. A new Special Symbols submenu page added using the Icon Menu Wizard adds the following lines of text: **M101 SPECIALSYMBOLS Explanation: **M101 Menu page number.
the Symbol Preview window. The second part is the slide (or .png) name. Include the path to the .SLD. If the slide is contained within a slide library (or resource dll library) the format here is library_name (slide_name). The third part is the actual icon function. The function can be a symbol name to insert, a submenu trigger, or a command. A line that looks like this can be added by the menu wizard to insert a special switch: Special Switch | hzs11.
BOM and Catalogs 17 Catalog database Sample catalog information is furnished with the default AutoCAD Electrical installation. The information is held in tables in a Microsoft Access database file (.mdb) which are populated with sample vendor data. Expand and modify these tables to meet your specific BOM reporting needs. Use tools provided with AutoCAD Electrical, or use a database program that can read/write the Access file format. The .mdb file is a single file that is named _cat.
catalog tables for the same component family. Alternately, all master test and all neon pilot lights (of all colors) can be combined into a single catalog table named LT. AutoCAD Electrical determines the default catalog lookup table name based on the WDBLKNAM attribute. The following example references a custom master control relay with block name “HCR1_MC_PWR.” If your symbol does not carry the WDBLKNAM attribute: 1 The symbol is checked for the WDBLKNAM attribute (or Xdata). It is not found.
characters from the attribute value, looking for a table name match with each character removed. This process continues until only seven characters remain. In this case, characters are not removed. 4 If there is not a match on the last table name, AutoCAD Electrical checks for a family-specific table (CR). It is the second and third character of the original WDBLKNAM value (HCRM). 5 If this table exists, it is used.
Family Code/Table Name Description list on the Select Symbol / Objects on page 342 dialog box. See Create a Symbol Builder attribute template on page 2105. _LISTBOX_DEF Allows starting MFG/TYPE/RATING combinations to be predefined for each catalog lookup table, when AutoCAD Electrical would normally default to the values given in the first record of the selected catalog lookup table. See Overview of the LISTBOX_DEF catalog database table on page 1277. _PINLIST Default pin list data table.
Family Code/Table Name Description CR Control relays DI Din Rail DN Device networks DO Diodes DR Drives DS Disconnect switches EN Enclosures/hardware FM Frequency meters FS Flow sensors FT Foot switches FU Fuses LR Latching relays LS Limit switches LT Lights, pilot lights MISC Miscellaneous MO Motors MS Motor starters/contactors NP Nameplates OL Overloads PB Push buttons PE Photo switches Catalog database | 1269
Family Code/Table Name Description PLCIO Programmable logic controllers PM Power meters PNEU-ACT Actuators PNEU-ALU Lubricators PNEU-CYL Cylinders PNEU-FLC Flow Control PNEU-FLT Filters PNEU-MET Pressure Gauges PNEU-MFL Silencers PNEU-MNF Manifolds PNEU-MOT Motors PNEU-NOZ Nozzles PNEU-OPR Push buttons PNEU-PMP Pumps PNEU-TNK Reservoirs PNEU-VAC Suction PNEU-VLV Valves PS Pressure switches PW Power supplies PX Proximity switches RE Resistors 1270 | Chapter 17 BOM
Family Code/Table Name Description SS Selector switches SU Surge suppressors SW Toggle switches TD Timer relays TRMS Terminal blocks TS Temperature switches VM Volt meters WO Cables, multi-conductor cables WW Wire ways XF Transformers Move the catalog database file In Project Manager, right-click the project name and select Settings to find the location of the default_cat.mdb file.
Define a secondary catalog lookup file for a project You can use two catalog database files when working with an AutoCAD Electrical project: the first file can contain the catalog information that you commonly use, and the second file can contain the full list of catalog content available with AutoCAD Electrical. 1 Copy the default_cat.mdb file and save it with a different name (such as full_catalog.mdb). 2 Modify the original default_cat.
How to install additional manufacturer content During installation, you specified which manufacturer content to install. You can install additional manufacturer content later. 1 Close all instances of AutoCAD Electrical. 2 From the Windows Control Panel select Add or Remove Programs. 3 From the Add or Remove Programs dialog box, select the latest version of AutoCAD Electrical and click the Change/Remove button. 4 On the AutoCAD Electrical Installation Wizard, click Add or Remove Features.
Overview of the catalog database table structure AutoCAD Electrical uses the first 16 fields for its own which includes three user fields for your use. You can insert additional fields beyond the 16th one, but they are ignored when generating reports. Here are the 16 fields accessed by AutoCAD Electrical. (They must remain in this order in the database records.) Field Name Width Description CATALOG 60 Catalog number. MANUFACTURER 24 Manufacturer code; abbreviations are allowed.
Field Name Width Description TEXTVALUES 255 Optional user-defined RATING/miscellaneous attribute values. WEBLINK 255 Associate .pdf files or Web URL to component. WDBLKNAM 60 AutoCAD Electrical block name minus the first character of the block name since the first character is the orientation of block (H= Horizontal, V= Vertical). TEXTVALUES rating and miscellaneous attribute value assignment An optional 14th field named TEXTVALUES can be added to any catalog lookup table.
4 On the Edit Record dialog box, type a value into the TEXTVALUES edit box and click OK. If the TEXTVALUES field did not exist in the selected catalog table, it is added to each record in the database. If it did exist, your new value is saved in the TEXTVALUES field for the selected record of the catalog number. WEBLINK assignment Sometimes, you want to see more information about your component than can be held in the catalog database.
name “HTD1_xxx” and the Filter by WDBLKNAM value option is selected, the only records that display are listed in the TD table of the catalog database file that have a blank WDBLKNAM value or a value in the WDBLKNAM field that matches the block name of the symbol. For example, a catalog lookup on an on-delay coil (HTD1N.dwg or VTD1N.dwg) displays all blank WDBLKNAM entries and all entries that include “TD1N” somewhere in the WDBLKNAM field.
1 When the Parts Catalog dialog box displays, the program checks to see if the component already has a catalog defined. 2 If no catalog is defined, the program checks the _LISTBOX_DEF table for a record with a TABLENAME value that matches the table name on page 1265 for the component. 3 If a TABLENAME match is found, the program filters the records displayed in the Parts Catalog dialog box using the non-blank values from the _LISTBOX_DEF record.
to make it easier when assigning a catalog to a terminal accessory or terminal jumper. ■ TRMS(H) - defines the filters when adding terminal accessories from Terminal Strip Editor. For example: TABLENAME=TRMS(H), MANUFACTURER = AB, TYPE = HARDWARE ■ TRMS(J) - defines the filters when adding terminal jumpers from Terminal Strip Editor or the Edit Jumper command. For example: TABLENAME=TRMS(H), MANUFACTURER = AB, TYPE = HARDWARE, RATING = JUMPER.
4 Select whether to save the catalog file to the project folder with the file name {project name}_cat.mdb. Yes - the file becomes the new project catalog lookup file. No - the project does not reference the file. Define the database file name and folder. 5 Click OK. The specified catalog database file is copied to the new name. Entries that are not used in the project are removed from the new file. All reference tables with names that begin with an underscore (_) are copied intact to the new file.
No - enables the new project-specific file edit box and browse button. Enter or browse to the file name and folder. The file name is predefined as {project name}_cat.mdb but stored in the user folder defined in the WD_USER entry of the wd.env file. Displays the file path for the project specific-catalog file.
Use a project-specific catalog file You can set up a project catalog file with all the component types of the project in it. The file must reside in the subdirectory of the project. Name the file either default_cat.mdb or_cat.mdb. AutoCAD Electrical references this file first before looking in the user subdirectory or the catalogs subdirectory (as defined in wd.env). Use a miscellaneous catalog file You can set up a general catalog table within the .mdb file with all component types in it.
dialog box, Catalog Data section, click Project. In the Find: Catalog Assignments dialog box, select External file, and click OK. Pull from your own external database application AutoCAD Electrical provides a means to bypass its internal catalog part number look-up and temporarily pass control to your custom catalog part number selection application. In the Insert/Edit dialog box, Catalog Data section, click Lookup.
■ Click the drop-down arrow on the column heading and select a sort option from the menu. 4 To filter the catalog records, click the drop-down arrow on the column heading. A list of unique values for the selected field displays. Select the fields to show or hide from the list. NOTE If there are over 450 unique values to display, the list is not available. 5 Search the entire catalog database for a catalog value. ■ Enter a catalog value in the search box.
NOTE Changing the display does not affect the catalog database, only the way the catalog records are viewed. 9 In the Parts catalog dialog box, select the vendor and catalog part number to use. The invisible MANUFACTURER, CATALOG, and ASSEMBLYCODE attributes of the block are populated with the key values pulled from the selected record in the target table. Various description and miscellaneous field values from the picked record are not saved on the attributes of the block.
Edit Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit. Click Catalog Data: Lookup. View Web Link Displays more information about the component, such as pictures, specifications, or a Web URL. Use the 15th field in the catalog database to set up the link.
NOTE Also available on the right-click context menu. Clear All Filters Clears all selected filters or entered search values. This option does not clear the Filter by WDBLKNAM value option. NOTE Also available on the right-click context menu. Add Catalog Entry Adds a catalog item to the catalog database file with values you enter on the Add Catalog Record on page 1295 dialog box. If you select an existing catalog entry, the fields populate with values from that entry.
Searches the catalog database for data with fields that match the entered text. NOTE The field search assumes an ending “*” wildcard allowing it to display matching values as you enter the search value. ■ Sorts the catalog database information. ■ Filters the catalog database by values you select in the drop-down list. NOTE If there are over 450 unique values to display, the drop-down list is not available. Displays the catalog entries that match the current settings.
If found, this catalog information displays in the dialog box for component catalog number selection. If the table does not exist, it is created automatically. Use the Add Catalog Entry button to add records. Opens the Edit Catalog Conductor List dialog box. Edit the cable conductor database table (_W0_CBLWIRES) for the selected Manufacturer and Catalog combination. Conductor List You can delete or change existing cables or add new ones to the list. Available for cable markers only.
Size Column to Fit Adjusts the size of the column under the cursor to fit the text values within that column. Size All Columns to Fit Adjusts the size of all columns to fit the text values within each column. Reset Column sequence Resets the column sequence to match the column order in the catalog database. Column name listing Shows a listing of column names and current visibility. A check mark indicates the column is included in the display. Select which columns to display and which to hide.
Catalog Database Search - Wildcards Character Definition # (pound) Matches any numeric digit @ (at) Matches any alphabetic character.
Edit Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit. Click Catalog Data: Lookup. Enter a search value and select the search icon. Displays a list of the tables , and the number of records in the table, containing the catalog value. Select a table to display the records within that table that match the search value.
OK Assigns the selected catalog value to the component on the Parts Catalog dialog box. Catalog values Lists the catalog part number information for any or all components (or footprints) that have the same family block name (WDBLKNAM value) as the component being edited. Catalog Check Displays its bill of materials description. OK Copies the highlighted catalog information to the component being edited. Component catalog lookup This tool creates a component-specific or general family catalog table.
Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Icon Menu) Command entry: AEFOOTPRINT On the Insert/Edit dialog box, click Catalog Lookup. If there is no catalog table for the footprint, an alert displays. Click OK. Option A Creates a catalog table now. Component Creates a component-specific catalog table. The name of this catalog table matches the block name for the component (minus the "H" or "V" first letter). For example, both horizontal and vertical versions of a standard, N.O.
1 Force AutoCAD Electrical to reference the appropriate catalog table. Insert a new component related to the catalog table you want to edit, or pick an existing component of that type to edit with the Edit Component tool. For example, suppose you want to add some new components to the catalog table for standard red pilot lights (LT1R). Use AutoCAD Electrical to insert a new red pilot light symbol, or edit a red pilot light symbol. 2 From the Insert/Edit dialog box, select Catalog lookup.
Insert Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. Click Catalog Data: Lookup. In the Parts Catalog dialog box, click Add Catalog Entry or Edit Catalog Entry. Edit Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit.
Description Specifies the optional description text for the catalog part. Type Specifies the type for the catalog part. Coil/Voltage/Color The type of value can vary based on the type of component. This value populates the fifth field in the catalog record. Miscellaneous/Contacts Specifies the contacts or the first miscellaneous field assigned to the part. The type of value can vary based on the type of component. This value populates the sixth field in the catalog record.
ated with that file extension (for example, "Open With...") displays the file. NOTE For ".pdf" display, you can include the page number to display upon document open. Add a space and the page number after the .pdf file name in the WEBLINK field value (for example, c:\\rockwell\\700series.pdf 13). Specifies the schematic block name (used for catalog lookup - that is, PB11, CR) of the catalog record. It serves as a filtration of the catalog records based on the schematic block name.
NOTE This dialog is also accessed when a new table on page 1294 is added to the catalog database from the Parts Catalog dialog box. MDB file to modify Specifies the file name of the Catalog Database file to modify. Existing tables Lists the existing tables found in the file. Table Name Specifies the name of new table to add to the selected catalog database. The new, blank table inserts with the default fields defined (for example, the fields needed for the catalog lookup function).
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Copy Catalog assignment. 2 Select the master component from which to copy the catalog data. 3 Select the part number information by clicking Catalog Lookup, Find: Drawing Only, Multiple Catalog, or Catalog Check. ■ Catalog Lookup: Select the catalog table information in the Parts Catalog dialog box for the selected component type and click OK.
This tool allows you to insert or edit extra catalog part numbers on to the currently selected component or footprint. You can add up to 99 additional part numbers to any schematic or panel component on-the-fly. These multiple BOM part numbers appear as subassembly part numbers to the main catalog part number in the various BOM and component reports. On the Insert/Edit Component or Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box, Catalog Data section, click Multiple Catalog.
be there for these catalog entries. Select List to pick from a list of tables that are contained in your catalog database file or Misc to use the MISC_CAT table. Catalog Lookup Checks for and displays catalog table information in the Parts Catalog dialog box for the selected component type. Catalog Check Quickly performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result. Item Number Assign an item number to the catalog number. fixed If checked, marks an item number as fixed.
NOTE If the Item Numbering Mode on page 211 is Reset with Each Drawing, this button is disabled. Project: List Lists the item numbers along with each manufacturer, catalog, assembly code combinations in use on the drawings in the active project. NOTE If the Item Numbering Mode on page 211 is Reset with Each Drawing, this button is disabled. If the Item Assignments on page 211 project setting is set Per-Component Basis, this section is disabled.
around the insertion point of the symbol in temporary graphics. A REDRAW restores the screen to its original state. Extracts the information from the active drawing or project and displays a list of parent or stand-alone components without catalog information. Report TIP Extracted BOM data can be output to a spreadsheet file, mdb database file, text report file, or comma-delimited for export to a spreadsheet or database program. It can also be inserted, in tabular form, on the current AutoCAD drawing.
insert one of these devices and perform a Catalog lookup and part number selection, AutoCAD Electrical quickly looks for a MFG/CAT match in the pin list database. On a match AutoCAD Electrical pulls out the coil pin numbers of the device and automatically inserts them on to the newly inserted device.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Database Editors drop-down ➤ Pin List Database Editor. 2 In the Select Pin List Table dialog box, select the table to edit and click Edit. NOTE You can also create a table by entering the manufacturer name in the edit box and clicking Create. 3 In the Edit dialog box: ■ To edit a record, click Sort, Filter, or Find to search for the record to edit. Select the record from the list and click Edit.
Select the table to edit or enter a name for a new one. Table Displays the proper table name in the catalog database. This text changes depending on which manufacturer is selected. For example, if you select SQD, then _PINLIST_SQD appears. Create Creates a table in the catalog database with the specified name and adds the table to the list of manufacturers. Once a table is created, the Edit (Table: _PINLIST_manufacturer) dialog box appears so you can edit the new table.
Specify the table to create and click Create or select the table to edit and click Edit. This lookup database table is a table within the catalog lookup Access .mdb file. The default file name is default_cat.mdb, table _PINLIST, and comes populated with a sample of vendor data. You can expand this table as needed. Use your own copy of Microsoft Access or this dialog box to add new entries, add entries based on existing entries, edit, and delete entries from the table.
ASSEMBLYCODE AutoCAD Electrical internal assembly code (must be consistent with the catalog lookup files) COILPINS Terminal pin numbers for coils (separate multiple pins with commas) PINLIST Contact type and pin numbers PEER_COILPINS Terminal pin numbers for peer coil PEER_PINLIST Contact type and pin numbers Edit record Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Database Editors drop-down ➤ Pin List Database Editor.
this list to the TERMxx attributes it finds on the parent symbol. If the parent itself can be either a N.O. or N.C. contact, encode the COILPINS field like the PINLIST field. For example, a value of "1,A1,A2;2,B1,B2" for a target mfg/cat record in the _PINLIST table applies pins "A1/A2" to the parent device pins if the device is a generic N.O., and "B1/B2" if it is a generic N.C. device. Repeat these values in the PINLIST field so that AutoCAD Electrical can correctly track all contacts.
flags "Form-C", "8" is the common pin, "5" is the NO pin, and "6" is the NC pin. PEER_COILPINS, PEER_PINLIST There can be two additional "PEER_" fields in the _PINLIST table for defining special cases where a single part number calls out two parent devices. For example, a reversing motor starter part number can include two parent contactor coils, one for forward and one for reverse. Each parent coil symbol must have its own pin list assignment.
4A,1L,2L;4A,1R,2R;4C,L1,T1;4C,L2,T2;4C,L3,T3 When either symbol is inserted and associated with the parent, AutoCAD Electrical sees the PINLIST_TYPE value of the symbol. The contact combinations that do not apply to the inserted component type are filtered out. When you insert a N.O. auxiliary motor starter contact (preset with PINLIST_TYPE attribute value of 4A), you trigger AutoCAD Electrical to pick the next available 4A pin list combination of 1L/2L or 1R/2R. When you insert a N.O.
You can set up your type “0” pin list assignment to handle different pin assignments depending on the physical orientation of the contact in the relay body by encoding the symbol PINLIST of the relay coil like: 0,1A,1B,1C,1D;0,2A,2B,2C,2D;0,3A,3B,3C,3D;0,4A,4B,4C,4D Each type “0” contact (convertible contact flag) is followed by four pin assignments instead of the normal two. The first two assignments default to the contact when it is inserted as a N.O. contact. If the contact is flipped to N.C.
1314
Reports 18 Generate reports There is a lot of flexibility with AutoCAD Electrical reports, which can be run manually or automatically. AutoCAD Electrical extracts multiple fields into each report type. Different reports contain different fields of information. When running a report, you can select which fields to include and which fields to ignore. You can also add your own fields by creating a user-defined attribute support file (.wda) using the User Defined Attributes List tool.
rather than Portrait mode by modifying the template and saving it. Run a report and save to an Excel file. When the Excel file is opened, it displays in Landscape mode. NOTE If you are using the Export Drawing to Spreadsheet tool, modify the "wd_xls_all_template.txt" template. TIP Changing some of the setup on template files (such as changing the text in the first row or the sheet names) can cause the export to fail.
contains multiple lines of text, such as a Bill of Materials description, each line of text is considered a row. A table will not be broken in the middle of a multi-line entry but the entire entry is moved to the next section. You can also break a report into sections based on some report fields. This must be selected in the Report Generator dialog box. Different reports may have different Special Breaks available.
AutoLisp-supported wildcard characters: Character Definition # (pound) Matches any single numeric digit. @ (at) Matches any single alphabetic character. . (period) Matches any single non-alphanumeric character. * (asterisk) Matches any character sequence, including an empty one and it can be used anywhere in the search pattern: beginning, middle, or end. ? (question mark) Matches any single character. ~ (tilde) If it is the first character in the pattern, it matches anything except the pattern.
Table The available options depend on whether a matching table exists when you click the Put on Drawing button. If there isn't a matching table on the drawing, the Insert New and Insert New (non-updatable) options are available. If a matching table exists on the drawing, the Insert New (non-updatable) and Update Existing options are available. Insert New Inserts a new updatable table. If there is an existing table, new (non-updatable) tables are inserted.
Title Defines the table title attributes. Include time/date Shows the report's time and date above the table. Include project info Shows the project description lines above the table. You select which lines will display in the project description dialog box. Include title line Shows the report's title above the table. When the checkbox is active, you may modify the default report title. Include special break values Specifies to include special break values for the title line of each section.
First New Section Placement Specifies where to place the table in the drawing. You can enter x and y values or pick a point on the screen. The table appears at the specified coordinates once you click the OK button. Row Definition Specifies the number of table rows, the start and end lines, the number of rows for each section, and whether to build the table from the bottom up. Start Line/End The starting and ending lines reflect the total number of rows displayed in the Report Generator dialog box.
Specifies the Y-distance from the end of one table section to the beginning of the next. The sections are on the same drawing. Y-Distance Optional script file reference This provides the option to save the report file to a script file. You can set up this script file to automatically know the file name of the report you just created. For AutoCAD 2000 and later, the report's file name can be retrieved using the AutoLISP expression (v1-bb-ref 'FNAM).
New Lines Indicates to add new lines above or below the selected line, or as a sub-assembly of the selected line. ■ Add from Catalog: Opens a subdialog box for selecting which catalog lookup table to open. From this catalog table, you can select a part to add to the report. ■ Add New: Creates a new report line entry. Enter the values in the input boxes and click OK. ■ Add Copy: Creates a copy of the selected line entry. Modify the values in the input boxes and click OK.
Displays the results of the report generation. The dialog box options that are available depend on which report you are creating. Schematic Reports Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports Command entry: AESCHEMATICREPORT Specify whether to process the project, the active drawing, or selected components, and click OK Panel Reports Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Panel panel ➤ Reports.
Breaks Controls how the report breaks across multiple pages. Only one check box can be selected at a time. Specify whether to add page breaks or special breaks to the report. Add page breaks Breaks the report at the 58th line. Special breaks Specifies the value that controls the section break. You can break the report into sections based on the special break selected from the list. The list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special break.
Left Side / Right Side Displays the wiring information from the left or right side of the pin symbols. This displays what is connected to the pin and the wiring information. Fill In Missing Pin Numbers Identifies additional pin numbering not defined in the schematic for spare pin connections. For example, the connector may have used four out of nine pins in the schematic and those are the connections that are being reported.
characteristics. Then when reporting you can select Plug or Jack to filter the overall report (or you can choose to show all). Sort Sorts the report. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list. User Post Sets up options for running a post-process report before saving the report to a file or inserting as a table onto your drawing. AutoCAD Electrical supports calling a LISP file that can be customized to meet any post-processing needs for a report.
Schematic Report User post file name for .lsp and .dcl PLC I/O Component Connection PLCCON PLC Modules Used So Far PLC_USED Terminal Numbers TERM Terminal Plan TERMPLAN Connector Summary QPINRPT Connector Detail PINRPT Cable Summary CBL Cable From/To CBLCON Wire Label WIRELABEL Panel Report User post file name for .lsp and .
Panel Report User post file name for .lsp and .dcl Missing Level/Sequence Assignments LEVBLNK Display Setup (for Wire Label report only) Sets up options for label quantity, horizontal or vertical arrangement of data, display selection of wire labels and cable labels, and total number of columns for displaying the report. Display Wire Label Displays the wire label for all wires in the specified format. Display Cable Label Displays the cable labels in the specified format.
Put on Drawing (Not applicable for Wire Label reports) Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing. NOTE Tables should be placed on drawings that are part of the active project only. Once wire label reports are placed on the drawing in table format they are not editable using the Edit Component tool. You must use the AutoCAD table edit command to edit the table. Save to File Saves the report to a file.
Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report. Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list. Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list. Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the column label (default is Top Left).
SP/CNT Count of spare or unused wires DESC1-2 Description attribute values 1-2 HDL Entity handle number SH Sheet - the %S value LEN Length (calculated wire length) INST1 "From" device's installation code (must end with "1") LOC1 "From" device's location code (must end with "1") CMP1 "From" device's component tag ID (must end with "1") PIN1 "From" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "1") INST2 "To" device's installation code (must end with "2") LOC2 "To" device's loca
Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager, right-click the project name and select Drawing List Report. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list. Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.
SEC Drawing SEC assignment SUBSEC Drawing SUBSEC assignment DWGDESC Drawing one-line description text FULLFILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg) with complete path Cable insert/edit data fields to display Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Cable Markers drop-down ➤ Multiple Cable Markers. Toolbar: Cable Markers Menu: Wires ➤ Cables ➤ Multiple Cable Markers Command entry: AEMULTICABLE Run the report.
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select "Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display, printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ignored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report justification is top right.
CBLMFG Cable manufacturer attribute value CBLCAT Cable catalog part number CBLASMB Cable ASSYCODE assignment DESC1CBL - DESC3CBL Cable description attribute values 1 - 3 CBLP1C2 Cable parent or child (parent = 1, child = 2) CMP:PIN1 "From" device's component tag and component terminal pin number CMP:PIN2 "To" device's component tag and component terminal pin number SEC1 "From" device's drawing section assignment (must end with "1") SUB1 "From" device's drawing sub-section assignment (must e
PNLWDLEV2 "To" device's panel equivalent level (WDLEV) value (must end with "2") CMPHDL1 "From" device's entity handle value (must end with "1") CMPHDL2 "To" device's entity handle value (must end with "2") DWGIX1 "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database (must end with "1") DWGIX2 "To" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database (must end with "2") DWGNAM1 "From" device's drawing %D value (must end with "1
PNLZ1 "From" wire connection's physical Z-coordinate value (must end with "1") PNLXDIR1 Panel wire "From" connection point's direction - i.e.
Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list. Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list. Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the column label (default is Top Left).
QUERY2 2nd query field (middle pulldown on Catalog Lookup dialog box) QUERY3 3rd query field (right-hand pulldown on Catalog Lookup dialog box) MISC1-2 Catalog lookup data field USER1-3 User field in catalog lookup database TABNAM Catalog Database (vendor database) table name TAGS Component tag names HDL Entity handle number DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database Panel component exception data fields to report Changes what data field
Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list. Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the Put on Drawing report feature.
FULLFILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg) with complete path FILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg) Panel component data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Panel panel ➤ Reports. Toolbar: Panel Layout Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports Command entry: AEPANELREPORT Select Component from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report justification is top right. Available Fields ITEM Item number assignment TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1") CNT Count UNITS Units of measurement (i.e. AMPS, VOLTS, mA) SUBQTY Sub-quantity MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e.
USER1-3 User field in catalog lookup database P1C2 parent = 1, child = 2 WDBLKNAM Related to the name of the component's catalog lookup table BLOCK Block name HDL Entity handle number CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable marker) ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get part number groups SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value SEC Drawing section assignment SUBSEC Drawing sub-section assignment
Toolbar: Panel Layout Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports Command entry: AEPANELREPORT Select Missing Level/Sequence Assignments from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list. Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.
MOUNT Mount attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for user-defined "panel mounting" assignment GROUP GROUPWITH attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for userdefined "group with" assignment HDL Entity handle number CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable marker) DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3 SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value FILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.
Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list. Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list. Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the column label (default is Top Left).
END2 Component and connection information on one end of wire (must end with "2") BLKNAME WDBLKNAM attribute value used for the linking of symbols to tables in the Default CAT database DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database HDL Entity handle number CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable marker, FP = Panel Footprint, FPT = terminal footprint) PDESC Wire connection point description attribute value SFX
Select Nameplate from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list. Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report. Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list.
MOUNT Mount attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for user-defined "panel mounting" assignment GROUP GROUPWITH attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for userdefined "group with" assignment INST Installation attribute value SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value ITEM Item number assignment RATING1-12 Rating 1 - 12 attribute values POS1-12 Switch position description text (1 - 12) HDL Entity handle number DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value
Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report. Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list. Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list. Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the column label (default is Top Left).
SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value FULLFILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg) with complete path FILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg) Panel wire connection data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Panel panel ➤ Reports. Toolbar: Panel Layout Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports Command entry: AEPANELREPORT Select Wire Connection from the report list.
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select "Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display, printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ignored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report justification is top right.
ITEM Item number assignment on Panel drawings; there is no correlation between schematic and panel item number attributes DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database HDL Entity handle number CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable marker, FP = Panel Footprint, FPT = terminal footprint) PDESC Wire connection point description attribute value SFX Values of R or L; used for terminal block symbols where we ident
Select Bill of Material from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list. Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report. Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list.
N/A Not applicable or not used; if a report does not use a particular field, N/A is used to line up the raw data and make them consistent between all formats for the BOM QTY Quantity SUB Subassembly quantity CATALOG Catalog part number assignment MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e.
Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports Command entry: AESCHEMATICREPORT Select Cable Summary from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list.
MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e.
Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports Command entry: AESCHEMATICREPORT Select Cable From/To from the report list. Run the report. Select the location codes for the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list.
CMP1 "From" device's component tag ID (must end with "1") PIN1 "From" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "1") LOC2 "To" device's location code (must end with "2") CMP2 "To" device's component tag ID (must end with "2") PIN2 "To" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "2") WLAY1 Wire layer "From" device (must end with "1") WLAY2 Wire layer "To" device (must end with "2") REF1 Line or grid reference location for "From" device (must end with "1") REF2 Line
CBLMISC1CAT CBLMISC2CAT Cable BOM miscellaneous fields (pulled from the catalog lookup file for the cable's catalog part number query) CBLUSER1CAT CBLUSER3CAT Cable BOM user fields (pulled from the catalog lookup file for the cable's catalog part number query) DESC1CBL-DESC3CBL Cable description attribute values 1 - 3 CBLP1C2 Cable parent or child (parent = 1, child = 2) CMP:PIN1 "From" device's component tag and component terminal pin number CMP:PIN2 "To" device's component tag and component ter
PNLWDLEV2 "To" device's panel equivalent level (WDLEV) value (must end with "2") CMPHDL1 "From" device's entity handle value (must end with "1") CMPHDL2 "To" device's entity handle value (must end with "2") DWGIX1 "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database (must end with "1") DWGIX2 "To" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database (must end with "2") DWGNAM1 "From" device's drawing properties %D value (must
PNLZ1 "From" wire connection's physical Z-coordinate value (must end with "1") PNLXDIR1 Panel wire "From" connection point's direction - i.e.
Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report. Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list. Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list. Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Separator Specifies the special character to separate the selected fields. Enter a special character to separate the selected fields inside the list box.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports Command entry: AESCHEMATICREPORT Select PLC I/O Component Connection from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list. Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.
PLCDESCA-PLCDESCE PLC I/O description text lines 1 - 5 PLCTERM PLC I/O terminal text value, attribute TERMxx PLCTERMDESC PLC I/O terminal description text value, attribute TERMDESCxx PLCINST PLC I/O module's Installation attribute value PLCLOC PLC I/O module's Location attribute value WLAY Wire layer name PLCMFG PLC I/O module's Manufacturer attribute value PLCCAT PLC I/O module's Catalog part number PLCASSYCODE PLC I/O module's ASSYCODE attribute value PLCTERMCODE PLC I/O terminal attrib
CMPTERM Connected component TERMxx attribute value (the side that connects to the PLC I/O point) CMPTERMDESC Connected component TERMDESCxx attribute value (the side that connects to the PLC I/O point) CMPMFG Connected component Manufacturer attribute value CMPCAT Connected component catalog part number CMPASSYCODE Connected component ASSYCODE attribute value CMPDWGIX Connected component's Drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database CMPHDL Connected component's A
CBLWC Cable wire or cable core color CBLHDL Cable entity's handle value Component wire list data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports Command entry: AESCHEMATICREPORT Select Component Wire List from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report justification is top right.
INST Installation attribute value DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3 MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e.
Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list. Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list. Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the column label (default is Top Left).
SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value HDL Entity handle number; used internally for programming or customization RATING1-12 Rating 1 - 12 attribute values DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database; used internally for programming or customization Connector plug data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports.
Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select "Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display, printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ignored).
TERMDESC Component wire connection TERMDESCxx value INST Installation attribute value DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3 MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (for example, Siemens) CATALOG Catalog part number assignment ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get part number groups RATING1-12 Rating 1 - 12 attribute values XTERMHDL Wire connection X?TERMxx attribute's entity handle name DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of p
Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list. Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list. Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the column label (default is Top Left).
"From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database DWGIX Component data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports Command entry: AESCHEMATICREPORT Select Component from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
put the report on the drawing, the report justification is top right. Available Fields ITEM Item number assignment TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1") CNT Count on panel component UNITS Units of measurement (i.e.
BLOCK Block name HDL Entity handle number CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable marker) ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get part number groups SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value SEC Drawing SEC assignment SUBSEC Drawing SUBSEC assignment FAMILY Component family WDTAGALT Tag-ID of device on alternate drawing type WDTYPE Alternate type of symbol (for example, "PN" for pneumatic, "HY" for
Select Missing Bill of Material from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list. Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report. Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list.
CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable marker) SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value FILENAME AutoCAD drawing .dwg file name (with full path) Wire from/to data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports.
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select "Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display, printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ignored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report justification is top right.
CBLMFG Cable manufacturer attribute value CBLCAT Cable catalog part number CBLASMB Cable ASSYCODE assignment DESC1CBL-DESC3CBL Cable description attribute values 1 - 3 CBLP1C2 Cable parent or child (parent = 1, child = 2) CMP:PIN1 "From" device's component tag and component terminal pin number CMP:PIN2 "To" device's component tag and component terminal pin number SEC1 "From" device's drawing section assignment (must end with "1") SUB1 "From" device's drawing sub-section assignment (must end
PNLWDLEV2 "To" device's panel equivalent panel (WDLEV) value (must end with "2") CMPHDL1 "From" device's entity handle value (must end with "1") CMPHDL2 "To" device's entity handle value (must end with "2") DWGIX1 "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database (must end with "1") DWGIX2 "To" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database (must end with "2") DWGNAM1 "From" device's drawing %D value (must end with "1
PNLZ1 "From" wire connection's physical Z-coordinate value (must end with "1") PNLXDIR1 Panel wire "From" connection point's direction - i.e.
Select PLC I/O Address and Descriptions from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list. Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report. Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list.
WIRENO Wire number INST Installation attribute value LOC Location attribute value MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (for example, Siemens) CAT Catalog part number assignment ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get part number groups LINE1 PLC I/O LINE1 attribute description text LINE2 PLC I/O LINE2 attribute description text HDL Entity handle number XTERMHDL Wire connection X?TERMxx attribute's entity handle name TERMCODE Wire connection X?TERMxx attribut
Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports Command entry: AESCHEMATICREPORT Select Terminal Numbers from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list.
WIRENO Wire number INST Installation attribute value LOC Location attribute value REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value BLKNAME Block name MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e.
Select PLC Modules Used So Far from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list. Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report. Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list.
LINE1 PLC I/O LINE1 attribute description text LINE2 PLC I/O LINE2 attribute description text INST Installation attribute value LOC Location attribute value REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value SEC Drawing section assignment SUBSEC Drawing sub-section assignment DESC General description line of text HDL Entity handle number DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of proje
Select Terminal Plan from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list. Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report. Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list.
LAYCMP1 Layer of wire connecting to device component 1 (must end with "1") CBL1 Cable ID tied to device component 1 (must end with "1") CBLWC1 Cable wire color tied to device component 1 (must end with "1") WNUM1 Wire number tied to device component 1 (must end with "1") LAYTRM1 Layer of wire connecting to terminal side 1 (must end with "1") STRIP-ID Terminal strip TAGSTRIP ID name TD1 Terminal pin TERMDESC value for the first wire connection (must end with "1") TERM Terminal or terminal numb
SH Sheet - the %S value REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference HDL Entity handle number XDIR1 "From" device's wire connection point direction - i.e. 4 = connects from left (must end with "1") XDIR2 "To" device's wire connection point direction - i.e.
Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Separator Specifies the special character to separate the selected fields. Enter a special character to separate the selected fields inside the list box. Do this by selecting a field from the Fields to Report list, define the separator, select another field, define a separator, and so on. You can also select the separator from a list. The "\n" symbol stands for the new line.
Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report. Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list. Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list. Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the column label (default is Top Left).
PIN2 "To" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "2") WLAY Wire layer name ROUTING Conduit routing path description Cross-reference table data fields to display Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager, right-click the project or drawing name and select Properties.
Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the Put on Drawing report feature.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Component Cross-Reference drop-down ➤ Cross-Reference Table. Menu: Components ➤ Cross-Reference ➤ Cross-Reference Table Command entry: AESHOWXREFTABLE Select the component to evaluate. Click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list.
TYPE Contact type - can be user defined and come from the Contact attribute on the child symbol - this gets overwritten from the contact mapping in the dialog box T2 Terminal pin number - second wire connection (TERM02) W2 Wire number - second wire connection (TERM02) REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value FILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg) FULLFILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.
Component report This report performs a project-wide extract of all components found on your wiring diagram set. This data includes component tags, location codes, location reference, description text, ratings, catalog information, and block names. Wire From/To report If you marked components and/or terminals with location codes, you can make good use of this report. This report first extracts component, terminal, location code, and wire connection information from every drawing in the project set.
wire connection point and follows the connected wire. The first terminal symbol, fuse symbol, or connector symbol that is hit reports in the column marked with default "TERMTAG" label. The first schematic component reports in the column with the "CMPTAG" label. If there are multiple instances, the one closest to the PLC I/O point is the one that shows up in the report column. PLC Modules Used So Far report For this report, AutoCAD Electrical quickly scans the wiring diagram set.
Cable From/To report This project-wide cable conductor report lists the "from / to" for each cable conductor. It also lists the parent cable number of the conductor, conductor color code, and wire number (if present). Wire Label report This report lists wire markers/labels and can be used to create physical wire or cable labels. Generate a schematic report Generates schematic reports, such as Bills of Material, Component lists, Wire From/To, and PLC descriptions. Select which drawings to process.
8 In the Report Generator Window, sort, format, or edit the data before sending the information to the printer, file, or the active drawing file. ■ Edit Mode: Modifies the report before you insert it to your drawing. You can move data up or down in the report, add lines from a catalog, and delete lines. ■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing. ■ Save to File: Saves the report to a file.
Category By default, the report lists schematic components. Select a different Category to run the report for one-line, one-line bus-tap, hydraulic, pneumatic, P&ID, or user-defined components. These components are each identified by a unique WDTYPE attribute on page 325 value. Include options Include Cables Specifies to include cable information in the report. Include Connectors Specifies to include connector information in the report.
Display in By TAG Format All instances of a given component-ID or terminal tag are processed together and then reported as a single entry. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components without an installation code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports Command entry: AESCHEMATICREPORT Select Cable Summary from the report list. Category By default, the report lists schematic components. Select a different Category to run the report for one-line, one-line bus-tap, hydraulic, pneumatic, P&ID, or user-defined components. These components are each identified by a unique WDTYPE attribute on page 325 value.
Freshen Project Database Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any out-of-date drawing files. Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The subdialog box lists the format files to select from. Schematic cable from/to This project-wide cable conductor report lists the "from / to" for each cable conductor. It also lists the parent cable number of the conductor, conductor color code, and wire number (if present). Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports.
This report scans the selected drawings and returns information about any components connected to PLC I/O points. Data for the report starts at each wire connection point and follows the connected wire. The first terminal symbol, fuse symbol, or connector symbol that is hit reports in the column marked with default "TERMTAG" label. The first schematic component reports in the column with the "CMPTAG" label.
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search. List Lists drawings that appear to be out-of-date with the wire connection table of the project. Freshen Wire Connection Table Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the wire connection table to include any out-of-date drawing files. Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The subdialog box lists the format files to select from.
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named installation search.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports Command entry: AESCHEMATICREPORT Select Connector Details from the report list. Specify whether to process the project or a single pick. Category By default, the report lists schematic components. Select a different Category to run the report for one-line, one-line bus-tap, hydraulic, pneumatic, P&ID, or user-defined components. These components are each identified by a unique WDTYPE attribute on page 325 value.
Freshen Project Database Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any out-of-date drawing files. Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files to select from. Schematic connector plug This report extracts plug/jack connection reports and optionally generates pin charts. Since each wire tied to each connector pin displays in the report, each pin has two entries - one for the 'in' wire and one for the 'out' wire.
After you click Named Installation, type the installation code in the box, or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named installation search. Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports Command entry: AESCHEMATICREPORT Select Connector Summary from the report list. Specify whether to process the project or a single pick. Category By default, the report lists schematic components. Select a different Category to run the report for one-line, one-line bus-tap, hydraulic, pneumatic, P&ID, or user-defined components. These components are each identified by a unique WDTYPE attribute on page 325 value.
Freshen Project Database Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any out-of-date drawing files. Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files to select from. Schematic component This report extracts the component wire connection data and displays it in a dialog box.
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported. After you click Named Installation, type the installation code in the box, or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named installation search.
Select Missing Bill of Material from the report list. Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing. Category By default, the report lists schematic components. Select a different Category to run the report for one-line, one-line bus-tap, hydraulic, pneumatic, P&ID, or user-defined components. These components are each identified by a unique WDTYPE attribute on page 325 value. Options Specifies to include components, cable markers, connectors, or terminals in the report.
Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files to select from. Schematic wire from/to If you marked components and/or terminals with location codes, you can make good use of this report. AutoCAD Electrical first extracts component, terminal, location code, and wire connection information from every drawing in the project set. Then it displays a location list dialog box where you can make your report's "from" and "to" location selections.
Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files to select from. Schematic PLC I/O address and descriptions This report lists each PLC module and its beginning and ending I/O address numbers. It scans your drawing set and returns all individual I/O connection points it finds. It includes up to five lines of description text and the connected wire number for each I/O point. Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports.
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search. Freshen Project Database Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any out-of-date drawing files. Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files to select from. Schematic terminal numbers This project-wide, stand-alone report lists all instances of terminals.
Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components without a location code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported. After you click Named Installation, type the installation code in the box, or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named installation search.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports Command entry: AESCHEMATICREPORT Select PLC Modules Used So Far from the report list. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components without an installation code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
This report lists wire markers/labels and can be used to create physical wire or cable labels. Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports. Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports Command entry: AESCHEMATICREPORT Select Wire Label from the report list. Specify whether to process the project, the active drawing, or selected wires. NOTE If you select Active drawing (pick), click the wire rather than the wire number.
List Lists drawings that appear to be out-of-date with the wire connection table of the project. Freshen Wire Connection Table Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the wire connection table to include any out-of-date drawing files. Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files to select from.
to a text report file, a comma-delimited file to import into a spreadsheet or database program, or insert it on to a drawing in table format. Location codes Displays the “from” (left-hand list) and “to” location codes (right-hand list) found on the drawings. Clicking a location code moves the selected code from these lists to the Report From/To list in the center of the dialog box. Report From/To Displays the combination of location codes you selected from the Location Code lists.
Panel Reports Generate panel reports AutoCAD Electrical has multiple panel reports that you can run. Bill of Material report This report parallels the Schematic BOM report, but deals with panel component and terminal footprint symbols and nameplates. Optionally, it can include schematic items that are not referenced on the panel layouts (for example, field devices).
attributes, AutoCAD Electrical reports their XYZ wire connection location. The location is offset by the value defined in Panel Configuration dialog box. Component Exception report This report provides error checking between the schematics and panel layout drawings. AutoCAD Electrical looks at the selected components, both schematic and panel, looking for a match in the project.
Select which drawings to process. The report displays options to: ■ Change included fields. ■ Add or modify data. ■ Print. ■ Save to a file. ■ Put on the drawings as table objects. 1 Click Reports tab ➤ Panel panel ➤ Reports. 2 Select which panel report to generate from the report list. 3 Select to process the project, active drawing, or selected components. 4 Select installation or location codes to extract (if applicable). 5 Specify to extract any installation or location codes (if applicable).
any column and the column label. The Description field can be multi-lined. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Switch on and off the specific fields to define the Description. 9 Once all modifications have been made to the report, save the report, place the report on the drawing as a table, or print the report.
List terminal numbers Lists each individual Tag-ID and terminal number combination if selected. If unselected (default), the terminals are combined on the same Tag-ID strip into a single entry with a quantity. Include Jumpers Specifies to include jumper information in the report. Full: include schematic components not referenced on panel layout Specifies to include all schematic component information not found on the panel layout in the report.
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named installation search. Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components without a location code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
Select Component Exception from the report list. Specify whether to process the project, active drawing, or a selected component. Conditions for Report Specifies which conditions the report checks for: whether the panel item is on the schematic, whether the schematic item is on a panel, if there are multiple instances of the terminal, and if there is a mismatch between schematic and panel terminals.
This report lists every occurrence of a smart panel component footprint found on the current drawing or in the project drawing set. You can customize the scope of the report by filtering on certain location values (for example, report for CAB1 items only), process only a subset of drawings, or include/exclude certain categories of items. Note: this report will not include panel terminals unless you check that option. Each extracted panel component is listed as its own line item.
Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components without a location code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for components marked "OP STA 2". Wild-cards are supported.
Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components without an installation code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation codes.
Toolbar: Panel Layout Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports Command entry: AEPANELREPORT Select Wire Annotation Exception from the report list. Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Panel panel ➤ Reports. Toolbar: Panel Layout Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports Command entry: AEPANELREPORT Select Nameplate from the report list. Specify whether to process the project, active drawing, or a selected component. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files to select from. Panel terminal exception This report provides error checking between the schematic terminals and panel layout terminals. AutoCAD Electrical looks at the selected terminals, both schematic and panel, looking for a match in the project. For each schematic terminal selected, it tries to find a matching panel terminal. If a match is found, it compares catalog information, looking for any discrepancies.
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named installation search. Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components without a location code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
Specify whether to process the project, active drawing, or a selected component. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components without an installation code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
to be able to insert multiple updatable tables for the same report with the same scope you need to use different format files for each report. If you are not inserting updatable tables, or the report or scope is different, then you do not need to use different format files. A format file defines which fields to include from the available fields, the field order, justification, and column label. This information from the format file is used for both manual and automatic reports.
1 Click Reports tab ➤ Miscellaneous panel ➤ Report Format Setup. NOTE You can also open this dialog box by clicking Format File Setup on the Automatic Report Selection on page 1497 dialog box. 2 Select which report to generate a format file for or open an existing format file. 3 Specify any report options (if applicable). 4 Select installation or location codes to extract (if applicable). 5 (Optional) Select to add special break values to the page header.
8 Click Done. Report format file setup - panel bill of material Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Miscellaneous panel ➤ Report Format Setup. Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup Command entry: AEFORMATFILE Select Bill of Material from the Panel report Include options Specifies whether to include nameplates, cable/connectors, or both in the report. You can also indicate whether to include schematic components not referenced on the panel layout.
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a list of used installation codes. Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Breaks ■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special break. ■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the page header. For example, if you select a special break of Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the panel are displayed in the report section header.
Conditions for Report Specifies which conditions the report checks for: the panel item is not on the schematic, the schematic item is not on a panel, multiple instances of the component, and if there is a mismatch between schematic components and panel components. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing. ■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report. NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the subdialog boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.
Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup Command entry: AEFORMATFILE Select Component from the Panel report list. Options Specifies to include nameplates, cables, connectors, terminals, or all of them in the report. You can also indicate to skip components with blank device TAG values or blank manufacturer or catalog values. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be shown on all report sections. ■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description.
Report format file setup - missing level/sequence assignments Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Miscellaneous panel ➤ Report Format Setup. Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup Command entry: AEFORMATFILE Select Missing Level/Sequence Assignments from the Panel report list. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options are shown on all report sections. ■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column and even the column label. The Description field is handled a little differently than the other fields. This field can be a multi-line field which is actually made up of multiple fields.
Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup Command entry: AEFORMATFILE Select Wire Annotation Exception from the Panel report list. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code, or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported.
is actually made up of multiple fields. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Switch on and off the specific fields to define the Description. ■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing. ■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report. NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK in the dialog boxes.
Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code, or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a list of used installation codes.
NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the subdialog boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made. Breaks ■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special break. ■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the page header.
Select Terminal Exception from the Panel report list. Conditions for Report Specifies which conditions the report checks for: the panel item is not on the schematic, the schematic item is not on a panel, multiple instances of the terminal, and if there is a mismatch between schematic terminals and panel terminals. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description. ■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing. ■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report. NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the subdialog boxes.
Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Miscellaneous panel ➤ Report Format Setup. Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup Command entry: AEFORMATFILE Select Wire Connection from the Panel report list. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code, or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box.
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be shown on all report sections. ■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description.
Report format file setup - schematic bill of material Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Miscellaneous panel ➤ Report Format Setup. Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup Command entry: AEFORMATFILE Select Bill of Material from the Schematic report list. Category By default, the report lists schematic components. Select a different Category to run the report for one-line, one-line bus-tap, hydraulic, pneumatic, P&ID, or user-defined components.
Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code, or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you click Named Installation, you can type the installation code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation codes.
Breaks ■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special break. ■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the page header. For example, if you select a special break of Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic are displayed in the report section header.
or user-defined components. These components are each identified by a unique WDTYPE attribute on page 325 value. Report options ■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited (.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml) format.
saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' subdirectory or 'Users\{user name}' on a Windows Vista or Windows 7 installation. ■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in the user subdirectory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK. ■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and usage when generating reports.
Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a list of used location codes.
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic are displayed in the report section header. Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report before generating the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' subdirectory or 'Users\{user name}' on a Windows Vista or Windows 7 installation. ■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit.
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a list of used installation codes. Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Breaks ■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special break. ■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the page header. For example, if you select a special break of Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic are displayed in the report section header.
Select Component Wire List from the Schematic report list. Options Specifies to include stand-alone terminals or plug-jack connectors in the report. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code, or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing. ■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report. NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the subdialog boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.
Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Miscellaneous panel ➤ Report Format Setup. Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup Command entry: AEFORMATFILE Select Connector Details from the Schematic report list. Category By default, the report lists schematic components. Select a different Category to run the report for one-line, one-line bus-tap, hydraulic, pneumatic, P&ID, or user-defined components. These components are each identified by a unique WDTYPE attribute on page 325 value.
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited (.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml) format. The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option (such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be shown on all report sections. ■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.
■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and usage when generating reports. ■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with a different name. Report format file setup - schematic connector plug Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Miscellaneous panel ➤ Report Format Setup. Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup Command entry: AEFORMATFILE Select Connector Plug from the Schematic report list.
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a list of used location codes. Report options ■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs using this dialog box.
Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report before generating the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' subdirectory or 'Users\{user name}' on a Windows Vista or Windows 7 installation. ■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in the user subdirectory.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a list of used installation codes. Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Breaks ■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special break. ■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the page header. For example, if you select a special break of Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic are displayed in the report section header.
Category By default, the report lists schematic components. Select a different Category to run the report for one-line, one-line bus-tap, hydraulic, pneumatic, P&ID, or user-defined components. These components are each identified by a unique WDTYPE attribute on page 325 value. Options Specifies whether to include components, cable markers, or connectors in the report. You can also indicate to include the children for any of the selected options.
■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description. ■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.
Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Miscellaneous panel ➤ Report Format Setup. Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup Command entry: AEFORMATFILE Select Missing Bill of Material from the Schematic report list. Category By default, the report lists schematic components. Select a different Category to run the report for one-line, one-line bus-tap, hydraulic, pneumatic, P&ID, or user-defined components.
Report options ■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited (.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml) format. The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option (such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if multiple sections are used.
saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' subdirectory or 'Users\{user name}' on a Windows Vista or Windows 7 installation. ■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in the user subdirectory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK. ■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and usage when generating reports.
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be shown on all report sections. ■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description.
Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup Command entry: AEFORMATFILE Select PLC I/O Address and Descriptions from the Schematic report list. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code, or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description. ■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing. ■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report. NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the subdialog boxes.
Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Miscellaneous panel ➤ Report Format Setup. Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup Command entry: AEFORMATFILE Select Terminal Numbers from the Schematic report list. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code, or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box.
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be shown on all report sections. ■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description.
Report format file setup - schematic terminal plan Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Miscellaneous panel ➤ Report Format Setup. Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup Command entry: AEFORMATFILE Select Terminal Plan from the Schematic report list. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be shown on all report sections. ■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description.
■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with a different name. Report format file setup - schematic PLC modules used so far Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Miscellaneous panel ➤ Report Format Setup. Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup Command entry: AEFORMATFILE Select PLC Modules Used So Far from the Schematic report list. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml) format. The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option (such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be shown on all report sections. ■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column and even the column label.
■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and usage when generating reports. ■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with a different name. Report format file setup - schematic wire label The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the dialog boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you must save the data after you click Done to keep the changes you made.
Label Quantity per Connection Specifies the quantity of wire labels or cable labels. Wire labels are generated for every wire connection while cable labels are generated once for every cable. Number of Columns to Display Arranges the wire labels in the specified number of columns. Horizontal/Vertical Arrangement Arranges the wire label horizontally or vertically across the columns. Save Report to File Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box.
Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code, or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you click Named Installation, you can type the installation code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation codes.
any number of output files or to automatically place report tables on drawings. The first step to using the Automatic Reports feature is to create the format files using the Report Format File Setup dialog box defining the report options and output as described above. You can create any number of format files for the same report if you use the same report with different options. Once your format files are created you are ready to run the reports automatically.
For the File and Table Output options, an 'X' indicates that the automatic generation will run that portion, while an 'O' indicates that it will not run that portion. 6 Modify the output of a report type by selecting the report in the Selected Reports list and then clicking the Modify Output button. Make changes in the subdialog box and click OK. 7 Save the list of report names and format files for later retrieval and usage.
The Browse button allows you to search for a specific format file that is not displayed in the list. Control buttons ■ Modify Output: Changes the output types for individually selected reports. Each format file definition can determine whether the report is set to a file or table on the drawing, or both. Select a file in the Selected Reports list, click the Modify Output button, and click either of the toggle buttons to turn on or off the output type.
Drawing Information for Table Output Specifies a starting drawing file location and filename, and the drawing template file to use for the automatic creation of the drawing files. You can select a template drawing file to use for the automatic creation of drawing files. Type in a template filename or use the Browse button to search for and select a template file. It is advised to start the first drawing filename with a numeric suffix.
AutoCAD Electrical creates a file of the data pulled from your wiring diagram drawings. 6 Open this file in any spreadsheet or database program for view and edit. Caution: If you selected a Tab or Comma-delimited ASCII format, import all fields as text. Some spreadsheet programs may try to convert some fields into numeric or scientific notation values. You may need to save the AutoCAD Electrical extracted data to a file with a .
Exports project data to a comma-delimited, Excel spreadsheet, or Access database file so you can examine and edit the data. Ribbon: Import/Export Data tab ➤ Export panel ➤ To Spreadsheet. Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet Command entry: AEEXPORT2SS You can edit component tags, descriptions, catalog assignments, wire numbers, and PLC I/O descriptions in the spreadsheet. Import the changes from the spreadsheet using Update from Spreadsheet.
Data export for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project. Output format Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet. Location Codes to extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. After you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You can also create a report from multiple location codes.
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search. PLC I/O header information export This utility copies PLC I/O header information to a comma-delimited, Excel XLS, or Access MDB file format for editing. Ribbon: Import/Export Data tab ➤ Export panel ➤ To Spreadsheet.
Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet Command entry: AEEXPORT2SS Select PLC I/O wire connections from the list. Data export for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project. Output format Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet. Location Codes to extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Output format Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet. Location Codes to extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. After you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search. Panel terminals data export This utility copies panel terminals to a comma-delimited, Excel XLS, or Access MDB file format for editing. NOTE The User-defined attributes list on page 1508 can be used to add fields to the spreadsheet if an attribute from a component is not exported by default. Ribbon: Import/Export Data tab ➤ Export panel ➤ To Spreadsheet.
NOTE The User-defined attributes list on page 1508 can be used to add fields to the spreadsheet if an attribute from a component is not exported by default. Ribbon: Import/Export Data tab ➤ Export panel ➤ To Spreadsheet. Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet Command entry: AEEXPORT2SS Select Terminals from the list. Data export for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project.
Menu: Projects ➤ Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Update from Spreadsheet Command entry: AEIMPORTSS Select the spreadsheet and click Open. Export project data using Export to Spreadsheet. Edit the data and import changes to update the project drawings. The spreadsheet can update existing components and wire numbers with your edits. If the block name is modified, it can swap one block for another. It cannot insert new items into the drawings.
NOTE You can edit the attribute text file (*.wda) in Notepad; however, you must set the Encoding to Unicode in the Open and Save dialog boxes. The Project Database Service (PDS) saves all non-AutoCAD Electrical-aware attributes from block files into the project for processing. The PDS maintains these database entries when the drawing file is saved and monitors them in real-time as if they are normal components in the project.
If this is the first time the grid content is being saved, the Save As dialog box displays. Enter the file name and click Save. This is generally .wda or default.wda. NOTE Click Save As if an existing file needs to be saved in a different location or with a different name. User-defined attribute list Creates or modifies a list of attributes to report. Ribbon: Reports tab ➤ Miscellaneous panel ➤ User Attributes.
Sort the list by clicking any of the column headers or move rows up or down in the list by highlighting multiple rows and dragging the selection on the sequence number list to the appropriate position. Attribute Tag Edits and displays the list of attribute tags to be made available in the Report Generator. The attribute tags can be in any order in the list. Enter text, click in the cell to edit, or right-click in the cell to pick, copy, cut, or paste a value.
Right-click options Pick Allows selection of an attribute from the drawing. This is available only for the Attribute Tag. Copy Copies the cell contents to paste in another. Cut Removes the cell contents to paste in another. Paste Places the copied or cut cell contents in a new cell. NOTE You can also copy, cut, and paste entire row contents from one row to another (one at a time), however you cannot paste the row contents into a single cell.
assembly in the Cable & Harness application. Use the Part Properties dialog box in Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness to change the RefDes property. You can define attributes on components in AutoCAD Electrical that can map to properties when exported to Autodesk Inventor Professional. These attributes can be component definition (catalog database) or component occurrence specific. Use the Edit Component tool to edit the occurrence of a component.
mapped into wires in 3D should be drawn with a layer identified as a wire for inclusion in the output report file for Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness. If a wire that is included in the custom report output file is not recognized as a library wire in the Cable & Harness Library during the Import Wire List process, the wire occurrence will not be imported. The layers defined in AutoCAD Electrical must first be defined as valid wire layers.
NOTE When you apply additional parts to the component occurrence, their respective splice definition properties can also be applied in the overall component occurrence. Up to ten additional part numbers can be applied to the occurrence of a component. Each of these catalog numbers can have their own set of component definition properties. Branches and Ts in nets Branches and Ts in nets are not valid on nets imported into Cable & Harness.
ASSYCODE Occurrence Assembly code for part - if part is a subset of an assembly CAT01-10 Occurrence Multiple BOM part numbers MFG01-10 Occurrence Multiple BOM Manufacturer associated to the Multiple BOM part numbers ASSYCODE01-10 Occurrence Multiple BOM Assembly codes associated to the Multiple BOM part numbers RATING1-12 Occurrence Rating information associated to the component definition FAMILY Definition Family code definition - FAMILY attribute on AutoCAD Electrical block file WDBLKNAM
INST & LOC Occurrence Installation and Location code; associated to the component tag (RefDes) TAG1 & TAG2 Occurrence Component TAG - RefDes property name RATING1 Occurrence Cable conductor ID; AutoCAD Electrical Rating1 attribute - Cable Wire name in Autodesk Inventor Professional; add a numeric value along with the conductor color DESC1- DESC3 Occurrence Descriptions used to describe the component CAT Occurrence Main AutoCAD Electrical catalog number - Part Number property name in Autodesk I
INST & LOC Occurrence Installation and Location code; associated to the component tag (RefDes) TAG1 Occurrence Component TAG - RefDes property name DESC1- DESC3 Occurrence Descriptions used to describe the component CAT Occurrence Main AutoCAD Electrical catalog number - Part Number property name in Autodesk Inventor Professional MFG Occurrence Manufacturer - Vendor of Part Number property name in Autodesk Inventor Professional ASSYCODE Occurrence Assembly code for part - if part is a subse
Output reports to Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable and Harness Use this tool to export component, connector, wiring/cable, and splice data from your 2D connector drawing into an XML file that can then be imported into Autodesk Inventor Professional to aid in the generation of a cable and harness assembly. NOTE You must first configure wire numbering to be "On per Wire Basis" for export and set up the appropriate variables before running the report.
2 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, click Add Existing Layer to add the wire line layers in use in the schematic to the list to be recognized as layers by AutoCAD Electrical. 3 In the Layers for Line Wires dialog box, enter the layer name or pick a wire from the existing layer list. A wildcard used in the name selects a group of layers. For example, RED_* selects all layers that begin with "RED_." 4 Click OK. 5 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, click OK.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Wire Numbers. 2 In the Wire Tagging dialog box, select Insert as Fixed if it is not already selected. 3 Click Project-wide, Drawing-wide, or Pick Individual Wires depending on which method you want to use to update your wire numbers. Manually inserting wire numbers: 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Edit Wire Number.
Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Import/Export Data ➤ Export ➤ Autodesk Inventor Professional Export Command entry: AEAIPEXPORT Extracts wire list information into an XML export file for use exclusively in Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable and Harness. Before you run the export, configure wire numbering to be On per Wire Basis for export and set up the appropriate variables. Select to export the active drawing or the entire project.
Panel Layout 19 Overview of panel layouts Panel Layout tools create intelligent mechanical / panel layout drawings. Here are the key features: ■ Layouts can be driven from information carried on the AutoCAD Electrical schematic wiring diagram drawings or they can be constructed independently of schematics. ■ AutoCAD Electrical places no requirements on special naming or attribute requirements on mechanical footprint symbols.
Using the ribbon Select the various panel layout commands from the Panel tab on page 60 on the ribbon in AutoCAD Electrical. Using the pull-down menu Select the various panel layout commands from Panel Layout menu in AutoCAD Electrical. Using the toolbar If the Panel Layout toolbar is not visible, you can turn it on by right-clicking on a toolbar and selecting ACE:Panel Layout.
name listed here, AutoCAD Electrical uses that attribute to carry the specific piece of data. Otherwise, AutoCAD Electrical uses extended entity data with names based on the data names listed here but with a VIA_WD_ prefix (ex: "VIA_WD_DESC1").
Minimum attribute/Xdata requirements The following tables are the minimum requirements for AutoCAD Electrical to recognize a block as a panel footprint, terminal, or nameplate.
box redisplays. Repeat the process to convert other pieces of Xdata quickly into visible attributes. Xdata Displays all AutoCAD Electrical-related pieces of extended entity data (Xdata). Height Specifies the height for the attribute value. Justification Specifies the justification for the attribute value. Visibility Indicates whether the attribute is visible on the screen. Ratings Opens a sub-dialog for setting the values for rating attributes.
Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Panel Configuration Command entry: AEPANELCONFIG Panel Configuration saves settings as attribute values on a non-visible block named WD_PNLM. In any panel layout command, if this block is not present in the current drawing a message box displays asking permission to insert the block. The location of the block is not critical. Item Numbering Specifies the number/letter to use as the first item number.
can insert with smart AutoCAD Electrical attributes added automatically, on the fly. There are five attribute template drawings: wd_ptag_addattr_comp.dwg component footprints wd_ptag_addattr_trm.dwg terminal footprints wd_ptag_addattr_wtrm.dwg terminal with wire no. as terminal number wd_ptag_addattr_itemballoon.dwg balloons Wd_ptag_addattr_pnltermstrip.
Defines the default wire connection text format. Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Panel Configuration drop-down ➤ Configuration. Toolbar: Panel Layout Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Panel Configuration Command entry: AEPANELCONFIG Click Panel wire connection report XYZ offset reference Setup. After you add wire numbers to your schematics and extract this information, you are ready to annotate your panel footprint symbols with this information.
%W and %1 and %G parameters. Acceptable formats include "%T=%W (%1) %G" or "%T=%W / %1 (%G)" or "%T=%W (%1) %G". NOTE You cannot use commas in the format. They signal multiple wire connection annotations onto a single wire connection attribute. Additional options for the "To" component tag Additional options to include in the text. Add terminal pin as a suffix to tag Adds the terminal text as a suffix. Add terminal description to tag Adds any terminal description value as a suffix.
■ Edits to a panel footprint update the associated schematic parent, child symbols, nameplates, and peer one-line symbols. ■ Edits to a panel nameplate update the associated schematic parent, child symbols, panel footprints, and peer one-line symbols. ■ Edits to a schematic child do not update the associated schematic parent, panel footprints, nameplates, or peer one-line symbols. ■ Edits to a one-line terminal do not update any other terminal symbols.
LT411 and LT413 are assigned an Allen-Bradley part number for a 30-mm pilot light (catalog part number 800H-PR16R). LT412 is given a part number for a smaller, 22.5-mm pilot light (catalog part number 800MR-P16RS). The manufacturer and catalog part number assignments are carried on invisible attributes MFG and CAT on each instance of the red pilot light symbol. All three symbols look the same on the schematic since they are the same AutoCAD block symbol.
■ Footprint mapping file on page 1592 (footprint_lookup.mdb) - a table is assigned to each manufacturer. Footprint/Terminal Insertion Insert panel footprints from a schematic list Let your project set of schematic wiring diagrams help drive the panel layout. Component catalog number information comes directly from manufacturer and catalog data carried on each electrical component.
9 CNT Optional count value 10 UM Optional unit of measure 11-13 DESC1-DESC3 Three lines of description text 14 BLKNAM Schematic block name (used to determine catalog lookup table name) 15-26 RATING1-12 Optional rating values 27 ITEM Optional item number assignment 28 (blank) Panel terminals spreadsheet data format The spreadsheet data for panel terminals must be in this order and have 30 columns of data and be saved in a "CSV comma delimited" text format.
14 BLOCK Optional schematic block name (blank) 15-26 RATING1-12 Optional rating values 27 ITEM Optional item number assignment 28 TERMNO Terminal number 29 30 (blank) WIRENO Optional wire number tied to terminal Schematic spreadsheet data of previous project If your new project is like a previous project, you can use the schematics of the previous project to create a component or terminal spreadsheet listing. It can then help drive the new panel layout of the project.
5 In the Select Drawings to Process dialog box, select the drawing that has the schematic symbol you inserted. Click Process, and then click OK. This extracts a list of all schematic devices found in the drawing and displays them in a dialog box for selection. 6 In the Schematic Components dialog box, select the schematic component you inserted and click Insert. ■ AutoCAD Electrical takes the manufacturer attribute value (MFG) and finds a table in the footprint_lookup.mdb file with this name.
Schematic diagrams can help drive the panel layout. Each electrical component carries manufacturer and catalog data with catalog number information. A matching manufacturer and catalog number combination in the footprint look-up file determines the correct footprint block to insert. The list of schematic components checks off the panel footprints you insert. This tool provides error checking between the schematics and the panel layout drawings.
Inserts and annotates a panel terminal by referencing the schematic terminal list in the project. Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ ➤ Insert Terminals drop-down ➤ Insert Terminal (Schematic List). Toolbar: Terminal Footprint Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Insert Terminal (Schematic List) Command entry: AEPANELTERMINALSCH This tool provides error checking between the schematic terminals and panel layout terminals.
Location Codes to extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. Once you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search. Schematic components or terminals AutoCAD Electrical processes the project drawing set.
Toolbar: Terminal Footprint Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Insert Terminal (Schematic List) Command entry: AEPANELTERMINALSCH Select Project and click OK. Select the files to process and click OK. Sort List Sorts the list of schematic footprints. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list. Reload Reinitializes the display. Causes the dialog box to return to the Schematic components (or terminals) list panel layout insert dialog box.
Rotate Specifies the block rotation angle. (blank = "ask") External Program Executes external user routine to retrieve footprint block name and/or catalog data. Requires WD_XCAT reference in wd.env and a user AutoLISP file to manage the data send/receive with the external routine. Manual Specifies to pick the insertion point manually. Insert Finds and inserts footprint for highlighted component (or terminal).
Run any of the component, footprint, or terminal insertion from list commands (such as Insert Component (Panel List) on page 790).Select the drawings to process and click OK. Select multiple components or terminals to insert and click Insert. The components display in the list box in the order they are inserted. To modify the order, select an item from the list, then select Move Up or Move Down in the list.
Insert panel footprints using vendor menus Pick the item from a vendor icon menu that is preset with specific catalog number data and footprint block names. Choosing from this menu supplies AutoCAD Electrical with the manufacturer and catalog information and the footprint block name, bypassing any look-up. It can save time if you frequently use the same vendor and panel components.
Toolbar: Component Footprint Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Manufacturer Menu) Command entry: AEFOOTPRINTMFG NOTE This dialog box is also available by clicking Vendor Menu Select on the Vendor Panel Footprint dialog box after a vendor is first selected. The vendor icon menu files that are found in AutoCAD Electrical are listed in the dialog box. Vendor panel footprint Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert Footprints drop-down ➤ Manufacturer Menu.
Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol images corresponding to the menu or the submenu selected in the Menu section. Clicking on the icon inserts the footprint into the active drawing as defined by the command in the .pnl file. Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing session; the most recently used icon displays in the top. This list box follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window (icon, icon with text or list view).
Right-click menus Options for the Menu tree structure view Right-click the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to display the following options: ■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the folders. ■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to modify the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name, image, or submenu title. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.
Insert panel footprints using icon menu 1 Click Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert Footprints drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. 2 In the Insert Footprint dialog box, select the component to insert from the Symbol Preview window and click OK. 3 On the Footprint on page 1552 dialog box, choose one of the following: ■ Choice A - make catalog assignment for automatic footprint selection. ■ Choice B - manual footprint selection or creation.
Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure. The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just above the menu tree structure. This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon Menu Paths section of the Project properties: project settings tab on page 204. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to modify the menu easily. The default icon menu can also be redefined in "wd.
■ Executes a command ■ Displays a submenu NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information. Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing session; the most recently used icon displays in the top. The list box follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window (icon, icon with text or list view) and the total number of icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit box.
Type it Manually type in the component block to insert. Browse Browses to and selects the component to insert. Right-click menus Options for the Menu tree structure view Right-click the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to display the following options: ■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus. ■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name, image, or submenu title.
2 In the Insert Component Footprint -- Manual dialog box, select: ■ Use generic marker only - Insert a block to annotate with the tag, description text, and so on, of the component. ■ Draw shapes - draw a rectangle, circle, or octagon to represent the component. ■ Pick “just like” footprint - Select a block from the drawing. ■ Browse - pick a block from a list of files on disk. ■ Pick - pick a non-AutoCAD Electrical block on the drawing to change into a smart AutoCAD Electrical block.
find a match in the footprint lookup of the manufacturer or the _PNLMISC miscellaneous lookup file. Choice B - manual footprint selection or creation Skips the catalog assignment. Select from the available options to insert a footprint. Use generic marker only Inserts a block with the tag, description text, and so on, of the component. Draw shapes Draws a rectangle, circle, or octagon to represent the component. Text and hidden information inserted when drawn.
or library symbol. If the lookup table does not exist, it is created. Insert Footprint (Manual) Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert Footprints drop-down ➤ Manual. Toolbar: Component Footprint Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Manual) Command entry: AEFOOTPRINTMAN Skips the catalog assignment.
Insert panel footprints from a catalog list Inserts panel symbols by choosing a catalog number or a component description from a user-defined pick list. The data displayed in this pick list is stored in a database in generic Access format. The file name is wd_picklist.mdb and can be edited with Access or from Add/Edit/Delete along the bottom of the dialog box of the pick list.
Insert Component (Catalog List) Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Catalog List. Toolbar: Insert Component Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component (Lists) ➤ Insert Component (Catalog List) Command entry: AECOMPONENTCAT Insert Footprint (Catalog List) Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert Footprints drop-down ➤ Catalog List.
Removes an existing record. Delete Insert footprints from an equipment list This tool lists data extracted from your equipment list, finds the appropriate panel symbol by querying the footprint_lookup.mdb, and inserts the panel footprint at your pick point. Each line or record in the equipment list represents a single entry into the Panel Equipment in {file name} dialog box for schematic component selection. The quantity for a selected catalog number is not supported.
8 In the Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box, enter additional component values and click OK. 9 In the Panel equipment in {file name} dialog box, click Close. Panel equipment in You can select to insert a single panel footprint or multiple footprints from the equipment list. Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert Footprints drop-down ➤ Equipment List.
External Program Executes an external user routine to retrieve the footprint block name and catalog data. Requires the WD_XCAT reference in the wd.env and a user AutoLISP file to manage the data send/receive with the external routine. Manual Specifies to pick the panel footprint manually. The Panel Component dialog box displays, so you can define the footprint to use. Insert Finds and inserts footprint for the highlighted component.
Your equipment list can be an AutoCAD Electrical-generated Component report, or it can be a list of motors giving horsepower and starter type along with motor ID and descriptions. NOTE You can open a comma-delimited file, Excel spreadsheet, or Access database file for input. Insert Component (Equipment List) Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Equipment List.
Spreadsheet/Table columns Defines the order of the data in the selected equipment list file. Assign column numbers to data categories (such as Manufacturer, Catalog, and Installation) in the Equipment List Spreadsheet Settings dialog box. Save settings Saves the column information in a text file for reuse. The filename is user-defined with the extension .wde. Insert a copy of a panel footprint Insert a copy of a panel footprint Copies a selected panel footprint on the active drawing.
Use panel templates and assemblies You can use templates to create a panel layout drawing or to add attributes to footprints automatically during insertion time. You can Wblock assemblies of panel components out to disk for insertion later. Panel layout template drawings You can set up an AutoCAD template drawing for panel layout drawings with the WD_PNLM block pre-inserted and set up with your own default settings.
5 Add the schematic data to the footprint. If the target attribute exists, the data is added as attribute data. If the target attribute does not exist, the data is added as invisible Xdata. Panel assembly You can Wblock assemblies of panel components out to disk for insertion later. Use the Insert Panel Assembly utility instead of the AutoCAD Insert/Explode command when to insert a WBlocked group of panel component footprints with balloons or nameplates.
4 In the Wblocked Assembly to Insert dialog box, select the assembly and click Open. 5 Specify the insertion point for the block. 6 Enter a rotation angle or press Enter to use the default. Your block is inserted onto the drawing at your picked point. Copy panel footprint assemblies Copies one or more selected panel footprints. The Copy Assembly utility copies a group of panel component footprints, balloons, and nameplates. You select the balloons or nameplates to copy with the footprints.
Footprint/Terminal Edit Edit a footprint or panel terminal You can go back to a component at any time and edit values, such as tag, catalog assignment, location, installation, descriptions, ratings, and miscellaneous values. Related components update to match new values. In some cases, a footprint updates due to manufacturer, catalog, or assembly value changes. Panel layout - component insert/edit Edits the panel footprint or terminal. Converts a selected block if not compatible with AutoCAD Electrical.
You can go back to a footprint at any time and edit values, such as tag, catalog assignment, location, installation, descriptions, ratings, and miscellaneous values. Related components update to match new values. In some cases, a footprint updates due to manufacturer, catalog, or assembly value changes. NOTE The dialog box options differ depending on whether you are inserting or editing a footprint or nameplate.
remembered. When you insert another component of that type, the catalog assignment of the previous component is set as the default (assuming a previous one was made during the current editing session). Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the footprint. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Catalog Lists the catalog number for the footprint. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Assembly Lists the assembly code for the footprint.
NOTE If this button is unavailable, the component you are editing does not carry any rating attributes. Component Tag Any existing tags appear in the edit box. To define the component tag, edit the tag or type a specific tag in the edit box. Select Fixed if you do not want to update this tag on a retag. Schematic List Applies an ID tag number to link the panel component back to its equivalent device on the schematics. External list file Assigns a tag from an external list file.
Show/Edit Miscellaneous View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes. Panel layout - terminal insert/edit Insert Terminal (Manual) Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Insert Terminals drop-down ➤ Insert Terminal (Manual). Toolbar: Terminal Footprint Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Insert Terminal (Manual) Command entry: AEPANELTERMINAL Select the method for inserting a terminal strip and place the terminal strip on the drawing.
NOTE You can assign short installation or location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" to take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to create installation or location-specific BOM and component lists. Installation Changes the installation codes. Click Browse to search the active drawing, entire project, and an external list (default.inst) for installation codes. Pick from the list to update the component with the installation code automatically. Location Changes the location codes.
NOTE You cannot associate terminals using the Add/Modify or Break Out Panel options when you insert a terminal using the Insert Terminal (Schematic List) tool. However, once the terminal is inserted onto the drawing, you can modify the associations using these tools. Displays the Add/Modify Associations dialog box. Select terminal strips and their respective blocks to make an association to the terminal symbol being inserted or edited.
Number Lists the terminal numbers defined in the association. Only one terminal number is allowed per level and each level displays its respective terminal number or text. Panel terminal symbols do not display terminal numbers. PinL Lists the pin numbers defined left side of the terminal block. This data is entered into the L0nPINL attribute if present; otherwise, it is placed in the xdata. PinR Lists the pin numbers defined on the right side of the terminal block.
■ Fix the item number. If checked, marks an item number as fixed. If you run Resequence Item Numbers on page 1602 later on, fixed item numbers do not change. Catalog Lookup Opens the catalog database of the terminal from which you can select the Manufacturer and Catalog values. Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected terminal. Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar terminals in the current drawing.
Extracts the details from the catalog database to display what the selected item looks like in a Bill of Material template. Catalog Check Descriptions Specifies the optional description attribute text to assign to the terminal block (up to three lines of text can be specified). Click Browse to search for all terminal descriptions in the project or active drawing. Select the description you want to copy to the edited terminal block by selecting it in the list and clicking OK.
Insert Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT Select Terminals and Connectors from the dialog box and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Modify Properties/Associations section, click Add/Modify. Edit Component Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit.
Active Association Use this section to modify the terminal number. The Installation, Location, and Tag Strip values are not editable. Installation Displays the Installation value defined for the edited terminal symbol. Location Displays the Location value defined for the edited terminal symbol. Tag Strip Displays the tag strip value defined for the edited terminal symbol. Number (Unavailable for panel terminals) Specifies the terminal number.
minal symbols do not display terminal numbers. Terminal levels with an assignment and a terminal that has not been assigned a terminal number display a “???” in this column. ■ PinL: Lists the pin numbers defined on the left side of the terminal block. This data is entered into the LnnPINL attribute if present; otherwise, it is placed into Xdata. ■ PinR: Lists the pin numbers defined on the right side of the terminal block.
levels defined in the block properties displays at the end of the node string in parenthesis. For example, 1,21,GND (3). If a level is not represented on the schematic, an empty space represents it: 1, , GND (3). If a terminal has been assigned to the level, but the terminal does not have a number assignment, a ‘???’ represents it: 1,???,GND (3). Select Association grid Displays all levels of the terminal selected in the tree.
This tool allows you to insert or edit extra catalog part numbers on to the currently selected component or footprint. You can add up to 99 additional part numbers to any schematic or panel component on-the-fly. These multiple BOM part numbers appear as subassembly part numbers to the main catalog part number in the various BOM and component reports. On the Insert/Edit Component or Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box, Catalog Data section, click Multiple Catalog.
be there for these catalog entries. Select List to pick from a list of tables that are contained in your catalog database file or Misc to use the MISC_CAT table. Catalog Lookup Checks for and displays catalog table information in the Parts Catalog dialog box for the selected component type. Catalog Check Quickly performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result. Item Number Assign an item number to the catalog number. fixed If checked, marks an item number as fixed.
NOTE If the Item Numbering Mode on page 211 is Reset with Each Drawing, this button is disabled. Project: List Lists the item numbers along with each manufacturer, catalog, assembly code combinations in use on the drawings in the active project. NOTE If the Item Numbering Mode on page 211 is Reset with Each Drawing, this button is disabled. If the Item Assignments on page 211 project setting is set Per-Component Basis, this section is disabled.
1 Click Panel tab ➤ Edit Footprints panel ➤ Copy Codes drop-down ➤ Copy Location code. 2 In the Copy Installation\Location\Mount\Group to components dialog box, select the code names you want to copy. 3 Enter a value for the code: ■ Pick Master: Select a panel component from the drawing carrying the desired values for the all the codes you want to copy. ■ Enter a value in the edit box. ■ Drawing: Select a value from a list of values used on the active drawing.
Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Panel Miscellaneous Tools ➤ Copy Installation Code Command entry: AECOPYINST Copy Location Code Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Edit Footprints panel ➤ Copy Codes drop-down ➤ Copy Location code. Toolbar: Copy Codes Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Panel Miscellaneous Tools ➤ Copy Location Code Command entry: AECOPYLOC Copy Mount Code Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Edit Footprints panel ➤ Copy Codes drop-down ➤ Copy Mount code.
Command entry: AECOPYGROUPCODE Pick master Retrieves existing values by selecting a panel component from the drawing carrying the desired Installation or Location value you wish to copy. Installation Specifies to copy the installation code that you enter in the edit box. Location Specifies to copy the location code that you enter in the edit box. Mount Specifies to copy the mount code that you enter in the edit box. Group Specifies to copy the group code that you enter in the edit box.
1 Click Panel tab ➤ Edit Footprints panel ➤ Delete Footprint. 2 Select the footprints to delete. 3 Press Enter. Layout Wire Connection Annotation Add wire information to footprints Insert schematic wire connection information on to panel footprint representations. After you add wire numbers to your schematics, annotate panel footprint symbols with this information. You can build panel footprint symbols with target attributes used for the wire connection information.
The TERMxx attribute definition default values match the default pin values for the relay, for example: ■ Parent coil - K1, K2 ■ Child contact pairs - A1X/A1Y, A2X/ A2Y, A3X/A3Y, A4X/A4Y When the wire connection information is added to the footprint, the match is made based on the TERMxx value match. NOTE You can build two sets of panel footprint symbols: one set that does not carry the target attributes for wire information and a set that does.
MText The default MText insertion point is the same as the insertion point of the footprint block. The default text size either matches that of existing wire number attributes found on the footprint symbol or, if none present, the MText size is forced to match the current value of the AutoCAD system variable "TEXTSIZE". To predefine the MText insertion point, text size, and text style on footprint blocks, insert an invisible attribute "WXREF" on your footprint block library symbol.
3 Select the wire numbering format to use. 4 Select the layout devices to update with the schematic wire connection information. 5 Click OK. 6 If you are exporting the data for the entire project, select the drawings to process, and click OK. Schematic wire numbers -> panel wiring diagram Annotates panel footprint symbols with wire connection information extracted from selected schematics. Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Wire Annotation.
Replaceable parameters for defining wire annotation %P Terminal pin text %Q Terminal pin TERMDESC text %I IEC-style installation code %L IEC-style location code %M Mount assignment (on panel footprint equivalent) %U Group assignment (on panel footprint equivalent) %W Wire number %C Cable tag + conductor/core color combination (format is "tag-color") %E Cable tag %J Cable conductor/core color %V Cable tag substituted for wire number if cable tag is non-blank.
%5 Equivalent of "%L%1:%P" (tag:term) %6 Equivalent of "%L%1:%P:%D" (tag:term:termdesc) %7 Equivalent of "%I%I%1" (INST prefix+IEC component tag) %8 Equivalent of "%I%L%1:%P" (tag:term) %9 Equivalent of "%I%L%1:%P:%D" (tag:term:termdesc) The part after the ":" is suppressed if the value is blank in %2 - %9 parameters. For example, %2=comp tag:term. The ":term" part is suppressed if blank. Schematic layout wire connection annotation Defines the wire connection text format.
at the right; or you can enter your own format using replaceable parameters on page 236. Parameters must be separated by non-blank delimiters for AutoCAD Electrical to be able to re-extract wiring diagram information into reports. For example, "%T=%W %1 %G" is not acceptable because there is only a space between the %W and %1 and %G parameters. Acceptable formats include "%T=%W (%1) %G" or "%T=%W / %1 (%G)" or "%T=%W (%1) %G". NOTE You cannot use commas in the format.
To predefine the MText insertion point, text size, and text style on footprint blocks, insert an invisible attribute "WXREF" on your footprint block library symbol. Open up each footprint symbol in AutoCAD and insert a blank attribute definition "WXREF". Put its origin at the point where you want AutoCAD Electrical to insert the MText wire connection information. Mark this attribute definition invisible and set its text size and style to the desired MText size and style.
5 You insert the footprint representation into the drawing. AutoCAD Electrical search sequence 1st choice -- _footprint_lookup.mdb in the subdirectory of the project 2nd choice -- footprint_lookup.mdb in the subdirectory of the project 3rd choice -- footprint_lookup.mdb in user subdirectory 4th choice -- footprint_lookup.
BLKNAM Footprint block name with partial path or geometry definition DESCRIPTION Optional short description used for display purposes only Block name vs. geometry definition You can encode a simple geometry definition in place of a footprint path/block name in the lookup file. For example, if a footprint shape for a given part number is a 3x4 rectangle, instead of creating and saving a 3x4 rectangle as a Wblocked .
The Catalog Number and Footprint block name, at a minimum, must be filled in to provide a key field for the search and a block or geometry definition for the matching footprint. Your new record is added to the list. You can also immediately see any changes you made to an existing record. 6 Click Save to save your changes and keep the dialog box open for more editing, or click OK / Save/ Exit to save your changes and close the dialog box.
Footprint lookup This tool allows you to examine the records and, modify, delete, or add records. Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Footprint Database File Editor. Toolbar: Panel Miscellaneous Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Database File Editor ➤ Footprint Database File Editor Command entry: AEFOOTPRINTDB Select the Edit Existing Table button, select the table to edit, and click OK. Edit record Opens a sub-dialog box for editing a record. Highlight the record and click the Edit button.
Toolbar: Panel Miscellaneous Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Database File Editor ➤ Footprint Database File Editor Command entry: AEFOOTPRINTDB Select the Edit Existing Table button, select the table to edit, and click OK. Click Add New or Edit Record on the Footprint Lookup dialog box. NOTE The Catalog Number and Footprint block name, at a minimum, must be filled in to provide a key field for the search and a block or geometry definition for the matching footprint.
Geometry Substitutes a simple on-the-fly generated outline for the matching footprint. Several shapes are selectable or you can manually enter the definition. Icon Menu Opens an AutoCAD Electrical icon menu page for the block you specify in the Catalog Number section of the dialog box. Enter the menu name or browse for it. Once selected, click List to see a list of the submenu pages defined within that icon menu to select from or enter the number of the menu page to display and click OK.
2-D side view|mcp_300_2dsv.sld|$C=wd_infpx "MCP300-2Ds.dwg" 3-D side insertion|mcp_300_3dsv.sld|$C=wd_infpx "MCP300-3Ds.dwg" When you select an icon from the icon menu, it returns the footprint block ".dwg" file to use. This technique of footprint selection is useful for situations where there may be multiple possible orientations of a given footprint part number.
The AutoCAD Electrical item balloon labels are smart in that they update automatically if the item number of the component is changed through the EDIT dialog box. NOTE If the component has multiple item numbers, a multiple balloon is built up showing all item numbers. See also: ■ Item Numbering Setup on page 211 Add an item number balloon to a component Inserts a balloon containing the item number of a selected component. Prompts direct you to select points for an optional leader arrow.
1 Click Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Balloon. 2 Select the component for the balloon or press S at the command line prompt to open the Balloon Setup dialog box. 3 Specify the leader start or balloon insertion point. 4 Specify the leader end and press Enter when you finish specifying the leader. You can also press Enter without specifying the leader end to create the balloon at the first picked point (the balloon does not have a leader). 5 Enter the item number if prompted and click OK.
Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Panel Configuration drop-down ➤ Configuration. Toolbar: Panel Layout Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Panel Configuration Command entry: AEPANELCONFIG Click Balloon Setup. Balloon Specifies the type and size of balloon marker to insert. Choose from Circle, Ellipse, Polygon, and None. Circle - select either Diameter or Fit. Enter the diameter value or the Fit Margin, which sizes the circle automatically to fit the text plus the margin value. Ellipse - select either Axis or Fit.
■ Assigns the same item number to repeated part numbers. This is done on a drawing basis or project basis depending on the Item Numbering Setup on page 211. ■ Fixed item numbers do not change. If multiple components have the same item number but only one is marked fixed, the item number is not resequenced. ■ Ability to process components based on selected manufacturers. ■ Ability to control the process order based on manufacturer.
NOTE Fixed item numbers do not change. See also: ■ Item Numbering Setup on page 211 ■ Fixing item numbers on page 1605 Resequence panel item numbers Extracts all panel components and resequences their item numbers starting at the value you provide. Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Edit Footprints panel ➤ Resequence Item Numbers.
Process blank items only Check to skip any existing item numbers even if not fixed. Drawings to Process Project - process the entire project. Active drawing (all) - process components on the active drawing only. Active drawing (pick) - select the components for processing. Manufacturers to Process Defines the manufacturers to process and the order to process them. If you want to process only the components with certain manufacturers or define the order: ■ Uncheck Process all.
Mark an individual item number as fixed on the Insert/Edit dialog box for the panel component. Run the Project-wide utility on page 1193 to fix or unfix all item numbers. Fix/unfix all item numbers project-wide 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Utilities. 2 Select from the options on the Item Numbers: Fix/Unfix drop-down list. No Change - do not modify the status of any existing item numbers. This option is the default. Set all to fixed - change all existing items numbers to fixed.
Select project drawings and perform any of the following: ■ Erase, reset, fix, or unfix wire numbers. ■ Fix or unfix component tags. ■ Fix or unfix item numbers. ■ Clear signal cross-referencing. ■ Run a user-specified script file. ■ Change attribute text size or style. ■ Import wire types from another drawing or drawing template. You can have multiple drawings open at any time.
NOTE If you do not want the attribute height or width to change, do not enter a value definition. Click Setup to select a text font to apply to the text style used on component attributes. Change Style For each drawing Enter the name or browse to a command script file to use for each drawing in the current project or to purge all blocks. Wire Types Imports wire types defined on another drawing or drawing template. Enter the drawing or template name or browse to it using the browse button.
Insert a nameplate Several generic, rectangular nameplates with stretchable boundaries are provided. Three generic nameplates are shown on the panel icon menu nameplates page. Each of them consists of a nested block, which AutoCAD Electrical explodes and groups upon insertion. The rectangular outline of the resulting nameplate can be stretched using AutoCAD Grips or the Stretch Window command. 1 Click Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert Footprints drop-down ➤ Icon Menu.
3 On a new blank drawing, insert the first drawing as a block at 0,0 using the AutoCAD Insert command. 4 Draw a polyline rectangle around the block. 5 Save the drawing as _npxxtd3.dwg. 6 Click Panel tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Icon Menu Wizard. 7 Select the panel icon menu, for example ACE_PANEL_MENU.DAT. 8 Double-click Nameplates to open the nameplates menu page. 9 Click the Add button and select Command.
Show sequencing assignments Show sequencing assignments You can select a supplementary terminal strip to display its defined leveling assignments to the command line. You can also select two panel footprint symbols to display wire connection information in a visual path on the screen. Show terminal strip sequencing assignments 1 Enter AESHOWTERMINALSEQ at the command prompt. 2 Select a supplementary terminal strip. The leveling assignments for the selected terminal strip display in the command line.
View/edit panel component connection sequence View/edit panel component connection sequence This tool allows you to view and rearrange the sequencing of all panel footprint components that share a common set of Level 1-4 level code assignments. This coding, when present, influences the way that AutoCAD Electrical calculates the wire connection from/to sequence.
WDLEV or as extended entity data (xdata) on the symbol if the target attribute is not available. Copy level assignments Copy level assignments Define or capture a common set of level assignments for panel footprint components and then copy these 3-digit level codes to one or multiple footprints. This coding, when present, influences the way that AutoCAD Electrical calculates the wire connection from/to sequence.
■ Disable (Default) AutoCAD Electrical treats the terminal connections through the terminal strip normally. It uses the level category code assignments of the terminal to influence how the from/to wire sequencing is calculated. ■ Enable Processes the connection calculations of the terminal last. It checks each of the terminal potentials of the strip against those on any supplementary terminal strip found that is at the same level combination.
Draw shapes Draws a rectangle, circle, or octagon to represent the terminal strip. Text and hidden information are inserted when drawn. Pick "just like" footprint Select a terminal strip from the drawing. Browse Pick a terminal strip from a list of .DWG files on disk. Pick Pick a non-AutoCAD Electrical block on the drawing to be instantly changed into a smart AutoCAD Electrical block.
assignments for all unassigned panel layout footprint component and terminal strip representations on the active drawing. NOTE This dialog box can also be accessed from the Panel Configuration dialog box. Enter the optional 3-digit level codes (for example, 001, 002, and so on) for one or more of the four level categories.
codes should be 3-digit values and match up with level codes of panel layout footprints whose wiring is to pass through the terminal strip. Multiple code entries are comma separated. Jumper Directly to Supplementary Terminal Strip: Enable/Disable This option is applicable to the terminal strip only if it is referenced on the schematics as well as the panel layout drawing (that is, it is not a supplementary terminal strip that only is represented on the panel layout drawings).
For example, a single Level 1 terminal strip marked with Level 1 code "001,002,004" runs between three back plates with mounted components, two on the left (footprint Level 1 codes of "001" and "002") and one on the right (footprint Level 1 codes "004").
Higher only Wiring from 3-digit code assignments higher than this terminal's assigned operating level code can pass through this terminal strip. Lower only Wiring from 3-digit code assignments lower than this terminal's assigned operating level code can pass through this terminal strip. Example: the middle "002" shipping section has a Level 4 terminal strip at the left-hand end and another at the right-hand end.
Level 4/Level 3/Level 2/Level 1 Specifies which level codes to use in the sequencing. Level 4 = ship split, Level 3 = unit, Level 2 = cubical, and Level 1 = pan/plate. The leveling assignment codes should be 3-digit values since they are used in for sorting component data in the project database. If codes are not defined in the edit boxes, the drawingwide default values are used.
Default Displays a dialog box to set the drawing-wide default assignments for each of the four level categories. Values entered here become the default level assignments for all unassigned panel layout footprint component and terminal strip representations on the active drawing. NOTE This dialog box can also be accessed from the Panel Configuration dialog box. Enter the optional 3-digit level codes (for example, 001, 002, and so on) for one or more of the four level categories.
Bypass terminal strips Controls the wiring bypass of this component of one or more level categories of supplementary terminal strips. For example, special signal wiring passes from the currently edited component to some other components in a different cubical/unit/ship split section.
In the Report Generator dialog box, click Insert as Terminal Strip to define a graphical representation of the terminal strip for placement on the active drawing file. Panel terminal strip graphical report parameters Panel terminal strip graphical report parameters Toolbar: Panel Level/Sequencing Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Panel Level/Sequencing ➤ Panel Terminal Strip Report Command entry: AETERMINALSTRIPREPORT Select a terminal strip and click OK.
1624
Conduit Tools 20 Overview of conduit tools AutoCAD Electrical provides a set of utilities to help you label, size, and report on conduits. A conduit can be represented by a line or a poly line and by itself does not carry any intelligence. However, you may insert a conduit marker symbol and associate it to a conduit. The conduit marker symbol then carries wire information intelligence pulled from the AutoCAD Electrical drawings.
WIREINFO# Wire information for each wire included in the conduit. Wire# ; Wire Layer ; Wire Description ; Wire Size W_SPARES# Spare wires defined. Wire Description ; Count Insert conduit markers Use the Conduit Marker (Pick) tool 1 Click Panel tab ➤ Conduit Tools panel ➤ Conduit Markers drop-down ➤ Insert Marker. 2 Type S and press Enter to set up the conduit marker. 3 Specify the text for the marker tag and the scale for the marker block. Click OK.
5 Specify the conduit tag, catalog information, conduit size, description, or included wires in the Insert or Edit Conduit/WirewayLabel dialog box. The conduit marker symbol carries wire information intelligence pulled from the AutoCAD Electrical drawings. 6 Click OK. Edit all conduit marker information Once you insert the conduit marker, you may need to supply some additional information for the marker.
Command entry: AECONDUITMARKER Select the line that represents the conduit, click to define the leader, and then select layout devices or branching conduit markers and press Enter. Conduit Marker (From/To List) Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Conduit Tools panel ➤ Conduit Markers drop-down ➤ Insert From List. Toolbar: Conduit Markers Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Conduit Marker Tools ➤ Conduit Marker (From/To List) Command entry: AECONDUITMARKERLIST Select the line that represents the conduit, click to define the leader.
Size The conduit size can be selected from the list of available sizes or entered in the box. To make it a little easier, AutoCAD Electrical can calculate the percentage full for each conduit size available. To do this AutoCAD Electrical needs 2 support files on page 1632 containing wire size information and conduit size information. If there is not a .WW1 file or if the wire sizes are not in the file, the calculations are not made.
Lists the part numbers used for similar conduits in the project. You can search in the active project, another project, or in an external file. Project ■ Active project: All of the drawings in the current project are scanned and the results are listed in a sub-dialog box. Select from the list to assign your new conduit with a catalog number that is consistent with other similar conduits in the project.
Pick Devices Adds wires from additional devices. Spares Defines the spares to include in the conduit. Sort Sorts the list of conduit wires using an alphanumeric sort. Report/Print Opens the Report Generator dialog box for running a Conduit marker report. Conduit marker setup The conduit marker is a block inserted to add intelligence to a line or pline representing a conduit on a layout drawing. There are four blocks, called WWAYT, WWAYB, WWAYL, and WWAYR.
Toolbar: Conduit Markers Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Conduit Marker Tools ➤ Conduit Marker (Pick) Command entry: AECONDUITMARKER Click the Spares button on the Insert/Edit Conduit/Wireway Label dialog box. Select wires from Lists the spare wires that can be added to the conduit. The list is built from the .WDW support file. Type it If the wire type is not listed, type your spare wire description in the edit box. Wires to Add Lists the wires that to add to the conduit.
For example, if you have a wire layer called 14_RED_THHN and you want the wire color/gauge label to read #14AWG RED for this layer, and the wire itself has a wire diameter of 0.0087, the line in the .WDW file would read: 14_RED_THHN;#14AWGRED;0.0087 .WW1 file The .WW1 file contains the conduit information. You may have a different file for each project. Simply create a projname.ww1 file and put in the same directory as your project file (.WDP).
You can specify to display the last report run from this dialog box instead of running a new report by clicking the Redisplay Last Run button. 3 Click OK. 4 Select the drawings or conduit markers to process (depending on whether the report is run across the projector selected markers). 5 In the Report Generator dialog box, change the report format. You can specify to add the time and date, title line, project lines, column labels, page numbers, and blank spaces between report entities.
Generate a conduit routing report Generate a conduit routing report You must have at least one conduit marker with wire connections on your drawing in order to run this report. 1 Click Panel tab ➤ Conduit Tools panel ➤ Conduit Reports drop-down ➤ Routing Report. 2 Specify whether to run the report across selected drawings from the project, the current drawing, or selected conduit markers.
Toolbar: Conduit Reports Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Conduit Marker Tools ➤ Wire/Conduit Routing Report Command entry: AEROUTINGREPORT Decide if you want to run the report across selected drawings from the project, the active drawing, or selected conduit markers.
Conversion Tools 21 Convert promis.e drawing files to AutoCAD Electrical The promis·e® Conversion tool converts drawing files from promis·e to AutoCAD Electrical, while maintaining graphical elements. The drawing file data is converted into a format that can be edited and maintained in AutoCAD Electrical. You can convert a single drawing file or an entire project. A log file is created in the same location as the drawing file or project to display all modifications.
■ Processes wire numbers. ■ Inserts a copy of the WD_PNLM block at 0,0. NOTE You cannot see the command window messages during conversion unless you turn on the command trace mode on page 1686 debug tool. Convert promis·e drawings to AutoCAD Electrical drawings Use to convert promis·e drawings to AutoCAD Electrical "smart" drawings. 1 Click Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Promis·e Conversion.
NOTE If the project file exists and is marked active, the conversion cannot finish. You must have another project open so AutoCAD Electrical can temporarily activate the other project, delete the active project (the one being overwritten), write the new .wdp file and reactivate the project. promis·e conversion This tool converts drawing files from promis·e to AutoCAD Electrical.
NOTE You cannot see the command window messages during conversion unless you turn on the command trace mode on page 1686 debug tool. Ribbon: Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Promis·e Conversion. Toolbar: Conversion Tools Menu: Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ Promis·e Conversion Command entry: AEP2E Select Convert promis·e Project and click OK. Select the promis·e mapping file and click Open. promis·e Projects Project Names Lists the promis·e projects defined in the project mapping file.
the option to save the command line error message to a log file. Symbol Libraries Opens the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box for selecting library search paths and icon menu files for the new project. Conversion destination (base folder) Specifies the AutoCAD Electrical project path. It is where the new project folder and drawing files are located. A path must be specified before the conversion can take place.
Finish mapping values from non-AutoCAD Electrical blocks Use this utility to continue what you started with the Convert to Schematic Component tool. Use it if you did not finish mapping values from your non-AutoCAD Electrical block. 1 Click Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Map Attributes from Old to New. 2 Select the block for additional attributes. 3 Optionally, select any non-AutoCAD Electrical block or text objects to map values to the AutoCAD Electrical attributes and click Done.
Toolbar: Conversion Tools Menu: Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ Convert Drawing ➤ Map Attributes from Old to New Command entry: AEMAPATT The left-side of the dialog box lists the text or attributes to map to an AutoCAD Electrical block while the right-side of the dialog box lists valid attribute fields to fill in. NOTE Your options may differ depending on how you accessed the dialog box.
Miscellaneous, Ratings, Positions, Pins Opens sub-dialog boxes for changing the attribute list to reflect ratings, pins, and so on. Delete original non-AutoCAD Electrical block Deletes a non-AutoCAD Electrical block once you map all the attributes. Delete picked text objects Replaces the picked text with the new AutoCAD Electrical attribute. To leave the selected text as is, then make sure that you turn this option off. Zoom window Defines an area of the drawing to fill the graphics window.
1 Click Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Text Conversion drop-down ➤ Convert Text to Attribute Definition. 2 Select the text entity to convert. 3 Define the attribute tag name. Enter a value or click the arrows to increment or decrement the displayed attribute tag name (for example, click the > button to increment the tag name “RATING5” to “RATING6”). 4 Click OK. Convert text to attribute definition Converts a text object (that is not associated to a block) into an attribute definition.
1 Click Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Text Conversion drop-down ➤ Convert Text to Wire Number. 2 Select the wire near the text to convert. 3 Select the text to convert. Convert Arrows Convert non-AutoCAD Electrical arrows Convert non-AutoCAD Electrical arrows Use the Convert Block to Source Arrow tool to replace a non-AutoCAD Electrical source arrow with a smart AutoCAD Electrical source arrow and map the information to the new AutoCAD Electrical source.
Convert a block to a destination arrow 1 Click Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Schematic Conversion drop-down ➤ Convert Block to Destination Arrow. 2 Select your non-AutoCAD Electrical destination block and/or any text related to it that you might want to map to the new AutoCAD Electrical destination. 3 Select the wire end for the destination arrow. 4 Define the Destination Signal Code and click OK. 5 Define attribute values.
Notice the line mapping the attribute DESCRIPTION to DESC#. If you have blocks that contain multiple copies of the same attribute, for example, DESCRIPTION, you can map them to separate AutoCAD Electrical attributes such as DESC1, DESC2, DESC3. The "#" in the AutoCAD Electrical Attribute field, indicates that each time a DESCRIPTION attribute is found within a block, the AutoCAD Electrical attribute name should be incremented by 1 (starting with 1).
Project Options Existing VIA ECDS or Jr. Project (.VPJ) Specifies the ECDS project name. Enter your ECDS project name or browse for it. AutoCAD Electrical Project (.WDP) Specifies the AutoCAD Electrical project name. Enter an AutoCAD Electrical project name, either existing or new. If you are adding the drawings to an existing AutoCAD Electrical project make sure that you select that option, otherwise the .WDP project files are overwritten.
Drawing Options Your drawings are copied to another directory and converted; the original drawings are not changed. Copy Directory Specifies the path for the converted drawings. If the directory does not exist it is created. Drawing Configuration Sets up the drawing defaults that are used for each drawing. The defaults are read from your ECDS PROJECT.CFG file, if possible. AutoCAD Electrical presents a list of drawings in your ECDS project. Select the drawings you want to convert.
Linking results: ■ The selected text entities are replaced with an AutoCAD Electrical attribute. ■ Colors change to distinguish visually what was already converted as defined in the WD_M block. ■ Temporary lines display the link. Wire Connection Results: ■ Visual indicators (x) appear where the wire connection attributes were already applied. ■ Wire connection attributes, terminal attributes, and terminal description attributes are added.
It explodes attributes and blocks to geometry and text entities while maintaining the value previously defined in the attribute. 3 Select the wire layer from the grid to add wire lines to. The selected wire layer highlights in blue to indicate which layer is selected; the current wire layer highlights in gray. 4 Click Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Change/Convert Wire Type drop-down ➤ Change/Convert Wire Type. 5 Click Pick and select wire lines from the drawing to add to a wire layer. 6 Click OK.
5 Right-click to create the link. 6 (Optional) Link any other text entities to the proper attribute. 7 Right-click to exit the Linking command. Right-click a few times before exiting, if necessary. Add geometry and wire connections 1 Click Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Add Wire Connections. 2 Select the block to tie the wire connections to. 3 Select the endpoint of the wire or a position on a symbol. Press Shift, right-click, and select Endpoint from the menu to select the endpoint easily.
Use this tool to explode attributes and blocks to geometry and text entities while maintaining the value previously defined in the attributes. You can take advantage of the tagging tools to modify the text entities to attributes and the linking tools to make various blocks. NOTE Use AutoCAD Explode to convert Mtext to normal text for tagging and linking. Ribbon: Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Special Explode.
VERT.DWG, or PLCIO_V_CONVERT.DWG depending on the drawing properties) contains attributes found useful for PLC addressing. After the addressing is defined on the block, select a PLC Tag or place one into the symbol definition for use with AutoCAD Electrical. Tag Child Makes selected text entities an attributed block file with the TAG2 attribute visible. The template block file (HDV2_CONVERT.DWG or VDV2_CONVERT.DWG depending on the drawing properties) contains attributes used for a child component.
Tag Schematic Terminal Wire Number Makes the selected text entities an attributed block file with the TAGSTRIP and WIRENO attribute visible. The template block file (HT0W_CONVERT.DWG or VT0W_CONVERT.DWG depending on the drawing properties) contains attributes used for a terminal block component containing a wire number as the terminal number. Tag Schematic Terminal Wire Number Change Makes the selected text entities an attributed block file with the TAGSTRIP and TERM01 attribute visible.
panel component block definition, the attribute values on the panel component are hidden and the nameplate attributes DESC1-3 are added and made visible. Tag Panel Terminal - Terminal Number Makes selected text entities an attributed block file with the TERM01 terminal number attribute visible. The template block file (ACE_TERMT_CONVERT.DWG) contains attributes for terminal numbers.
Link PLC Address Description Links simple text to a PLC address attribute as PLC I/O address description attributes. During the conversion process, the text entity is removed and replaced with the next available PLC address description attribute, up to 5. Link Terminal Number Links simple text to a TAGSTRIP attribute as a terminal number attribute on an AutoCAD Electrical terminal block symbol. During the conversion process, the text entity is removed and replaced with the TERM01 or WIRENO attribute.
Link Split Tag Links another string of text to a tag attribute, creating a split tag. Create the device Tag using the TAG1, TAG, or P_TAG1 attributes. Then use this tool to select the existing TAG attribute on the drawing and link another string of text, creating a split tag situation. The first TAG becomes the Part1 of the split tag while the linked portion becomes the Part2 of the split tag.
Use this tool to add AutoCAD geometry to a template block file to be created as part of a unique block instance. It creates a block definition with the newly added geometry. You can later create a block file if the block is exploded. Ribbon: Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Add Geometry. Toolbar: Link Schematic Menu: Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ Link Schematic ➤ Add Geometry Command entry: AEGEOMETRY Select the block to add the geometry to.
Use this tool to select the tagged template block file and display everything (such as description, location, manufacturer, and catalog number codes) that has been linked to it. Ribbon: Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Show Links. Toolbar: Link Schematic Menu: Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ Link Schematic ➤ Show Links Command entry: AESHOWLINK Select a single link by picking or multiple links by windowing. Temporary line graphics show what was previously linked.
block names remain. It automatically continues to the next drawing if project-wide mode is selected. The mapping spreadsheet has two parts: Attribute mapping defaults and Block name mapping. Each section is a sheet within the spreadsheet and must follow a defined column format. The sheets must be in order, where sheet 1 defines the attribute mapping and sheet 2 defines the block mapping.
Column D/ Scale Multiplier If blank, the new block swaps in at the same scale as the existing block it replaces. If this field is not blank, the swapped block is scaled up or down per the multiplier value of the field. Column E / X-Y Offset If blank, the new block swaps in at the same XY coordinate as the existing block it replaces. If not blank and in the format of a coordinate pair, the swapped block inserts offset from the origin of the original block by this XY amount.
1 Click Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Block Replacement drop-down ➤ Block Replacement. 2 Select to run the block replacement for the entire project, the active drawing, or a selected component on the active drawing. 3 Click OK. 4 On the Select Mapping Spreadsheet dialog box, select the spreadsheet to use for mapping the blocks and attributes. 5 Click Open. If you select an existing spreadsheet the block replacement automatically begins.
Select to run the block replacement on the entire project, the active drawing, or a single symbol on the active drawing.
1666
Miscellaneous Tools 22 Overview of power check tools You can add information to your schematic components to indicate power source and load values using the supplied Power Check tools. Once these values are added, you can run the Power Load Check Report to scan the wire interconnections and report if there is too much load on a given power source. There are 3 tools to use for checking power source/load: Add/Edit Power Source/Load Levels Marks a component with a power source and load value.
example, if you apply a supply value to the left power bus on a ladder, there are a bunch of pilot lights and relay coils in the ladder. AutoCAD Electrical goes down the left bus and checks each connected rung. It reads through contact and terminals, but when it hits a load on a rung, it accumulates the load value (if present) and stops going any further on that rung. The utility still checks the other rungs tied to the lefthand bus and attempts to find more loads.
Select the component for the power source or load value. The value is added to an AutoCAD Electrical connection attribute. This dialog box contains a list of available connection points. If you select near the connection point for the power value it is preselected in the dialog box. Enter the power source and load value and an optional units value. These values are saved on the connection point as invisible xdata.
Menu: Wires ➤ Wire Numbers Miscellaneous ➤ Power Check ➤ Mark Component to Pass Power Command entry: AEPASSPWR Each selected component is displayed in the list. If the component already carries the PASSPWR flag, a * appears next to the tag. To set or unset the PASSPWR flag, click the tag of the component in the list.
■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: \Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\pneu_iso125 Recommended Settings for drawing pneumatic diagrams Setting Value Where this can be set Ladder Orientation Horizontal Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format Insert component This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with a custom menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon Menu Paths section of the Project properties: project settings tab on page 204.
NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable markers; and saved circuits. Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure. The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just above the menu tree structure. Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.
Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This value is opposite the default ladder rung orientation for the drawing. No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit. No tag Inserts the component, untagged (that is, without assigning a unique Component Tag).
■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name, image, or submenu title. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties. Options for the Symbol Preview window Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display the following options: ■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check mark.
Insert hydraulic components Insert hydraulic components Use the Insert Hydraulic Component tool to insert a component into the drawing. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ ➤ Insert Hydraulic Component. 2 On the Insert Component dialog box, select the starting orientation for the component: horizontal or vertical. 3 (Optional) If you want to turn off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing, select No edit dialog box.
Scale Factor 1 20 Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format Ladder Orientation Horizontal Horizontal Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format Insert component This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with a custom menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon Menu Paths section of the Project properties: project settings tab on page 204. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to modify the menu. The default icon menu can also be redefined in wd.env.
NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable markers; and saved circuits. Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure. The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just above the menu tree structure. Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.
Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This value is opposite the default ladder rung orientation for the drawing. No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit. No tag Inserts the component, untagged (that is, without assigning a unique Component Tag).
■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name, image, or submenu title. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties. Options for the Symbol Preview window Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display the following options: ■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check mark.
Insert P&ID components Insert P&ID components Use the Insert P&ID Component tool to insert a component into the drawing. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ ➤ Insert P&ID Components. 2 In the Insert Component dialog box, select the starting orientation for the component: horizontal or vertical. 3 (Optional) If you want to turn off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing, select No edit dialog box.
Scale Factor 1 20 Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format Ladder Orientation Vertical Vertical Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format Insert component This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with a custom menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon Menu Paths section of the Project properties: project settings tab on page 204. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to modify the menu. The default icon menu can also be redefined in wd.env.
NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable markers; and saved circuits. Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure. The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just above the menu tree structure. Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.
Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This value is opposite the default ladder rung orientation for the drawing. No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit. No tag Inserts the component, untagged (that is, without assigning a unique Component Tag).
■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name, image, or submenu title. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties. Options for the Symbol Preview window Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display the following options: ■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check mark.
Troubleshooting Tools Overview of real-time error checking Although AutoCAD Electrical checks for duplicated schematic component reference designations and wire numbers during the insert or edit process, you have the option of displaying the warning in real time. Real-time error checking is enabled by default in the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings on page 204 tab. If you enter an existing component tag/wire number during the insert/edit process, a warning dialog box displays.
Use the troubleshooting tools There are many tools to use for troubleshooting your AutoCAD Electrical drawing. Use the audit tool Use this tool to identify and clean up some types of problems that affect an AutoCAD Electrical drawing. The Electrical Audit tool displays a report of detected problems for the active project. You can save this file for reference or surf the file to view and correct the errors. 1 Click Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Electrical Audit.
Clean the drawings 1 Click Project tab ➤ Troubleshooting panel ➤ Clean DWG Utility. 2 On the Clean Drawing Utility dialog box, select the drawings to clean: drawings in the active project, a single drawing, or all drawings in a selected folder. 3 (Optional) Click Purge All to run the AutoCAD Purge command and purges all unused items (such as block definitions, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, and text styles). 4 Click OK.
Click Project tab ➤ Troubleshooting panel ➤ Command Trace drop-down ➤ Command Trace Off. Check, repair, or trace wire and gap pointers The Check/Repair Gap Pointers utility verifies that the invisible Xdata pointers on both sides of a wire gap/loop are valid. If not, appropriate pointers are established. The Check/Trace a Wire utility single steps through and highlights each connected wire of the selected wire network.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wires drop-down ➤ Check/Trace Wire. 2 Select a wire on the network. You can select "A" to show All Segments. If you prefer to step through wire by wire, press the spacebar. 3 Determine whether to pan or zoom the selected wire. The connected wire segments endpoints are shown in the command prompt area. Check multiple wires 1 Click Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ DWG Audit.
Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Electrical Audit Command entry: AEAUDIT When you run Electrical Audit, a progress bar shows the progress of the audit process. Once the audit is complete, a text box displays the total number of errors found. The Details option lists the detected problems. You can go to the location of an error within the project and correct the error. Project Displays the audit information for all the drawings in the active project.
Cable Exception Displays the duplicated cable and wire id for the active project. The report lists the duplicated cable tags or cable tags with duplicated wire id, error message, reference of the cable tag, and the drawing where the error occurs. Component - No Catalog Number Displays components with no bill of material part assignments. The report lists the component reference designation tag, component category, reference of the component tag, error message, and the drawing where the error occurs.
Contacts Displays any children without a parent schematic component. The report lists the component reference designation tag for the child without a parent, reference of the child component tag, error message, and the drawing where the error occurs. Recovery Tip Displays the recovery tip so that you can fix the error. Go To Goes to the error location within the project and correct the error. It is enabled when you select a single audit record in the dialog box.
Drawing Audit identifies and cleans up some of the problems that can affect an AutoCAD Electrical drawing. Save the error report file for reference or surf the file to view and correct errors. Audit drawing or project Specifies to run the audit on the active drawing or selected drawings in the active project. Previous Redisplays the last audit report that was run. You can then surf to the performed function, save the report, or print the report for reference.
Modify invisible data Modify invisible data For some functions AutoCAD Electrical adds invisible information to a block insert or even to a specific attribute. This invisible data is called Xdata. To add or modify this invisible data, AutoCAD Electrical provides an Xdata editor. Edit existing invisible data 1 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Xdata Editor. 2 Select an attribute in the drawing. 3 If Xdata exists for the attribute, select the Xdata to edit from the list in the dialog box.
4 Enter the name for the Xdata and its value. Click OK. 5 Click Save Changes to update the selected block or attribute with the Xdata changes. Xdata editor For some functions AutoCAD Electrical adds invisible information to a block insert or even to a specific attribute. This invisible data is called Xdata. To add or modify this invisible data, AutoCAD Electrical provides an Xdata editor. Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Xdata Editor.
1696
Tutorials 23 Introduction AutoCAD Electrical currently supports the following industry standards: JIC (US), IEC (Europe), JIS (Japan), GB (China) and AS (Australia). Although AutoCAD Electrical supports many standards, these exercises follow the JIC standard and sample drawing set. The exercises are grouped into main topics. Each main topic contains one or more individual exercises. You can perform the main topics in any order but perform the exercises within a main topic in order.
Backup exercise files Backup exercise files are found at Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs. If you make a mistake while working through the exercises, browse to and copy the demo files to your project folder. Completed exercise files for each tutorial are found at Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Completed\{tutorial_name}\.
5 Click Next on the first screen. 6 Select AB and Siemens on the Manufacturer Contents Selection screen and click Next. 7 Click Next on the Symbol Libraries screen. 8 Click Next to continue. Projects Projects - Introduction Create a project and add drawings with Project Manager. Time required 10 minutes Prerequisites: Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Projects to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade
■ Create a project ■ Set project properties ■ Create a drawing ■ Add drawings to a project ■ View drawings in a project Working with projects AutoCAD Electrical is a project-based system. An ASCII text with a .wdp extension defines each project. This project file contains a list of project information, default project settings, drawing properties, and drawing file names. You can have an unlimited number of projects; however, only one project can be active at a time.
Create an AutoCAD Electrical project 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. 2 In the Project Manager, click the New Project tool. NOTE You can also use the Project Manager to open an existing project. In the Project Manager, click the project selection arrow and select Open Project. 3 In the Create New Project dialog box, specify: Name: AEGS A name must be entered to define any of the project properties. The .wdp extension is not required in the edit box. 4 Make sure wddemo.
Set project properties 1 In the Project Properties dialog box, click the Components tab. 2 In the Component Tag Format section, verify that Line Reference is selected. This selection creates unique reference-based tags when multiple components of the same family are located at the same reference location. When reference-based tagging is used, a suffix variable is required to keep components of the same family type unique.
6 Click OK. Working with drawings A single project file can have drawings located in many different directories. There is no limit to the number of drawings in a project. You can add drawings to your project at any time. When you create a drawing, using the New Drawing tool, it is automatically added to the active project. Many of the drawing settings used by AutoCAD Electrical are stored in a smart block on the drawing named WD_M.dwg.
5 In the Create New Drawing dialog box, click OK. NOTE You could click OK-Properties to display the Drawing Properties dialog box. This dialog box has options like the options found in the Project Properties dialog box. It defines drawing-specific settings that are maintained inside the WD_M block of the drawing. 6 In the Project Manager, double-click the project name (AEGS) to display the drawing files. AEGS11 is the only file in the list.
NOTE Two projects can reference the same drawing file. However, if both projects try to modify the same drawing with a project-wide tagging or cross-referencing function, it can lead to conflicts. The drawing order in the Project Manager determines how AutoCAD Electrical processes the drawings during project-wide operations such as resequencing and wire numbering. 4 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Reorder Drawings. 5 In the Reorder Drawings dialog box, select AEGS10.
2 In the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box, Drawing File section, specify: Description 1: Connector Drawing 3 Click OK. 4 In the Project Manager, select AEGS10.dwg. 5 In the Project Manager, Details section, review the drawing descriptions. The drawing details update when you highlight a drawing file and remain visible until a new drawing file is selected.
View project drawings when a drawing is open 1 In the Project Manager, double-click AEGS04.dwg. 2 To view the drawings, Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Previous DWG. or Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Next DWG. A new window opens and the original window closes when you click the navigation tools unless you hold the Shift key while clicking the tools.
Create a title block and link it to the Title Block Update. Select either the WD_TB attribute method or the WDT file method, and perform only the exercises for that method. The same files are used for both methods. Time required 40 minutes Prerequisites: Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Title Block to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs Windows Vista, Windows 7 Users\{us
AutoCAD Electrical uses two methods to map the AutoCAD Electrical values to attributes on the title block: ■ WD_TB attribute method - mapping information embedded on the title block. This option is self-contained in the drawing and requires no external file. It is limited to the number of characters that can be placed on a single attribute. ■ WDT file method - external attribute mapping file.
Select method Select either the WD_TB attribute method on page 1710 or the WDT file method on page 1724, and perform only the exercises for that method. WD_TB attribute method Create a title block IMPORTANT Select either the WD_TB attribute method or the WDT file method and perform only the exercises for that method. The same files are used for either method. The title block is a border drawing inserted as an AutoCAD block on another drawing.
2 Zoom in for attribute definition placement. 3 Enter ATTDEF at the command prompt to insert attribute definition objects. NOTE When the border drawing is inserted as a block on another drawing, attribute definition objects become attributes.
4 Enter the Tag name SH#. 5 Set any other attribute definition properties and values, such as text style, height, and justification. 6 Select OK. 7 Specify the insertion point.
8 Repeat for each attribute definition for the title block as shown. 9 Enter SAVEAS at the command prompt. 10 Enter File name: acade_title. 11 Select Files of type: AutoCAD Drawing (*.dwg) 12 Click Save.
Title Block Setup - WD_TB attribute method An invisible attribute on a title block of the drawing, named "WD_TB," is encoded with the mapping information. This method eliminates the need for an external mapping text file. 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. 2 If AEGS is not the active project, activate the AEGS project. If AEGS is in the list of open projects: ■ Select AEGS and right-click. ■ Click Activate.
NOTE If no attribute definition objects are found on the drawing, an alert displays. 7 In the Title Block Setup dialog box, select the attribute from each list to map to its corresponding project description line. TITLE#1 ➤ LINE1 TITLE#2 ➤ LINE2 JOB# ➤ LINE4 DRAWNBY ➤ LINE6 8 Click Drawing Values to assign drawing specific values. 9 Select the attribute from each list to map to its corresponding drawing value.
10 Click OK. Title Block Setup updates the WD_TB attribute definition with the selected mappings. If a WD_TB attribute definition does not exist, Title Block Setup inserts it at 0,0. 11 Save the drawing. Show Me: Title Block Setup - WD_TB attribute method Click the Play arrow to start the animation. Create a drawing template A drawing template file is used to provide consistency in the drawings that you create by providing standard styles and settings.
8 On the Insert dialog box, make sure the Explode option is not checked. 9 Click OK. 10 Specify the insertion point at 0,0,0. 11 If prompted for attribute values, leave them blank. NOTE Attributes are invisible if no default values are assigned. 12 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties. The alert displays. 13 Click OK to insert the WD_M block. 14 Set the default drawing properties such as component tagging, wire numbering, cross-referencing, and so on.
17 Add wire layers as needed. Set the properties, color, linetype, and lineweight for each layer. For example: ■ In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, click inside the Wire Color column for a blank row and enter RED for a new wire layer. ■ Click inside the Size column and enter 12 for the size. The Layer Name RED_12 is automatically created. ■ Click Color. ■ Select Red and click OK. ■ Click OK. The layer is created and defined as a wire layer. 18 Enter SAVEAS at the command prompt.
6 In the Create New Drawing dialog box, click OK. 7 On the Apply Project Defaults to Drawing Settings dialog box, click No. Project Manager creates the drawing using the template containing the title block. Project description lines The Title Block Update utility can update attributes on your title block with the project description lines. 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. 2 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS and select Activate.
3 Enter values: Sheet: 11 Drawing: 0211 NOTE Drawing Description 1 and 2 were defined when the drawing was created. 4 Click OK. 5 Save the drawing. Title Block Update 1 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS and select Activate. 2 In the Project Manager, double-click to expand the AEGS project. 3 Double-click drawing AEGS11 to open it. 4 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Title Block Update. The Update Title Block dialog box displays.
6 Click OK Project-Wide. 7 Select drawings AEGS01 through AEGS05, and AEGS11 to process. Click Process v. NOTE Drawings AEGS01 through AEGS05 are supplied with the WD_TB attribute on the title block for this exercise. 8 Click OK.
Customize project description labels The title block and project description dialog boxes in AutoCAD Electrical display generic labels like “LINE1”, “LINE2”, and so on. You can change these labels so they match up with the link to the title block. For example, you have linked the AutoCAD Electrical data “LINE4” value to the “JOB#” attribute on the title block. What you want to see when AutoCAD Electrical displays a title block-related dialog box is not “LINE4” but “Job Number.
LINE7 = Engineer LINE8 = Checked By LINE9 = Scale 3 Save the file as AEGS_WDTITLE.WDL in the project folder. ■ Windows XP: Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs ■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs 4 Switch over to AutoCAD Electrical. 5 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. 6 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS and select Activate.
WDT file method Create a title block IMPORTANT Select either the WD_TB attribute method or the WDT file method and perform only the exercises for that method. The same files are used for either method. The title block is a border drawing inserted as an AutoCAD block on another drawing. The title block border drawing can be inserted as a block on an AutoCAD drawing template file. If your drawing title block consists of an AutoCAD block with attributes, AutoCAD Electrical can link to it.
2 Zoom in for attribute definition placement. 3 Enter ATTDEF at the command prompt to insert attribute definition objects. NOTE When the border drawing is inserted as a block on another drawing, attribute definition objects become attributes. 4 Enter the Tag name SH#.
5 Set any other attribute definition properties and values, such as text style, height, and justification. 6 Select OK. 7 Specify the insertion point.
8 Repeat for each attribute definition for the title block as shown. 9 Enter SAVEAS at the command prompt. 10 Enter File name: acade_title. 11 Select Files of type: AutoCAD Drawing (*.dwg) 12 Click Save.
Title Block Setup - WDT file method A text file defines which AutoCAD Electrical values are mapped to the drawing title block attributes. Use the Title Block Setup utility to create or modify the WDT mapping file. 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. 2 If AEGS is not the active project, activate the AEGS project. If AEGS is in the list of open projects: ■ Select AEGS and right-click. ■ Click Activate. If AEGS is not in the list of open projects: ■ Select the project list drop-down.
7 Click Active Drawing. NOTE If running Title Block Setup on a drawing with ACADE_TITLE inserted as a block, select Pick Block and select on the block. 8 Click OK. Title Block Setup reads the attribute definitions and the Title Block Setup dialog box displays. Each drop-down list contains all the attribute definition objects found on the drawing. NOTE If no attribute definition objects are found on the drawing, an alert displays.
TITLE#2 ➤ LINE2 JOB# ➤ LINE4 DRAWNBY ➤ LINE6 10 Click Drawing Values to assign drawing specific values. 11 Select the attribute from each list to map to its corresponding drawing value. DWG# ➤ Drawing (%D value) SH# ➤ Sheet (%S value) SHTS ➤ Sheet Maximum TITLE#3 ➤ Drawing Description 1 TITLE#4 ➤ Drawing Description 2 12 Click OK. 13 Title Block Setup creates AEGS.WDT with the selected mappings. Show Me: Title Block Setup - WDT file method Click the Play arrow to start the animation.
By default, drawing template files are stored in the template folder, where they are easily accessible. 1 Enter QNEW at the command prompt to start a new drawing. 2 Select the acad.dwt template. 3 Click Open. 4 Enter INSERT at the command prompt. 5 Click Browse. 6 Navigate to and select the title block ACADE_TITLE.DWG created for the border. 7 Click Open. 8 On the Insert dialog box, make sure the Explode option is not checked. 9 Click OK. 10 Specify the insertion point at 0,0,0.
13 Click OK to insert the WD_M block. 14 Set the default drawing properties such as component tagging, wire numbering, cross-referencing, and so on. NOTE No specific changes are needed for this tutorial. 15 Click OK. 16 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type. 17 Add wire layers as needed. Set the properties, color, linetype, and lineweight for each layer.
Use the template 1 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS and select Activate. 2 In the Project Manager, click the New Drawing tool. 3 In the Create New Drawing dialog box, specify: Name: AEGS11 Description 1: Title Block Description 2: Exercise 4 Click Browse next to the Template edit box. 5 In the Select template dialog box, select AEGS_ELECTRICAL.dwt, and click Open. 6 In the Create New Drawing dialog box, click OK.
Line 4: Job #01000 Line 6: {your name} 5 Click OK. Drawing values The Title Block Update utility can update attributes on your title block with certain drawing property values. 1 In the Project Manager, double-click to expand the AEGS project. 2 Right-click on drawing AEGS11 and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. 3 Enter values: Sheet: 11 Drawing: 0211 NOTE Drawing Description 1 and 2 were defined when the drawing was created. 4 Click OK. 5 Save the drawing.
5 Select the project and drawing values to update on the title block. ■ LINE1 ■ LINE2 ■ LINE4 ■ LINE6 ■ Drawing Description: 1 and 2 ■ Drawing (%D value) ■ Sheet (%S value) ■ Sheet maximum ■ Resequence sheet %S values: 1 6 Click OK Project-Wide. 7 Select drawings AEGS06 through AEGS11 to process. Click Process v. NOTE Drawings AEGS01 through AEGS05 are supplied with the WD_TB attribute on the title block for this exercise.
8 Click OK. Customize project description labels The title block and project description dialog boxes in AutoCAD Electrical display generic labels like “LINE1”, “LINE2”, and so on. You can change these labels so they match up with the link to the title block. For example, you have linked the AutoCAD Electrical data “LINE4” value to the “JOB#” attribute on the title block. What you want to see when AutoCAD Electrical displays a title block-related dialog box is not “LINE4” but “Job Number.
LINE5 = Date LINE6 = Drawn By LINE7 = Engineer LINE8 = Checked By LINE9 = Scale 3 Save the file as AEGS_WDTITLE.WDL in the project folder. ■ Windows XP: Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs ■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs 4 Switch over to AutoCAD Electrical. 5 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.
Wiring Wiring - Introduction Insert and modify wires and ladders. Time required 20 minutes Prerequisites: Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Wiring to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs Windows Vista, Windows 7 Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Wiring to Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs You learn to: ■ Understand
About wires AutoCAD Electrical treats AutoCAD® line entities as wires when the lines are placed on an AutoCAD Electrical defined wire layer. The number of wire layers available in AutoCAD Electrical is unlimited. These lines get tagged with wire numbers and show up in various wire connection reports. Two wire segments connect if the end of one wire segment touches or falls within a small trap distance of any part of the other wire segment.
Insert wiring 1 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS and select Activate. 2 In the Project Manager, double-click AEGS to expand the drawing list. 3 In the Project Manager, Project Drawing List, double-click AEGS04.dwg. 4 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the drawing. Make sure the hot and neutral vertical wires are displayed. 5 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Ladder drop-down ➤ Add Rung.
Specify wire start or [wireType/X=show connections]: Select the top wire at line reference 403(1) Specify wire end or [V=start Vertical/H=start Horizontal/Continue]: Select the lower wire at line reference 404 (2) The color of temporary graphics changes for a new wire when AutoCAD Electrical can connect the wire to an existing wire. Each component wire connection point displays as a green x at the wire connection when you enter X + ENTER during wire insertion.
Wire segments are trimmed back to a connecting dot, a component, or completely if neither is encountered along the segment. Any connection dots that are no longer needed are removed. The trimmed wire resembles the following image. Insert a single-phase ladder You can insert a ladder into a drawing at any time. A drawing can have multiple ladders, as well as single-phase and three-phase ladders. The ladders can have different parameters, such as rung spacing, number of rungs, and ladder width.
You do not specify the Length since it is automatically calculated once the first Reference, Index, and Rungs are specified. NOTE Reference 519 represents Page 5, Reference 19. 4 Click OK. 5 Respond to the prompts as follows: Specify start position of first rung or [wireType]: Enter 16, 21 press ENTER NOTE You can also specify the start position of the first rung by left-clicking a location on the drawing with your mouse. A single phase ladder is inserted in the drawing.
Resequence ladder line reference numbers 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Ladder drop-down ➤ Revise Ladder. The Modify Line Reference Numbers dialog box displays a list of ladders in the drawing. 2 Change the beginning line reference numbers for each ladder. Change the first ladder to 101 (column 1, line 01) and the second ladder to 201 (column 2, line 01). 3 Click OK. The reference numbers update along each ladder.
Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Schematic components to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs Windows Vista, Windows 7 Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Schematic components to Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs You learn to: ■ Understand schematic components ■ Insert a parent component ■ Scoot a component ■ Insert a child component ■ Al
AutoCAD Electrical supplies a schematic symbol dialog box for finding and inserting schematic components. It also triggers some additional features. ■ Automatic wire breaks ■ Component tagging ■ Real-time cross-referencing ■ Component annotation Inserting components AutoCAD Electrical employs a parent/child relationship for schematic components. The parent coil symbol and the child contact symbols represent a relay coil with a certain number of contacts.
8 Respond to the prompts as follows: Specify insertion point: Position the component on the wire at line reference 403 near the neutral wire and click (1) If you select directly on the wire or near to it, the coil symbol breaks the underlying ladder wire and reconnects. If the underlying wire did not break, you did not select close enough to the wire. To try again, click Cancel on the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. Right-click or press ENTER to repeat the command. Turning on Snap helps (0.
MANUFACTURER: AB TYPE: TYPE P COIL: 120VAC 13 Change the catalog assignment to 700-P200A1. 14 Click the Show BOM Details check box. The dialog box expands to show the BOM information. Review the BOM information associated with the selected part number. 15 In the Parts catalog dialog box, click OK. The selected manufacturer code and catalog number display in the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. When you click OK on the dialog box, the values transfers to the symbol.
16 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Description section, specify: Line 1: MASTER CONTROL Line 2: RELAY Up to three lines of description text can be entered as a description for components. If the third description line is unavailable, the symbol does not carry an attribute for a third line of description. NOTE You can specify a description by entering text or by clicking Defaults to select from a list of standard component descriptions.
20 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK. Any values entered here are saved as attribute values on the symbol itself. Relocating components If the component was not inserted in the correct location, you can scoot the component. Use the Scoot tool to select a component or wire number and slide it back and forth along the wire while keeping everything connected. You can select a wire or a whole rung of circuitry and scoot it to a new position.
Scoot a component 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components drop-down ➤ Scoot. 2 Respond to the prompts as follows: Select component, wire, or wire number for SCOOT: Select the component that was inserted at line reference 403 The cursor changes to a box. Select component, wire, or wire number for SCOOT: to Move the cursor to the right and click, right-click to exit the command The component moves to its new location.
4 Respond to the prompts as follows: Specify insertion point: Position the cursor on the wire at line reference 404 near the hot wire and click (1) The Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box displays. Notice that AutoCAD Electrical did not automatically assign a tag name for the relay contact; there is just a generic “CR” in the edit box. Determine the relay contact tag name. A relay contact is a child component that must link to a parent relay coil on a drawing in the active project.
8 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, verify that the following options are specified: Component Tag: CR403 Description: Line 1: MASTER CONTROL Description: Line 2: RELAY Cross-reference: 403 Location code: MCAB5 Pins: Pin 1: A1X Pins: Pin 2: A1Y 9 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, click OK. The child component is inserted. It is cross-referenced in real time. The coil is annotated with the line reference number of the new child contact.
Aligning components Align the normally open relay contact with an existing component. After you insert a component, you can align or edit it as necessary. Align a component 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components drop-down ➤ Align. 2 Respond to the prompts as follows: Pick component to align with (Horizontal/): Select the normally open limit switch component near the hot wire at line reference 406 (1) A dashed line displays.
Insert a system reset button 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. 2 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click Push Buttons. 3 In the JIC: Push Buttons dialog box, click Push Button NO.
Insert a pilot light 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. 2 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click Pilot Lights. 3 In the JIC: Pilot Lights dialog box, click Green Press to Test. 4 Respond to the prompts as follows: Specify insertion point: Position the pilot light on the wire at line reference 404 near the neutral wire and click (2) TIP Having Snap turned on makes positioning the pilot light easier.
Insert a push button for emergency stop 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. 2 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click Push Buttons. 3 In the JIC: Push Buttons dialog box, click Mushroom Head NC.
Editing components You can go back to a component at any time and change it. You can change description, tag, catalog number, location code, terminal numbers, and rating values using the Edit Component tool. Insert a child contact 1 Zoom in on the blank ladder rung at line reference 410. 2 Press F9 to turn on SNAP . 3 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. 4 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click Selector Switches.
7 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, click OK. Insert a pilot light 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. 2 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click Pilot Lights. 3 In the JIC: Pilot Lights dialog box, click Blue Press to Test.
2 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit. NOTE You can also right-click on a component and select Edit Component from the context menu. 3 Respond to the prompts as follows: Select component/cable/location box to EDIT: Select the selector switch on line reference 410 4 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, Component Tag section, click Parent/Sibling.
AutoCAD Electrical reads the sibling contact and transfers the appropriate annotation to your new switch contact. 6 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, click OK. The sibling contact information displays on the drawing. Linking components In this exercise, you link the selector switch you inserted to the existing RAM MODE selector switch residing on line reference 406 through 408 using dashed link lines.
Specify wire start or [wireType/X=show connections]: Click the wire connection point on the right-hand side of the switch contact (4) Specify wire end or [Continue]: Drag the wire to the right and click the wire connection point on the left-hand side of the blue pilot light (5) Specify wire start or [Scoot/wireType/X=show connections]: Click the left-hand side of the switch contact Specify wire end or [Continue]: Drag the wire to the left and click the left-hand vertical bus wire The wire automatically
The annotation of the contact is changed to invisible. A dashed link line is drawn from the bottom of the upper contact to the top of your new contact. Your finished schematic resembles the following: NOTE The Scoot command is fully compatible with dashed line links. Scooting one contact left or right causes both links to update automatically. You can even scoot the horizontal “jog” in the dashed link line up or down.
4 On the Parts Catalog dialog box each column has an edit field to enter search text. Enter: Manufacturer: AB Type: 30.5mm Voltage: 120VAC XFMR Each column also has a drop-down list containing the available field values. You can set the filter criteria to get a different set of catalog numbers. Each time you make a selection from one of these lists, the catalog selection is filtered. NOTE If there are too many unique values to display, the list is not available.
The entries are prefilled with the information for the currently assigned catalog part number. It is easy to add a new entry with similar information. 2 In the Add Catalog Record dialog box, specify: Catalog: BOG-123B Manufacturer: BOGUS The catalog lookup works most efficiently when field values that are meant to be the same are the same in both spelling and capitalization. The drop-down list for each field helps you maintain consistency as you add new catalog items.
AutoCAD Electrical provides three blank user fields for your own internal use. Each can be a maximum of 24 characters wide and are extracted into BOM reports along with all the other fields. NOTE You can add catalog entries with a subassembly. To link a subassembly with the main, the catalog part numbers share the same codes. In the Edit Catalog Record dialog box, select As main->sub, enter the ASSYCODE, and click OK. The ASSYCODE must be unique since it links the main catalog item with subassembly items.
Wire layers Wire layers - Introduction Create and modify wire layers. Time required 10 minutes Prerequisites: Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Wire layers Wire layers | 1767
to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs Windows Vista, Windows 7 Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Wire layers to Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs You learn to: ■ Create wire layers ■ Change wire layer assignments Creating a wire layer Create wire layer 1 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS and select Activate.
7 Click Color in the Layer section. Select blue and click OK. NOTE If you want the new wire layer to be the default, click Mark Selected as Default. 8 Click OK. Changing a wire layer assignment When a wire is inserted, the wire ends up on the first valid wire layer as defined in the Drawing Properties dialog box. You can place wires on different wire layers. You can use the AutoCAD® PROPERTIES command to move a wire to the correct layer or you can use the Wire Layer utility.
4 Click OK. 5 Respond to the prompts as follows: Select Objects: Window from left to right around the wires as shown and press ENTER Before you press ENTER, the wires display as dashed lines to indicate that they have been selected. Once you press ENTER the lines display in red indicating that they have been moved to the RED_18AWG wire layer. 6 Repeat to move any other wiring onto another wire layer. Circuits Circuits - Introduction Create circuits with Circuit Builder. Save and insert a saved circuit.
Prerequisites: Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Circuits to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs Windows Vista, Windows 7 Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Circuits to Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs You learn to: ■ Move a circuit ■ Insert a circuit using Circuit Builder ■ Save and insert a saved circuit ■ In
This circuit has component tags ■ “FU215” on the 3-pole fuse ■ “215CBL” on the multi-conductor cable ■ “DS215” on the disconnect switch ■ “MOT216” on the motor 5 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Circuit drop-down ➤ Move Circuit. 6 Respond to the prompts as follows: Select Objects: Window select the circuit on line reference 215 to capture the connection wire and dots that tie in to the vertical bus, right-click Press F9 to turn on SNAP .
7 In the Update Related Components dialog box, click Yes-Update. Related child references on the active drawing update to match the newly retagged parent components. 8 In the Update other drawings dialog box, click OK. Related child components and panel layout references on other drawings update to match the parent components on the moved circuit. 9 If asked to save the drawing, click OK. 10 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Surfer drop-down ➤ Surfer. 11 Select FU214 on the drawing.
Moving the motor circuit up one line reference spacing opened up a bit more room to add a new circuit below it. The next step is to extend the 3-phase bus down to line reference 218 and over to the right to begin building a new motor circuit. Extending the 3-phase bus 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Trim Wire.
5 Click OK. 6 Respond to the prompts as follows: Select existing wire to begin multi-phase bus connection: Select the bottom corner of the left-most vertical bus on line reference 214 as shown Select existing wire to begin multi-phase bus connection: to Pull the cursor down to line reference 218. Temporary graphics show the proposed routing of the extended bus. 7 Click to create the wires. 8 Right-click to exit the command.
The 3-phase bus and wire connection dot symbols are inserted on the drawing. Insert and configure a circuit You now construct a new motor circuit on the extended 3-phase bus. Insert and configure the circuit 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder. 2 The Circuit Selection dialog box displays.
3 Expand 3ph Motor Circuit. 4 Select Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing. 5 Change the Rung Spacing: Horizontal to 0.5. 6 Select Configure. 7 Specify insertion point at rung 217.
Circuit Configuration A circuit is made up of individual circuit elements and the wiring that connects them. Circuit Builder inserts a template drawing. This template contains the base wiring for the circuit and strategically positioned “marker blocks”. The “marker blocks” control what circuit elements are presented in the Circuit Configuration dialog box. For example, a “marker block” indicates the need for a Disconnecting Means in the circuit.
Setup & Annotation section: The options within this section change according to your selections in the Circuit Elements and Select sections. Type in values or select the Browse button to access a lookup table. Select an entry from the lookup table to obtain values for the individual settings. If the circuit option is a component, the catalog lookup opens. 3 In the Circuit Elements section, select Control transformer and circuit non-reversing. In the Select section, select Include control circuit: None.
4 In the Circuit Elements section, select Power Factor correction. In the Select section, select Include power factor correction capacitor: None.
5 In the Circuit Elements section, select Overloads. In the Select section, select Overload elements: Thermal, Include N.O. auxiliary contact: No. 6 In the Circuit Elements section, select Motor terminal connections. In the Select section, select Motor connection terminals: Round.
7 In the Circuit Elements section, select Cable marker. In the Select section, select Cable: None.
8 In the Circuit Elements section, select Safety disconnect at the load. In the Select section, select Safety disconnect: Disconnect switch, Include N.O. auxiliary contact: No. 9 Select the Insert all circuit elements tool. Circuit Builder inserts each of the selected circuit elements. 10 Select Done. NOTE See the Circuit Builder topics later in this section for more examples.
Save and insert a circuit AutoCAD®Electrical makes saving and inserting pre-drawn circuits easy and convenient. You can save and insert from a user circuits page on the Insert Component icon menu. You can also use the normal AutoCAD® WBlock command to save selected circuitry to disk. Use the Insert Circuit command to insert WBlocked circuits into the active drawing. Save your circuit for use in the future 1 Zoom around the circuit so that it fills your screen.
Select the left-most wire connection point where the circuit ties into the left-hand vertical bus wire Select objects: Window around the circuit from left to right to capture all the components and wiring, but exclude the vertical bus, press ENTER 7 On the Save Circuit to Icon Menu dialog box, click OK. The circuit is saved to your AutoCAD Electrical user folder. It can be quickly accessed from the Insert Component icon menu or from the Insert Saved Circuit tool.
4 On the Save Circuit to Icon Menu dialog box, click Add ➤ New circuit. 5 On the Create New Circuit dialog box, specify: Name: Motor starter circ Image file: Active and Create PNG from current screen image File name: UserCirc2 Click OK.
5 Respond to the prompts as follows: Specify insertion point: Place the circuit insertion point on the vertical bus wire at line reference 427, left-click to insert the circuit. The circuit inserts and updates. Tags automatically update to reflect the new line reference number, and parent/child relationships defined inside of the circuit update accordingly. 6 Right-click the M427 coil symbol and select Edit Component. 7 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, specify: Description Line 2: MOTOR NO.
The tag M427 is now displayed in the Component Tag edit box. Notice that the description, cross-reference, and location code boxes have also updated. 5 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, click OK. 6 In the Update linked components dialog box, click OK. The components are now linked. If you go back to drawing AEGS04.dwg and look at the motor starter coil, it shows references to these three child contacts (plus one seal contact around PB427).
6 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, specify: Description Line 2: MOTOR NO. 3 Click OK. 7 In the Update related components dialog box, click Yes-Update. 8 Open drawing AEGS02.dwg and zoom to the blank area at line references 204-206. 9 Repeat the steps for inserting a saved circuit, but this time insert the Motor Circ - Fusible DS circuit. 10 In the Circuit Scale dialog box, click OK.
Insert a saved circuit using WBlock Another method for saving and inserting circuits is to use the AutoCAD WBlock command to save the circuit to disk. A separate Insert Circuit command is used to browse to a selected saved circuit and insert it into the active drawing. This method allows unlimited circuits to be constructed and saved to disk. They can be arranged into a set of shared subfolders for easy browsing and retrieval using the Insert Circuit command.
7 In the Write Block dialog box, enter a name for the saved circuit. Take note of the location where the drawing file is being saved. 8 Click OK. Inserting a WBlocked circuit 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit drop-down ➤ Insert WBlocked Circuit. 2 In the Insert Wblocked Circuit dialog box, browse to the folder containing the circuit you saved. 3 Select the WBlocked motor circuit, and click Open.
Insert a one-line motor control circuit In this exercise, you insert and configure a one-line motor control circuit using Circuit Builder. ➤ In the Project Manager, Project Drawing List, double-click One-Line.dwg. One-Line.dwg contains a one-line bus. This wire is drawn on a wire layer defined as No Wire Numbering. Such a wire layer behaves normally for inserting, breaking, and scooting components. These wires also show up in the from/to report.
The Circuit Configuration dialog box displays. 6 In the Circuit Elements section, select Motor Setup.
7 In the Setup & Annotations: Motor Setup section, select the Browse button. The Motor Table Not Found dialog box displays. The sample project is set up to use the NEC standard. However, a MOTOR_NEC table is not supplied, only a default MOTOR table. 8 Select Use default table. The Select Motor dialog box displays. 9 Select Type: Induction, Voltage (V): 480, and Frequency (HZ): 60. 10 Select the row that shows Load: 15, Units: HP, Phase: 3, Speed (RPM): 3600, FLA (A) 18.6.
This option directs Circuit Builder to use a de-rating factor for an elevated ambient temperature. These values are defined in the electrical standards database file. 15 Select 36~40C from the drop-down list. The de-rating factor is extracted from the electrical standards database file and entered in the dialog box. The wire size grid is adjusted based on the new total de-rating factor. Based on this de-rating factor the minimum wire size can change. 16 Select the Run distance option.
Disconnecting means: Disconnect switch and fuses Motor starter: Yes Power factor correction: No Overloads: None Terminal strip or connector: None Cable marker: Yes Safety disconnect at the load: None 25 Click to insert all circuit elements. 26 Click Done. 27 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit.
28 Select the motor symbol. 29 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, enter FIELD for the Location code and MY MOTOR for Description Line 1. 30 Save the drawing. Insert a one-line dual power feed circuit In this part of the exercise, you insert a dual power feed circuit. A dual circuit has two distinct circuits running off the same bus-tap. Each circuit can be independently configured. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder.
The Circuit Configuration dialog box displays. Notice that some circuit elements have a “(2)” prefix. These elements make up the second circuit in the dual circuit. 6 In the Circuit Elements section, select Load Setup. 7 In the Setup & Annotations: Load Setup section, select the Browse button. The Select Load dialog box displays. 8 Select Type: Transformer, Voltage (V): 480, and Phase: 3. 9 Select an entry from the grid and click OK.
12 In the Setup & Annotations: Load Setup section, select the Browse button. The Select Load dialog box displays. 13 Select Type: Transformer, Voltage (V): 480, and Phase: 3. 14 Select an entry from the grid and click OK. 15 Continue selecting Circuit Elements for the second circuit: (2) Load: Source arrow (2) Disconnecting means: Disconnect switch and fuses (2) Terminal strip or connector: None (2) Cable marker: None 16 Click to insert all circuit elements. 17 Click Done.
18 Save the drawing. Reference an existing circuit When a new circuit is inserted, you can reference an existing circuit picked from a list of circuits pulled from the active project. The components, values, descriptions, and tag assignments from the selected circuit, become defaults for the new circuit. Tags are recalculated if the option “Retag new components” is selected. In this exercise, you insert a 3-phase motor control circuit referencing the one-line motor control circuit inserted earlier.
3 Click Yes to apply the project default values to the drawing settings. 4 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Ladder drop-down ➤ Insert Ladder. 5 Insert a 3-phase ladder. 6 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder. 7 The Circuit Selection dialog box displays. 8 Select 3ph Motor Circuit: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing. 9 Select Reference Existing Circuit. 10 Select the List button. The Existing Circuits dialog box displays.
It directs Circuit Builder to use the tags from the one-line circuit for the components with matching marker block code values. 14 Select Configure. 15 Select an insertion point on the bus for the new circuit. 16 Verify that the same circuit elements as the referenced one-line motor circuit are selected. The default options are based on the referenced circuit.
Circuit Elements Select Power Factor correction Include power factor correction capacitor: None Overloads Overload elements: None Include N.O. auxiliary contact: No Motor terminal connections Motor connection terminals: None Cable marker Cable: Yes Safety disconnect at the load Safety disconnect: None Include N.O. auxiliary contact: No 17 Click to insert all circuit elements. 18 Click Done. The circuit is inserted and the component values from the one-line circuit are applied.
Surf Surf - Introduction Move between related components with Surfer. Time required 10 minutes Prerequisites: Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Surf to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs Windows Vista, Windows 7 Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Surf to Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs You learn to: ■ Use the Su
4 Zoom on the upper left-hand portion of the first ladder column. 5 Click Projects tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Surfer drop-down ➤ Surfer. 6 Click anywhere on relay coil CR407. All instances of CR407 appear in the Surf dialog box. 7 Select the reference on sheet 6. 8 Click Go To. The instance of CR407 on sheet 6 is surfed to and displayed in the drawing next to the Surf dialog box.
9 Select the reference on sheet 9. 10 Click Go To. You can edit or delete the component using options in the Surf dialog box. 11 Double-click the first entry in the Surf dialog box to return to the original AEGS04.dwg drawing. 12 Click Close. NOTE If AutoCAD Electrical senses that a change has been made to the drawing while surfing, drawing files are saved. .
Block swap Block swap - Introduction Swap components while maintaining wire connections with Swap/Update Block. Time required 10 minutes Prerequisites: Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Block swap to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs Windows Vista, Windows 7 Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Block swap to Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {
Swap switches while keeping wire connections 1 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS and select Activate. 2 In the Project Manager, double-click AEGS to expand the drawing list. 3 In the Project Manager, Project Drawing List, double-click AEGS04.dwg. 4 Zoom in on the limit switch on line reference 406. 5 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Swap/Update Block.
The limit switch symbol disappears and the proximity switch symbol inserts. All existing text annotation transfers to the new symbols and the wires reconnect. PLC PLC - Introduction Insert PLC modules and connected devices. Time required 30 minutes Prerequisites: Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\PLC to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs Windows Vista, Windows 7 Users\
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs You learn to: ■ Understand PLC parametric build ■ Insert a PLC module ■ Remove ladder rungs ■ Use multiple insert component ■ Annotate PLC I/O descriptions Inserting PLC modules AutoCAD Electrical generates any of hundreds of different PLC I/O modules on demand. The modules generate in various different graphical styles, all without a single, complete I/O module library symbol resident on the system.
Graphics Style: 2, Vertical Module 6 Click OK.
8 In the Module Layout dialog box, verify the default settings: Spacing: 1.0000 I/O Points: Insert all Click OK. AutoCAD Electrical reads the vertical rung spacing of your ladder and calculates how long the module is going to be. It multiplies the rung spacing by the number of wire connections specified by the module you selected. Temporary graphics display a representation of the module (with the spacing defined) to help position the module on the ladder.
NOTE You can also select the beginning address from the Quick picks list. 12 Click OK. 13 In the I/O Addressing dialog box, click Decimal. The PLC module is inserted into your drawing with incremental address numbers already annotated as the module goes in, it breaks and reconnects to underlying wires. You can break an I/O module into as many pieces as you want at insertion time. It is great for high-density modules that do not fit into a single ladder column.
Remove ladder rungs 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Trim Wire. 2 Respond to the prompts as follows: Fence/Crossing/Zext/
Component Fence, From Point: Select above the wire at line reference 520 (1) Component Fence, From Point: to: Drag below the wire at line reference 522, click the point (2), right-click 5 In the Keep dialog box, select: Keep this one Show edit dialog box after each Click OK 6 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, specify: Component Tag: LS520 Description: Line 1: PALLET ENTERING Description: Line 2: STATION Location code: MACHINE Click OK.
Location code: MACHINE Click OK. 9 In the Keep dialog box, select: Keep this one Show edit dialog box after each Click OK 10 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, specify: Component Tag: LS522 Description: Line 1: PALLET LEAVING Description: Line 2: STATION Location code: MACHINE Click OK. The normally open limit switches are inserted into the drawing. Annotating PLC I/O descriptions You can add description text to a PLC module using the Edit Component tool.
Select anywhere on the top portion of the PLC module The Edit PLC Module dialog box displays. This dialog box provides spaces for you to enter description text for each I/O point. Assume that the descriptions already assigned to the connected limit switches are like what you want to use for the PLC I/O point descriptions. 3 In the Edit PLC Module dialog box, click Wired Devices. AutoCAD Electrical follows the connected wire for each I/O point backwards.
6 Click Next to highlight I/O address 1:11/01 in the Addressing list. The corresponding device description highlights automatically. 7 Select the highlighted description, PALLET INSIDE STATION, and click OK. 8 Repeat this process for the remaining I/O point. NOTE Alternately you can use Pick to capture existing description text from a connected device. To do so, in the Edit PLC Module dialog box, click Pick, and then select the component whose text you want to copy.
Schematic terminals Schematic terminals - Introduction Insert and modify schematic terminals. Define multi-level schematic terminals. Time required 45 minutes Prerequisites: Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Schematic terminals to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs Windows Vista, Windows 7 Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Schematic termina
You learn to: ■ Understand terminal relationships ■ Insert terminals ■ Assign terminal block properties ■ Define a multi-level terminal ■ Associate terminals About schematic terminals AutoCAD Electrical supports two types of relationships for terminals: schematic-to-schematic and schematic-to-panel. NOTE Since one-line terminal symbols likely represent multiple, independent terminals, they cannot be associated to other schematic or panel terminals. A one-line terminal must be updated manually.
To associate schematic terminals, first add block properties. The number of terminals you can associate is limited to the number of levels defined in the block properties. Once block properties are established you can associate schematic terminals to build a multi-level terminal block by: ■ Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Associate Terminals. You select a master terminal and then select each terminal symbol to associate to the master.
You can associate a schematic and panel terminal automatically by: ■ Click Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ ➤ Insert Terminals drop-down ➤ Insert Terminal (Schematic List). ■ Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Terminal (Panel List). For multi-level terminals, the Insert Terminal (Schematic List) tool shows only one terminal for insertion regardless of how many schematic terminal symbols/levels there are for that multi-level block.
5 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click Terminals/Connectors. 6 In the JIC: Terminals and Connectors dialog box, click Round with Terminal Number. 7 Respond to the prompts as follows: Component Fence, From Point: Select above wire at line reference 520 (1) Component Fence, From Point: to: Select below wire at line reference 535 (2), left click to end command, right-click to add terminal 8 In the Keep dialog box, select Keep this one. Click OK.
10 Click OK. 11 In the Keep dialog box, select: Keep all, don’t ask Clear Show edit dialog box after each Click OK The terminals are automatically added to your drawing.
Multi-level terminals Multi-level terminals 1 In the Project Manager, Project Drawing List, double-click AEGS02.dwg. 2 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit. 3 Select the round terminal on rung 217. The Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box displays, where you can annotate the terminal properties and associations. 4 In the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Project List section, select Tag Strip TB. 5 Enter Location: MCAB5 and Number: 10.
6 Click Details >>. 7 In the Catalog Data section, click Catalog Lookup. 8 On the Parts Catalog dialog box, click filters. Click Yes to confirm. to clear all predefined 9 On the Parts Catalog dialog box each column has an edit field to enter search text. Enter: Manufacturer: SIEMENS Type: MULTI-LEVEL Rating: 20 AMPS 10 Select part 8WA1 011-3JF16 and click OK. The Manufacturer and Catalog information for the selected part displays in the Catalog Data section of the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box.
13 Select the middle terminal between rungs 217 and 218. The Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box displays. 14 In the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Project List section, select Tag Strip TB. 15 Enter Location: MCAB5 and Number: 11. Modify multi-level associations Modify multi-level terminal associations 1 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Modify Properties/Associations section, click Add/Modify.
GND (3). A ‘???’ represents a terminal assigned to the level, but the terminal does not have a number assignment: 1,???,GND (3). NOTE The grid to the right populates with the definition for the selected terminal: Level 1 has Label = TOP, Number = 10, Reference = 2,217. 4 Select Level 2 in the grid and click Associate. Once you click Associate, the middle level updates with the terminal number in the grid in the Active Association section of the dialog box. 5 Click OK.
7 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components drop-down ➤ Edit. 8 Select the bottom terminal on rung 218. The Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box displays. 9 In the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Project List section, select Tag Strip TB. 10 Enter Location: MCAB5 and Number: 12. 11 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Modify Properties/Associations section, click Add/Modify.
15 Click OK. The level assignments display in the Properties/Associations section of the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box. Notice that levels 1, 2, and 3 are now assigned. 16 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, click OK. Terminal Properties You can modify an existing terminal to make it a multi-level terminal block and then associate terminals to the master terminal block. Modify terminal properties 1 Right-click terminal 4 on line reference 211 and select Edit Component.
4 On the Terminal Block Properties dialog box, specify: Levels: 3 Level 1 Level Description: Top Wires Per Connection: 2 PinL: 1 PinR: 2 Level 2 Level Description: Middle Wires Per Connection: 2 PinL: 3 PinR: 4 Level 3 Level Description: Bottom Wires Per Connection: 2 PinL: 5 PinR: 6 Click OK. Notice on the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Properties/Associations section that the block now has three levels. Terminal 4 is assigned to the top level of the block.
5 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, click OK. 6 On the Update other drawings dialog box, click OK. 7 If asked to save the drawing, click OK. Associate terminals Associate terminals 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ ➤ Associate Terminals.
3 Right-click terminal 6 and select Edit Component. On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Properties/Associations section, all three levels have been assigned. You can now move a terminal to another level using the Add/Modify Association dialog box. 4 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Modify Properties/Associations section, click Add/Modify. 5 On the Add/Modify Association dialog box, Active Association section, highlight level 3 in the grid and click Move Up.
NOTE If the terminals are not all on the same drawing you can associate them using the Add/Modify Association dialog box. Wire numbers Wire numbers - Introduction Insert wire numbers and signal arrows. Time required 45 minutes Prerequisites: Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Wire numbers to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs Windows Vista, Windows 7 Users\{username}\Do
■ Delete wire numbers ■ Understand signal arrows ■ Insert a source arrow ■ Insert a destination arrow About wire numbers Wire numbers can be assigned to any existing wires on an individual selection, an entire drawing, selected drawings in a project, or an entire project. AutoCAD® Electrical assigns a unique wire number to each wire network. A wire network consists of one or more wires that are electrically connected.
5 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Wire Numbers. 6 In the Sheet 4 - Wire Tagging dialog box, click Pick Individual Wires. 7 Respond to the prompts as follows: Select objects: Select the wire segment between the two push buttons on line reference 403 (1), right-click The wire number is placed. Add wire numbers to the entire drawing 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Wire Numbers.
Add wire numbers project-wide 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ Wire Numbers. 2 In the Sheet 4 - Wire Tagging dialog box, click Project-wide. 3 In the Wire Tagging (Project-wide) dialog box, verify: Wire tag mode: Reference-based tags To do: Tag/retag all Freshen database (for Signals) 4 Click OK. 5 In the Select Drawings to Process dialog box, Project Drawing List section, press SHIFT as you select AEGS03.dwg and AEGSO04.dwg. Click Process.
numbers. If a wire number retag is run later on, fixed wire numbers do not change. NOTE If you want PLC I/O based wire numbering to be the automatic default for a drawing, set it up in the Drawing Properties dialog box. Select the Search for PLC I/O address on insert toggle. Insert PLC I/O wire numbers 1 Open AEGS05.dwg. 2 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wire Numbers drop-down ➤ PLC I/O. The PLC I/O Wire Numbers dialog box displays.
The wire numbers are inserted with the specified format. If some of the I/O points short-circuit to other I/O points, the last point wire number prevails for that common wire network. Deleting a wire number You can use the Delete Wire Numbers tool to select a wire number or to pick on any wire of the network.
Delete a wire number 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Delete Wire Numbers. 2 Respond the prompts as follows: Select objects: Enter all, press ENTER The wires in the network change to dashed lines, representing the wires from which the wire numbers will be erased. 3 Press ENTER again to erase the wire numbers. Source signal arrows AutoCAD Electrical uses a named source/destination concept.
Select wire end for Source: Select the end of the hot wire on the schematic on the right side of the drawing at line reference 332 (1) 4 In the Signal - Source Code dialog box, specify: Code: 24 VDC Signal Arrow Style: 1 AutoCAD Electrical allows one description line on a source arrow. This description can then be carried over to the associated destination arrow. You can define some default description lines to make them easier to enter without typing them in each time.
is available on the Signal - Source Code and Insert Destination Code dialog boxes. 5 Click OK. 6 In the Source/Destination Signal Arrows dialog box, click No. NOTE Click No to insert the signal arrows on the next drawing. Click OK to insert the signal arrows on the current drawing. 7 To access AEGS04.dwg Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Next DWG. Now you are ready to insert a destination signal arrow.
3 In the Insert Destination Code dialog box, click Project. 4 In the Signal codes -- Project-wide Source dialog box, select the following: 5 Click OK. 6 In the Insert Destination Code dialog box, verify: Code: 24 VDC Signal Arrow Style: 1 Click OK + Update Source. The cross-references for your signal insert into the drawing above the hot wire.
Attach source and destination signals to the neutral wires. 1 To return to AEGS03.dwg Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Previous DWG. 2 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Signal Arrows drop-down ➤ Source Arrow. 3 Respond to the prompts as follows: Select wire end for Source: Select the bottom of the neutral wire at line reference 332 (3) 4 In the Signal - Source Code dialog box, specify: Code: 24 VDC NEUTRAL Click OK.
5 In the Source/Destination Signal Arrows dialog box, click No. NOTE Click No to insert the signal arrows on the next drawing. Click OK to insert the signal arrows on the current drawing. 6 To open AEGS04.dwg Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Next DWG. 7 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Signal Arrows drop-down ➤ Destination Arrow.
11 Click OK. 12 In the Insert Destination Code dialog box, verify: Code: 24 VDC NEUTRAL Signal Arrow Style: 1 Click OK + Update Source. NOTE If asked to change the destination wire layer, click Yes. The cross-references for your signal insert into the drawing above the neutral wire. 13 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ ➤ Show Signal Paths. Temporary graphics illustrate the flow of the signals on your drawings.
NOTE There is no limit to the number of source and destination links you can set up. One source network can jump to multiple destinations on one or many drawings. A wire can carry both a destination signal and a source signal pointing to the next daisy-chained destination.
Insert and edit panel footprints. Insert and modify a graphical terminal strip with Terminal Strip Editor. Time required 45 minutes Prerequisites: Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Panel layout to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs Windows Vista, Windows 7 Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Panel layout to Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {ve
4 Click Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert Footprints drop-down ➤ Schematic List. 5 In the Schematic Component List -- Panel Layout Insert dialog box, verify: Extract component list for: Project Location Codes to extract: All 6 Click OK. 7 In the Select Drawings to Process dialog box, select AEGS04.dwg and click Process. 8 Verify that AEGS04.dwg is listed in the Drawing to Process section and click OK. 9 In the Schematic Components (active project) dialog box, click Mark Existing.
10 In the Schematic Components (active project) dialog box, Display section, select Hide Existing. The schematic component footprints not yet inserted into the panel layout are displayed. Now you can begin to insert schematic component footprints manually on the panel layout.
Insert the system reset footprint manually 1 In the Schematics Components (active project) dialog box, select PB403 OPSTA3 SYSTEM RESET. 2 Click Manual. NOTE The Manual button is used when schematic component footprints do not have a manufacturer and catalog number defined. The next step is to make a catalog assignment for the automatic footprint. 3 In the Footprint dialog box, Choice A section, click Catalog lookup. NOTE Use Choice B to enter a graphic without selecting a catalog number.
6 Change the catalog assignment to 800T-A2A 1 NO 1 NC BLACK PUSH BUTTON - MOMENTARY, NEMA 4/13 and click OK. 7 In the Footprint dialog box, Choice A section, verify: Manufacturer: AB Catalog: 800T-A2A Click OK.
The component may already have an Item Number assigned. If AutoCAD Electrical finds a component with the same catalog information, it automatically assigns the same item number to this new component. If no item number is assigned, and you think a matching component exists, use one of the Find buttons to look through the drawing or project. If no matching component is found, click Next to assign an item number to this footprint. This button updates each time you insert a footprint and assign an item number.
NOTE The Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box displays each time you insert a panel footprint. Information from the schematic representation is automatically carried over to the panel footprint representation. 9 In the Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box, click OK. The Schematics Component (active project) dialog box redisplays. You can continue inserting components from the schematic list of the project.
Manufacturer: AB Type: 30.5mm Style: Red 6 Change the catalog assignment to 800T-D6A 1NO-1NC PUSH BUTTON-MUSHROOM, NEMA 4/13 and click OK. 7 In the Footprint dialog box, Choice A section, verify: Manufacturer: AB Catalog: 800T-D6A Click OK.
2 Click Manual. 3 In the Footprint dialog box, Choice A section, click Catalog lookup. 4 On the Parts Catalog dialog box, click filters. Click Yes to confirm. to clear all predefined 5 On the Parts Catalog dialog box each column has an edit field to enter search text. Enter: MANUFACTURER: AB TYPE: 30.5mm 6 Change the catalog assignment to 800H-QRT24G PLASTIC LENS 24VAC/VDC FULL VOLT GREEN PILOT and click OK. NOTE Click a column header to sort the catalog records based on the values in a specific field.
7 In the Footprint dialog box, Choice A section, verify: Manufacturer: AB Catalog: 800H-QRT24G Click OK.
9 In the Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box, click OK. In the Schematics Components (active project) dialog box, notice the master control relay must still be placed. 10 In the Schematic Components (active project) dialog box, click Close. NOTE You can modify a footprint at any time using the Edit Footprint tool. Since there is bidirectional update capabilities between the schematics and the panel layout drawings, it is possible to introduce some inconsistencies between the two during edit.
2 In the Insert Footprint: Panel Layout Symbols dialog box, click Nameplates. 3 In the Panel: Nameplates dialog box, click Nameplate, Catalog Lookup. 4 In the Nameplate dialog box, Choice A section, click Catalog Lookup. 5 On the Parts Catalog dialog box, click filters. Click Yes to confirm. to clear all predefined 6 On the Parts Catalog dialog box each column has an edit field to enter search text.
10 In the Panel Layout - Nameplate Insert/Edit dialog box, click OK. NOTE A tag name links the data on the nameplate a tag name to the footprint and to the schematic component of the same name. Changing the tag name of any of these three representations triggers a prompt for permission to update the other related instances. Insert a half round nameplate 1 Click Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert Footprints drop-down ➤ Icon Menu.
8 In the Nameplate dialog box, Choice A section, verify: Manufacturer: AB Catalog: 800T-X59E Click OK. 9 Respond to the prompts as follows: Select objects: Select PB403A (2), right-click to place the nameplate 10 In the Panel Layout - Nameplate Insert/Edit dialog box, click OK. The nameplate is inserted.
Terminal Strip Editor Terminal blocks connect devices that require quick disconnect or disassembly during product shipment. They can also be used to distribute power to other devices. The Terminal Strip Editor easily and quickly defines the locations for these connected devices during the system design process. Terminal strip editing is primarily used towards the end of the control system design cycle to expedite the labeling, numbering, and rearranging of terminals on a terminal strip.
2 Click Panel tab ➤ Terminal Footprints panel ➤ Editor. 3 On the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box, select Terminal Strip “TB” and click Edit. 4 On the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box, Terminal Strip tab, select terminal 1 in the grid.
5 In the Terminal section, click the Move Terminal button. 6 In the Move Terminal dialog box, click Pick Above. In the Terminal Strip Editor grid, select terminal 4. NOTE You can also use the Move Up tool to move terminal 1 to the top of the grid. Click Done. 7 Select terminal 4 in the grid. 8 In the Properties section, click the Copy Terminal Block Properties button. Notice that when you click Copy Terminal Block Properties, terminals 5 and 6 also highlight.
Associate terminals 1 Select terminals 8 and 9 in the grid. 2 In the Multi-Level section, click the Associate Terminals button. 3 On the Associate Terminals dialog box, select terminal 7, , (3) and click Associate. Click OK. 4 In the Spare section, click Delete Spare Terminals/Accessories to remove the blank terminals resulting from the Associate.
5 On the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box, select terminals 11 and 12 in the grid. 6 In the Multi-Level section, click the Associate Terminals button. 7 On the Associate Terminals dialog box, select terminal 10, , (3) and click Associate. Click OK. 8 In the Spare section, click Delete Spare Terminals/Accessories to remove the blank terminals resulting from the Associate. Insert spare terminals and accessories 1 Select terminal 7 in the grid.
Now you insert accessories (end barriers) into the terminal strip - one at the top and one at the bottom of the terminal strip. 4 Select terminal 1 in the grid. 5 In the Spare section, click the Insert Accessory button. 6 On the Insert Accessory dialog box, specify: Number: EB1 Quantity: 1 NOTE You can also assign catalog information for the accessory from the Insert Accessory dialog box by clicking Catalog Lookup. You can then select the part from the Parts Catalog dialog box. Click Insert Above.
Insert the terminal strip into the drawing 1 On the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box, click the Layout Preview tab. 2 Select Graphical Terminal Strip as the terminal type to insert into the drawing. 3 Enter 2.0 in Scale on Insert. 4 Click Rebuild. 5 On the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box, click OK. 6 On the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box, click OK.
Generate and work with reports. Time required 30 minutes Prerequisites: Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Generating reports to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs Windows Vista, Windows 7 Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Generating reports to Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs You learn to: ■ Generate a report ■
2 In the Project Manager, double-click AEGS to expand the drawing list. 3 Open AEGS11.dwg. 4 Click Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports. 5 In the Schematic Reports dialog box, select: Report Name: Bill of Material Bill of Material: Project Verify that the following options are specified: Include options: All the above Display option: Normal Tallied Format Installation Codes to extract: All Location Codes to extract: All Click OK. 6 In the Select Drawings to Process dialog box, select AEGS03.
Inserting Bill of Material tables into drawings Insert a BOM into the drawing in tabular format 1 With the BOM report displayed in the dialog box, click Put on Drawing. 2 In the Table Generation Setup dialog box, select: Column Labels: Include column labels Title: Include time/date Column Width: Calculate automatically Borders: All Borders Click OK. NOTE The extents of the BOM table are displayed in temporary graphics. Press Z to zoom down, or R to flip into real-time pan and zoom mode, if necessary.
Changing format of Bill of Material report Each AutoCAD Electrical report is customizable: ■ Define which data fields are reported ■ Define the order in which they appear ■ Define the justification of any column ■ Define the column labels Remove the TAGS columns from the BOM 1 Erase the table, or UNDO, and rerun the BOM extract for AEGS03.DWG. 2 In the Report Generator dialog box, click Change Report Format.
NOTE This new format becomes the default the next time you extract a BOM report. The BOM data in the Report Generator dialog box is reformatted and displayed. 6 Scroll down the report to verify that the component tags column is removed. 7 Insert the new version of the BOM table into the drawing. Exporting Bill of Material report to spreadsheet You can move your BOM to a spreadsheet, database, or any other application that can read data in a comma-delimited or Microsoft®Access® format.
of the spreadsheet are shown in the previous image. The first column is the tallied quantity, followed by subassembly quantity, catalog number, and manufacturer code. The remaining fields are the fields extracted from the mfg/cat combo query on the external catalog look-up file. Connector diagrams Connector diagrams - Introduction Insert, modify, and wire connectors. Time required 45 minutes Prerequisites: Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {vers
■ Wire connectors ■ Insert in-line connectors ■ Stretch a connector ■ Add a connector pin ■ Move a connector pin ■ Add connector descriptors About connector diagrams The connector wiring tools help you more easily create and work with point-to-point style wiring schematics (as opposed to ladder-style schematics). Although some of these tools are useful for ladder-style schematics, they are tuned to work well with drawings that are heavy on point-to-point connector diagrams.
4 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. 5 On the Drawing Properties ➤ Components dialog box, select Sequential. 6 On the Drawing Properties ➤ Wire Numbers dialog box, New Wire Number Placement section, select In-Line. 7 Click OK. Add connectors to the drawing 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Connector drop-down ➤ Insert Connector. 2 On the Insert Connector dialog box, specify: Pin Spacing: 1.
4 Click Insert. A preview outline of the connector displays for placement on the drawing. It shows rounded corners for the plug side of the connector. An “x” indicates the insertion point of the connector. An arrow indicates the plug side wire connection direction for plug/receptacle or plug-only connector inserts or shows the wire connection direction for a receptacle-only connector insert.
6 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Connector drop-down ➤ Insert Connector. 7 On the Insert Connector dialog box, specify: Pin Spacing: 0.75 Pin Count: 4 Fixed Spacing Pin List: A Insert All 8 Click the Flip button to flip the connector. The preview looks like the following image. 9 Click Insert.
Wiring connectors Black Box 1 is associated to a larger component such as a power box. Black Box 2 - Black Box 4 are smaller components that are part of the power box. The components must be wired together. The easiest way to do it is to use the Insert Wire and Multiple Wire Bus tools. Wire the connectors together 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wires drop-down ➤ Wire.
Notice that the Insert Wire tool drew the wire between the connectors while avoiding any existing geometry on the screen. 4 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Multiple Bus. 5 On the Multiple Wire Bus dialog box, specify: Horizontal Spacing: 0.75 Vertical Spacing: 0.
6 Click OK.
to (T= wiretype): Drag the wires to the right, to Point (Continue/Flip): Drag up the wires towards PJ3 on Black Box 3, enter C, and press ENTER (to continue and lock the drag) to (Continue/Flip): Drag the wires to the right and connect to pins B-D on PJ3 11 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Multiple Bus. 12 On the Multiple Wire Bus dialog box, click OK to use the previous settings.
Grouping wires Now that you wired the connectors together, you insert in-line connectors to group the wires. Insert in-line connectors 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Connector drop-down ➤ Insert Connector. 2 On the Insert Connector dialog box, specify: Pin Spacing: 1.0 Pin Count: 3 At Wire Crossing Pin List: 1 Insert All 3 Click Details. 4 On the Type section, clear the Add Divider Line box.
5 On the Display section, set Plug to Right and Pins to Both Sides. 6 On the Size section, set the Plug to 0.325. 7 Click Insert. 8 Respond to the prompts as follows: Specify insertion point or [Z=zoom, P=pan, X=wire crossing, V=horizontal/vertical, TAB=flip]: Select to place the connector on the wires connected to PJ1, Pins 1-3 9 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Connector drop-down ➤ Insert Connector. 10 On the Insert Connector dialog box, specify: Pin Spacing: 1.
Allow Spacers/Breaks 11 Click Insert. 12 Respond to the prompts as follows: Specify insertion point or [Z=zoom, P=pan, X=wire crossing, V=horizontal/vertical, TAB=flip]: Select to place the connector starting on the line at PJ1, Pin 5 Notice how the connector expands when you cross the wires. 13 On the Custom Pin Spaces/Breaks dialog box, click Insert Next Connection. The dialog box displays which connector pin has been inserted so far.
NOTE Another method is to insert the entire connector and then use the Split Connector tool to break the existing connector. 18 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Dashed Link Line drop-down ➤ Link Components with Dashed Line.
Modifying connectors The Insert Connector toolbar has tools for modifying connectors and connector pins. You can also add, remove, or move the pins found inside of the connector. Stretch existing connectors 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Stretch Connector.
Add connector pins 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Add Connector Pins. 2 Respond to the prompts as follows: Select connector: Select PJ1 Specify where to insert new pin or [Reset]<16>: Select 4 spaces down from pin 15 on PJ1, right-click, and select Enter The next available pin number (16) inserts at the selected point. 3 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Add Connector Pins.
NOTE You can delete pins using the Delete Connector Pins tool. Select the pin you want to delete and it is automatically removed from the connector. Modify connector pins 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Connectors drop-down ➤ Move Connector Pins.
6 Respond to the prompts as follows: Select connector to Reverse: Select the top in-line connector, right-click 7 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Connector drop-down ➤ Insert Connector. 8 On the Insert Connector dialog box, specify: Pin Spacing: 1.0 Pin Count: 2 Fixed Spacing Pin List: 1 Insert All 9 Click Details. 10 On the Type section, select Add Divider Line. 11 On the Display section, set Pins to Plug Side. 12 Click Insert.
Select connector to Rotate or [Hold]: Select the new connector, right-click, and select Enter Adding wire numbers Wire numbers are blocks or attributes inserted on a line wire entity. AutoCAD® Electrical assigns each wire number type to its own layer. You can assign a different color to each of these layers so you can easily tell them apart. The wire number placement is set to in-line as defined on the Drawing Properties ➤ Wire Numbers dialog box.
NOTE You can align the wire numbers using the Align tool. Adding connector descriptors AutoCAD Electrical supports two lines of description text on each connector: one for the plug and one for the receptacle side of the connector. Add descriptions 1 Right-click connector PJ1 and select Edit Component. 2 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Pins section, click List. 3 On the Connector Pin Numbers In Use dialog box, connector pin grid, click in the Description column for Pin 1.
9 Click OK. 10 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK. 11 Repeat to add the description POWER IN for Pins A on Black Box 2, Black Box 3 and Black Box 4. Your finished point-to-point diagram looks like the following image.
P&ID and Hydraulic diagrams P&ID and Hydraulic diagrams - Introduction Create Piping & Instrumentation (P&ID) and Hydraulic drawings. The same workflow can be applied for Pneumatics. Once your drawing is created, use the standard tools in the AutoCAD Electrical software to modify your drawing. Time required 65 minutes Prerequisites: Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\P&ID to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Docum
Setting Up Hydraulic Drawings Use the Project Manager to manage your hydraulic drawings. From here, you can create a drawing and modify any drawing properties. Create a new drawing 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. 2 If AEGS is not the active project, activate the AEGS project. If AEGS is in the list of open projects: ■ Select AEGS and right-click. ■ Click Activate. If AEGS is not in the list of open projects: ■ Select the project list drop-down. ■ Click Open Project.
If ACAD_Electrical.dwt is not specified, click Browse. Select it from the list of available templates. Description 1: Hydraulic Example Click OK. NOTE If you want to set the component, wire number, cross-reference, style, and drawing format settings, click OK-Properties to proceed to Drawing Properties dialog box. 8 Enter DSETTINGS at the command prompt. 9 In the Drafting Settings dialog box ➤ Snap and Grid tab, turn on Snap and Grid and set the size of both to 0.125. 10 Click OK.
Insert hydraulic symbols 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ ➤ Insert Hydraulic Components. NOTE By default, an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. To keep a panel expanded, click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. 2 In the Insert Component: Hydraulic Symbol dialog box, select the check box for Vertical. 3 In the Insert Component: Hydraulic Symbol dialog box, click the General Valves icon.
9 Respond to the prompts as follows: Specify insertion point: Select to place the check valve below the shut off valve 10 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK. 11 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ ➤ Insert Hydraulic Components. 12 In the Insert Component: Hydraulic Symbol dialog box, click Motors & Pumps. 13 In the Hydraulic: Motors and Pumps dialog box, click Fixed Displacement. 14 In the Hydraulic: Fixed Displacement dialog box, click Uni-Directional Pump.
Click OK. 17 Insert another Shut Off Valve Open below the Hydraulic Oil Pump. 18 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ ➤ Insert Hydraulic Components. 19 In the Insert Component: Hydraulic Symbol dialog box, click Filters. 20 In the Hydraulic: Filters dialog box, click Filter.
27 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK. Creating Pipes In AutoCAD Electrical, different types of wires represent the type of running pipes that allow water or oil flows from one instrument to another. Start by setting up the type of wires for pipe runs. Insert wires as pipes 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type. 2 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, specify: Wire Color: RED Size: 20 The Layer Name is automatically created.
3 Click Color. 4 In the Select Color dialog box, select red and click OK. 5 Click Linetype. 6 In the Select Linetype dialog box, select Continuous and click OK. 7 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, specify: Wire Color: GREEN Size: 10 Color: Green Linetype: Hidden2 NOTE If HIDDEN2 is not available, click Load. Select it from the list of line types on the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box. 8 Select RED_20 in the grid and click Mark Selected as Default. 9 Click OK.
11 Respond to the prompts as follows: Specify wire start or [wireType/X=show connections]: Enter X and press ENTER Specify wire start or [wireType/X=show connections]: Select the bottom of the shut off valve Specify wire end or [Scoot/T=wiretype, X=show connections]: Select the top of the check valve 12 Continue inserting wires connecting the components together. Right-click to exit the command.
NOTE You can also insert the vertical or horizontal pipes first and then insert the components onto the pipe, one at a time. 13 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ ➤ Insert Hydraulic Components. 14 In the Insert Component: Hydraulic Symbol dialog box, select the check box for Vertical. 15 In the Insert Component: Hydraulic Symbol dialog box, click Pressure Relief Valves. 16 In the Hydraulic: Pressure Relief Valves dialog box, click N.C. Pressure Relief Valve with Preset -1.
17 Respond to the prompts as follows: Specify insertion point: Select to place the valve to the right of the pump 18 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, specify: Component Tag: VAL4 Description: Line 1: Pressure Relief Click OK. 19 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Wire.
Select the wire layer GREEN_10. Click OK. TIP Make sure that Snap is turned off and that the Wire Layer is set to GREEN_10.
2 In the Insert Component: Hydraulic Symbol dialog box, click Meters. 3 In the Hydraulic: Meters dialog box, click Pressure Gauge. 4 Respond to the prompts as follows: Specify insertion point: Select to place the pressure gauge to the far left (and slightly above) of the pump 5 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, specify: Component Tag: MTR1 Description: Line 1: Pressure Gauge Click OK. 6 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ ➤ Insert Hydraulic Components.
11 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK. 12 Set the wire layer to RED_20. 13 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Wire.
15 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ ➤ Insert Hydraulic Components. 16 Insert and place the devices listed as shown in the following illustration. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK after each insertion. NOTE You can also insert the vertical or horizontal pipes first and then insert the components onto the pipe, one by one.
Icon Symbol to Insert Filters ➤ Filter (insert as a Vertical symbol) Restrictors ➤ Restrictor with Variable Output Flow Restrictors ➤ By-Pass Flow Regulator with Variable Output Flow Cylinders ➤ Single Acting Single Ended Piston Rod TIP Align the components horizontally and vertically using the Align tool to make inserting the pipes easier. 17 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Wire.
18 Connect the pipes from one control device to another as illustrated. 19 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ ➤ Insert Hydraulic Components. 20 In the Insert Component: Hydraulic Symbol dialog box, click General Valves. 21 In the Hydraulic: General Valves dialog box, click Checkvalve Flow Left.
23 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK. 24 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Wire. 25 Connect the pipes as shown.
The hydraulic schematic diagram is complete. If you want to create a pneumatic drawing, use the Insert Pneumatic Components tool on the Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel. Refer to the pneumatic demo drawing file (Demo03.dwg) in the Extra Library Demo project. Setting Up P&ID Drawings Use the Project Manager to manage your P&ID drawings. From here, you can create a drawing and modify any pin . Create a new drawing 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.
2 In the Project Manager, click the New Drawing tool. 3 In the Create New Drawing dialog box, specify: Name: AEGS13 Template: Mouse over the edit box to verify ACAD_Electrical.dwt is specified If ACAD_Electrical.dwt is not specified, click Browse. Select it from the list of available templates. Description 1: P&ID Example Click OK. NOTE If you want to set the component, wire number, cross-reference, style, and drawing format settings, click OK-Properties to proceed to Drawing Properties dialog box.
Set up wire layers 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type. 2 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, click in the Wire Type #2 row and specify: Wire Color: RED Size: 25 The Layer Name is automatically created. The name RED_25 is assigned to the wire layer you are creating. 3 Click Color. 4 In the Select Color dialog box, select red and click OK. 5 Click Linetype. 6 In the Select Linetype dialog box, select Continuous and click OK. 7 Click Lineweight.
NOTE For pipe runs in P&ID drawings, include the different linetypes from the acade.lin file. You can set up the wire types for pipes at the beginning of the drawing or before creating the pipes. 10 To set the Linetype for the GREEN_10 wire layer, click Linetype. 11 In the Select Linetype dialog box, click Load. 12 In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, click File. 13 In the Select Linetype File dialog box, select acade.lin and click Open. NOTE The default location for the acade.lin file is \Documents
15 In the Select Linetype dialog box, select Pneumatic Signal and click OK. 16 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, click OK. Inserting P&ID Schematic Symbols The P&ID symbol library in AutoCAD electrical includes equipment, tanks, nozzles, pumps, fittings, valves, actuators, logic functions, instrumentation, flow, and flow arrows. The P&ID symbol library consists of all the piping and instrumentation symbols. It is found at \Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\Pid
4 Respond to the prompts as follows: Specify insertion point: Select to place the ball mill in the upper left corner of your drawing 5 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, specify: Component Tag: C-100 Description: Line 1: BALL MILL Click OK. 6 Repeat steps 1-2. 7 In the PID: Equipment dialog box, click Conveyors. 8 In the PID: Conveyors dialog box, click Conveyor 1.
Select to place the mixer to the right and diagonally below the conveyor 14 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, specify: Component Tag: A-100 Description: Line 1: MIXER Click OK. 15 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ ➤ Insert P&ID Components. 16 Insert and place the devices listed as shown in the following illustration. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK after each insertion.
TIP Align the components horizontally and vertically using the Align tool to make inserting the pipes easier. Creating Pipes In AutoCAD Electrical, different types of wires represent the type of running pipes that allow water or oil flows from one instrument to another. Insert wires as pipes 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Wire. 2 Change the wire type to RED_25: Specify wire start or [wireType/X=show connections]: Enter T, press ENTER Select the wire layer RED_25. Click OK.
4 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Wire. 5 Respond to the prompts as follows: Specify wire start or [wireType/X=show connections]: Enter T, press ENTER Select the wire layer RED_10. Click OK. Select the bottom of the discrete instrument Specify wire end or [Continue]: Drag the wire down a few spaces, press ENTER 6 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Components.
7 In the Insert Component: Piping and Instrumentation Symbols dialog box, click Flow Arrows. 8 In the PID: Equipment dialog box, click Flow Arrow Down. 9 Respond to the prompts as follows: Specify insertion point: Select to place the flow arrow at the bottom of the new wire The P&ID diagram is complete. If you want to see how to expand the P&ID drawing, refer to the P&ID demo drawing file (Demo01.dwg) in the Extra Library Demo project.
Symbol Builder Symbol Builder - Introduction Create custom symbols with Symbol Builder. Time required 30 minutes Prerequisites: Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Symbol Builder to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs Windows Vista, Windows 7 Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Symbol Builder to Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\
Creating custom symbols You can use the Symbol Builder to create an AutoCAD Electrical symbol easily. This utility builds a smart schematic symbol by either adding AutoCAD Electrical attributes to the geometry of the symbol, or by converting text entities to AutoCAD Electrical attributes. You can also use AutoCAD attribute definition and editing commands to do the same thing. This tool makes the task easier because you quickly pick and place attributes.
Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\jic125 (or C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\jic125 on a Windows Vista or Windows 7 installation). 7 In the Attribute template section, select Symbol: Horizontal Parent, Type: Generic. 8 In the Select from drawing section, click Select objects, select the rectangle, and press ENTER. 9 Select OK. Adding attributes In this example, you add the attributes: TAG1, DESC1, LOC, INST, FAMILY, MFG, CAT, and ASSYCODE.
Use this palette to assign attributes to the rectangle as well as set the height and justification for each attribute. The palette displays the AutoCAD Electrical attributes that you can insert and define as part of the symbol. Once an attribute is inserted on the symbol a check mark displays next to it and you cannot insert it again. AutoCAD Electrical allows only one insertion of each attribute. 2 In the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor, select TAG1 and click the Properties tool.
3 Click the Insert Attribute tool. Insert the attribute above the rectangle. In the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor, notice the check mark next to the TAG1 attribute. Continue placing the rest of the attributes. 4 In the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor select DESC1. Click the Insert Attribute tool. 5 Insert the attribute below TAG1. 6 Insert the LOC and INST attributes as indicated. 7 Insert the FAMILY attribute near the center of the rectangle.
9 Select MFG and insert near the center of the rectangle. Repeat for CAT and ASSYCODE. Adding wire connections If an X?TERMxx of the component (for example, "X2TERM01") wire connection-point attribute lies within the small trap distance of the end of a wire, then AutoCAD Electrical interprets the component connected to the wire. The only time the trap distance changes is when you change the Feature Scale Multiplier in the Drawing (or Project) Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box.
5 Select Connection direction: Left & Top. It determines the direction the wire attaches to the component. 6 Enter “L” as the value for TERM01 in Pin Information. 7 Select X2TERMDESC01 in Pin Information and click Delete. 8 Click Insert. 9 Select the Insert Wire Connection tool and insert the terminal in the upper left-hand corner as shown. NOTE Always use AutoCAD Snap to insert the wire connection point.
Insertion Point: to the left of TERM05 TERM07: Bottom Insertion Point: to the left of TERM06 13 Press Enter if necessary to return to the command prompt. 14 On the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor, expand the Pins section.
Saving the symbol You have two options for saving the symbol: WBlock or Block. WBlock creates the symbol .dwg file while Block creates the symbol for this drawing file only. Save and insert the symbol onto a drawing 1 Click Symbol Builder tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Done. 2 On the Close Block Editor: Save Symbol dialog box, in the Base point section, click Pick point. Select a point in-line with the top terminals so that it is easy to place on a wire later. 3 Select WBlock.
NOTE New symbols you create can also be inserted with the AutoCAD Electrical Insert Component command. You can add your new symbol to the icon menu. Or, you can select it from the Type it or Browse dialog box file selection options in the icon menu. 8 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK. Migration of AutoCAD Data Migration of AutoCAD Data - Introduction Convert non blocked geometry and text to a fully functional AutoCAD Electrical block insert.
About Tagging and Linking Tools This chapter describes using the tagging and linking tools in AutoCAD® Electrical to convert non blocked geometry and text to a fully functional AutoCAD Electrical-aware block insert. AutoCAD Electrical has tagging and linking tools that enable non blocked geometry to be made aware of AutoCAD Electrical. The existing geometry stays in place and is unblocked.
3 Open Convert-03.dwg. 4 Zoom in on the components in the upper left-hand corner of the drawing. 5 Click Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Special Explode. Use the Special Explode tool to explode attributes and blocks to geometry and text entities while maintaining the value previously defined in the attributes. You can take advantage of the tagging tools to modify the text entities to attributes and the linking tools to make various blocks.
The blocks explode into separate text entities and geometry. Tagging Schematic Components Use the AutoCAD Electrical Tagging tools to convert text entities into an attributed block. Through the insertion of a template block, you have control over which attributes are inserted and visible. All necessary attribute definitions are automatically placed. During the tagging process, the text entity is removed and replaced with a template block file that contains multiple attributes used in AutoCAD Electrical.
2 Respond to the prompts as follows: Select objects: Select 9PB, 10PB, 11PB, and 12 PB, right-click NOTE You may have to right-click several times to exit the command. The text changes color to indicate that it has been tagged. The color of the TAG attribute is by layer. The attribute is the same layer as defined on the WD_M block. You can now link the descriptions and wire numbers. 3 Click Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports.
The Link Descriptions tool links simple text as Description 1-3 attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical block file. You can link them as description attributes to one or more existing template block definitions. During the conversion process, the text entity is removed and replaced with the next available description attribute, up to 3. Link descriptions 1 Click Conversion Tools tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Link Descriptions.
Colors change to distinguish what has been converted and temporary lines display the link. 3 Click Reports tab ➤ Schematic panel ➤ Reports. 4 In the Schematic Report dialog box, specify: Report Name: Component Active Drawing Click OK. 5 If asked to QSave the drawing, click Yes. In the Report Generator dialog box, notice that 9PB-12PB are still listed in the TAGNAME column of the report. 6 In the Report Generator dialog box, click Change Report Format.
8 Click OK. The Report Generator dialog box now lists the TAGNAME and DESC1 values from the active drawing. 9 In the Report Generator dialog box, click Close. Adding Wire Connections Wire connection attributes can also be merged into the new generic block insert. The Add Wire Connections tool in AutoCAD Electrical adds wire connection attributes to the existing tagged block file. Select line endpoints or geometry to add the appropriate wire connection attributes to.
Convert device pins to wire connection attributes 1 Click Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Add Wire Connections. 2 Respond to the prompts as follows: Select block TAG or PLC Address: Select 9PB Select end of wire (P=Pick Location): Enter P and press ENTER Select location (W=Wire): Press SHIFT + right-click to select Endpoint from the Snap options, select the end point of the first wire on line 401 In the Wire Direction dialog box, select from left.
Pause the mouse over 9PB - 12 PB. The text, wire connection attributes, and description text all highlight. We still must convert the wire number text and add the geometry to our block. 4 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type. 5 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, select Make all Lines Valid Wires and click OK. 6 Click Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Convert Text to Wire Number.
Adding Geometry The Add Geometry tool in AutoCAD Electrical adds AutoCAD geometry to a template block file to be created as part of a unique block instance. It creates a block definition with the newly added geometry. You can later create a block file if the block is exploded. Add Geometry Results: ■ TAG1, TAG2, PLC TAG, and TAGSTRIP attributes are defined and selected first. ■ The block definition is automatically modified.
3 Repeat steps 1 -2 for 10PB, 11PB, and 12 PB. Your blocks are now AutoCAD Electrical-smart. Tagging and Linking Panel Components The AutoCAD Electrical Tagging and Linking tools work on panel components the same way they work on schematic components. Tag and link panel components 1 Open Convert-04.dwg. 2 Zoom in on the components in the middle of the drawing. 3 Click Conversion Tools tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Special Explode.
The blocks explode into separate text entities and geometry. The Tag Panel Component tool makes selected text entities an attributed block file with the P_TAG1 attribute visible. The template block file (ACE_P_TAG1_CONVERT.DWG) contains attributes for a panel component. 5 Click Conversion Tools tab ➤ Panel panel ➤ Tag Footprint. 6 Respond to the prompts as follows: Select objects: Select 9PB, 10PB, 11PB, and 12 PB, right-click NOTE You may have to right-click several times to exit the command.
Updating Panel or Schematic Components Once a panel component has a component tag assigned, it is automatically linked to the schematic component with the same tag. Updates to either the schematic or panel component prompt an update to the related component. Surf to the related schematic component 1 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Surfer.
4 If asked to save the drawing, click Yes. 5 In the Surf dialog box, click Edit. 6 In the Component Insert/Edit dialog box, change the description to LIGHT 1 and click OK. The Update Other Drawings dialog box displays. This dialog alerts that other drawings in the project set include child components or related panel components. 7 If asked to save the drawing, click Yes. 8 In the Update Other Drawings dialog box, click OK. 9 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Surfer.
12 In the Surf dialog box, click Close. Interoperability: Inventor and AutoCAD Electrical Introduction Learn to use AutoCAD Electrical and Inventor interoperability to digitally prototype and document your electrical designs.
Prerequisites: ■ Familiarity with both AutoCAD Electrical and Inventor is recommended but not necessary. This tutorial is designed to work whether you have only AutoCAD Electrical or Inventor, or if you have both programs. ■ Know how to navigate the model space with the various view tools. Tutorial file used 900501.dwg Copy all files located in Windows XP Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Interoperability to Documents and Settings\{username}\My Docum
You do not need both programs to derive benefit from this exercise. The two XML files generated in this workflow are also included in the tutorial sample files. Therefore, if you have only one program, you can still perform the XML import operation. If you have only AutoCAD Electrical, you can review the Inventor portion of the tutorial. Then you can perform the import steps and subsequent steps on the Import the Inventor data on page 1973 page.
Ensure that the drawing is in Model Space. Rename component tags Before you export this data to Inventor, you update the PASSENGER SEAT component tags. Assume that this drawing was copied forward and is now ready to modify and use for the driver seat. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Retag Components drop-down ➤ Find/Edit/Replace Component Text. 2 Select Active drawing (all) in the Find/Edit/Replace Electrical Component Text dialog box, and click OK.
■ Click Start Search, and review the results in the Match 1 of 16 dialog box. ■ Click Replace All, and then click Yes, Make Changes. The component tags are changed to DRIVER SEAT. ■ Click Cancel. 4 Save the drawing.
Export to XML Next, you export the electrical data contained in your AutoCAD Electrical digital prototype to an XML file. You use this XML file later to import the data into Inventor. 1 Click Import/Export Data tab ➤ Export panel ➤ Inventor. 2 Ensure Active Drawing is selected in the Autodesk Inventor Professional Export dialog box, and click OK. 3 Save to the same directory you copied the tutorial files in the Autodesk Inventor Professional XML File Export dialog box.
Open the dataset 1 Open 100500.iam. The file is contained in the 1000 folder. The model opens in the Default design view representation. This sample has been stripped down to reduce data size.
2 Switch to the Electrical design view representation.
Orbit and zoom your view as you progress through the workflow, as needed. It can be helpful to approximate the following view as you get started with the workflow.
Add harness segments Now you add the two harness segments. 1 Double-click Harness1 in the browser to edit the harness. Be careful to edit the harness assembly rather than the harness part. 2 Select Cable and Harness ➤ Create ➤ Create Segment. 3 Select the existing segment near the front of the seat to place the first point. The exact selection location is not critical.
4 Select the existing work point to set the next segment point. The two work points are very close together. You may need to zoom in to see them clearly.
5 Select the other work point to set the final point. 6 Right-click, and select Continue. The first segment is created.
Add harness segments (continued) Next, you add a second segment. This segment begins in the same location as the previous segment. Because you selected Continue from the context menu, Create Segment is still active and ready to create another segment. 1 Select the segment point that you added previously.
2 Select the existing work point. 3 Select the other work point.
4 Right-click, and select Finish. The segment is created.
Import the AutoCAD Electrical data Apply the AutoCAD Electrical data to the Inventor 3D model.
1 Select Cable and Harness ➤ Manage ➤ Import Harness Data. 2 Click the Browse button next to the Harness Data File field.Select driverseat_from_ace.xml you exported from AutoCAD Electrical in the Select Wire List Data File dialog box. Click Open. NOTE If you do not have AutoCAD Electrical, you can now use driverseat_from_ace.xml provided in Tutorial Files\Automotive\XML_delivered. 3 Click OK in the Import Harness Data dialog box.
Scroll to the top of the item list, then right-click PJ2, and select Issue Description. The issue description describes the problem and offers solutions. Review the information, and then close the issue description. TIP Click the Help button in the Imported Harness Data dialog box to open a reference topic that describes various elements and features in the dialog box. Next, you use functionality on the same context menu to assign the missing RefDes.
With reference to the AutoCAD Electrical drawing, PJ2 is the RefDes specified for the connector that connects to the motor MOT2, the motor for horizontal adjustment. 2 Pause the cursor over the connector occurrence 900575:2 in the graphics window, and note the tooltip.
You can select the occurrence in the browser; however, when you use the graphics window, Inventor displays a tooltip. The tooltip shows the RefDes for that component. The question mark (?) indicates that the RefDes is not yet assigned. 3 Select the connector. 4 Click OK in the Select Electrical Part dialog box. 5 The RefDes specified in AutoCAD Electrical is assigned to the Inventor connector, and the issue associated with PJ2 is removed.
dialog filter is set to show only items with issues, PJ2 is not included in the list. Finish the Import Next, you finish the import operation. 1 Click OK in the Imported Harness Data dialog box. 2 Close the message dialog box. For this exercise, accept the remaining issues without making further changes. The data from AutoCAD Electrical is imported. You should see eight imported wires in the graphics window and in the browser.
1 Select Cable and Harness ➤ Route ➤ Automatic Route. 2 Select the All Unrouted Wires option. The Selected field in the dialog box indicates eight wires are selected. 3 Click OK. The wires are routed into the segments. 4 Select Cable and Harness ➤ Exit ➤ Finish Cable and Harness. Save the assembly. This exercise completes the 2D to 3D portion of the tutorial.
Add a new connector 1 Place an occurrence of the connector 900356.ipt. Place the occurrence as shown. TIP Drag one of the existing occurrences from the browser into the graphics window to create another occurrence, instead of using the Place command.
2 From the Position panel of the Assemble tab, use Grip Snap or Move and Rotate to approximate the position of the connector. Face the pins on the connector toward the front of the seat. Normally you use assembly constraints to position and constrain the component, but it is not necessary for this exercise.
Create wires 1 In the browser, double-click Harness1 to edit the harness. Edit the harness assembly - not the part. 2 Select Cable and Harness ➤ Create ➤ Create Wire. 3 Select the pins on the connectors, as shown in the following image. The identification for the first selected pin is PJ4 Pin 7. Before you apply the selections, use the Create Wire dialog box to specify Wire ID, Category, Name and other properties for the wire.
Create Wires (continued) 1 Select the pins on the connectors for the second wire. The identification for the first selected pin is PJ4 Pin 8.
■ Category - Belden ■ Name - 9916-ORG 3 Click Apply. Alternatively, right-click and select Apply. 4 Cancel the Create Wire dialog box. Route wires ➤ Use Automatic Route as you did previously to route the wires into the segments.
Save the file. Export to XML Next, you export the electrical data contained in your Inventor digital prototype to an XML file. You use this XML file to import the data into AutoCAD Electrical. 1 Select Cable and Harness ➤ Manage ➤ Export Harness Data. 2 Name the file driverseat_from_inv.xml, and save to the same directory you used for the previous XML file. Dismiss the Cable and Harness message dialog box.
Now, you apply the added connector and wires to the 2D model. Switch to AutoCAD Electrical. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Component panel ➤ Insert Connector drop-down ➤ Insert Connector (From List). 2 Select driverseat_from_inv.xml. Click Open. NOTE If you do not have Inventor, you can now use driverseat_from_inv.xml provided in the folder specified on the Introduction page. 3 The connector you added in Inventor is listed in the Connector Selection dialog box. Select the row for the connector.
6 Click Insert. 7 Place the connector to the right of the power seat main switch.
8 In the Connector Selection dialog box, click Wire It. AutoCAD Electrical connects the pins as you specified in Inventor.
You completed the tutorial.
In this tutorial, you used interoperability between AutoCAD Electrical and Inventor Professional or Inventor Routed Systems to develop your digital prototypes. This tutorial showed you how you can: ■ Define electrical data in AutoCAD Electrical and then apply that data to the related Inventor 3D prototype. ■ Define electrical data in the Inventor 3D prototype and then apply that data to the related AutoCAD Electrical drawing.
Advanced Productivity 24 Set up peer-to-peer component relationships The following example has a valve representation on an instrument drawing, FE100, and its equivalent on the electrical schematic, SOL2500. They are the same physical device, but carry different tags based on the drawing discipline in which they appear.
The schematic parent solenoid symbol includes just one extra attribute: WDTAGALT carries a copy of the instrument value of the bubble. Your drawings must be part of the active AutoCAD Electrical project so that the WDTAGALT value on the instrument drawing is automatically updated when you edit the schematic parent tag name and vice versa. Using AutoCAD Electrical SURF on one automatically includes the other in the surf pick window. 1 Open the Project Manager.
13 Select Show all components for all families. The tag values from the other symbol appear in the list. 14 Select the valve representation (in this case, FE100) with a family code of IN (for instrument). 15 Click Copy Tag. 16 On the Copy Tag dialog box, click WDTAGALT. 17 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click Show/Edit Miscellaneous. 18 Verify that the WDTAGALT value lists the TAG1 value of the valve (in this case, FE100) and click OK. 19 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK.
Any device can have pins assigned to it, but common components that carry pin assignments are relays, motor starters, and connectors. Pins are used for: ■ Error checking ■ Accurate connection information ■ Providing correct connections You can expand the Pin List database table as needed. Many users have difficulty creating their own database entries so the following procedures simplify this procedure for you.
Setting up COILPINS for two wired devices The automatic pin list look-up and assignment at component insertion time is not limited to relay devices as shown in the example above. You can encode two wire devices like pilot lights or proximity switches into the database file. Insert the Manufacturer and Catalog numbers and fill in the COILPINS filed with the terminal pin numbers. Leave the PINLIST field blank.
Setting up PEER_COILPINS and PEER_PINLIST The PEER_ fields in the Pin List database specify pin list assignments for a single part number with two parent devices. You set up the second coil's coil pins and pin list data in the PEER_COILPINS and PEER_PINLIST fields for the common part number. This is commonly used for setting up forward and reversing starters or latching and unlatching relays.
Shared files The following shared files can be pasted from your local machine to a shared location. The table lists the file names, default location, and any WD.ENV file lines that must be modified. The main executables and static support files are located under C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\. The user-modifiable support files and database content are found under Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country cod
Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Support\ WD.ENV file edit: Original file name: WD_CIRCBUILDER_FNAM,”ace_circuit_builder.xls”,Circuit Builder spreadsheet file name Edited name: WD_CIRCBUILDER_FNAM,”my_ace_circuit_builder.xls”,Circuit Builder spreadsheet file name Symbol libraries jic1, jic125, iec2, iec4, jis2, gb2, panel, pneu_iso125 Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\
Windows XP:C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support S_LDPC.SLB, WD_LOCAL.SLB, WDSIG.SLB, WDSIG_1.SLB, gepb.slb C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Support WD.ENV file edit: Original path: *WD_SLB,x:some path/, to override path pointing to ".
NOTE These files must be in a location that is specified as an AutoCAD Support path. They can be placed in a location that is already defined as being a support path, or you can add a new support path pointing to this location. Installation code selection list default.inst Optional file, does not exist by default. To create this file in Notepad, create a file with the project name and an .inst extension (or use default.inst) and save to an AutoCAD Support path so the program can find it.
NOTE You cannot set up network deployment after installing AutoCAD Electrical as a stand-alone program on individual machines. Referencing icon menus from other menu files You can also share custom symbols to be accessed by multiple users. The easiest way to do this is to create and link to your own menu file. You can set up AutoCAD Electrical's icon menuing system so that you can switch back and forth from the default menu file (such as ACE_JIC_menu.dat) to your own menu (for example "special_menu.dat").
Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. 2 On the Alert dialog box, click OK to add the WD_M block. 3 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Style tab. You can select the default Fan-In/Out marker style here along with defining the layers for the wires. Notice that the default layer name for fan in/out single line layers is "_MULTI_WIRE." 4 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click OK. 5 Click the AutoCAD Layer Properties Manager tool.
Adding wires 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wires drop-down ➤ Wire. 2 Add a wire to the top push button. Drag the wire to the right. 3 Repeat for the other two push buttons. 4 Add a wire to each of the limit switches. Drag the wires to the left. 5 Press F9 to turn off SNAP. 6 Select all of the wires and verify that they were created on the WIRES layer.
Adding source and destination markers 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Signal Arrows drop-down ➤ Fan In Source. 2 In the Fan In/Out Source dialog box, select Solid as the Source marker style. 4 Click the left button to set the wire connection orientation. 5 Select in the middle of the wire that is connected to the top push button. 6 In the Signal - Source Code dialog box, enter "cbla" as the code and "RED" as the description.
NOTE Because the destination wires are nearby, it is easier to insert them right away. If the wires were on another drawing you could wait until later to add the destination markers. 9 In the Fan-In/Fan-Out Signal Destination dialog box, select Solid as the destination marker style. 10 Click the right button to set the wire connection orientation. 11 Select in the middle of the wire connected to the top limit switch.
For the middle wire: In the Signal - Source Code dialog box, click Use to enter "CBLA-01" as the code and enter "BLUE" as the description. For the bottom wire: In the Signal - Source Code dialog box, click Use to enter "CBLA-02" as the code and enter "WHT" as the description. Notice that the wires change from blue to red, and the descriptions BLUE and WHT display on both sets of wires. 13 Press Esc to exit the command. 14 Select all of the wires and verify that they are on the _MULTI_WIRE layer.
5 Type MA at the command prompt to run the AutoCAD MATCHPROP command. 6 Click the wire connected to the top limit switch. 7 Click each of the lines you just created. The lines change from black to red since they are taking on the properties of the wire you selected. ➤ Press Enter to exit the command. Adding cable markers At this point, you have established the link between the push buttons and the limit switches.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Cable Markers drop-down ➤ Cable Markers. 2 Select to insert a cable marker. 3 Insert the cable marker on the horizontal line. 4 In the Insert/Edit Cable Marker (Parent wire) dialog box, click Catalog Data Lookup. 5 In the Parts Catalog dialog box, select the 3 conductor (second item in list) and click OK. 6 In the Insert/Edit Cable Marker (Parent wire) dialog box, delete the wire color/id value (BLK), and click OK.
Creating new PLC modules By default, when creating a PLC module the PLC Database File Editor lists as many blank field Terminal Types as there are terminals defined in the New Module dialog box. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Database Editors drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor. 2 Click the PLC Database File Editor tool. 3 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, highlight PLCs in the PLC selection list and click New Module.
that it can carry some basic information for the module that only needs to occur once in the final symbol. Assigning Terminal Types 1 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, right-click Terminal Type 1 and select Edit Terminal from the context menu. The Select Terminal Information dialog box appears. There are 3 categories for top symbols: Top Input, Top Output, and Top Terminal. Top Input and Top Output are addressable terminals, while the Top Terminal category consists of non-addressable terminals.
NOTE You can select multiple fields to edit at the same time by dragging your mouse across contiguous fields or by holding down the Control key while selecting non-contiguous fields. 5 In the Select Terminal Information dialog box, select the Input category and look at the available terminals. 6 Select the Input I/O Point Wire Left terminal and click OK. All seven terminals are assigned at the same time.
Setting additional terminal information Some modules may have terminals that are not used. When you build your PLC module on an AutoCAD Electrical drawing there is a choice inside the Module Layout dialog box to include unused/extra connections. When this toggle is not selected, all terminal entries marked as "Show: When Including Unused" in the PLC Database File Editor are skipped. When this toggle is selected, all entries marked with "Show: When Excluding Unused" are skipped.
There are about two dozen symbols (with a file name "HP?*.dwg" where "?" is the style number) associated with each style in the library folder. To create a style, copy an existing style's symbols to one of the unused style numbers (6-9) and edit each library symbol. Library folder: Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\{library}\ Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\{library}\ 3 Specify the module box dimensions f
Category Used in the PLC Database File editor to easily find specific types of terminals. Unique Description These descriptions are used during the terminal type selection process. They need to be maintained as unique Sample Bitmap File This file is also used by the PLC database File editor to display a view of the terminal for selection. Symbols and BMP files need to be created outside of the PLC database file editor.
Notice that the value for the LINE1 is RACK %%1 and LINE2 is SLOT %%2. The prompting values of %%1 and %%2 are populated with what you type into the text box when prompted. The static text of Rack and Slot appears in the attribute once the PLC module is created. There are multiple prompting variables from %%1 through %%9. Prompting strings can be added to any existing attributes on the terminal block.
6 In the I/O Address dialog box, specify a beginning I/O address or use the quick picks to select an address (such as I:/00). 7 Click OK. Your module should look like the following. The Manufacturer, Catalog Number, and Description attributes also display at the top of the module (not shown).
Customize Circuit Builder Circuit Builder overview The Circuit Builder tool comes prepopulated with data to build and annotate a sampling of motor control circuits and power feed circuits. Circuits include 3-phase, single-phase, and one-line circuit representations. Each circuit is built dynamically, adjusting the power bus to match the wire bus for the drawing, adding wiring between components, and annotating the elements with suggested values based upon the selected load.
multiple consecutive rows in the circuit codes sheet. The section identifies one of the following: ■ The action taken at this marker block location in the circuit. For example, calculate a wire type, insert a wire number, or adjust rung spacing. ■ Provides a list of component insertion options that can be inserted at this point in the circuit. For example, presents a selection list containing a fuse, circuit breaker, or disconnect switch symbol.
ACE_CIRCS sheet Circuit Builder reads the list of circuit categories and types from the first sheet in the spreadsheet, ACE_CIRCS. This information appears in a tree-structure selection window in the Circuit Selection dialog box. The ACE_CIRCS sheet contains the following columns. CATEGORY A major circuit category displayed at the highest level of the tree structure in the Circuit Selection dialog box. TYPE The specific type of circuit within a major category.
COMMENTS Text displayed in the Circuit Elements list in the Circuit Configuration dialog box. UI_DEF The default option for a circuit element is marked with an “X”. When a circuit is inserted rather than configured, all elements marked with "X" are used to build the selected circuit. UI_TITLE Title for the group of options in the middle Select section of the Circuit Configuration dialog box. Each circuit element can have one or more groups of options.
A numerical value matched to the sum total of the values in the UI_VAL column for each selection made within a group. The COMMAND_LIST value from this row is used to insert the selected options. UI_SEL NOTE This value must be inserted as a text value in the spreadsheet and not as a number. An apostrophe character in front of the number forces the spreadsheet software to interpret it as a text value. You can also format the cells specifically as text. The text appears left justified in the cell.
ATTRIBUTE Attribute name on the component inserted at the position of the marker block. PROMPT Text prompt displayed in the Annotation Presets dialog box. DEFAULT The default value for the attribute if annotation presets are listed on page 708 or applied on page 706. This value can be a text value or an AutoLISP expression that returns a text value. OPTIONS Future How Annotation Presets work 1 Make a selection from the Circuit Selection dialog box, for example "Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing".
The circuit drawing templates use the following naming convention. ■ ace_cb1_*.dwg - primary circuit drawing templates ■ ace_cb2_*.dwg - branching or nested circuit drawing templates The default location for the circuit drawing templates is the schematic library folder: ■ Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\{library}\ ■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\{library}\ One-line template drawings have a “1-
■ Decide if an underlying wire is trimmed. ■ Set up the circuit annotation. NOTE If you choose to Insert a circuit, bypassing the Circuit Configuration dialog box, the default options, as defined in the Spreadsheet on page 655, for each circuit element are used. Marker block attributes CODE This attribute value provides the link between the marker block on the circuit template drawing and a section in the circuit codes sheet.
■ _WIRESKIP= - number of wires to skip over when trying to connect to another wire. ■ _MAXTRAPCOUNT= - maximum search distance to look for a wire connection, given in wire connection trap units. The wire connection trap value is fixed and is displayed on the Drawing properties: drawing format tab on page 231 for the active drawing. ■ _BASE - indicates a base wire, the one that does not move, when setting up to adjust multiple bus wire spacing.
Wire Number Blocks that define a wire number to assign to the wire under the block. Nested Circuit Blocks that define the placement of a branching or nested circuit such as a control circuit at the insertion point of the marker block. Component Blocks that define the placement of a component, connector, terminal, cable marker, or a multi-pole component at the insertion point of the marker block. Bus Spacing Blocks that control rung spacing adjustment for the wires under these blocks.
■ VDV1_BTT_1-.dwg - “tee” connection for dual vertical circuit ■ HDV1_BTL_1-.dwg - “corner” connection for dual horizontal circuit ■ VDV1_BTL_1-.dwg - “corner” connection for dual vertical circuit NOTE A WDTYPE attribute with a “1-1” value, identifies a bus-tap symbol. Circuit Builder database Circuit Builder uses an electrical standards database to define default values, define engineering calculations, annotate circuits, and provide wire size recommendations.
this cost is recovered many times over in reduced energy losses in the wiring during the life of the installation. NOTE The ace_electrical_standards.mdb file replaces the mcc.mdb file used in previous versions of Circuit Builder. The electrical standards database contains multiple tables used by Circuit Builder. MOTOR Contains the values used to populate the Select Motor on page 710 dialog box. FEED Contains the values used to populate the Select Load on page 711 dialog box.
MOTOR_I_DESC Lists the component type descriptions whose sizing ties directly into the full load amps value (FLA) of the motor or load. The CODE value maps to the MOTOR_I_CALC and MOTOR_I_MAP tables. MOTOR_I_CALC Lists the formula to calculate the maximum amp value for various types of components on a per motor type basis. MOTOR_I_MAP Maps the calculated FLA for a component to a specific rating value and an optional catalog assignment.
The FEED table follows this table naming convention: ■ FEED - if no specific electrical standards table is found, the default table name to use. ■ _{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code. For example, an “_NEC” suffix could mean that the data for the table parallels the National Electrical Code. A suffixed FEED table name is not necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database to support multiple standards.
Name Description tinuous load. The wire size calculation may need to select the next larger wire size. W_METAL Default wire metal value used to determine appropriate wire ampacity and wire insulation table names. For example, “CU” to define copper wiring as the default, “AL” to define aluminum wiring as the default. W_STD Default wire type standard used to determine appropriate wire ampacity and wire insulation table names. For example, “AWG” or “MM2”.
Name Description VOLTS Default supply voltage value and values for voltage pick list in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. PHASE Default supply phase value and values for phase pick list in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. For example, “1” for single-phase, “3” for three-phase. PARALLEL_MIN_SIZE Default value for the minimum wire size when displaying paralleled wire option in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. For example, “1-0 AWG”.
Wire ampacity tables The wire ampacity tables provide the wire conductor sizes, descriptions, and maximum FLA ampacity values based on wire size and standard insulation temperature ratings. This information is used in the following ways: ■ Automatically select a default wire size based upon the maximum load amp value displayed in the Select Motor on page 710 or Select Load on page 711 dialog boxes.
■ Automatically calculate or recalculate suggested wire sizes in the Wire Size Lookup on page 712 dialog box as various parameters and de-rating factors are applied. The wire ampacity tables use the following naming convention: ■ AMP - the table name prefix. ■ _{type} - the wire metal type such as CU for copper, or AL for aluminum. ■ _{size} - wire size standard such as AWG, or MM2 for metric. ■ _{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code.
Grounding conductor sizing tables The grounding conductor sizing tables provide the grounding wire conductor sizes and maximum FLA ampacity values. This information is used in the following ways: ■ Provide a suggested minimum grounding conductor size based on the amp value returned by the expression defined in the AMPG_MAX entry in the OPT table.
■ Provide a selection list on the Wire Size Lookup on page 712 dialog box giving this minimum suggested size plus all larger grounding conductor sizes. The grounding conductor sizing tables use the following naming convention: ■ AMPG - the table name prefix ■ _{type} - the wire metal type such as CU for copper, or AL for aluminum. ■ _{size} - wire size standard such as AWG, or MM2 for metric. ■ _{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code.
■ Automatically calculate or recalculate suggested wire sizes in the Wire Size Lookup on page 712 dialog box as various insulation and temperature de-rating factors are applied. The wire insulation tables use the following naming convention: ■ INSUL - the table name prefix. ■ _{type} - the wire metal type such as CU for copper, or AL for aluminum. ■ _{size} - wire size standard such as AWG, or MM2 for metric. ■ _{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code.
Conductor Reactance / AC Resistance tables The optional conductor reactance/AC resistance tables provide the reactance and resistance values for wire size based on conduit type. These values are used to calculate the voltage drop percentage in power wiring when a run distance is supplied. There are two types of tables for this feature. A conduit type description table and the reactance/resistance data tables.
The description table, XL&R_DESC, contains the labels used on the Wire Size Lookup on page 712 dialog box for the conduit or raceway type selection list. The labels also map to the columns in the data tables. Data tables The conductor reactance/AC resistance data tables use the following naming convention: ■ XL&R - the table name prefix ■ _{type} - the wire metal type such as CU for copper, or AL for aluminum. ■ _{size} - wire size standard such as AWG, or MM2 for metric.
For example, a table named XL&R_CU_AWG_NEC contains the conductor reactance/AC resistance information for copper, AWG sizes, and parallels values found in the National Electrical Code. Name Description SIZE Wire size code. C1-C3 A set of reactance and resistance values, semi-colon delimited for the conduit type. The first element is the estimated reactance and the second element is the AC resistance. NOTE see the XL&R_DESC table for the corresponding label for each.
Fill tables When multiple current carrying wire conductors are in the same conduit, duct, or raceway, the wire ampacity may need to be de-rated. Current carrying wire conductors are defined as power wiring, not ground, neutral, or control wires. The Fill table provides the de-rating factor based on the maximum number of power wire conductors. The FILL table follows this naming convention: ■ FILL - the table name prefix. ■ _{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code.
MOTOR_I* tables A set of three tables containing values used for calculating suggested breaker size, fuse size, and disconnect switch ratings for a given motor or load amp value. Each table name can have an optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code such as “_NEC” for National Electrical Code. MOTOR_I_DESC Lists the component type descriptions whose sizing ties directly into the full load amps value (FLA) of the motor or load.
MOTOR_I_CALC Lists the formula to calculate the maximum amp value for various types of components on a per motor type basis. Each row gives a motor type followed by columns marked with the codes given in the MOTOR_I_DESC table. Each cell contains an expression to calculate a FLA value. The FLA value for the selected motor corresponds to the symbol "I" in the expression. Valid operations are +-*/^. The “^” character is the exponential function. For example, I^2 is I squared, while I^0.
time-delay fuses is selected for the new circuit, the previously used catalog selection appears as the default. If the circuit is configured using the Reference an existing circuit on page 721 feature, the values are not used from the CATALOGSEL table but from the referenced circuit. However, if a new motor is then selected from the Select Motor on page 710 dialog box, the CATALOGSEL tables values are checked for a match.
1 Locate the existing circuit template drawing file ace_cb1_FVNR_H.dwg. Copies of the circuit builder templates are installed in each of the schematic library folders, JIC125, IEC2, and so onto. Copy this file to ace_cb1_FVNR_H_custom.dwg. NOTE The circuit template name is not critical and does not affect functionality of Circuit Builder. 2 Open the copied and renamed circuit template, ace_cb1_FVNR_H_custom.dwg, in AutoCAD. Make sure that you have write access to the drawing.
Define wires stretching to connect to bus The first modification is to change the way the horizontal wires connect to the vertical bus when inserted. The copied template is defined as follows: ■ Top wire skips over two wires and connects to the left-most vertical bus wire. ■ Middle wire skips over one wire and connects to the middle vertical bus wire. ■ Bottom wire connects to the first vertical bus wire it encounters. The following changes to the marker blocks reverse it.
■ MISC1 = _WIRESKIP=2;_MAXTRAPCOUNT=200 - defines any special handling of the marker block. See the Marker block attributes on page 660 topic for a complete list of supported values. 3 Change the MISC1 value to _MAXTRAPCOUNT=200, removing _WIRESKIP=2. The _WIRESKIP value defines the number of wires to skip over when trying to connect to the vertical bus when inserted. Removing this value directs Circuit Builder to connect to the first vertical wire it finds.
5 Open the 3ph_H worksheet. 6 Find the entry for Control transformer and circuit - non-reversing in the COMMENTS column. 7 Find the CODE value for this row, XF01. This CODE value links the marker block to the circuit code sheet. 8 Switch back to the drawing and locate the marker block with the CODE value of XF01. 9 Erase the marker block using the AutoCAD ERASE command. 10 Repeat the steps to locate and delete the power factor correction marker block, CODE=KVAR1.
Use letters or numbers for the value. There is no code naming convention. Make sure it is unique within the circuit codes spreadsheet. This marker block code value maps a row or group of rows in to the spreadsheet. The information in the spreadsheet directs Circuit Builder to perform a specific action at the XY coordinate of this marker block. 6 Enter a value for the ORDER attribute, for example 12. This value can be an integer or decimal number and defines the order that the marker blocks are processed.
NOTE Save the circuit template drawing after all the modifications are made. ACE_CIRCS sheet The ACE_CIRCS sheet in the ace_circuit_builder.xls spreadsheet controls the circuit options displayed on the Circuit Selection dialog box. In this exercise, you add entry to this ACE_CIRCS sheet so your new circuit option shows up in the Circuit Selection dialog box. 1 Open ace_circuit_builder.xls for edit using a spreadsheet software.
Circuit codes sheet Once a circuit is selected from the Circuit Selection dialog box (the CATEGORY and TYPE fields from the ACE_CIRC sheet), the associated circuit template drawing, with the marker blocks, is inserted (the DWG_TEMPLATE field). A related circuit code sheet is ready for reference (the SHEET_NAME field). Each marker block contains a CODE attribute with a value.
It is the label that shows up above the selection list in the middle part of the Circuit Configuration dialog box. 9 Enter Red Light in the UI_PROMPT_LIST field in the same row. It is the text shown in the selection list for this item, displayed in the middle part of the dialog box. 10 Enter ‘1 in the UI_VAL field in the same row. It is a numerical value assigned to the selection from each group. These numerical values are added up and matched to the value in the UI_SEL column.
17 Enter (c:ace_cb_insym #xyz nil “HSS112” #scl 8 nil) in the COMMAND_LIST field. 18 Enter NO Contact in the UI_PROMPT_LIST field in the next row. 19 Enter ‘3 in the UI_VAL field in the same row. 20 Enter ‘3 in the UI_SEL field in the same row. 21 Enter (c:ace_cb_insym #xyz nil “HCR21” #scl 8 nil) in the COMMAND_LIST field. 22 Enter None in the UI_PROMPT_LIST field in the next row. 23 Enter ‘0 in the UI_VAL field in the same row. 24 Enter ‘0 in the UI_SEL field in the same row.
4 Look for the new category you added, Custom Circuits, on the Circuit Selection dialog box. If it is not there, or is not in the place you wanted, go back to the ACE_CIRCS on page 2038 exercise. 5 Expand the Custom Circuits category and select the circuit you added, My 3-ph motor. If it is not there or is not in the place you wanted, go back to the ACE_CIRCS on page 2038 exercise. 6 Click Configure. 7 Select a location on the 3-phase bus.
Circuit Builder - How to Overview Circuit Builder is controlled by a spreadsheet, a set of circuit template drawings, and the electrical standards database file. The spreadsheet, circuit template drawings, and the electrical standards database file can be modified to customize Circuit Builder. Spreadsheet The spreadsheet defines the available circuits, circuit types, and defaults for each option within a circuit. The default name for the Circuit Builder spreadsheet is ace_circuit_builder.xls.
■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\{library}\ One-line circuit templates have a “1-” and the default location is in a “1-” folder under the schematic library folder. ■ Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\{library}\1- ■ Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\{library}\1- NOTE New templates do not have to follow this naming convention.
3 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H. 4 Find the component, for example CODE: PB01, COMMENTS: Stop, UI_PROMPT_LIST: Stop. Notice the values in TABLE0: PB and TITLE0: Push Button. It indicates that the component can have a main catalog value. The TABLE0 value is the table name for the catalog lookup. The TITLE0 value is the title for the section in the Setup & Annotation area of the Circuit Configuration dialog box.
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values. Separate each one with a semicolon. 4 Save the circuit template drawing. Spreadsheet method 1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
5 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for this component. For example, the last argument of this Insert Multi-pole Component API call is used to predefine MISC1 coded values with nil when nothing extra is defined. Before and after are shown: Before: (c:ace_cb_multipole #xyz nil "HT0001" 3 #scl 4 nil) After: (c:ace_cb_multipole #xyz nil "HT0001" 3 #scl 4 “_L=|TERM01=T1|TERM01=T2|TERM01=T3|”) NOTE See the API documentation for more information. 6 Save the spreadsheet.
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values. Separate each one with a semicolon. 4 Save the circuit template drawing. Conditionally trim or remove a wire segment As Circuit Builder dynamically builds the circuit, a circuit element selection can require that a wire is trimmed back or removed.
5 Save the circuit template drawing. 6 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls. 7 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing. 8 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H. 9 Find the optional component, for example CODE: LT01, COMMENTS: Light, UI_PROMPT_LIST: Light.
Conditional component insertion As Circuit Builder dynamically builds the circuit, a circuit element selection may require a conditional component insertion. For example, there may be an option to insert either a “start” push button or a N.O. relay contact at the insertion point of a marker block. If a momentary push button is selected then a “seal” contact should be inserted around the push button at the location marked with a separate marker block. However, if the N.O.
8 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls. 9 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing. 10 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H. 11 Find the optional component, for example CODE: PB02, COMMENTS: Start, UI_PROMPT_LIST: Start. 12 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for the option that would require the conditional insert.
3 Edit its MISC1 attribute value using the format “_D={digit}”, where 1=build left to right, 2=build up, 4=build right to left, and 8=build down. For example, if the template has a vertical 3-phase bus and the disconnection means that marker block is located over the right-hand wire, give its MISC1 attribute a value of "_D=4". It causes the child poles of the multi-pole insert to move to the left to pick up the remaining two bus wires.
The base wire is determined in one of two ways: ■ The base wire is the marker block that has a MISC1 attribute with a value of "_BASE". ■ If no MISC1 attribute has a “_BASE” value, the underlying wire that comes closest to being colinear with the insertion point of the template is the one that becomes the base wire. A template can carry multiple groups of marker blocks indicating that the underlying bus wires should auto-adjust.
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values. Separate each one with a semicolon. 4 Save the circuit template drawing. Spreadsheet method 1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
Before: (c:ace_cb_set_wiretype #data 1 nil nil) After:(c:ace_cb_set_wiretype #data 1 nil “_WIRETYPE=BRN_10AWG”) NOTE See the API documentation for more information. 6 Save the spreadsheet. Based on motor size selection You can apply the minimum wire size for a selected motor load to the wire type layer name. The value, which is extracted from the ace_electrical_standards.mdb database, can be substituted for any “@WSIZE@” string found in the “_WIRETYPE=” value.
5 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for this wire. For example, the last argument of this Set Wire type API call is used to predefine MISC1 coded values with nil when nothing extra is defined. Before and after are shown: Before: (c:ace_cb_set_wiretype #data 1 nil nil) After:(c:ace_cb_set_wiretype #data 1 nil “_WIRETYPE=BRN_@WSIZE@”) NOTE See the API documentation for more information. 6 Save the spreadsheet.
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values. Separate each one with a semicolon. 4 Save the circuit template drawing. Spreadsheet method 1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
Format the numeric tag of the motor symbol in a wire number You can include the motor symbol tag number assignment in connected wire number assignments. It requires coordination between the motor symbol insertion and the wire number insertion. The motor symbol must insert before the wire number. The order of insertion is controlled by the ORDER attribute value on the marker blocks within the circuit template drawing.
7 Find the marker blocks for the wire numbers that are tied to the motor tag. These could be on the main circuit template or on a nested template drawing. Open the circuit template drawing. 8 Find the correct marker block for the wire number. 9 Edit its MISC1 attribute value using the @MOTOR_NUM@ in the format where you want the motor tag value. For example, “_TAGFMT=@MOTOR_NUM@-%N” or to predefine a wire number, “_TAGFMT=@MOTOR_NUM@-T1A”.
insert before these other components. The order of insertion is controlled by the ORDER attribute value on the marker blocks within the circuit template drawing. The marker block ORDER attribute value for the motor symbol must be a lower number than the ORDER values of the marker blocks for the other components in the circuit template drawing. When the other components are inserted, the motor tag value can be incorporated into the subsequent component tags.
The last argument of this API call, “%N=@MOTOR_NUM@”, tells Circuit Builder to use the TAG1 value from the motor, saved as “@MOTOR_NUM@”, as the number part of the tag for this component. For example, if the component tag format is defined on page 222 as “%S-%F-%N”, the numeric part of the motor tag is used for the “%N” part of the generated component tag. You can also define this using a fixed _TAGFMT option. Using this approach overrides the component tag format defined on page 222 for the drawing.
1 Open the circuit template drawings that contain the parent and child marker blocks. There can be more than one circuit template drawing involved, for example a main template with power contacts and a nested template with the starter coils and interlocking auxiliary contacts. 2 Find the correct marker block for each component that requires a new default tag link. 3 Edit the MISC1 attribute value adding “_PRETAG={new default tag link}”.
Map motor parameters to the motor symbol attributes When a motor circuit is selected, a special motor setup/annotation function is called. This special function is flagged by a marker block on the template with a CODE value which maps to a line in the circuit codes sheet marked "!MCC_CTRL" in the UI_TITLE field. This function references the ace_electrical_standards.mdb file to determine full load current and wire size values for a selected set of motor input parameters.
The elements in the first sublist of the "#data" list are held in memory in the following order. The values related to the motor are held in the first eight elements. See the API documentation for a complete list of elements. 0 Motor Type 1 Power 2 Units 3 Voltage 4 Phase 5 Hertz (Hz) 6 Speed (RPM) 7 Full Load Amps (FLA) NOTE Circuit Builder numbers this indexed list starting at 0 rather than 1. There are two ways to map these values to the attributes on a component.
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values. Separate each one with a semicolon. 4 Save the circuit template drawing. Spreadsheet method 1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
action for this combination of selections. The sum is matched to a value in the UI_SEL field. Once this match is made, the COMMAND_LIST value, ANNOTATE_LIST value, and so on, are used to insert and annotate the selections. 5 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for this motor symbol. For example, the last argument of this Insert Component API call is used to predefine MISC1 coded values with nil when nothing extra is defined.
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values. Separate each one with a semicolon. 4 Save the circuit template drawing. Spreadsheet method 1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
action for this combination of selections. The sum is matched to a value in the UI_SEL field. Once this match is made, the COMMAND_LIST value, ANNOTATE_LIST value, and so on, are used to insert and annotate the selections. 5 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for this component. For example, the last argument of this Insert Multi-pole Component API call is used to predefine MISC1 coded values with nil when nothing extra is defined.
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values. Separate each one with a semicolon. 4 Save the circuit template drawing. Spreadsheet method 1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
After:(c:ace_cb_wnum nil nil 1 “_TAGFMT=%N-T1”) NOTE See the API documentation for more information. 6 Save the spreadsheet. Predefine attribute values There are three ways to predefine attribute values for a component. ■ On the marker block for the component in the circuit template drawing. ■ In the Circuit Builder spreadsheet circuit codes sheet. ■ Annotation presets on page 2072 - provides the ability to select which attribute values to apply when the circuit is inserted.
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values. Separate each one with a semicolon. 4 Save the circuit template drawing. Spreadsheet method 1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
5 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for this component. For example, the last argument of this Insert Component API call is used to predefine MISC1 coded values with nil when nothing extra is defined. Before and after are shown: Before: (c:ace_cb_insym #xyz nil "HPB12" #scl 8 nil) After: (c:ace_cb_insym #xyz nil "HPB12" #scl 8 “DESC1=CONVEYOR;DESC2=SYSTEM RESET”) NOTE See the API documentation for more information. 6 Save the spreadsheet.
7 Enter the ANNO_CODE value from earlier in the ANNO_CODE field of a blank row, ANNO_3M. For this example, you define some attribute values for the motor symbol. 8 In AutoCAD Electrical, find the marker block that defines the insertion point for the motor symbol. Find the CODE attribute value, for example MTR03. 9 In the spreadsheet, add a new line in the ANNO_CODE table for each attribute you wish to predefine. For example: ■ ANNO_CODE = ANNO_3M. It is the value from the ACE_CIRCS sheet for this circuit.
inserted. You can select which attribute values to apply or edit the values as necessary. 16 Select OK. 17 On the Circuit Selection dialog box, select Insert. The circuit is built and the attribute values are applied. Predefine a wire number Predefine a wire number on the wire number marker block on the circuit template drawing. 1 Open the circuit template drawing that contains the marker block for the wire number. 2 Find the correct marker block for the wire number.
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values. Separate each one with a semicolon. 4 Save the circuit template drawing. NOTE To get a fixed wire number, you must adjust the API call in the spreadsheet to indicate it. See the API documentation for more information.
When the Circuit Configuration dialog box opens, and you select Main Disconnecting Means from the Circuit Elements tree structure, the Fused Disconnect option is selected. If you select Insert, instead of Configure, to insert the circuit without user prompts, the Fused Disconnect is used for the main disconnecting means. If you always want a different option selected or used as the default, this value can be changed. 1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
Here is how it is defined: ■ The CODE value of the marker block on the inserted circuit template drawing, points at a group of rows in the circuit codes sheet. These rows define the types of components that can be inserted at the location of this marker block. ■ The row for the inserted component, either the default component or the component selected on the Circuit Configuration dialog box, contains an ANNOTATION_LIST column value.
■ The cell in the MOTOR_I_CALC table contains an expression using “I” to represent the full load amps of the motor. This expression is evaluated using the actual full load amps for the motor. The calculated value is used to determine the value to assign to the attribute. Valid operations are +-*/^. The “^” character is the exponential function. For example, I^2 is I squared, while I^0.5 is the square root of I. If-then-else statements are supported including one level of nested statements.
MFG={manufacturer};CAT={catalog}. For example, an “A3” entry for 15A time-delay fuses might look like the following example: MFG=BUSSMAN;CAT=KTK-R-15 When a component has multiple calculated values such as a disconnect switch with fuses, the two RATING attributes for the component are semicolon delimited, as shown in this example: (c:ace_cb_anno2 nil “A7” “RATING1;RATING2” nil 0) The MOTOR_I_MAP table contains corresponding semicolon delimited values in the RATING column.
trap distance cannot be set. It is calculated from the drawing scale. NOTE If this value is not defined on the marker block, Circuit Builder uses a distance value equal to 200 times the trap distance value of the drawing. The CODE value of the marker block must tie in to the (c:ace_cb_stretch_wire_connect #xyz nil #misc1) API call in the spreadsheet. The values on the MISC1 attributes are used for the #misc1 argument.
Circuit Builder - How to | 2081
NOTE If the marked wire has a terminal at its end, Circuit Builder stretches the wire and moves the terminal. It stretches based on the origin of the connected terminal rather than the end of the wire. Build your own symbols Build your own symbols You can use the Symbol Builder to create an AutoCAD Electrical symbol or to convert existing non-AutoCAD Electrical symbols.
the geometry of the symbol or by converting text entities to AutoCAD Electrical attributes. You can also use AutoCAD attribute definition and editing commands to do the same thing. Use this tool to quickly pick and place attributes. It tracks what attributes are present and checks your work to make sure that any AutoCAD Electrical required attributes are not omitted. For this exercise, you create a symbol and add AutoCAD Electrical attributes to the new geometry.
5 In the Attribute template section, choose Type: Generic. 6 In the Select from drawing section, click Select objects and select the rectangle. 7 Select OK. Add attributes In this part of the exercise, you insert some AutoCAD Electrical attributes from the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor. You are not limited to these attributes, and you can include your own user-defined attributes on the AutoCAD Electrical block files. NOTE The TAG1 attribute is the only one required for a parent schematic symbol.
9 Select DESC1, click the Insert Attribute tool, and insert it below TAG1. 10 Repeat to insert the INST and LOC attributes above TAG1. 11 Select MFG, CAT, and ASSYCODE. Click the Insert Attribute tool, and insert them near the center of the rectangle. NOTE If the CAT and ASSYCODE attributes are not listed they are inserted with MFG as a group. 12 Repeat to insert the FAMILY attribute near the center of the rectangle.
Click Symbol Builder tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Palette Visibility Toggle. 2 Expand the Wire Connection section of the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor. 3 Expand the Direction/Style list and select Others to launch the Insert Wire Connections dialog box. 4 On the Insert Wire Connections dialog box, select Terminal Style: Screw. 5 Select Connection Direction: Left. 6 Check Use this configuration as default. This directs Symbol Builder to use the current Terminal Style and Scale as the default in the drop-down list.
10 Back on the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor, expand the Wire Connection list and select Bottom/Screw. 11 Select the Insert Wire Connection tool and insert the terminal in the bottom center of the rectangle. 12 Select Right/Screw from the Wire Connection Direction/Style list. 13 Select the Insert Wire Connection tool and insert the terminal in the center of the right-hand side of the rectangle. 14 In the Pins section, enter “GND” in the TERM02 value, and “L2” in the TERM03 value.
Finishing the parent symbol 1 Click Symbol Builder tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Done. 2 Click Base Point: Pick point and select the center of the rectangle. 3 Select Wblock. Wblock creates the symbol .dwg file, while Block creates the symbol for this drawing file only. 4 Enter the Name and file path or keep the default. AutoCAD Electrical provides a default name for the new symbol based on the attribute template selected.
4 Click Insert to insert the attribute or OK to add it to the list without inserting it. ■ Link Lines: Inserts Link Line attributes so the program can draw dashed link lines between a parent symbol and its related child contact. It requires special attributes at the point where the dashed line connects to the symbol. 1 Expand the Link Lines section. 2 Select a direction from the Direction list. 3 Select the Insert Link Lines tool. 4 Select a location for the Link Line attribute.
■ Convert text: If you selected existing text entities from the Select Symbol/Objects dialog box, or added text while in the Block Editor environment, this option converts a single text entity to an AutoCAD Electrical attribute in the same location as the original text. 1 Select an attribute on the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor. 2 Select the Convert Text tool. 3 Select the text entity. The text entity is converted to the attribute. The text value becomes the default value for the attribute.
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\jic125 Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\jic125 4 In the Attribute template section, choose Symbol: Horizontal Terminal. 5 In the Attribute template section, choose Type: Terminal with wire number. 6 In the Select from drawing section:, click Select objects and select the rectangle. 7 Select OK.
7 Insert the attribute above the rectangle. 8 Select WIRENO, click the Insert Attribute tool, and insert it above TAGSTRIP. Use the Properties tool to change it to Justify = Center. 9 Select MFG, CAT, and ASSYCODE. Click the Insert Attribute tool, and insert them near the center of the rectangle. NOTE If the CAT and ASSYCODE attributes are not listed they are inserted with MFG as a group. Add wire connection attributes You can define wire connection points for the library symbol.
4 Select the Insert Wire Connection tool and insert the wire connection in the center of the left-hand side of the rectangle. Use the Midpoint OSnap to insert the wire connection attribute in the middle of the line. 5 The wire connection insertion remains active until you press Enter. Press “R{spacebar}” and insert the wire connection in the center of the right-hand side of the rectangle. 6 Press “T{spacebar}” and insert the wire connection in the center of the top of the rectangle.
as a one-line symbol. This is defined by the WDTYPE attribute on page 325 value of “1-” on the symbol, or a “1-1” on a one-line bus-tap symbol. 5 (Optional) If you are going to add the symbol to the icon menu at a later time using the Icon Menu Wizard on page 1231, check Icon image. Enter the image name and folder. 6 (Optional) Click Details to see the Symbol Audit on page 359 dialog box listing potential issues with your symbol. 7 Select OK. 8 Select Close Block Editor from the block editor toolbar.
5 In the Attribute template section, choose Type: (CB) Circuit breakers. 6 In the Select from drawing section, click Select objects and select the graphics. 7 Select OK. Add attributes In this part of the exercise, you insert some AutoCAD Electrical attributes from the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor. You are not limited to these attributes, and you can include your own user-defined attributes on the AutoCAD Electrical block files.
NOTE You can also right-click and select Insert Attribute or drag the attribute to insert it. 8 Select WDTYPE, click the Insert Attribute tool, and insert it. The WDTYPE attribute has a value of “1-” and is invisible by default. It is required to identify the symbol as a one-line symbol. 9 Select DESC1, click the Insert Attribute tool, and insert it below TAG1. 10 Repeat to insert the INST and LOC attributes above TAG1. 11 Select MFG, CAT, and ASSYCODE.
This style contains just the wire connection attributes with no graphics. Select Others to display the Insert Wire Connections dialog box for selecting other styles. 4 Select the Insert Wire Connection tool and insert the wire connection attributes. The wire connection attribute, X2TERM01, and the terminal pin attribute, TERM01, are inserted. 5 Back on the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor, expand the Wire Connection list and select Bottom/None.
7 Select OK. 8 Select Close Block Editor from the block editor toolbar. 9 (Optional) Select Yes to insert the symbol on the drawing and select a location. If you place the component on an existing wire, the wire breaks. The component tag is assigned. See also: ■ Create a parent schematic symbol on page 2083 Convert a non-AutoCAD Electrical block 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder drop-down ➤ Symbol Builder. 2 Browse to the existing block to select the symbol to create or edit.
Converting attribute definition or text objects If the existing symbol contains attribute or text objects you can convert these to the expected attributes for the symbol type. 1 If the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor is not visible, Click Symbol Builder tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Palette Visibility Toggle. 2 Select the Convert Text to Attribute tool to open the dialog box. All the attributes and text objects contained in your non-AutoCAD Electrical block are in the left-hand list.
■ The symbol block naming for the panel footprint does not follow the special naming convention. The first four or five characters of the block name for a panel symbol is not as critical as it is for schematic symbols. In this example, you take geometry (either geometry you just drew, existing geometry, or a vendor representation) and convert it to an AutoCAD Electrical panel footprint using the Symbol Builder. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder drop-down ➤ Symbol Builder.
Add attributes to the symbol In this part of the exercise, you insert some AutoCAD Electrical attributes from the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor. You are not limited to these attributes and you can include your own user-defined attributes on the AutoCAD Electrical block files. NOTE The P_TAG1 attribute is the only one required for a panel footprint symbol. The other attributes in the Required section are expected on a panel footprint, however the symbol is recognized as a panel footprint without them.
9 Insert the LOC, INST, MFG, CAT, and ASSYCODE attributes. NOTE If the CAT and ASSYCODE attributes are not listed they are inserted with MFG as a group. Finishing the panel symbol 1 Click Symbol Builder tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Done. 2 Click Base Point: Pick point and select the insertion point for the graphics. 3 Select Wblock. Wblock creates the symbol .dwg file, while Block creates the symbol for this drawing file only. 4 Enter the Name and file path or keep the default.
5 (Optional) If you are going to add the symbol to the icon menu at a later time using the Icon Menu Wizard on page 1231, check Icon image. Enter the image name and folder. 6 (Optional) Click Details to see the Symbol Audit on page 359 dialog box listing potential issues with your symbol. 7 Select OK. 8 Select Close Block Editor from the block editor toolbar. 9 (Optional) Select Yes to insert the symbol on the drawing and select a location.
Block Editor environment, this option converts existing text entities to AutoCAD Electrical attributes in the same location as the original text. 1 Select the Convert Text to Attribute tool from the Symbol Builder toolbar to launch the dialog box. 2 Select a text entry in the list and click the arrow pointing at the attribute name. 3 Repeat for all text entities. 4 Click Done. The text entity is converted to the attribute. The text value becomes the default value for the attribute.
You can set up to have visible attributes added to any footprint automatically at footprint insertion time. There are five attribute template drawings: wd_ptag_addattr_comp.dwg component footprints wd_ptag_addattr_trm.dwg terminal with terminal number wd_ptag_addattr_wtrm.dwg terminal with wire number as terminal number wd_ptag_addattr_itemballoon.dwg balloons Wd_ptag_addattr_pnltermstrip.
NOTE Wire connection attributes are not included in the symbol attribute templates but are in separate wire connection templates on page 2107. 1 Create a drawing file following the naming convention “AT_{symbol}_{type}.dwg” containing the AutoCAD Electrical attribute definitions. 2 (Optional) Add the xdata and indexed attributes which tell the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor how to handle each attribute. 3 (Optional) Add the symbol type to the “_FAMILY_DESCRIPTION” table in the catalog database file.
VIA_WD_MULTIATT The value defines a group of attributes to insert together. The value lists all the attributes which are inserted along with the attribute with this xdata. The attributes listed are not displayed in the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor. For example, if you want DESC2 and DESC3 inserted when you insert DESC1, add this xdata with the value “DESC2,DESC3” to the DESC1 attribute definition. NOTE MFG, CAT, and ASSYCODE are a default group.
■ BB?21.dwg ■ BB?22.dwg ■ BB?23.dwg ■ BB?31.dwg ■ BB?32.dwg ■ BB?33.dwg The “?” is replaced with the next available digit. AutoCAD Electrical allows up to ten styles using the digits 0-9. You can create them using new drawings or by copying a set of existing wire connection template drawings to the appropriate names and modifying as needed. Starting a wire connection template from a new drawing 1 Start a blank new drawing. 2 Draw the graphics for the wire connection.
■ Select Add. ■ Enter “Terminal style” for the custom property name. ■ Enter the style description for the value. ■ Select OK to save the drawing property. 7 Save the drawing to the appropriate library folder following the wire connection template naming convention. Wire connection template naming convention ■ First two characters are “BB”. ■ Optional characters which indicate the symbol type for this wire connection.
31 Right and top 32 Right 33 Right and bottom Supplied wire connection templates Template Name Symbol Type Terminal Style Attributes in the template BB012, BB021, BB023, BB032 Schematic parent or child None X?TERMn, TERMn BB000 Schematic parent or child None X0TERMn BB111 to B133 Schematic parent or child Screw X?TERMn, TERMn BB211 to BB233 Schematic parent or child Small Screw X?TERMn, TERMn BB311 to BB333 Schematic parent or child Circle, number inside X?TERMn, TERMn BB411 to
Template Name Symbol Type Terminal Style Attributes in the template BBPTWN1_12, BBPTWN1_21, BBPTWN1_23, BBPTWN1_32 Panel footprint One wire number X?TERMn, TERMn, TERMDESCn, WIRENOn BBPTWN2_12, BBPTWN2_21, BBPTWN2_23, BBPTWN2_32 Panel footprint Two wire numbers X?TERMn, TERMn, TERMDESCn, WIRENOn, WIRENOnA BBPTWN_NOTERM0_12, BBPTWN_NOTERM0_21, BBPTWN_NOTERM0_23, BBPTWN_NOTERM0_32 Panel terminal, no levels No levels WIRENOL, WIRENOR, TERM, TERMDESCL, TERMDESCR BBPTWN_NOTERM1_12, BBPTWN_NOTERM1
Add your own symbols, circuits, and commands to the icon menu AutoCAD Electrical supplies two default icon menus: one for schematic symbols and the other for panel symbols. Each menu is driven by a text file. AutoCAD Electrical defaults to icon menu ACE__MENU.DAT (where = JIC, IEC, GB, HYD, JIS, PID, or PNEU) for schematic symbols and ACE_PANEL_MENU.DAT for panel symbols. These menu files are located in ■ Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCA
2 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Icon Menu Wizard. 3 In the Select Menu File dialog box, select to modify the schematic menu file, and click OK. 4 In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, select Add ➤ Component to add a new icon to the menu. NOTE You can also right-click in empty space and select Add icon ➤ Component. Three pieces of information are needed for the new icon button. 5 On the Add Icon - Component dialog box, specify the image file name and graphic to appear in the icon button.
command on your current screen image to create the .png and .sld file. If the file does not exist, then Create PNG from the current screen image is selected by default. If you do not want to create the image from the current drawing's displayed image, switch it off. If you want to redo an existing image, click this switch on. 6 Specify the block name to insert on the icon. The symbol's file name can be typed into the edit box or you can browse for an existing WBlocked ".
The Create New Submenu dialog box appears. Here you can select the function that will be performed when the icon is selected from the icon menu. Three pieces of information are needed to trigger the new menu page. 2 On the Create New Submenu dialog box, specify the image file name and .sld or .png graphic to appear in the icon button. The image name can be manually typed into the edit box. You can browse to an existing .sld or .
display at the right. If quotation marks are shown, then enclose the parameter value within quotation marks. NOTE If you select an API command that requires parameters you must manually enter the additional parameters as indicated. Commands that require parameters should be inside of parenthesis. If you use one of the AutoCAD commands from the list, no parenthesis are needed.
NOTE Browse cannot be used if you are using a slide library (instead of individual .sld files). Manually enter these as "library name(slide name)". 3 Specify the circuit name to insert on the icon. The symbol's file name can be typed into the edit box or you can browse for an existing WBlocked ".dwg" file to assign to the icon or insert the full active drawing as a block. 4 Click OK. The new menu button appears in the menu.
NOTE Browse cannot be used if you are using a slide library (instead of individual .sld files). Manually enter these as "library name(slide name)". 3 Click OK. The new menu button appears in the menu. 4 Select the appropriate Insert Component command and test your new symbol insert. Edit the DAT file with a text editor There may be times when you want to bypass the Icon Menu Wizard and edit the menu DAT file directly.
NOTE Make sure this text is all on one line. 3 In your new "my_menu.dat" file, add a line like the following one so that you can jump back to the default AutoCAD Electrical icon menu. Default AutoCAD Electrical menu|back2wd.sld|$C=(c:wd_loadmenu "ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT")(c:wd_insym_go2menu 0) The result should be: **M0 D0 My Menu: My Companies Symbols AutoCAD Electrical menu|back2wd.sld|$C=(c:wd_loadmenu "ACE_JIC_MENU.
options defined in the Project Properties dialog box can also be applied to any drawing in the project if needed. Project Settings Tab Schematic Libraries Schematic Icon Menu File AutoCAD Electrical contains two specific IEC-type symbols, IEC2 and IEC4. The main difference between these libraries is the size of the text associated with them. ■ IEC2 symbols have a text size of 2.5 for the main text items such as Component Tag, Installation, Location, Component Description, and so on.
Components Tab Component TAG Options Defines most of the specific tagging options to conform to the IEC tagging mode. Select the option that best fits your needs: ■ Combined Installation/Location Tag Mode: Uses the combined installation/location tag for interpreting component tag names. For example, 100CR relay contact marked with location code PNL1 is interpreted as being associated with a different relay coil than relay contact -100CR marked with location code PNL2.
Components Tab as K16 in the Surf dialog box. But if selected, the tag might show up +AAA-K16 (where AAA is the location). ■ Suppress Installation/Location in tag when match drawing default: Suppresses Location and Installation values on components if they match the drawing default values. ■ Suppress Installation/Location in tag on reports: Specifies to exclude Installation and Location values as part of the tag when displayed in reports.
Cross-reference Tab (nontable) format, you can define details of the graphical format by clicking Setup. Styles Tab Wire Style In IEC, it is sometimes preferable to display wire connections as tee markers instead of connection dots. To do this, in the Wire Tee section, select the appropriate angle tee marker from the list. Drawing Format Tab Ladder Defaults In IEC, the most common ladder orientation is Horizontal. In the Ladder Defaults section, configure how to display your horizontal ladders.
Drawing Format Tab spacing, and origin on the X Zones setup dialog box. TIP Use negative zone spacing value if you want the zone reference origin to be at the right side of the drawing. Scale for IEC drawings is normally set to mm full size. Scale Drawing Properties Drawing Properties are configured by either right-clicking on the drawing name in the Project Manager and selecting Properties ➤ Drawing Properties, or by selecting Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\User\ Windows Vista, Windows 7: C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\User\ 2 Active project's .wdp file subdirectory 3 All paths defined under AutoCAD Options ➤ Files ➤ Support Files Search Path Depending on how you want to override component family names, you can move the wd_fam.
Project settings 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. 2 Right-click on the project name in Project Manager. 3 Select Properties. 4 Select the Project Settings tab. 5 Expand the Schematic Libraries section. 6 Remove any folder names you no longer want and add any that you need. For example, remove the JIC folder and add the IEC library folder. NOTE AutoCAD Electrical searches for a symbol in the order the folders are listed. 7 Expand the Schematic Icon Menu File section.
6 Highlight all the drawings in Project Manager you wish to apply the project settings to. 7 Right-click and select Properties ➤ Apply Project Defaults. NOTE When the project settings are applied to a drawing, all settings are applied, not specific ones. Drawing settings - change a single drawing Component tagging options can be changed on a per-drawing basis. 1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. 2 Highlight the drawing in Project Manager that you wish to change.
and data with the ability to search for required information across multiple drawings and projects. The AutoCAD Vault add-in works within AutoCAD Electrical, adding data management tools to the interface. Through the AutoCAD Vault add-in, you can add files to a vault, and check files in and out. The add-in works with both DWG and image files. In AutoCAD Electrical, you work on one project at a time. The project file (.wdp) lists all the drawings that are part of a project.
TIP If you want others to view updates you made to a project and you want to continue modifying the project, select the Keep Checked Out option on the Check In dialog box. This checks in the updates you made to the project and keeps the project checked out to you. NOTE You must have all references of a project file downloaded to your working folder to edit the project file.
3 In a single user environment, if you did not set a working folder yet, start Autodesk Vault Explorer and set a working folder on your local computer and then switch back to AutoCAD Electrical. In a multiple-user design environment, set the working folder on a shared network resource for the entire project team. This allows simultaneous access for all users on the same dataset and maintains the data consistency. 4 Open a project you want to add to the vault.
Get Latest Version retrieves a read-only copy of the most recent design data that is checked in. You cannot modify it until you check it out using Autodesk Vault Explorer or the Vault add-in for AutoCAD-based products. 1 In the Project Manager, select a file. 2 Right-click and select: ■ Get Latest Version to get the most recent version of the selected project file. ■ Get Latest Version for All to get the most recent version of the selected project file and all of the related files.
is associated to the latest versions of the drawing at that instance. You can edit individual drawings of a project and create versions of the drawings as needed. When you want to take a project snapshot (create a project version), check out the .wdp and check it back in. Even if the .wdp is not modified, if any drawings have newer versions, a newer version of the .wdp is created, associating all newer drawing versions.
■ Autodesk Vault Explorer ■ AutoCAD Vault Add-in ■ Microsoft Vault Add-in You can choose to work in a local or shared working folder according to your design requirements. A shared working folder is highly recommended for the AutoCAD Electrical environment, especially in a multi-user situation, because it enables you and your design team to keep all files up-to-date. To use a shared workspace, the system administrator should preset a consistent working folder for all project members to use.
5 You can open a file in read only when it is currently checked out to someone else using the same working folder. 6 Ensure that the drawings are checked back into the vault after you finish working on them so they are available to other users who need to modify them.
AutoCAD Electrical Command 25 AutoCAD Electrical Commands Commands These topics are called from within the command itself. If you do not find all the information you need, look further in the Help.
Automatic Report Selection on page 1497 Bend Wire on page 921 Block Replacement on page 1664 Break Apart Terminal Associations on page 1057 Cable Markers on page 934 Change Attribute Justification on page 870 Change Attribute Layer on page 862 Change Attribute Size on page 873 Change/Convert Wire Type on page 275 Change Cross-reference to Multiple Line Text on page 879 Check/Repair Gap Pointers on page 1688 Check/Trace Wire on page 1688 Child Location/Description Update on page 882 Circuit Builder on page 7
Copy Assembly on page 1564 Copy Catalog Assignment on page 1299 Copy Circuit on page 724 Copy Component on page 773 Copy Footprint on page 1561 Copy Installation Code on page 1582 Copy Group Code on page 1582 Copy Level Assignments on page 1613 Copy Location Code on page 1582 Copy Mount Code on page 1582 Copy Project on page 156 Copy Terminal Block Properties on page 1057 Copy Wire Number on page 999 Copy Wire Number (In-Line) on page 1000 Create/Edit Wire Type on page 266 Create New Drawing on page 168 Cre
Drawing Properties: Components on page 222 Drawing Properties: Cross-references on page 228 Drawing Properties: Drawing Format on page 231 Drawing Properties: Drawing Settings on page 220 Drawing Properties: Styles on page 1016 Drawing Properties: Wire Numbers on page 979 Edit Component on page 742 Edit Conduit Marker on page 1627 Edit Footprint on page 1565 Edit Jumper on page 1122 Edit Language Database File on page 1203 Edit Selected Attribute on page 861 Edit Wire Number on page 992 Edit Wire Sequence o
Flip Wire Number on page 1002 Footprint Database File Editor on page 1595 Hide Attribute (Single Picks) on page 868 Hide Attribute (Window/Multiple) on page 868 Hide/Unhide Cross-Referencing on page 812 Hide Wire Numbers on page 1008 Icon Menu Wizard on page 1234 IEC Tag Mode - Update on page 192 In-Line Wire Labels on page 924 Insert 22.5 Degree Wire on page 912 Insert 45 Degree Wire on page 912 Insert 67.
Insert Footprint (Manual) on page 1552 Insert Footprint (Manufacturer Menu) on page 1544 Insert Footprint (Schematic List) on page 1537 Insert Hydraulic Components on page 1676 Insert Ladder on page 961 Insert Panel Assembly on page 1563 Insert P&ID Components on page 1681 Insert PLC (Full Units) on page 592 Insert PLC (Parametric) on page 588 Insert Pneumatic Components on page 1671 Insert Reference Arrow - From on page 847 Insert Reference Arrow - To on page 846 Insert Saved Circuit on page 735 Insert Spl
Link Description on page 1657 Link Item Number on page 1657 Link Installation Code on page 1657 Link Location Code on page 1657 Link Manufacturer on page 1657 Link PLC Address Description on page 1657 Link Rating on page 1657 Link Split Tag on page 1657 Link Terminal Number on page 1657 Link User on page 1657 List Signal Code on page 848 Location Box on page 889 Location Symbols on page 885 Make Xdata Visible on page 1526 Map Attributes from Old to New on page 1642 Mark/Verify Drawings on page 1200 Mark Com
Multiple Insert (Pick Master) on page 775 Multiple Wire Bus on page 917 Next Project Drawing on page 1189 Panel Bill of Materials Report on page 1430 Panel Component Report on page 1433 Panel Component Exception Report on page 1432 Panel Configuration on page 1527 Panel Nameplate Report on page 1437 Panel Terminal Exception Report on page 1439 Panel Terminal Strip Report on page 1622 Panel Terminal Strip Swap Wire Text on page 1611 Panel Wire Connection Report on page 1440 Pin List Database Editor on page 1
Promis.
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Missing Bill of Material on page 1480 Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC/IO Address and Descriptions on page 1484 Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC I/O Component Connection on page 1467 Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC Modules Used So Far on page 1491 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Terminal Numbers on page 1486 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Terminal Plan on page 1489 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Wire From/To on page 1483 Report F
Schematic Connector Summary Report on page 1413 Schematic Database File Editor on page 782 Schematic Missing Bill of Material Report on page 1416 Schematic PLC I/O Address and Descriptions Report on page 1419 Schematic PLC I/O Component Connection Report on page 1407 Schematic PLC Modules Used So Far Report on page 1422 Schematic Terminal Numbers Report on page 1420 Schematic Terminal Plan Report on page 1421 Schematic Wire From/To Report on page 1418 Schematic Wire Label Report on page 1423 Scoot on page 7
Squeeze Attribute/Text on page 871 Stretch Attribute/Text on page 871 Stretch Connector on page 1144 Stretch PLC Module on page 801 Stretch Wire on page 920 Surfer on page 1187 Swap/Update Block on page 333 Swap Connector Pins on page 1149 Swap Wire Numbers on page 999 Symbol Builder on page 342 Tag Child on page 1654 Tag Child - Form C on page 1654 Tag Child - N.C. on page 1654 Tag Child - N.O.
Terminal List (From File) on page 1127 Terminal List (Manual Picks) on page 1127 Terminal Properties Database Editor on page 1060 Terminal Renumber (Pick Mode) on page 1132 Terminal Renumber (Project-Wide) on page 1133 Terminal Strip Editor on page 1071 Terminal Strip Table Generator on page 1116 Title Block Setup on page 1213 Title Block Update on page 1221 Toggle Angled Tee Markers on page 1033 Toggle NO/NC on page 808 Toggle Wire Number In-Line on page 978 Trim Wire on page 919 Unlink on page 1661 Unhide
User Defined Attribute List on page 1510 View/Edit Component Sequence on page 1612 Wire Annotation Exception Report on page 1436 Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint on page 1588 Wire Arrows for Reference Only on page 738 Wire Color/Gauge Labels on page 923 Wire/Conduit Routing Report on page 1635 Wire Number Leader on page 997 Xdata Editor on page 1695 X-Y Grid Setup on page 234 X Zones Setup on page 233 Zip Project on page 188 2148 | Chapter 25 AutoCAD Electrical Command
Index _LISTBOX_DEF table 1279, 1291 _PINLIST database table 1309 @MOTOR_NUM@ (motor symbol tags) 2059, 2061 1 pole circuit breaker symbols 454 1-line circuits 27, 700, 703, 706 1-line symbols 329 1-phase ladders 963 1-phase motor symbols 487 2+ pole circuit breaker symbols 458 3 -phase ladders 963 3 Phase Wire Numbering dialog box 976 3-phase buses 975 3-phase motor symbols 489, 655, 2006 3-phase transformer symbols 473 3-phase wires 917–918, 976 3-position selector switches 450 3-voltage-phase switch symbo
Edit Entry dialog box 1138 Edit Multi-Connection Sequence Terminal Symbol dialog box 1135 Edit PLC I/O Point dialog box 624 Edit Record dialog box 1298 Insert Component dialog box 742 Insert/Edit Child Component - IEC dialog box 773 Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box 769 Insert/Edit Component dialog box 748, 753 Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box 1046 Option - Tag Format Family Override dialog box 759 Panel Tag List dialog box 758 Parts Catalog dialog box 1291 Tags in Use dialog box 757 AECOMPONENTC
Panel Terminals Data Export dialog box 1506 PLC I/O Address/Description Export dialog box 1505 PLC I/O Connection Export dialog box 1504 PLC I/O Header Information Export dialog box 1503 Terminal Data Export dialog box 1507 Update Drawings per Spreadsheet Data dialog box 1508 AEFANIN command 1026 AEFANINDEST command 1025 AEFANINSRC command 1024 AEFINDCOMPTEXT command 865–866 AEFINDTERMTEXT command 867 AEFINDWIRENO command 987 AEFIXTAG command 878 AEFLIP command 805 AEFOOTPRINT command Component Catalog Look
Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC I/O Component Connection dialog box 1469 Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC Modules Used So Far dialog box 1493 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Terminal Numbers dialog box 1489 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Terminal Plan dialog box 1491 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Wire From/To dialog box 1484 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Wire Label dialog box 1495 Report Format File Setup - Wire Annotation Exception dialog box 1454 AEGEOMETRY comman
Panel Nameplate Data Fields to Report dialog box 1350 Panel Nameplate dialog box 1439 Panel Terminal Exception Data Fields to Report dialog box 1352 Panel Terminal Exception dialog box 1440 Panel Wire Annotation Exception Data Fields to Report dialog box 1348 Panel Wire Connection Data Fields to Report dialog box 1354 Panel Wire Connection dialog box 1441 Wire Annotation Exception dialog box 1437 AEPANELTERMINAL command 1574 AEPANELTERMINALSCH command 1540, 1542 AEPASSPWR command 1670 AEPINLISTTABLE command
AEROUTINGREPORT command Wire Conduit Routing Data Fields to Report dialog box 1396 Wire/Conduit Routing Report dialog box 1636 AERSLOGIX command 641–642 AESAVECIRCUIT command 735 AESAVEDCIRCUIT command 736 AESAXREF command 844 AESCHEMATICDB command 784–785 AESCHEMATICREPORT command Bill of Material Data Fields to Report dialog box 1356 Cable From/To Data Fields to Report dialog box 1363 Cable Label Data Fields to Report dialog box 1364 Cable Summary Data Fields to Report dialog box 1358 Component Data Field
AESPLITPLC command 805 AESS2PLC command Spreadsheet to PLC I/O utility 635 Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Setup dialog box 639 AESURF command 1189 AESWAPBLOCK command 336–338 AESYMBUILDER command Attribute Editor 349 Convert Text to Attribute dialog box 356 Insert Wire Connections dialog box 353 Insert/Edit Attributes dialog box 350 Save Symbol dialog box 359 Select SymbolObjects dialog box 344 Symbol Audit dialog box 360 Symbol Configuration dialog box 345 AETERMDBEDITOR command 1061– 1062, 1064 AETERMINAL
alternate environment settings 279 amp meters 421, 551 angled tee connections 1029 angled tee markers 1033–1034 angled wires 913, 922 Annotation Presets dialog box 708 annotations Circuit Builder circuits 681 circuits 708 converting non-Electrical blocks 1642, 1644 cross-reference symbols 839 I/O points 622 importing from external files 760 pins 1313 predefined symbol annotations 332 presets 708 ratings 807–808 reports 1428, 1437, 1454 schematic wire information 1590, 1592 swapping terminal strip text 1612
link lines 354 link panel descriptions 1943 link schematics 1936 linking to title blocks 1213 location boxes 892 location codes 881, 892 location mark symbols 885, 887 mapping 332, 336, 1663 miscellaneous attributes 331 missing 360 moving 798, 868 moving to other layers 862–863 multi-line text 880 non-AutoCAD Electrical 331 P&ID symbols 329 parametric build connectors 320 parent components 320, 882–883 PLC I/O symbols 320 predefined annotations 332 project-wide changes 1195 ratings 807–808 renaming 875 rota
resequencing item numbers 1604– 1605 banners (web pages) 1207 batch plotting 1191 Batch Plotting Options and Order dialog box 1193 batch report generation 1496 battery symbols 423, 551, 570 beacon light symbols 502–503 bell symbols 423, 570 bending wires 922 bi-directional updates 1532 Bill of Material Data Fields to Report dialog box 1356 Bill of Materials (BOM) adding part numbers to components 1283, 1285 copying 1300 equipment lists and 785 fields in reports 1340, 1356 missing catalog assignments 1304 mi
terminal associations 1057 terminal tables 1070 terminals after modules 610 bridge rectifier symbols 575 build direction 2052 Build of Materials (BOM) adding part numbers to components 1283, 1285 equipment lists and 785 fields in reports 1340, 1356 missing catalog assignments 1304 missing data in reports 1380, 1418, 1483 multiple catalogs 1303 multiple part numbers 755–756, 1303 performing checks 1303 reports 1402, 1405, 1418, 1432, 1446, 1463, 1483 bus-tap symbols 298, 304 buses 3-phase 917–918 multiple 11
multiple BOM part numbers 755– 756 multiple part numbers 1578 part numbers 1303 pin lists 1311 PLC modules 590, 596 terminal catalog codes 1046, 1083 tracking changes to 1200 updating child codes 883 Catalog Lookup File dialog box 207 Catalog Search Results dialog box 1293 catalog tables creating 1294 families 1294 structure 1277 Catalog Values dialog box 1293 catalogs adding components 1295 adding records 1298 adding tables 1299 assigning information to components 1283, 1285, 1300, 1304 catalog lookup file
configuring circuits 693 customizing circuits 655, 2006, 2044 defaults 2076 energy savings 26 inserting circuits 690 mapping motor parameters 2066 MCC database 681 mcc.
collaboration collaborative design 158 Vault setup 2134 colors cable markers 939, 943, 945, 947, 953 cables 954 wires 988, 990 columns (database tables) 685 columns (report tables) 1322 comma-delimited files exported component data 1502 exported panel layout data 1506 exported PLC data 1503–1505 exported terminal data 1506–1507 exporting 1501, 1503 updating drawings with data 1508 commands adding icons for 1234, 1242, 1264 adding to submenus 1249 AutoCAD Electrical commands 2148 Conduit Marker commands 116
deleting 798–799, 1585 descriptions 761, 868 duplicates 1686 editing 748, 753 equipment lists 782, 784–785 exceptions in reports 1342 exporting data 1502 extracting 949, 953 family codes 1271 fence crossing points 775–776 flipping or reversing 805–806 hydraulic 1676 icon properties 1252 importing from Inventor 1166–1167 inserting 738, 742, 774–776 inserting from catalogs 776, 778 inserting from equipment lists 789 inserting from panel lists 790–791, 794 installation codes 748, 753 interconnecting components
customizing 2112 direct-to-terminal wire connections 1029 displaying 1132 erasing connection codes 1132 exporting data 1504 from/to reports 1419, 1484 interconnecting components 919 level/routing wire connections 1029 multi-connection sequences 1134– 1135, 1138 PLC modules 591 reports 1368, 1409, 1428, 1441, 1461, 1469 schematic attributes 320 schematic wire connections 1029 sequencing 1029–1031, 1037, 1134 stretching wires 2082 symbols 339 tee markers 1033–1034 templates 351 wire connections 353 wire tools
constraints 1065 contacts checking 813, 815 contact states 809 contact switch symbols 545 Form C contacts 827 graphical cross-references 822, 824 pin lists 1305–1307, 1309, 1311 skipping during cross-referencing 813 symbols 379, 476 table cross-references 827, 830, 832 types of 1313 updating 883 continuing surf sessions 1187 Conversion toolbar 115 Convert promis.
cross-references about 809 advanced techniques 1981 annotations 839 attributes 320 checking coils or contacts 813, 815 child components 769, 773 child location codes 882–883 component data 748, 753 component setup 815 creating 812 dashed lines 846–848 destination symbols 809 displaying 817 drawing properties 812 drawing setup 815 formatting 817 graphical formats 822, 824 hiding 813 inserting 742 multi-line text 880 naming conventions 298 overriding 818 processing 810 project properties 812 project setup 815
footprint lookup files 1594 importing catalog information from 1283, 1300 importing connector data 1175 language translation tables 1202, 1204 merging 129 migrating 129 motor lookup database 712 moving files 1272 opening tables 682 pin lists 1305–1307, 1309, 1311 PLC database 2005 rebuilding 196 scratch databases 195 terminal properties 1060–1062, 1064 user data 854–855 DC motor symbols 490 de-rating factors 720 debugging projects 1686, 1688–1689, 1692, 1694 default libraries 301 default_cat.
symbols 557–558 directories 182 disconnect 1 pole symbols 462 disconnects 378, 461–462 Display tab (Connector Selection dialog box) 1174 Display tab (Insert Connector dialog box) 1157 displaying attributes 869 cross-references 813, 817 drawings 172 missing catalog assignments 1304 sequencing 1031, 1611 terminal associations 1055, 1057 terminal connections 1132 terminal strips 1129 wire numbers 1010 wires 978 dividers 1104, 1157, 1167 dot tee markers 1033 drafting settings 1896, 1913 dragging icons on menus
E earth symbols 423, 570 ECDS to AutoCAD Electrical conversions 1648, 1650 Edit Attribute dialog box 861 Edit Catalog Record dialog box 1298 Edit Child Component dialog box 769, 773 Edit Component - IEC dialog box 753 Edit Component dialog box 748 Edit Conduit/Wire Way Label dialog box 1631 Edit dialog box 784, 1062, 1309 Edit Entry dialog box 1138 Edit Footprint Record dialog box 1599 Edit Language Lookup File dialog box 1204 Edit Miscellaneous and Non-AutoCAD Electrical Attributes dialog box 331 Edit Mult
electronic symbols 426, 575 enclosure light symbols 423 end barriers 1104 energy flow 560 energy savings 26 ENV files 279 environment files 138, 279 equipment lists BOM data and 785 inserting components from 785– 787, 789 inserting footprints from 1557– 1559, 1561 schematic lookup files 782, 784–785 equipotential bond symbols 570 error checking 1686, 1688–1689, 1692, 1694 error reports component exceptions 1342, 1433, 1448 cross-references 809 exception reports 1428 signal reports 1019 symbol audits 357, 36
overriding tags 759 Fan-In/Fan-Out Signal Destination dialog box 1025 Fan-In/Fan-Out Signal Source dialog box 1024 Fan-In/Out Single Line Layer dialog box 1026 fanning markers in or out about 1020 advanced techniques 1996 destination markers 1021, 1025 layers 1022–1023, 1026 source markers 1021, 1024 styles 1022–1023 fault symbols 562 fence crossing points 775–776 fields BOM data in reports 1340, 1356, 1380 cable data in reports 1338, 1358, 1363–1364 catalog tables 1277, 1279 component data in reports 1344,
Footprint Database File Editor 1596, 1599 Footprint dialog box 1555 Footprint Lookup dialog box 1596 footprint lookup files 182, 1595–1596, 1599 footprint_lookup.
schematic terminal numbers reports 1489 schematic terminal plan reports 1491 schematic wire from/to reports 1484 schematic wire label reports 1495 formatting cross-references 817, 820 description text 763 reports 1442, 1444 wire annotations 1531, 1592 wire numbers 988, 990 frequency meter symbols 551 frequency relay symbols 482 from/to reports cable data 1363, 1407, 1465 controlling sequencing 1029 location codes in 1427 types of 1402 wire data 1384, 1419, 1484 fuse switch symbols 465 fuses 376, 465 fusible
checkvalve flow left 1897, 1908, 1910 filters 1899, 1909 fixed displacement pump 1898 general valves 1897, 1906, 1910 inserting 742, 1676 insertion 1897–1899, 1903, 1905– 1906, 1908, 1910 libraries 306 meters 1906 motors and pumps 1898 naming conventions 298 pressure gauge 1906 pressure relief valves 1903 reservoir 1899 restrictor with variable output flow 1909 shut off valve open 1897, 1906 single ended piston rod 1909 solenoid spring return 1908 uni-directional pump 1898 I I/O modules address and descrip
editing components 753 IEC symbols 441 inserting components 753 IEC Tag Mode Update dialog box 193 IEC tags new drawings 171 updating 193 illuminated push buttons 442 illuminated selector switches 374 Import Wire Type dialog box 273, 904 importing catalog information 1283, 1300 connector data 1175 data for I/O drawings 635, 639 RSLogix data 640–642 spreadsheet data 1500, 1508 Unity Pro data 645–646, 651 wire types 904, 907 in-line components PLC database information 630 PLC-generated drawings 639 wiring 630
footprints 1536, 1538, 1540, 1542, 1552, 1562 footprints from catalogs 1555, 1557 footprints from equipment lists 787, 1557–1559, 1561 footprints from icon menus 1544, 1548, 1551 footprints from vendor menus 1545, 1547 footprints manually 1551, 1555 footprints with spreadsheet data 1537 gauge labels 924 hydraulic components 1676 ladder rungs 966 ladders 960–961, 963 link line attributes 354 location boxes 892 location codes 881 multi-connection sequences 1138 multiple components 742 nameplates 1609–1610 one
inserting 1601–1602 resequencing 1604–1605 Item Numbering Setup dialog box item numbers balloons 1600–1601, 1604 fixed 1606 per-part numbers 211 settings 211 211 J jacks jack connector pin symbols 298 report options 1330 JIC standard 2127 JIC symbols 366 JPEG files 1205–1206 Jr.
renaming 258, 262 report tables 1322 schematic layers 258 settings 220, 233 WD_M block attributes 253 wire layers 265–266, 271, 902, 923– 924, 988, 990, 1195 wire number layers 261, 970 Layout Preview tab (Terminal Strip Editor) 1093 Layout tab (Connector Selection dialog box) 1174 Layout tab (Insert Connector dialog box) 1157 layouts about 1523 automatic updates 1532 batch plotting 1191 configuration 1527, 1529 editing 1565, 1569, 1574 exporting data 1506 footprint lookup files 1594 item number balloons 16
predefined annotations 332 saving 357, 359 schematic attributes 320 splitting tag names 299 substituting 330 swapping blocks 332–333, 336–338 Symbol Builder 342 TAG1 attribute 321 TAG2 attribute 321 text size 893 types 342 updating blocks 332–333, 336–338 light dependent electronics symbols 575 limit switches 408, 520 line reference numbers 966, 968 linear direction 557 lines blank lines in reports 1330 link lines 349, 354 PLC module boxes 608, 614 wire number leader lines 922 LINEx labels 1225 link lines a
updating 883 mapping AutoLISP values to title blocks 1227 block replacements 1663–1665 contact mapping cross-references 822, 824, 827, 830 data for import 639 editing symbol mapping tables 832 imported Inventor data properties 1166–1167 ladder diagrams to panel layouts 1534 non-Electrical blocks 1642, 1644 title block attributes 1213 title blocks information 1218, 1220 wire labels 922–924 wire list data to Inventor Cable & Harness 1519 Mark and Verify dialog box 1202 marker blocks 2037–2038 marking changes
Modify Line Reference Numbers dialog box 968 Modify/Fix/Unfix dialog box 994 Module Box Dimensions dialog box 608 Module Layout dialog box 591 Module Specifications dialog box 616 modules specification table 601 terminal information table 601 motion symbols 557–558 motor control circuits customizing 2006 wire numbers 975 motor control symbols 1-phase 487 3-phase 489 DC motors 490 general 486 generators 491 illustrated 387 starters 492 tags in wire numbers 2059 motor starter symbols 492 motor symbol tags 206
creating 1610 inserting 1609 layers 264 reports 1350, 1428, 1439, 1456 stretchable 1610 surfing references 1187 naming conventions attribute templates 2107 catalog tables 1271 circuit templates 2044 menus 1250 panel footprints 2105 schematic lookup files 782 symbols 282, 298, 2119 wire connections 2112 navigating through drawings 1190 NC contact state 809 neon pilot lights 392 network deployment 1989 new circuits 2032 new drawings 168 New Module dialog box 611 NEW_DWG value 630 next drawing command 1190 NO
Panel Component Exception Data Fields to Report dialog box 1342 Panel Component Exception dialog box 1433 Panel Component Layers dialog box 264 panel component lists 794 Panel Components dialog box 794 Panel Drawing Configuration and Defaults dialog box 1529 Panel Equipment In dialog box 1559 Panel Footprint dialog box 1557 Panel Footprint Lookup Database File Editor dialog box 1596 panel footprints attribute templates 1563 attributes 329, 1526 automatic updates 1532 catalog lookup tables 1294 configuration
inserting terminals from 795–796 Panel Missing Level/Sequence Assignments Data Fields to Report dialog box 1346 Panel Nameplate Data Fields to Report dialog box 1350 Panel Nameplate dialog box 1439 panel reports about 1318, 1428 automatic generation 1496 bill of materials reports 1340, 1432, 1446 component exception reports 1342, 1433, 1448 component reports 1344, 1435, 1451 generating 1330, 1428, 1430 list of 1428 missing level/sequence assignments reports 1346, 1436, 1452 nameplate reports 1350, 1439, 145
creating 2090 schematic attributes 320 TAG1 attribute 321 part catalogs 1271 part numbers assigning 1283, 1285, 1293 editing 1300 inserting 1300 multiple 755–756, 1578 multiple bill of materials 1303 sorting catalog databases by 1291 terminal catalog codes 1083 updating 883 Parts Catalog dialog box 1291 passing power 1670 pasting database tables 682 paths file locations 182 libraries 300, 338 project files 187 signal paths 849 PC3 (plotter configuration files) 1193 PDS (Project Database Service) 1509 PEER_C
PLC modules 596 point-to-point wiring 1140 reports 1330 schematic attributes 320 settings 1157 spacing 1159, 1167 swapping numbers 1150 pipes 1900, 1919 piping & instrumentation 1912 Piping and Instrumentation Diagram symbols inserting 742, 1681 libraries 306 naming conventions 298 symbol attributes 329 pitch 1130 PLC Component Connection Data Fields to Report dialog box 1368 PLC database about 601 advanced techniques 2005 CATEGORY field 135, 620 contents 588, 630 DESCRIPTION field 135, 620 editing 606 gene
prompts 617 reports 1402 RSLogix data 640–642 splitting 798, 802, 805 spreadsheet format 630 stand-alone points 620, 624 stretching 798, 802 styles 626 symbol illustrations 394 symbol schematic attributes 320 symbols 320, 505 terminals 603, 610, 613 tracking changes to 1200 wire numbers 977 PLC I/O Wire Numbers dialog box 977 PLC Modules Used So Far Data Fields to Report dialog box 1390 PLC Modules Used So Far reports about 1402 fields in 1390 formatting 1493 generating 1423 PLC Parametric Selection dialog
Project Zip dialog box 188 project-related files 182 Project-wide Schematic Terminal Renumber dialog box 1133 project-wide tools batch plotting 1191 marking changes 1200 moving between drawings 1190 Project-Wide Utilities dialog box 1195 publishing to the Web 1205–1207 renumbering ladders 1196 scripts 1195 surfing 1187 title blocks 1213, 1221 translating descriptions 1202–1203 updating and retagging 1199 Project-Wide Update or Retag dialog box 1199 Project-Wide Utilities dialog box 1195 projects 1714, 1728,
submenus 1259 templates 245 terminals 1046, 1053, 1060–1062, 1064, 1078 wire numbers 979 X zones 234 X-Y grid 236 Properties - Circuit dialog box 1257 Properties - Command dialog box 1254 Properties - Component dialog box 1252 Properties - Main Menu dialog box 1250 Properties - Submenu dialog box 1259 Properties dialog box Components tab 211 configuring for IEC standard 2125 Cross-References tab 216 Drawing Format tab 220 Project Settings tab 206 Styles tab 218 Wire Numbers tab 215 proximity switches capaci
editing 685, 780, 782 editing footprint lookup files 1596, 1599 editing in catalogs 1298 schematic lookup files 782, 785 terminal properties 1060, 1064 user data 854–855 Ref Des (tags) 748 referencing arrow symbols 431, 580 existing circuits 724 format settings 220, 233 WD_M block attributes 253 refreshing terminal strips 1093, 1119 relationships 1055, 1057 relays counter relay symbols 481 current protection relay symbols 479 general symbols 476, 482 illustrated 379, 382 relays with suppression symbols 477
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Component Wire List dialog box 1471 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Connector Details dialog box 1474 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Connector Plug dialog box 1476 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Connector Summary dialog box 1478 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Missing Bill of Material dialog box 1483 Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC I/O Address and Descriptions dialog box 1486 Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC I/O Component Connection
project-wide changes 1199 reusing circuits 735 Reverse/Flip Component dialog box 806 reversing components 805–806 connectors 1142, 1144 reviewing drawing sets 1200 RGF files 1496 ribbon about 25, 117 Conduit Marker tools 116 Conversion tools 115 displaying and organizing 118 Extra Library tools 117 Main Electrical tools 94, 104 Panel Layout tools 108 Power Check tools 117 right angle bends 922 rolling back projects 2134 rotating attributes 870 connectors 1142–1143 terminal strips 1130 wire numbers 997, 1008
Schematic Connector Summary dialog box 1415 Schematic Database File Editor 784–785 schematic diagrams attributes 320 auditing 1686, 1688–1689, 1692, 1694 automatic updates 1532 generating from PLC I/O modules 630–631, 635, 639 inserting panel footprints 1538, 1542 inserting terminals 1540, 1542 ladder diagrams 1140, 1534 layers 258 panel component spreadsheet data 1536–1537 point-to-point 1140 relationship to panel layouts 1534 reports 1428 showing links 1661 tagging 1656 wire connections 1029 Schematic Equ
Schematic Terminal Numbers dialog box 1421 Schematic Terminal Plan dialog box 1422 Schematic Terminals List Panel Layout Insert dialog box 1540 Schematic Wire From/To dialog box 1419 Schematic Wire Label dialog box 1425 Schematic Wire Numbers Panel Wiring Diagram dialog box 1590 schematic-to-panel terminal relationships 1055 schematic-to-schematic terminal relationships 1055 schematics attributes 320 auditing 1686, 1688–1689, 1692, 1694 automatic updates 1532 generating from PLC I/O modules 630–631, 635, 63
resequencing item numbers 1605 tee markers 1033–1034 sequential codes 1303 SET files about 1442 defining 1444 missing level/sequence assignments reports 1452 panel bill of materials reports 1446 panel component exception reports 1448 panel component reports 1451 panel nameplate reports 1456 panel terminal exception reports 1458 panel wire annotation exception reports 1454 panel wire connection reports 1461 schematic bill of material reports 1463 schematic cable from/to reports 1465 schematic cable summary r
text size 873–874, 893 wires 720–721 Size tab (Connector Selection dialog box) 1174 Size tab (Insert Connector dialog box) 1157 SKIP value 630 solenoids 419, 547 sorting database tables 685 sorting reports 1330 source arrows 1647 source codes source code lists 1019 tracking changes to 1200 source cross-reference symbols 809, 844– 845 source markers adding 1021 advanced techniques 1996 fanning 1020 layers 1022–1024, 1026 styles 1022–1024 source wire signal symbols 298, 320, 1011–1012, 1015, 1647 SPACER value
stand-alone symbols cross-reference symbols 430, 579, 838–839, 844–845 inserting 742 naming conventions 298 PLC 620 schematic attributes 320 TAG1 attribute 321 standard light symbols 494 standards 681, 687, 2044, 2125, 2127 stretching components 798, 802 connectors 1146 nameplates 1610 text 873 wires 921, 2082 Style Box Dimensions dialog box 614 styles attribute text 871 drawing properties 202 fanning markers 1022–1025 PLC database information 601 PLC modules 590, 614, 626 project properties 202 project-wid
Symbol Library Attribute Text/Scale Resize dialog box 893 symbol mapping cross-references 827, 830 editing tables 832 Symbol Preview window 1237 symbols adding to icon menus 1232, 2119 advanced techniques 2083 attributes 345, 349 auditing 357, 360 changing appearance 331 converting non-Electrical blocks 1642, 1644, 2099 COPYTAG attribute 329 creating 339, 342, 344 cross-references 809, 838–839, 844– 845 customizing icon menus 1232, 1234, 1237 default libraries 300–301 editing attributes 349, 893 family type
TAG2_PARTX 299 tagging non-Electrical-aware objects 1651, 1653, 1656– 1657, 1659 tagging tools 1932 tags cable markers 939, 943, 945, 947 cables 953 child components 769, 773 circuits 2068 codes for replaceable parameters 239 components 748, 753 conduits 1626, 1631 copying attributes 329 cross-references and 809 duplicate 1686, 1688, 1692, 1694 exporting for Cable & Harness 1519 fixed component tags 877–878 in-use 757–758 motor symbol tags 2061 motor symbols 2059 multi-connection sequences 1138 order settin
Terminal Strip Editor about 1065 accessories 1104 Cable Information tab 1087 Catalog Code Assignment tab 1083 columns and rows 1093 Edit Terminal dialog box 1100 inserting terminal strip tables 1070 inserting terminal strips 1066 installation codes 1106 jumper charts 1071 Layout Preview tab dialog box 1093 location codes 1105 previewing terminal strips 1093 selecting terminal strips 1068 spare terminals 1103 Terminal Strip Definition dialog box 1073 Terminal Strip Selection dialog box 1072 Terminal Strip ta
copying properties 1058 customized symbols 2094 device box symbols 428, 577 direct-to-terminal wire connections 1029 displaying associations 1055 editing 606, 1046, 1053, 1100, 1565, 1569, 1574 editing blocks 2005 editing database 1060 exceptions in reports 1352 exporting data 1506–1507 inserting 1040, 1046, 1542 inserting from panel lists 790, 795– 796 inserting terminal reports as strips 1330 jumper charts 1071 jumpers 1078, 1122–1123, 1125, 1127 level assignments 1614 listing 1078 marking 1132 multi-conn
size 873–874 styles 871 swapping wire text 1612 terminal strips 1130 terminals 866–867 title blocks 1224 tracking changes to 1200 translating descriptions 1202–1203 wire annotations 1531, 1587–1588 wire numbers 986–987 Text Cross-Reference Format Setup dialog box 820 text files external component lists 182 importing annotations from 760 text styles 871 TEXTVALUES 1277 thermal effect symbols 560 thermocouple symbols 421, 551 thermometer symbols 551 time delay relays 382, 485 timers 382, 384 title blocks abou
unfixed wire numbers 994 units of measurement 1303 Unity Pro exporting PLC data 645–646, 651 importing PLC data 652 Unity Pro Export dialog box 652 Unity Pro Import dialog box 651 unlinking symbols 1661 Update Block - Path/Filename dialog box 338 Update Configuration Changes dialog 244 Update Drawings per Spreadsheet Data dialog box 1508 Update Title Block dialog box 1224 Update Wire Signal and Stand-Alone Cross-Reference dialog box 845 updating annotations 839 blocks 332–333, 336–338 cable markers 953 chil
updating 255 WD_PNLM blocks configuration information 1527 copying attributes to 255 inserting 256 WD_SLB code 1232 WD_TB attribute 1213, 1708 WD_TB attributes 1218 WD_ZIP utility 187 wd.env files 129, 182, 187, 279 WDA files 1509 WDBLKNAM attribute 1271, 1277 WDD files 182, 761 wddinrl.
generating 1425 wire label symbols in-line wire label symbols 509 reports 1394, 1402, 1425, 1495 schematic attributes 320 wire layers 275, 1195 color and gauge information 988, 990 valid layers 271, 902 wire lists exporting for Cable & Harness 1519 importing 1167 reports 1370, 1410, 1471 wire loss 720 wire markers 925 wire networks about 895 connection reports 1029 wire number layers 261 wire numbers 3-phase 975–976 about 970 adding to footprints 1587 automatically inserting 971 codes for replaceable parame
Wire Size Lookup dialog box 720–721 Wire Tagging (project-wide) dialog box 973 Wire Tagging dialog box 972 wire tags formats 970 inserting 972–973 wire tees 919–920, 1033 wire types changing 275, 277 defining 2056 grid 271, 902 importing 271–272, 902–904, 907 setting default 278 wire ways generating spreadsheet records 853 inserting labels 1631 Wire/Conduit Routing Report dialog box 1636 wires 3-phase wires 917–918 about 895 angled 913 annotations 1348, 1428, 1437, 1454, 1531, 1587–1588, 1590, 1592 arrow sy
wire crossings 1142, 1157, 1159, 1167 wire grids 720 wire labels 1394, 1425, 1495 wire lists 1167, 1370, 1519 wire loss 720 wire numbers 970 wire types 271, 275, 277–278, 902, 2056 zooming extents and 919 WO_CBLWIRES table 954 workflows Circuit Builder 655, 2006 one-line symbols 2098 parent symbols 2090 pin lists 1984 PLC modules 2005 source and destination markers 1996 terminal jumpers 1123 terminal symbols 2094 workgroups collaborative design 158 Vault setup 2134 workspaces 26, 2134 WW1 files 1633 X X Zo
2208
